all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 4 |
|
Manual | Users Manual | 1.59 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Manual 1 | Users Manual | 3.32 MiB | December 04 2004 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Manual 2 | Users Manual | 1.15 MiB | December 04 2004 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Manual 3 | Users Manual | 81.60 KiB | December 04 2004 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Manual addendum | Users Manual | 24.54 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Users Manual | Users Manual | 1.24 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | RF Exposure Info | December 04 2004 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 | RF Exposure Info | December 04 2004 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 | RF Exposure Info | December 04 2004 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 | Test Report | December 04 2004 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Attestation Statements | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | External Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Internal Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | RF Exposure Info |
1 2 3 4 | Manual | Users Manual | 1.59 MiB |
Nokia 3595 User Guide Numbers Where to find?
Wireless service provider Wireless service provider Wireless service provider Wireless service provider Phone Notes Information My number Number to call for voice mail Wireless providers number Wireless providers customer care Model number 3595 Title page and phone label (under battery) Phone type number NPM-10 Back of title page and phone label Electronic serial number
(ESN) Phone label Nokia 3595 User Guide Copyright Nokia 2003 The wireless phone described in this guide is approved for use in 850 and 1900 GSM networks. LEGAL INFORMATION Part No. 9355727, Issue No. 1 Copyright 2003 Nokia. All rights reserved. Nokia, Nokia Connecting People, Air Glide, Bowling, Backgammon, Sky Diver, Nokia 3595, Xpress-On, and the Nokia Original Accessories logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nokia Corporation. All other product and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks or tradenames of their respective owners. Printed in Canada 03/2003 US Patent No 5818437 and other pending patents. T9 text input software Copyright 1999-2003. Tegic Communications, Inc. All rights reserved. Includes RSA BSAFE cryptographic or security protocol software from RSA Security. Java is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. The information in this user guide was written for the Nokia NPM-10 phone. Nokia operates a policy of continuous development. Nokia reserves the right to make changes and improvements to any of the products described in this document without prior notice. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NOKIA BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY LOSS OF DATA OR INCOME OR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, AND CONSEQUENTIAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES HOWSOEVER CAUSED. THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED AS IS. EXCEPT AS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NO WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE MADE IN RELATION TO THE ACCURACY AND RELIABILITY OR CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT. NOKIA RESERVES THE RIGHT TO REVISE THIS DOCUMENT OR WITHDRAW IT AT ANY TIME WITHOUT PRIOR NOTICE. EXPORT CONTROLS This product contains commodities, technology or software exported from the United States in accordance with the Export Administration regulations. Diversion contrary to U.S. or Canadian law is prohibited. FCC/INDUSTRY CANADA NOTICE Your phone may cause TV or radio interference (for example, when using a telephone in close proximity to receiving equipment). The FCC or Industry Canada can require you to stop using your telephone if such interference cannot be eliminated. If you require assistance, contact your local service facility. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the condition that this device does not cause harmful interference. Nokia 3595 User Guide Copyright Nokia 2003 Contents For your safety . 1 Welcome and quick guide . 5 Get the most out of this guide . 5 Get started with the quick guide . 7 Menu shortcuts . 8 Understand wireless network services . 9 Learn about accessibility solutions . 9 Shared memory . 11 Contact Nokia . 11 Register your phone . 12 E-newsletters . 12 Before you begin . 13 Install the SIM card . 13 Install the battery . 14 Charge the battery . 15 Battery notes . 15 Remove the battery . 16 Set up your headset . 16 Remove the SIM card . 17 About your phone . 18 Switch on your phone . 18 About the antenna . 19 About the start screen . 19 About indicators and icons . 20 Make and answer calls . 23 Make a call . 23 End a call . 24 Answer a call . 24 Reject a call . 24 Silence an incoming call . 25 Redial the last-dialed number . 25 Nokia 3595 User Guide iii Copyright Nokia 2003 The menu . 26 Scroll bar . 26 About menu shortcuts . 26 List of menu shortcuts . 27 Contact list menu . 33 Enter letters and numbers . 34 ABC mode . 34 Predictive text input . 36 Use the contact list . 39 Save names, numbers, and e-mail addresses . 39 Edit names . 40 Edit numbers . 41 Add text entries . 41 Find contact names in the contact list . 41 Phone memory . 42 Delete contact names and numbers . 43 Check call history . 45 Check missed, received, or dialed calls . 45 Choose options in call lists . 46 Clear call lists . 46 Use call timers . 47 Use the message counter . 48 Manage call costs . 50 Check data calls . 50 Advanced calling features . 52 Use in-call options . 52 Make an international call . 53 Use automatic redial . 53 Use 1-touch dialing . 54 Use anykey answer . 55 Use network services . 55 Use voice features . 61 About voice mail . 61 Use voice dialing . 62 Use voice commands . 64 Audible alerts . 66 iv Copyright Nokia 2003 Personalize your phone . 67 Profiles . 67 Accessory settings . 69 Polyphonic sound (MIDI) . 73 Download ringing tones . 73 Choose the display language . 74 Add a welcome note . 74 Activate help text . 75 Set up the time and date . 75 Use the gallery . 77 Display settings . 79 Use caller groups . 81 Restore factory settings . 83 Change Xpress-on color covers . 83 Manage phone security . 86 Lock the keypad (Keyguard) . 86 About security codes . 87 PIN codes . 87 PUK codes . 88 Security code . 89 Use fixed dialing . 89 Restrict calls . 90 Set up a closed user group . 91 Communicate with mobile messages . 92 Message settings . 92 Send and receive text messages . 95 Communicate with e-mail . 98 Store messages . 100 Delete messages . 102 Send and receive picture messages . 103 Receive multimedia messages (MMS) . 105 Use the info message service . 108 Use the service command editor . 108 Your WAP browser . 109 Notes on mobile Internet access . 109 Set up for browsing . 110 Sign on to the mobile Internet . 110 Use browser options . 111 Nokia 3595 User Guide v Copyright Nokia 2003 Navigate the mobile Internet . 111 Use bookmarks . 113 Disconnect from the mobile Internet . 113 Security issues . 114 GPRS . 115 Your personal digital assistant . 118 Use the calendar . 118 Use the alarm clock . 121 Share business cards . 122 Use the calculator . 123 Make a to-do list . 124 Use the stopwatch . 125 Synchronize your contacts and calender . 128 Fun and games . 131 Game rules . 131 Customize your phone with Java applications . 134 Reference information . 136 Batteries, chargers, and accessories . 136 Important safety information . 137 Emergency calls . 141 Certification information (SAR) . 142 Care and maintenance . 144 Accessories . 145 Battery information . 145 Chargers and other accessories . 146 Technical information . 153 Troubleshooting . 154 Nokia One-Year Limited Warranty . 155 Appendix A Message from the CTIA . 161 Appendix B Message from the FDA . 165 Index . 171 vi Copyright Nokia 2003 1 For your safety Read these simple guidelines. Breaking the rules may be dangerous or illegal. Further detailed information is given in this manual. Do not switch on the phone when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. ROAD SAFETY COMES FIRST Don't use a hand-held phone while driving INTERFERENCE All wireless phones may get interference, which could affect performance. SWITCH OFF IN HOSPITALS Follow any regulations or rules. Switch the phone off near medical equipment. SWITCH OFF IN AIRCRAFT Wireless devices can cause interference in aircraft. SWITCH OFF WHEN REFUELING Dont use the phone at a refueling point. Dont use near fuel or chemicals. SWITCH OFF NEAR BLASTING Dont use the phone where blasting is in progress. Observe restrictions, and follow any regulations or rules. USE SENSIBLY Use only in the normal position. Don't touch the antenna unnecessarily. QUALIFIED SERVICE Only qualified personnel may install or repair phone equipment. ACCESSORIES AND BATTERIES Use only approved accessories and batteries. Do not connect incompatible products. Nokia 3595 User Guide 1 Copyright 2003 Nokia For your safety WATER-RESISTANCE Your wireless phone is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. BACKUP COPIES Remember to make backup copies of all important data. CONNECTING TO OTHER DEVICES When connecting to any other device, read its user guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not connect incompatible products. CALLING Ensure the phone is switched on and in service. Enter the phone number, including the area code, then press the Talk key. To end a call, press the End key. To answer a call, press the Talk key. EMERGENCY CALLS Ensure the phone is switched on and in service. Press the End key as many times as needed (for example, to exit a call, to exit a menu) to clear the display. Enter the emergency number, then press the Talk key. Give your location. Do not end the call until told to do so. 2 Copyright 2003 Nokia NOTES Nokia 3595 User Guide 3 Copyright 2003 Nokia For your safety Nokia 3595 phone at a glance Power key Earpiece Right selection key End key Number keys Pound key Display screen Scroll up key Left selection key Talk key Scroll down key Star key Connection port Microphone 4 Copyright 2003 Nokia 2 Welcome and quick guide You will find that your Nokia 3595 mobile phone has many useful features for everyday use, such as a calendar, text messaging, and alarm clock. GET THE MOST OUT OF THIS GUIDE The diagram to the left illustrates the various components of your phone. Familiarize yourself with the diagram to help you better understand the instructions that follow. Understand the terms This guide uses certain terms for the steps that you are asked to perform. Press means to briefly press, then release a key. For example, press 7 means press the key on the keypad that is labeled with the number 7 and the letters, p, q, r, s. Press and hold means to press and hold a key for two to three seconds
(depending on the feature being used), then release the key. Highlighted options on the screen are enclosed within a dark bar. The selection keys are used to act on the highlighted option. Selection keys are used to select a menu option, press the selection key below the menu item on the phones screen. In the example to the right, to select Details, you would press the left selection key. To exit the contact list, press Back (the right selection key). Scroll keys are used to move up and down in the menus. For example, if instructed to scroll to another contact entry, this means to press Scroll up or Scroll down key. The Talk key is used to place a call or to answer an incoming call. The End key is used to end a call or press and hold to return to the idle screen. Right Selection Left Selection Scroll down Scroll up Talk End Nokia 3595 User Guide 5 Copyright 2003 Nokia Welcome and quick guide Notice text clues This user guide provides text clues to make instructions clear and easy to follow. Clue What it means bold Indicates one of the following items:
The word or phrase appears on the phones screen. Special text, such as Notes and Warnings. The name of one of the phone keys. bold and blue Indicates the text is an address on the World Wide Web. italic Italics indicate emphasis. Pay close attention to any information in italics. Follow graphic clues This guide uses icons (graphic clues) to alert you to important information. Tip: Information about a shortcut or an alternate method of doing something. Note: Explanation about a feature or an important concept. Important: Critical information about a feature. Caution: Help to avoid information loss. Warning: Help to avoid personal injury, damage to the phone, or property damage. Look for updates From time to time, Nokia updates this user guide to reflect changes or corrections. The latest version will be available at www.nokia.com/us. Also, an interactive tutorial will be available at www.nokiahowto.com. 6 Copyright 2003 Nokia GET STARTED WITH THE QUICK GUIDE Make a call Answer a call Answer with call waiting End a call Reject a call Redial Adjust call volume Use the in-call menu Save a name and number Enter a phone number, press the Talk key. Press the Talk key. Press Options, then select Answer call. Press the End key. Press the End key. Press the Talk key twice. During a call, press the Scroll up or Scroll down key. During a call, press Options. Enter a number, press Options, select Save, enter a name, and press OK. Press the Scroll up or Scroll down key to scroll to the name. Press Options, select Contacts, select Find, and scroll to the name/number. Recall the name, press Details, press Options, scroll to Add detail, press Select, select E-mail, enter e-mail address, and press OK. Recall the name, press Details, press Options, scroll to Add number, and press Select. Select General, Mobile, Home, Work, or Fax. Add a number, press OK. Press Menu 01-1-1, enter message, press Options, select Send, enter a phone number, then press OK. Press Menu 01-1-1, press Options, select Insert picture. Scroll to a picture you like, press View, press Insert, enter a text message, press Options, select Send, enter a phone number, and press OK. Press and hold 0 or press Menu 11, scroll to Home, then press Select. Note: Internet content/services designed for mobile devices requires subscription to service. Recall a name/number Recall a name/number during a call Add e-mail address Add multiple numbers Send a text message Send a picture message Use browser Nokia 3595 User Guide 7 Copyright 2003 Nokia Welcome and quick guide MENU SHORTCUTS Press Menu followed by the menu numbers. Note: Menu items may vary depending on network and accessories used. 1 MESSAGES 2 CALL LOG Text messages . 01-1 Multimedia msg. . 01-2 Voice messages . 01-3 Info messages . 01-4 Message settings . 01-5 Service command editor . 01-6 Missed calls. 2-1 Received calls . 2-2 Dialed numbers. 2-3 Delete recent call lists . 2-4 Call timers . 2-5 Call costs . 2-6 GPRS data counter. 2-7 GPRS connection timer . 2-8 Message counter . 2-9 Normal . 3-1 Silent . 3-2 Meeting . 3-3 Outdoor . 3-4 My profile 1 . 3-5 My profile 2 . 3-6 Tone settings. 4-1 Time and date settings . 4-2 Call settings . 4-3 Phone settings . 4-4 Display settings . 4-5 Network services . 4-6 Accessory settings . 4-7 Security settings. 4-8 Restore factory settings . 4-9 3 PROFILES 4 SETTINGS 5 GALLERY View folders. 5-1 Add folder . 5-2 Delete folder . 5-3 Rename folder. 5-4 Gallery downl.. 5-5 6 ORGANIZER Alarm clock . 6-1 Calendar. 6-2 To-do list . 6-3 7 GAMES Select game . 7-1 Game downlds. 7-2 Memory . 7-3 Settings . 7-4 8 APPLICATIONS Select app. 8-1 App. downloads . 8-2 Memory . 8-3 9 EXTRAS Calculator . 9-1 Stopwatch . 9-2 Voice commands. 9-3 10 CONNECTIVITY Synchronize . 10-1 GPRS connection . 10-2 11 SERVICES 12 I M 13 SIM SERVICES 8 Copyright 2003 Nokia UNDERSTAND WIRELESS NETWORK SERVICES A number of features included in this guide are called Network Services. These are special services that you arrange through your wireless service provider. Before you can take advantage of any of these Network Services, you must subscribe to them through your service provider and obtain instructions for their use from your service provider. Network services for the Nokia 3595 phone include:
Voice mail Call waiting, call forwarding, and caller ID Text and picture messages Info Message Service Notifications on SIM update Cell info display Service command editor Selected Internet access services GPRS services Note: Some networks may not support all language-dependent characters and/or services. LEARN ABOUT ACCESSIBILITY SOLUTIONS Nokia is committed to making mobile phones easy to use for all individuals, including those with disabilities. Accessibility solutions are offered through alternate user guide formats and mobile phone accessories. Accessible features The Nokia 3595 phone has many accessible features, including:
Ability to send and receive short text messages Convenience of one-touch dialing Ability to define ring tones for different caller groups Large easy-to-read display with adjustable font size Vibrating alert for incoming calls Voice dialing and commands for handsfree operation Audible alerts indicating battery and signal strengths Access alternate formats This user guide is available in alternate formats. Contact Nokia at www.nokiaaccessibility.com or call 1-888-665-4228 for more information. Nokia 3595 User Guide 9 Copyright 2003 Nokia Welcome and quick guide LPS-3 Mobile Inductive Loopset The LPS-3 Mobile Loopset gives people with T-coil equipped hearing aids the ability to make and receive calls without noise interference. Also compatible with the Nokia 3300, 3500, 8200, 8300 and 8800 series digital phones, the loopset gives hearing-impaired users clear access to digital telephony. The loopset is easy to use. You wear the loopset around your neck, connect it to your phone, and speak directly toward the microphone. For more information see Set up the loopset profile on page71. Note: The loopset can be purchased separately as an accessory. For operating instructions, refer to the booklet that comes with the LPS-3. TTY/TDD Adapter (HDA-9) The TTY/TDD Adapter is a Nokia accessory that allows you to connect your mobile phone to a Telecommunications Device for the Deaf (TTY/TDD) to make a call in digital mode. WHAT YOU WILL NEED In addition to the Nokia 3595 phone, youll need the following for TTY/TDD communication. A TTY/TDD device that is cellular ready or cellular compatible A cable for connecting the TTY/TDD to your phone, usually supplied by the manufacturer of the TTY/TDD device The TTY/TDD Adapter (HDA-9), which can be purchased separately as an accessory at www.nokia.com/us TTY/TDD Adapter For information on choosing a profile so that the phone recognizes the TTY/TDD device, see Set up the TTY/TDD profile on page71. 10 Copyright 2003 Nokia SHARED MEMORY The following features in this phone may share memory: ringing tones, pictures, screen savers, and JavaTM games and applications. Using any of these features may reduce the memory available for any features sharing memory. This is especially true with heavy use of any of the features (although some of the features may have a certain amount of memory specially allotted to them, in addition to the amount of memory shared with other features). For example, saving many games may take all of the shared memory and your phone may display a message that the memory is full. In this case, delete some of the information or entries stored in the shared memory features before continuing. You can find out the current memory consumption of your phone by using the memory status feature. For information on using this feature, see Use memory status on page77. CONTACT NOKIA If you ever need to call Nokia Customer Care or your service provider, you will need to provide specific information about your phone. This information is provided on the phone label. The label is on the back of the phone (under the battery). It shows the following:
Phone type Phone model IMEI FCC ID number Important: Do not remove or deface the label. Tip: See Remove the battery on page16 for instructions on how to access the phone label. Nokia 3595 User Guide 11 Copyright 2003 Nokia Welcome and quick guide Have the phone or accessory available Whether you are calling about your phone or an accessory, have the equipment with you when you call. For example, if you are calling about a headset, please have it available. If a Nokia representative asks a specific question about the accessory, you will have it available for quick reference. Nokia Customer Care Center, USA Customer Care Centre, Canada Nokia Mobile Phones 7725 Woodland Center Boulevard, Suite #150 Tampa, Florida 33614 Tel: 1-888-NOKIA-2U
(1-888-665-4228) Fax: 1-813-249-9619 For TTY users: 1-800-24-NOKIA
(1-800-246-6542) Nokia Products Ltd. 601 Westney Rd. South Ajax, Ontario L1S 4N7 Tel: 1-905-427-1373 1-888-22-NOKIA
(1-888-226-6542) Fax: 1-905-427-1070 Web site: www.nokia.ca REGISTER YOUR PHONE Make sure to register your phone at www.warranty.nokiausa.com or 1-888-NOKIA-2U (1-888-665-4228) so that we can serve your needs better if you should need to call the center or have your phone repaired. E-NEWSLETTERS When you register your phone, you can sign up for Nokia's e-newsletter, Nokia Connections, if you would like. You will receive tips and tricks on using your phone, accessory information, and special offers. 12 Copyright 2003 Nokia 3 Before you begin Before you begin, you need to prepare your phone by installing the SIM card, and charging the battery. This chapter covers these topics as well as instructions on how to attach the optional headset. Note: Your service provider supplies the SIM card and headset. INSTALL THE SIM CARD Important: Switch off the phone before installing the SIM card. Press and hold the power key for about two seconds to turn your phone off. 1 With the back of the phone body facing you, locate the SIM card slot. 2 Install the SIM card by sliding it gently into the slot: beveled corner on the right, gold colored contact area face down. SIM card installed SIM card beveled corner SIM card directional icon on type label Notes about SIM cards Keep all miniature SIM cards out of the reach of small children. The SIM card and its contacts are easily damaged by scratches or bending, so be careful when handling, inserting, or removing the card. Nokia 3595 User Guide 13 Copyright 2003 Nokia Before you begin INSTALL THE BATTERY 1 2 Place the battery in the compartment with the label side facing up and the golden contact area of the battery aligned with the contact prongs inside the phone. Slide the battery until it snaps into place. gold colored contacts Replace the back cover 1 2 Direct the back cover towards the locking catches on the phone. Slide the back cover until it locks into place. Note: Always store and use the phone with the covers attached. locking catches 14 Copyright 2003 Nokia CHARGE THE BATTERY 1 2 3 Connect the charger to a standard wall outlet. Connect the lead from the charger to the bottom of the phone. Charger The battery power indicator
(or battery bar) appears on the screen and starts scrolling. If the phone is on, Charging appears briefly on the screen. When the battery bar stops scrolling, the battery charge is complete. Battery full appears also, if the phone is on. Disconnect the charger from the phone. BATTERY NOTES Recharge your battery only with a charger approved by Nokia. Use the following guidelines to obtain the best performance from your battery:
With your phone turned off, charge your new battery for three hours before its first use. Use the battery until it is fully discharged. Repeat this procedure twice for a total of three charging cycles. Battery operation time may be less than the estimated times during the first charges. This condition is normal. When the battery is fully discharged, the scrolling bars may not appear immediately. After the first charge, you can make and receive calls during the charging cycle, but the calls interrupt the charge. When the phone call ends, the charge will resume. The bars on the screen stop scrolling and remain constant when the phone is charged. If you leave the phone connected to the charger, the battery receives an additional charge. If the battery is completely empty, it may take a few minutes before you can make or receive calls. The charging time depends on the charger and battery that you use. Note: The battery will accept a "trickle charge" for an additional two hours. For more details, see Battery information on page145. Nokia 3595 User Guide 15 Copyright 2003 Nokia Before you begin REMOVE THE BATTERY If you purchase a new battery or need to access information on the phone label, you may need to remove the battery. Important: Switch off the phone before removing the battery. Do not puncture or burn the battery. Please recycle or dispose of properly. 1 With the back of the phone facing you, press and hold the back cover release button. Slide the cover up, then lift it off the phone. Lift out the battery. 2 3 Note: Before taking the cover off, always switch off the power and disconnect the phone from the charger and/or any other device. Avoid touching electronic components while taking the cover off. Always store and use the phone with the covers attached. 2 3 1 SET UP YOUR HEADSET Your phone may come with a headset you can use while talking on your phone. The headset provides convenient handsfree use of the phone. Connect the headset 1 Insert the headset plug into the headset jack in the phone. Put the round ear plug into one ear. 2 Headset 16 Copyright 2003 Nokia Use the headset With the headset connected, you can make and answer calls as usual, using the keypad to press the Talk key and the End key or to enter numbers to call. The microphone for the headset hangs at the side of your head. Although the microphone may seem far from your mouth, you can speak at a normal volume. Refer to the packaging materials of your headset for further information regarding its operation. REMOVE THE SIM CARD If you ever need to take the SIM card out of the phone, follow these steps. Warning: Keep all miniature SIM cards out of the reach of small children. 1 2 3 4 Switch off the phone. Remove the back cover and battery. See Remove the battery on page16. Press the plastic tab of the SIM card holder down. Gently push the SIM card towards the top of the phone. Nokia 3595 User Guide 17 Copyright 2003 Nokia About your phone 4 About your phone SWITCH ON YOUR PHONE Press and hold the power key for about two seconds. After your phone is on, when any key is pressed, the keypad and display lights stay on for up to 15 seconds. The phone may ask for a Personal Identification Number (PIN) or a security code. Your service provider supplies the PIN code. See About security codes on page87 for more information. Warning: Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. Back cover On the back of your phone, you will find the back cover release button. When you remove the back cover, you will find an antenna area, which is similar to the one shown in the graphic on the left. Antenna area Back cover release 18 Copyright 2003 Nokia ABOUT THE ANTENNA Tip: Your phone has a built-in antenna. As with any other radio transmitting device, do not touch the antenna unnecessarily when the phone is switched on. Contact with the antenna affects call quality and may cause the phone to operate at a higher power level than otherwise needed. Not touching the antenna during a call optimizes the antenna performance and the talk-time of your phone. Hold the phone as you would any other telephone, with the antenna area pointed up and over your shoulder. ABOUT THE START SCREEN When you turn on your phone, the first screen that appears is the start screen. In the middle of the start screen, you may see information indicating which wireless network your phone uses. This information can vary between phones. Other indicators and icons appear on this start screen and are described in the next section. Nokia 3595 User Guide 19 Copyright 2003 Nokia About your phone ABOUT INDICATORS AND ICONS On your phone, you have two types of identifiers: indicators and icons. Indicators Indicators show the status of the phone. The phone uses three types of indicators:
Signal Strength Indicator Battery Strength Indicator The signal strength indicator shows the strength of the signal to your phone. The battery strength indicator shows how much power is left in your phones battery. The volume indicator shows the earpiece volume level. See Adjust the earpiece volume during a call on page24 for details. The audible signal and battery indicator:
indicates by a series of beeps that either the signal or battery strength is running low on your phone. You need to set up this feature on your phone through the voice command function before it will operate. See Use voice commands on page64 for more information. Icons Icons are graphical representations of a specific item or situation. The following table shows examples and tells you what each icon means. Icon What it means Line 1 is selected for outgoing calls. Line 2 is selected for outgoing calls. You have an active call. 20 Copyright 2003 Nokia Icon What it means You have a call on hold. You have one or more new voice mail messages. You have a new voice mail message on line 1. You have new voice mail messages on line 1 and line 2. You have a new voice mail message on line 2. You have one or more new text messages. If the icon blinks, text message memory is full. Keyguard is on. Your phone will not accept any key presses. The alarm clock is set. The call alert and text message alert tones are turned off. The Timed profile is selected. Incoming voice calls are being forwarded to another number. You have forwarded all voice calls received on line 1. You have forwarded all voice calls received on line 2. You have forwarded all voice calls received on lines 1 and 2. The phone is ready for you to enter a response. There is a voice tag attached to a name in your contact list. Nokia 3595 User Guide 21 Copyright 2003 Nokia About your phone Icon What it means Indicates an e-mail address in your contact list. You have assigned the name and number to a caller group. The headset is attached to your phone. The car kit is attached to your phone. The loopset is attached to your phone. A Telecommunications Device for the Deaf (TTY/TDD) is attached to your phone. The contact entry is stored on the SIM card. You are using predictive text input. Your phone uses a built-in dictionary to predict or guess the word entered. 22 Copyright 2003 Nokia 5 Make and answer calls This chapter tells you how to make and receive calls and how to adjust certain options. MAKE A CALL Check the signal strength The signal indicator on the left side of your phone screen shows the strength of the network radio signal. The indicator scrolls as the signal strength increases and decreases. To get the strongest signal, try moving your phone slightly. If you are inside a building, move toward a window. Use the keypad 1 Enter the area code (if required in your local calling area) and phone number. Press the Talk key. 2 Signal Strength Warning: Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. Use the contact list 1 From the start screen, press the Scroll up key or the Scroll down key and scroll to the number you want. Tip: To skip ahead quickly in the list, press the number key that matches the first letter of the name. 2 Press the Talk key to make the call. Nokia 3595 User Guide 23 Copyright 2003 Nokia Make and answer calls Adjust the earpiece volume during a call To increase the volume of a call, press the Scroll up key and watch the volume indicator go up. To decrease the volume, press the bottom scroll key and watch the volume indicator go down. If an accessory with its own loudspeaker is connected to your phone, the volume keys adjust the volume for that accessory. END A CALL Press the End key. ANSWER A CALL When someone calls you, the phone alerts you and Calling flashes on the display. To answer, press the Talk key. OR Press Options, scroll to Answer call, then press Select. Caller ID Note: This feature may not be available in all wireless systems. Contact your service provider for details and availability. When caller ID is active, your phone may display the callers phone number. The callers name may also appear, if his/her name and number are stored in the contact list. See Use the contact list on page39. REJECT A CALL Press the End key. OR Press Options, scroll to Decline call, then press Select. 24 Copyright 2003 Nokia SILENCE AN INCOMING CALL You can stop the ring for an incoming call by pressing Silence. Then, answer or decline the call. REDIAL THE LAST-DIALED NUMBER Press the Talk key twice. Dial any of the twenty last-dialed numbers 1 2 3 Press the Talk key. Scroll to the number you want to redial. Press the Talk key again. Nokia 3595 User Guide 25 Copyright 2003 Nokia The menu 6 The menu Your phone offers many functions that are grouped in menus and submenus. Access these menus with the selection keys and scroll keys or by entering the appropriate shortcut number. See Nokia 3595 phone at a glance on page4 and Understand the terms on page5 for more information about the selection keys and scroll keys and their functions. SCROLL BAR While using phone menus, a scroll bar appears at the far right of the screen. This bar indicates where you are in the menu. Each numbered tab on the bar represents a different menu item. For example, press Menu once. The scroll bar appears with the first (top) tab displayed. A different tab appears each time you press the Scroll up or Scroll down key. ABOUT MENU SHORTCUTS You can use a series of numbers, or shortcuts, to access frequently used features. For example, if you use the phone alarm clock each morning, you may want to learn the menu shortcut for quick access. To use a shortcut, press Menu, then the numbers that correspond to the feature. Tip: Be sure to press the numbers quickly in sequence. For example, to set your Alarm clock, press Menu 6 -1 (Organizer > Alarm clock). For complete instructions on using this feature, see Use the alarm clock on page121. 26 Copyright 2003 Nokia LIST OF MENU SHORTCUTS Here is an abbreviated list of menu items and their shortcuts. Later chapters tell you how to work with the menus, explaining their functions. Note: Some items may not appear due to the SIM card configuration and network service availability. For quick access to the Messages menu, press Menu, then 0, then the menu numbers. For example, to access your Messages Inbox, press Menu 01-2. 1 Messages 1 Text messages 1 Create message 2 Inbox 3 Create e-mail 4 Sent items 5 Archive 6 Templates 7 My folders 8 Distribution lists 9 Delete messages 1 Create message 2 Inbox 3 Outbox 4 Sent items 5 Saved items 6 Delete messages 2 Multimedia messages 3 Voice messages 1 Listen to voice messages 2 Voice mailbox number 4 Info messages 5 Message settings 1 Text messages 2 Multimedia msg. 3 Other settings 6 Service command editor Nokia 3595 User Guide 27 Copyright 2003 Nokia The menu 2 Call log 6 Call costs (Depends on network availability and your SIM card) 1 Missed calls 2 Received calls 3 Dialed numbers 4 Delete recent call lists 1 All 2 Missed 3 Received 4 Dialed 5 Call timers 1 Duration of last call 2 Duration of received calls 3 Duration of dialed calls 4 Duration of all calls 5 Life timer 6 Clear timers 1 Last call units 2 All calls units 3 Call cost settings 7 GPRS data counter 1 Data sent in last session 2 Data received in last session 3 All sent data 4 All received data 5 Clear counters 8 GPRS connection timer 1 Duration of last session 2 Duration of all sessions 3 Clear timers 9 Message counter 1 Sent messages 2 Received messages 3 Clear counters 28 Copyright 2003 Nokia 1 Ringing options 2 Ringing tone 3 Ringing volume 4 Vibrating alert 5 Message alert tone 6 Keypad tones 7 Warning tones 8 Alert for 9 Profile name (Appears under Silent, Meeting, Outdoor, My profile 1 and My profile 2) 3 Profiles 1 Normal 1 Select 2 Customize 3 Timed 2 Silent 3 Meeting 4 Outdoor 5 My profile 1 6 My profile 2 4 Settings 1 Tone settings 1 Ringing options 2 Ringing tone 3 Ringing volume 4 Vibrating alert 5 Message alert tone 6 Keypad tones 7 Warning tones 8 Alert for 2 Time and date settings 1 Clock 2 Date 3 Auto-update of date & time 3 Call settings 1 Automatic redial 2 1-touch dialing 3 Summary after call 4 Anykey answer Nokia 3595 User Guide 29 Copyright 2003 Nokia The menu 4 Phone settings 1 Language 2 Automatic keyguard 3 Cell info display 4 Welcome note 5 Help text activation 6 Start-up tone 7 Memory status 5 Display settings 1 Wallpaper 2 Color schemes 3 Operator logo 4 Screen saver timeout 5 Display brightness 6 Network services 1 Call forwarding 2 Call waiting 3 Send own caller ID when calling 4 Line for outgoing calls 5 System selection 6 Confirm SIM service actions 7 Accessory settings 8 Security settings 1 PIN code request 2 Call restrictions 3 Fixed dialing 4 Closed user group 5 Security level 6 Change access codes 9 Restore factory settings 1 Headset 2 Handsfree (Only shows up when phone is connected to Car Kit) 3 Loopset 4 TTY/TDD 5 Gallery 1 View folders 2 Add folder 3 Delete folder 4 Rename folder 5 Gallery downl. 30 Copyright 2003 Nokia 6 Organizer 1 Alarm clock 2 Calendar 3 To-do list 7 Games 1 Select game 1 Air Glide 2 Bowling 3 Backgammon 4 Sky Diver 1 Game sounds 2 Game lights 3 Shakes 2 Game downlds. (depends on network availability) 3 Memory 4 Settings 8 Applications 1 Select app. 2 App. downloads 3 Memory 9 Extras 1 Calculator 2 Stopwatch 3 Voice commands 1 Audible alerts 1 Audible signal bar 2 Audible battery bar 10 Connectivity 1 Synchronize 2 GPRS connection Nokia 3595 User Guide 31 Copyright 2003 Nokia The menu 11 Services THE FOLLOWING MENU ITEMS MAY VARY; CONTACT YOUR SERVICE PROVIDER. 1 Home 2 Bookmarks 3 Service inbox 4 Settings 1 Connection settings 1 Active service settings 2 Edit active service settings 2 Appearance settings 1 Scroll mode 2 Text wrapping 3 Show images 3 Security settings 1 User certificates 2 Authority certificates 3 Security module settings 4 Cookies 4 Service inbox settings 1 Service messages 5 Go to address 6 Clear the cache 12 I M 13 SIM services FOR AVAILABILITY, RATES AND INFORMATION ON USING INSTANT MESSAGING, CONTACT YOUR SERVICE PROVIDER. FOR AVAILABILITY, RATES AND INFORMATION ON USING SIM SERVICES, CONTACT YOUR SIM CARD VENDOR, E.G. NETWORK OPERATOR, SERVICE PROVIDER, OR OTHER VENDOR. 32 Copyright 2003 Nokia CONTACT LIST MENU For access to your contact list, press the End key to return to the start screen. Press Contacts. Find 1 2 These options may be available, depending on your SIM card:
1 2 Add contact 3 Edit name 4 Delete 5 Copy 6 Add number 7 Settings 1 Memory in use 2 Contacts view 3 Memory status 8 1-touch dialing 9 Voice tags 10 Caller groups 1 Family 2 VIP 3 Friends 4 Business 5 Other 12 Service nos. 13 Own numbers 11 Info numbers (ONLY SHOWS UP IF YOU HAVE INFO MESSAGE SERVICE INCLUDED ON SIM CARD) Nokia 3595 User Guide 33 Copyright 2003 Nokia Enter letters and numbers 7 Enter letters and numbers You can enter letters and numbers into your phone for a persons name and phone number, writing a text message, etc. There are two ways to do this:
ABC mode, for making entries in the contact list and renaming caller groups. Predictive text input, for writing text messages, adding notes to a picture message, entering calendar notes, and entering a web address using WAP services. ABC MODE You can use the ABC mode to enter information into the contact list. Add letters 1 2 3 From the start screen, press Contacts, scroll to Add contact, and press Select. Find the key that has the letter you want to enter. Press the key repeatedly until the letter appears on the screen. Tip: The phone automatically switches to lower case after you enter the first letter. Depending on the selected display language, the following characters may be available. Key Characters Key Characters 1 2 3 4 5 6
. , ? ! 1 - ( ) @ / : _ ABC2 DEF3 GHI4 JKL5 MNO6 7 8 9 0
PQRS7 TUV8 WXYZ9 space, 0
(See page35 for details.) Changes letter case Note: Some networks may not support all language-dependent characters. 34 Copyright 2003 Nokia To enter a space, press 0 once. To enter punctuation, press 1 repeatedly until the character you want appears. Press Clear to delete each character. Press and hold Clear to delete the entire field of characters. Enter spaces and punctuation Delete mistakes If you make a mistake:
Change letter case To switch between uppercase and lowercase letters, press #. The ABC icon switches to abc, showing you are using lowercase letters. Enter numbers To enter numbers:
Press and hold # to switch to 123 mode. Press the appropriate number key to enter a number. OR While in ABC mode, press and hold the corresponding number key until the Press Clear to delete the number. To switch back to the ABC mode, press and hold # again. number appears. If you make a mistake:
Use special characters IN ABC MODE 1 Press *. A screen appears with the following special characters:
Use scroll keys to select the character you want, then press Insert. C 2 Nokia 3595 User Guide 35 Copyright 2003 Nokia Enter letters and numbers IN 123 MODE You can access the following special characters only in 123 mode. There are two places you can use these characters:
At the start screen, when you dial a phone number At the number prompt, when you add a new entry to the contact list Action Press * to enter *. Press * twice to enter +. Press * three times to enter p. Press * four times to enter w. Characters Function Use this character to send command strings to the network. Contact your service provider for details. Use this character as a prefix for dialing international numbers. Use this character to create a pause that occurs when dialing a number. Numbers entered to the right of this special character are automatically sent as touch tones after a 2.5-second pause. Use this character to create a wait; digits to the right of the w are not sent until you press the Talk key. PREDICTIVE TEXT INPUT Predictive text input allows you to write messages much faster than the ABC mode. With predictive text input, you only need to press each number key once for each letter. Your phone uses a built-in dictionary to predict or guess what you are writing. You can also add new words to the dictionary. Note: Predictive text input may not be available for all languages. It is not available for adding contacts to the contact list. Select a language and turn on predictive text 1 Press Menu 01-1-1 (Messages > Text messages > Create message). Press Options, scroll up to Predictive text, then press Select. 2 3 Scroll to the language you want, then press Select. T9 prediction on appears. 36 Copyright 2003 Nokia Turn off predictive text To switch from predictive text input to ABC mode, repeat steps 1-3, then select Prediction off. OR While writing the message, quickly press # twice to switch between predictive text input and ABC mode. Tip: Your key presses must be quick! Press # twice in about 1.5 seconds. Write words using predictive text Press the number key that corresponds to the letter you want to enter. For example, to write Nokia with the English dictionary selected, press the following keys:
6 (for N) 6 (for o) 5 (for k) 4 (for i) 2 (for a) The display shows the above words for each key pressed. Since the displayed word changes after each key stroke, disregard the word until you have keyed in all the characters. If the displayed word is correct, press 0 to accept the word and add a space. If the displayed word is not correct, press * to see the other possible matches. If the word you are trying to write is not in the dictionary, a question mark appears. To check the number of available characters, refer to the counter in the upper right corner of the screen. Add a new word to the dictionary If the word you are trying to enter does not show up as a possible match, you can add the word to the dictionary. 1 2 3 Press * repeatedly until Spell appears in place of Options. Press Spell, then enter the word, using ABC mode. Press Save to add the word to the dictionary. Nokia 3595 User Guide 37 Copyright 2003 Nokia Enter letters and numbers Use predictive text shortcuts You can use predictive text shortcuts to write messages. Press Menu 01-1-1
(Messages > Text messages > Create message) and use the following shortcuts:
Press * to view the next matching word if the underlined word is not the word you intended. Press Spell to add a new word to the dictionary. Press 0 to accept a word and add a space. Press and hold # to enter a number. Press # to change the character case. indicates lowercase, and the contact list. Press # twice to select predictive input or ABC mode. indicate ABC mode, while text input. Press Clear to delete the character to the left of the cursor. Press 1 to add a punctuation mark. To change the underlined symbol, press 1 repeatedly until the desired symbol appears. is the default for entering contact names in indicates uppercase, while indicate predictive and and Press and hold * until the symbol screen appears. Scroll to the desired symbol and press Insert. Insert symbols 1 2 Insert numbers 1 2 Write compound words 1 Write the first part of the word and press the down scroll key to accept it. 2 Write the last part of the compound word and press 0 to enter the word in To add a number to the message, press and hold #. Key in the desired numbers, then press and hold # to return to ABC mode. memory. 38 Copyright 2003 Nokia 8 Use the contact list You can keep track of contact information in your contact list. Names are saved in the contact list memory and/or SIM memory. For each name in the phone memory, you can add up to five phone numbers, including the following categories:
General Mobile Home Work Fax For each name in the phone memory, you can also store an e-mail address, a web address and a street address. For more details about the phones memory and SIM memory, see Phone memory on page42. SAVE NAMES, NUMBERS, AND E-MAIL ADDRESSES Enter the number you want to save, then press Options. Scroll to Save, then press Select. Enter the name and press OK. Quick Save Here is a quick and easy way to save a name and number into the contact list. 1 Make sure your phone is at the start screen. 2 3 4 Save a number only 1 Enter the phone number. 2 Press and hold Options. Saved to phone memory appears. Nokia 3595 User Guide 39 Copyright 2003 Nokia Use the contact list Press Options. Scroll to Contacts, then press Select. Scroll to Add contact, then press Select. Enter the name, then press OK. Enter the phone number, then press OK. Save a name and number while in a call 1 2 3 4 5 Save an e-mail address You can save an e-mail address for a name in your contact list. Tip: All contact list entries that contain e-mail addresses must be stored in the phone memory. See Phone memory and SIM memory on page42. 1 2 3 4 5 6 At the start screen, press the Scroll up or the Scroll down key to scroll through the list until you find the name you want. Press Details, then press Options. Scroll to Add detail, then press Select. If the name has been saved to the SIM card, the phone prompts you to move it to the phone memory. Press Yes. Scroll to E-mail and press Select. Enter the e-mail address, then press OK. Tip: To switch between letters and numbers, press and hold the # key. To enter @ in the e-mail address, press the * key, scroll to @, then press Insert. EDIT NAMES 1 2 3 4 At the start screen, press the Scroll up or Scroll down key to scroll through the list until you find the name you want to change. Press Details, then press Options. Scroll to Edit name, then press Select. Edit the name, then press OK. 40 Copyright 2003 Nokia EDIT NUMBERS 1 2 3 4 At the start screen, press the Scroll up or Scroll down key to scroll through the list until you find the entry you want to change. Press Details, then press Options. Scroll to Edit number, then press Select. Edit the number, then press OK. ADD TEXT ENTRIES You can add a web address, street address, or note for each name. 1 At the start screen, press the Scroll up or the Scroll down key to scroll through the list until you find the name. Press Details, then press Options. Scroll to Add detail, then press Select. If the name has been saved to the SIM card, the phone prompts you to move it to the phone memory. Press Yes. Scroll to Web address, Street addr. or Note, then press Select. Enter your information, then press OK. 2 3 4 5 6 FIND CONTACT NAMES IN THE CONTACT LIST Scroll through the list until you find the name. Press Details to show the phone number. To call the number, press the Talk key. 1 At the start screen, press Contacts. 2 With Find highlighted, press Select. 3 4 5 Use scroll keys to find a name At the start screen, press the Scroll up or the Scroll down key to scroll through the list until you find the name. Nokia 3595 User Guide 41 Copyright 2003 Nokia Use the contact list PHONE MEMORY appears when the You can save names and numbers in the internal memory of the phone, SIM card memory, or in a combination of the two. The SIM icon contact list entry is saved in SIM memory. The shorter the names and numbers, the more entries you can store in the contact list. The phones memory can hold from 125 to 500 names, depending on the number of characters used for each name, number, or text entry. Phone memory and SIM memory The following table summarizes the differences between the three types of memory you can choose. Phone feature Phone memory SIM memory Contact names capacity Up to 500
(depending on length of entries) Phone numbers Up to 5 numbers per name Up to 250 contact names (Depends on your SIM card; check with your service provider) 1 number (Depends on your SIM card;
check with your service provider) E-mail, Web address, Street Address and Note Up to 3 text entries per name Not available Phone and SIM memory Up to 750 contact names (both SIM and phone entries are displayed) Up to 5 numbers per name (stored in phone memory) Up to 3 text entries per name
(stored in phone memory) Caller groups?
Transfer contact names/
numbers to another phone?
Voice tags?
Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes, contact your service provider for details. Only numbers stored to SIM can be transferred Yes Yes 42 Copyright 2003 Nokia Switch between memory types The default memory type is Phone and SIM. 1 2 3 4 If you choose to keep Phone and SIM as the memory type:
At the start screen, press Contacts. Scroll to Settings, then press Select. Scroll to Memory in use, then press Select. Scroll to Phone and SIM, Phone, or SIM card then press Select. Contact names and numbers can be recalled from both the phone and SIM card Contact list entries are displayed in a combined list New entries are saved to the phone memory. Check contact list memory status Check available storage space left in the phone memory or SIM card memory. 1 2 3 4 Contact list is full If your contact list is full, you can save the phone number to another memory or replace an existing entry. From the start screen, press Contacts. Scroll to Settings, then press Select. Scroll to Memory status, then press Select. Scroll to Phone or SIM card, then press Select. DELETE CONTACT NAMES AND NUMBERS Caution: You cannot undo delete functions, so delete carefully!
Delete a stored number 1 At the start screen, press the Scroll up or the Scroll down key to scroll through the list until you find the entry you want to delete. Press Details, then press Options. Scroll to Delete number, then press Select, then OK. 2 3 Nokia 3595 User Guide 43 Copyright 2003 Nokia Use the contact list Delete a stored name 1 At the start screen, press the Scroll up key or the down scroll key to scroll through the list until you find the entry you want to delete. Press Details, then press Options. Scroll to Delete, then press Select, then OK. 2 3 Delete entire contact list content Caution: This feature deletes the entire content of the contact list and cannot be undone!
Warning: Some repair services for your phone may erase your contact list entries. Be sure to make a copy of all information before requesting any repair service. 1 2 3 4 5 Press Contacts. Scroll to Delete and press Select. Scroll to Delete all and press Select. Scroll to the memory (Phone or SIM card) you want to delete, then press Delete. Press OK to confirm. Enter your security code and press OK. See Security code on page89 for the default code. 44 Copyright 2003 Nokia 9 Check call history Your phone registers information about each call you make and receive. The call log keeps track of the following:
Missed calls Received calls Dialed calls GPRS data sent and received. Time spent online for GPRS data transfers Text messages sent and received CHECK MISSED, RECEIVED, OR DIALED CALLS Your phone saves the last 20 numbers you have dialed or the last 10 numbers you have missed or received. Note: The call log saves the phone numbers of missed or received calls only if the callers number is available and your phone is turned on and you are in your home calling area. 1 2 3 4 5 Press Menu 2 (Call log), then scroll to Missed calls, Received calls or Dialed numbers. Press Select, then scroll to the number you want to see. To dial the number, press the Talk key. Press Options to find more information or to add a number to your contact list. Use the scroll keys to display each of the options listed in the following table. Once you find the option you want, press Select. Nokia 3595 User Guide 45 Copyright 2003 Nokia Check call history CHOOSE OPTIONS IN CALL LISTS When you view the missed calls, received calls, or dialed calls list and press Options, the following choices may appear. Note: Not all options will appear each time. Also, the order of options may vary. Choice Call time What it does Shows the date and time of the last call. Use the scroll keys to view up to five recent call dates/time for the displayed phone number. Send message Allows you to write a short text message to the person who called you. View number Displays the phone number if the callers name is stored in the contact list. Edit number Allows you to edit the displayed number and save it with a name to your contact list. Save Delete Call Allows you to enter a name for the number and save both to your contact list. Allows you to delete the number from the call list. Dials the number from the call log. CLEAR CALL LISTS This feature clears all the missed, received, and dialed call lists. Caution: You cannot undo this operation. 1 2 Press Menu 2-4 (Call log > Delete recent call lists). Scroll to All, Missed, Received, or Dialed, then press Select. Caution: Missed, received, and dialed calls lists are also deleted when you change the phone security setting or if you use a SIM card that is not one of the five most recent cards used with the phone. 46 Copyright 2003 Nokia USE CALL TIMERS Two phone lines If you subscribe to a second phone line (see Work with two phone lines on page 62), call timers are separate for each phone line. When you view call timers, the call timers that are shown are for the currently selected outgoing line. However, if you view call timers while you are in a call, the call timers that are shown are for the line you are using at that moment. View the call duration 1 2 Press Menu 2-5 (Call log > Call timers). Scroll to Duration of last call, Duration of received calls, Duration of dialed calls, or Duration of all calls. Press Back after viewing the selected call timer. 3 View the life timer Your phone keeps track of the total call time (all calls made and received). The life timer is displayed in hhhh:mm format. 1 2 Reset call timers to zero Press Menu 2-5-5 (Call log > Call timers > Life timer). Press Back after viewing the life timer. Note: You cannot reset the life timer. However, sometimes the life timer may be reset during service on software upgrades. 1 2 3 Press Menu 2-5 (Call log > Call timers). Scroll to Clear timers, then press Select. Enter your security code, then press OK. Nokia 3595 User Guide 47 Copyright 2003 Nokia Check call history Show call timer during a call Note: The actual time invoiced for calls by your service provider may vary, depending on network features, billing round-off, etc. Scroll to Menu, then press Select. Scroll to Call log, then press Select. Scroll to Call timers, then press Select. 1 While in a call, press Options. 2 3 4 The time for the active call is shown on the display. Show call timer after call Your phone can display the time spent on a call after you end the call. This feature is called Summary after call. TURN ON SUMMARY AFTER CALL 1 2 Press Menu 4-3-3 (Settings > Call settings > Summary after call). Scroll to On, then press Select. After you end a call, the total time for that call appears on the display. TURN OFF SUMMARY AFTER CALL 1 2 Press Menu 4-3-3 (Settings > Call settings > Summary after call). Scroll to Off, then press Select. USE THE MESSAGE COUNTER The message counter gives you information on how many text messages have been sent and received. You can view the amount of sent and received messages, view details about the messages and reset the counter. 1 Press Menu 2-9 (Call log > Message counter), then scroll to Sent messages or Received messages. The number of sent or received messages appears in the display. Press Select, then scroll to the message (number) you want to see. To dial the number, press the Talk key. Press Options to find more information or to add a number to your contact list. Use the scroll keys to display each of the options listed in the following table. Once you find the option you want, press OK. 2 3 4 5 48 Copyright 2003 Nokia Choice What it does Message details Shows either the sender or recipient of the message, along with details of the sent message. Send message Allows you to write a short text message to the person who either sent you a message or received a message from you. This option will display if the message was sent to or received from a phone number. Send e-mail Allows you to write a short text message to the person who either sent you a message or received a message from you. This option will display if the message was sent to or received from an email address. Call Allows you to call the person who either sent you a message or received a message from you. Edit number Allows you to edit the displayed number and save it with a name to your contact list. Save Allows you to enter a name for the number and save both to your contact list. Add to contact Allows you to move a contact to phone memory. Delete Allows you to delete the number from the message list. Nokia 3595 User Guide 49 Copyright 2003 Nokia Check call history MANAGE CALL COSTS This network service allows you to check call costs. You can view the last call cost or the total cost of all calls made or received since the counters were reset. Contact your service provider for availability and instructions. Note: The actual invoice for calls and services from your service provider may vary, depending upon network features, billing round-off, taxes, etc. CHECK DATA CALLS In addition to keeping track of voice calls, the phone call log records information about data calls. You can check the amount of GPRS data transferred over the network. You can also keep track of how much time you spend online. Note: Text messages sent over GPRS are not counted and therefore not included in the data counter or connection timer. For details on pricing and availability, contact your service provider. The actual invoice for calls and services from your service provider may vary, depending upon network features, billing round-off, taxes, etc. Check the data counter All data counters are displayed in bytes (B). 1 2 Press Menu 2-7 (Call log > GPRS data counter). Scroll to the information you are interested in viewing. Your options include the following:
Data sent in last session Data received in last session All sent data All received data Clear the data counter 1 2 3 Press Menu 2-7 (Call log > GPRS data counter). Scroll to Clear counters, then press Select. Enter your security code, then press OK. 50 Copyright 2003 Nokia Check the connection timer The time is displayed in hh:mm:ss format. Note: The actual time invoiced for calls by your service provider may vary, depending upon network features, billing round-off, etc. 1 2 Press Menu 2-8 (Call log > GPRS connection timer). Scroll to the information you are interested in viewing. Duration of last session Duration of all sessions Clear the connection timer 1 2 3 Press Menu 2-8 (Call log > GPRS connection timer). Scroll to Clear timers and press Select. Enter your security code, then press OK. Nokia 3595 User Guide 51 Copyright 2003 Nokia Advanced calling features 10 Advanced calling features In-call options and swapping between calls Call settings that you control such as anykey answer Network services such as call forwarding This chapter covers advanced calling features, including:
Not all features that are described are available in all wireless networks. Contact your service provider for availability of network services. USE IN-CALL OPTIONS During a call, press Options to see the in-call menu. Note: Not all options will appear each time. The order of options may vary. Choice What it does Lock Keypad Allows you to lock your phone keypad. End call New call Touch tones Contact list Menu Mute Hold Ends current call. Allows you to place a new call. Sends touch tones. Touch tones are the sounds generated when you press a key; touch tones can be used for automated, over-
the-phone services such as checking airline arrival/departure times. Switches you to the contact list so that you can look up a name, number, or address. Allows you to access your phone menu. Disables the microphone so that the other party cannot hear you speak. Mute also affects the microphone of any external accessories connected to your phone. Holds or releases a call. 52 Copyright 2003 Nokia Make a new call 1 2 Enter the second phone number or recall it from the contact list. Press the Talk key. OR Press Options. Scroll to New call, then press Select. Enter the second phone number or recall it from the contact list. Press Call. 1 2 3 4 With either method, the first call is automatically put on hold. SWITCH BETWEEN TWO CALLS IN PROGRESS Press the Talk key or Swap. The END THE ACTIVE CALL Press the End key. The call on hold becomes the active call. icon represents the active call and the icon represents the call on hold. MAKE AN INTERNATIONAL CALL 1 2 Press * twice to enter the international dialing prefix (+). Enter the country code, area code, and phone number, then press the Talk key. USE AUTOMATIC REDIAL Activate automatic redial 1 2 If the number you dial is busy, your phone immediately redials the number. If it is still busy, your phone will redial the number up to nine more times. Press Menu 4-3-1 (Settings > Call settings > Automatic redial). Scroll to On, then press Select. Note: Automatic redial will not work while you make or answer another call. Nokia 3595 User Guide 53 Copyright 2003 Nokia Advanced calling features USE 1-TOUCH DIALING Assign a name and number to a 1-touch dialing location so that when you press this key, the phone automatically dials the associated number. Key 1 is used to access your voice mail. See Listen to your voice messages on page62 for details on voice mail. Assign a number to a 1-touch dialing key 1 2 3 Press Contacts, scroll to 1-touch dialing, then press Select. Scroll to a dialing location, then press Assign. Enter a phone number, press OK. Enter a name, press OK. OR Press Find. Scroll to the contact list entry you want, then press Select twice. Press Menu 4-3-2 (Settings > Call settings > 1-touch dialing). Scroll to On, then press Select. Activate 1-touch dialing 1 2 Call a 1-touch dial number From the start screen, press and hold the appropriate key, or press the key, then press the Talk key. The phone dials the number. Change 1-touch dialing numbers 1 2 3 4 5 6 Delete 1-touch dialing numbers 1 2 3 4 Press Contacts. Scroll to 1-touch dialing and press Select. Scroll to the key that you want to change and press Options. Scroll to Change and press Select. Enter a phone number, then press OK. Enter a name, then press OK. Press Contacts, scroll to 1-touch dialing and press Select. Scroll to a key that you want to delete and press Options. Scroll to Delete and press Select. Press OK to confirm. 54 Copyright 2003 Nokia USE ANYKEY ANSWER This feature allows you to press any key to answer an incoming call. Note: Anykey answer does not work with the power button, the End key, or the left and right selection keys. Press Menu 4-3-4 (Settings > Call settings > Anykey answer). Scroll to On and press Select. Turn on Anykey answer 1 2 Turn off Anykey answer 1 2 Press Menu 4-3-4 (Settings > Call settings > Anykey answer). Scroll to Off and press Select. USE NETWORK SERVICES Network services include call forwarding, call waiting, caller ID, multiple lines for outgoing calls, and system selection. For availability, pricing, and subscription to network services, contact your service provider. Choose an outgoing line Tip: Your service provider must have this feature activated before you can select line 2. Press Menu 4-6-6 (Settings > Network services > Line for outgoing calls). Scroll to Line 1 or Line 2, then press Select. 1 2 Send your own number in caller ID You can determine, for each call you make, whether your telephone number appears on anothers phone caller ID. In most service areas, when you call others, your name is presented to their caller ID (if they subscribe to this service). With Send own caller ID when calling, you can block or send the display of your number when you make a call. Note: This feature may not be available in all wireless systems. Contact your service provider for details and availability. Also note that this feature is effective only when you call a number that is equipped with caller ID. Nokia 3595 User Guide 55 Copyright 2003 Nokia Advanced calling features 1 2 Press Menu 4-6-3 (Settings > Network services > Send own caller ID when calling). Scroll to one of the following options, then press Select:
Default: your phone number is sent according to the network. Yes: your phone number is sent to the other persons caller ID. No: your phone number is not sent to the other persons caller ID. Forward your calls This network service lets you forward your incoming calls to another phone number. Contact your service provider to sign up for call forwarding. Note: Call forwarding options may vary, depending on the SIM card configuration. Contact your service provider for details. If you subscribe to a second phone line, call forwarding works separately for each line. Make sure you have selected the line you want before you set up any call forwarding. ACTIVATE CALL FORWARDING 1 2 Press Menu 4-6-1 (Settings > Network services > Call forwarding). Scroll to one of the call forwarding options, then press Select:
Tip: If you want to forward your calls to another number when your phone is turned off, select Forward when not able to take calls. 3 4 Forward all voice calls Forward if busy Forward if not answered Forward if out of reach Forward when not able to take calls Cancel all call forwarding Scroll to Activate, then press Select. Scroll to either To voice mailb. or To other no. If you choose To other no., enter the phone number, then press OK. The following icons appear on your phones screen:
Incoming voice calls are being forwarded to another number. You have forwarded all voice calls that are received on line 1. You have forwarded all voice calls that are received on line 2. You have forwarded all voice calls that are received on lines 1 and 2. 56 Copyright 2003 Nokia CANCEL CALL FORWARDING 1 2 3 Press Menu 4-6-1 (Settings > Network services > Call forwarding). Scroll to the call forwarding option you want , then press Select. Scroll to Cancel, then press Select. Note: Canceling all call forwarding may also cancel any automatic forwarding of calls to voice mail that your service provider has activated for you. Also, this option may cancel your call forwarding service. Contact your service provider for details. CHECK CALL FORWARDING STATUS 1 2 3 Press Menu 4-6-1 (Settings > Network services > Call forwarding). Scroll to the call forwarding option you want to check, press Select. Scroll to Check status, then press Select. Note: Status is not available for Forward when not able to take calls. To see the phone number where the calls are being forwarded, press Number. Select a system You can select how your phone chooses a wireless network, as there may be more than one available. The selection you make stays active until you change it or change the SIM card. 1 2 Press Menu 4-6-5 (Settings > Network services > System selection). Scroll to Automatic or Manual, then press Select. Automatic: The phone automatically selects one of the available systems. Manual: The phone searches for available systems and then lists them. Scroll to the one you want, then press Select. The phone looks for a network and displays the result. If you lose connection while in Manual mode, the phone asks you to select a network again. Use call waiting This network service lets you receive an incoming call when you are already in a call. The phone beeps to let you know of the incoming call. Contact your service provider to sign up for call waiting. ACTIVATE/CANCEL CALL WAITING 1 2 Press Menu 4-6-2 (Settings > Network services > Call waiting). Scroll to Activate or Cancel, then press Select. Nokia 3595 User Guide 57 Copyright 2003 Nokia Advanced calling features Press Menu 4-6-2 (Settings > Network services > Call waiting). Scroll to Check status and press Select. CONFIRM CALL WAITING STATUS 1 2 ANSWER A WAITING CALL 1 2 Your phone signals when you have a call waiting. Press the Talk key to put the current call on hold and answer the waiting call OR Press Answer. icon represents the call on hold. icon represents the active call and the Press Options and scroll to Decline call. Press Select. REJECT A WAITING CALL You can just let the phone ring or perform the following steps:
1 2 SWITCH BETWEEN CALLS Press the Talk key or Swap. The END THE ACTIVE CALL Press the End key. The call on hold becomes active. OR Press Options, scroll to End call, then press Select. THIRD CALL WAITING If you have both an active and a call on hold and a third call is waiting, you can answer the third call and end the other calls. 1 2 3 Press Options. Scroll to End all calls, then press Select. Press the Talk key to answer the third call. 58 Copyright 2003 Nokia Make a conference call This network service, if available from your service provider, allows you to make conference calls with your phone. Check with your service provider for availability and details for use. 1 2 3 Place a call to the first person. Press Options and scroll to New call. Press Select, enter the number of the next party you want to include, then press Call. After the other party answers, press Options. Scroll to Conference, then press Select. To add other parties to the call, repeat steps 2-5. To end the conference call, press the End key. 4 5 6 7 TALK PRIVATELY WITH A PARTICIPANT 1 While in a conference call, press Options. 2 Scroll to Private call, then press Select. A list of the participants appears. Scroll to the person you want to speak with, then press OK. The other participants can continue talking with each other. To rejoin the conference call, press Options. Scroll to Conference, then press Select. 4 5 DROP A PARTICIPANT FROM THE CONFERENCE CALL 1 While in a conference call, press Options. 2 3 Scroll to Private call, then press Select. A list of the participants appears. Scroll to the person you want to drop, then press OK. The other participants can continue talking with each other. Press Options. Scroll to End call, then press Select. 3 4 5 Nokia 3595 User Guide 59 Copyright 2003 Nokia Advanced calling features Transfer a call When you have one active and one call on hold, you can connect the two calls and disconnect yourself from the call. Note: Your network must support this feature. Contact your service provider for availability. During a call, press Options, scroll to Transfer calls, then press Select. 60 Copyright 2003 Nokia 11 Use voice features The voice features in your phone make communication more convenient. You can check messages from friends or business associates, record a voice tag for contacts in the Contacts function, and use voice dialing for handsfree operation. ABOUT VOICE MAIL A voice mail subscription A voice mailbox number A temporary password Voice mail is a network feature that allows callers to leave a voice message for you when you are not able to take the call. To use voice mail, you must have:
These items are assigned by your service provider. Your service provider should also tell you how to record a greeting for your voice mailbox and how to change the temporary password. Note: If you have difficulty using the voice mail feature, contact your service provider. Save the voice mailbox number If your service provider has not already set up the voice mailbox number, follow these steps to set up the voice mailbox number. 1 2 3 4 The voice mailbox number must be longer than two characters and emergency numbers, such as 911, are not allowed. Press Menu, then press Select. Scroll to Voice messages, then press Select. Scroll to Voice mailbox number, then press Select. Enter your voice mailbox number, then press OK. Nokia 3595 User Guide 61 Copyright 2003 Nokia Use voice features Work with two phone lines If your particular SIM card supports it, your phone can have two phone lines. Your service provider can tell you if your SIM card allows the use of this feature and can give you access to two phone lines. If you decide to use two phone lines, you can select one of the two lines for outgoing calls, but you can still answer calls on both lines. If you use two phone lines, you will be given a voice mailbox number for each line. You need to save the voice mailbox number for each phone line separately. To do this, first select the outgoing line and save its voice mailbox number. Then, select the other line and save its number. Voice mail indicators When you receive a voice message, your phone beeps and either displays an icon on the screen or shows a text message. The method of notification depends upon your carrier. If you subscribe to two different phone numbers, the message icon shows which line is receiving the voice mail message Voice mail message on line 1. Voice mail message on line 2. Voice mail message on line 1 and on line 2. Listen to your voice messages If there is a notification message on your screen, you can get your voice messages using one of the following methods:
If you have saved your voice mailbox number in your phone, press and hold 1 to call your voice mailbox. Call your voice mailbox number as you would any other telephone number, then follow the directions provided. To check your voice messages anytime, press Menu 01-4-1 (Messages > Voice messages > Listen to voice messages). USE VOICE DIALING The phone voice dialing feature allows handsfree operation while you place a call. Before using this feature, you need to create entries in the contact list so you can associate a voice tag with a name and number. You can create up to 14 voice tags in your phone. To create entries in the contact list, see page39. 62 Copyright 2003 Nokia Using voice tags Before using voice dialing, note that:
Voice tags are not language dependent. They are dependent on the speakers voice. Voice tags are sensitive to background noise. Record them and make calls in a quiet environment. When recording a voice tag or making a call by speaking a voice tag, hold the phone in the normal position near to your ear. Very short names are not accepted. Use long names and avoid similar names for different numbers. You cannot use the voice tag or voice dialing feature if you are actively sending or receiving data using a GPRS connection. Note: You must say the name exactly as you said it when you recorded it. This may be difficult in, for example, a noisy environment or during an emergency, so you should not rely soley upon voice dialing in all circumstances. Add a voice tag to a contact list entry 1 2 3 At the start screen, scroll to the name to which you want to assign a voice tag. Press Details, then Options, and scroll to Add voice tag. Press Select. Press Start. Speak the name clearly into the microphone. Important: Do not press Quit unless you want to cancel the recording. The phone automatically stops recording, then replays and saves the voice tag. Make a call using voice recognition 1 At the start screen, press and hold Contacts. When you hear several beeps and Please speak now appears, release the button. Pronounce the voice tag clearly into the microphone. Your phone automatically dials the number. 2 Listen to a voice tag 1 2 3 Press Contacts, scroll to Voice tags, then press Select. Scroll to the name with the voice tag you want to hear. Press Options, scroll to Playback, and press Select. Nokia 3595 User Guide 63 Copyright 2003 Nokia Use voice features Press Contacts, scroll to Voice tags, then press Select. Scroll to the contact name with the voice tag you want to change. Press Options, scroll to Change, and press Select. Press Start, then speak the new contact name. Change a voice tag 1 2 3 4 The phone repeats and saves your new voice tag. Delete a voice tag 1 2 3 4 Press Contacts, scroll to Voice tags, then press Select. Scroll to the contact name with the voice tag you want to delete. Press Options, scroll to Delete and press Select. Press OK to delete the voice tag. USE VOICE COMMANDS The voice command feature allows access to handsfree operation for certain phone functions. Voice commands work similar to voice dialing. Before using voice commands, you must first associate a voice tag to the phone function you want to use. Add a voice tag for a command Press Menu 9-3 (Extras > Voice commands). 1 Audible alerts appears. Press Select and scroll to the following function you want to tag:
Audible signal bar Audible battery bar Press Options, then select Add command. Press Start, then speak the voice tag clearly into the microphone. 3 4 2 Note: A message will appear if the voice command is either too short or long. You are given the option to try again. Caution: Do not press Quit unless you want to cancel the recording. The phone replays and then saves the recorded tag. The to commands which have voice tags assigned. icon appears next 64 Copyright 2003 Nokia Work with an existing voice command tag After you have associated a voice tag to a command, you can either play back, change or delete the tag. PLAY BACK VOICE COMMAND TAGS 1 Press Menu 9-3 (Extras > Voice commands). Audible alerts appears. 2 Press Select and scroll to the voice command tag you want to play back. 3 Press Options, then select Playback. CHANGE VOICE COMMAND TAGS 1 2 3 4 Press Menu 9-3 (Extras > Voice commands). Audible alerts appears. Press Select and scroll to the voice command tag you want to delete. Press Options, then select Change. Press Start, then speak the voice tag clearly into the microphone. Voice command changed appears. DELETE VOICE COMMAND TAGS 1 Press Menu 9-3 (Extras > Voice commands). Audible alerts appears. Press Select and scroll to the voice command tag you want to delete. Press Options, then select Delete. Delete voice command? appears. Press OK. Voice command deleted appears. 2 3 4 Nokia 3595 User Guide 65 Copyright 2003 Nokia Use voice features AUDIBLE ALERTS Audible alerts provide you with the current signal bar or battery bar strength of your phone. In order to obtain audible alerts, the alerts must first be set up as voice commands. To set up voice commands, see Add a voice tag for a command on page64. Set up audible alerts 1 Press and hold Contacts. Please speak now appears. Pronounce the voice tag clearly into the microphone. 2 When the phone finds the tag, confirmation appears and the phone plays the recognized voice tag from the phone memory through the earpiece. The phone then beeps. Audible Alert One Beep Two Beeps Three Beeps Four Beeps Battery Bar Strength Signal Bar Strength Low Half full Almost full Full Weak Somewhat Almost strong Strong strong 66 Copyright 2003 Nokia 12 Personalize your phone PROFILES Profiles let you select the sound settings that match your environment, whether it is a meeting or a soccer game. Each profile contains settings for the ringing option, ringing tone, ringing volume, vibrating alert, message alert tone, keypad tones, and warning tones. Just pick the profile that suits your current environment: Silent, Meeting, or Outdoor. Your phone also has profile settings for Nokia accessories such as a headset, car kit, loopset, and TTY adapter. Note: The accessory profiles do not appear until you attach these accessories for the first time. Press Menu 3 (Profiles). Scroll to the profile you want to use, then press Select. Scroll to Select, then press Select. Select a profile 1 2 3 Customize a profile 1 Press Menu 3 (Profiles). 2 Scroll to the profile you want to customize, then press Select. 3 Scroll to Customize, then press Select. 4 Use the scroll keys to display each of the options listed in the following table. Once you find the option you want to customize, press Select. Option Ringing options Ringing tone What it does Allows you to choose a ringing style. Your choices include Silent, Ring, Ascending, Ring once, and Beep once. Allows you to choose from a selection of preprogrammed tones. Ringing volume Allows you to set the volume for incoming calls. Nokia 3595 User Guide 67 Copyright 2003 Nokia Personalize your phone Option What it does Vibrating alert Message alert tone Keypad tones Warning tones Alert for Allows you to turn the vibrating alert on or off. Note: Your phone has an internal vibrating mechanism so you do not need a special battery to use this feature. In some profiles, the vibrating alert default is Off, so the lights may not flash unless you change the default. Allows you to choose an alert style. Your choices include No tone, Standard, Special, Beep once, Ascending, and Ringing Tone. Allows you to set the volume for keypad tones. Allows you to turn warning and confirmation tones on or off. You can choose to have your phone sound an audible alert only when a member of a selected caller group is calling. For more information about Caller groups, see Use caller groups on page81. Profile name Allows you to give a new name to the following profiles:
Silent, Meeting, or Outdoor. 68 Copyright 2003 Nokia Set a timed profile Timed profiles can prevent missed calls. For example, if you attend an event that requires you to set your phone to the Silent profile, you may forget to return the phone to the Normal profile after the event is over. You may not notice incoming calls. With the timed profile, you can have the phone automatically return to the Normal profile at a time you specify. 1 2 3 4 5 The profile you have set for expiration becomes active and appears in the start screen along with a small clock icon. ACCESSORY SETTINGS Press Menu 3 (Profiles). Scroll to the profile you wish to activate, then press Select. Scroll to Timed, then press Select. Enter the time for the profile to expire and press OK. If you are using a 12-hour time format, scroll to am or pm, then press Select. Headset (HDC-5, HDE-2, HDB-5, or HDC-10) Car kit (CARK125 or CARK 134) Loopset (LPS-3) TTY adapter (HDA-9) You can use your phone with these Nokia accessories:
The accessory settings do not appear in the phone menu until you connect the headset, car kit, loopset, or TTY/TDD adapter. You can adjust settings related to the accessory, such as ring tone. Set the default profile When you use the headset, car kit, or loopset, you have the option of choosing a profile. You can use the currently selected profile (for example, Normal) or you can choose from the list. 1 2 3 4 Press Menu 4-7 (Settings > Accessory settings). Scroll to Headset, Handsfree, or Loopset, then press Select. Scroll to Default profile, then press Select. Scroll to the profile you want, then press Select. Nokia 3595 User Guide 69 Copyright 2003 Nokia Personalize your phone Set up the car profile You can connect your phone to an approved Nokia car kit for convenient handsfree operation. For descriptions and illustrations, see Express Car Kit (CARK-125) on page151 and Full Car Kit (CARK-134) on page152. The car kit contains a microphone and a speaker, so you can conduct a conversation without holding the phone to your ear. The setting used with the car kit is called Handsfree. SET UP AUTOMATIC ANSWER This profile lets your phone answer incoming calls after just one ring. 1 Place the phone into the car kit holder. When the phone recognizes the accessory, the car kit icon Press Menu 4-7-2 (Settings > Accessory settings > Handsfree). Scroll to Automatic answer, then press Select. Scroll to On, then press Select. 2 3 4 SET UP LIGHTS If you are using your phone with an approved Nokia car kit, you can set lights to On (display and keypad lights stay on) or Automatic (after 15 seconds, lights turn off until the next key is pressed or the phone rings). 1 appears. Place the phone into the car kit holder. When the phone recognizes the accessory, the car kit icon Press Menu 4-7-2 (Settings > Accessory settings > Handsfree). Scroll to Lights, then press Select. Scroll to On or Automatic, then press Select. 2 3 4 appears. Note: Connecting your phone to a car kit automatically disables Keyguard. 70 Copyright 2003 Nokia Set up the loopset profile The LPS-3 loopset gives people with T-coil equipped hearing aids the ability to make and receive calls without noise interference. Important: Refer to the booklet that comes with the LPS-3 for complete instructions and safety information. 1 2 3 4 Plug the loopset plug into the jack in the bottom of the phone, as shown in the illustration. Press Menu 4-7-3 (Settings > Accessory settings > Loopset). Scroll to Use loopset, then press Select. Scroll to Yes, then press Select. Note: If you want to use the headset or TTY, you perform steps 2-3, then select No to deactivate the loopset profile. Set up the TTY/TDD profile You can connect your phone to a TTY/TDD using the Nokia TTY/TDD Adapter (HDA-
9). In order for your phone to recognize the TTY/TDD, youll need to set up the TTY/
TDD profile, under Accessory settings. Important: Some manufacturers of TTY/TDD devices suggest that the phone be least 18 inches from the TTY/TDD device. Remember that when connecting to any other device, read its user guide or contact its manufacturer for detailed instructions and safety information. Nokia 3595 User Guide 71 Copyright 2003 Nokia Personalize your phone 1 2 Connect the TTY/TDD by a cable to the HDA-9 adapter. Plug the HDA-9 adapter into the connector on the bottom of your phone, as shown in the illustration. 3 Press Menu 4-7-4 (Settings > Accessory settings > TTY/TDD > Use TTY), then press Select. 4 Scroll to Yes, then press Select. NOTES ABOUT TTY/TDD CALLS The Nokia TTY/TDD Adapter (HDA-9) is for use with compatible TTY/TDD devices only. Check with the manufacturer of the TTY/TDD device to ensure that the connection is compatible. Check with the manufacturer of the TTY/TDD device for the connecting cable. TTY/TDD communications depend on network availability. Check with your service provider for availability and description of services. MAKE A TTY/TDD CALL Tip: Before making a TTY/TDD call with your Nokia phone, check the signal strength. See page23 for more details. From the start screen, enter the number and press the Talk key. 1 2 When the receiving party answers, begin typing your conversation on the TTY/
TDD. 72 Copyright 2003 Nokia RECEIVE A TTY/TDD CALL Tip: You may find it helpful to use the vibrating alert under the Profiles menu. See Customize a profile on page67 for details. Press the Talk key to answer the call, then type your responses on the TTY/TDD. 1 Make sure the TTY/TDD device is connected to your phone. 2 END A TTY/TDD CALL Press the End key. POLYPHONIC SOUND (MIDI) Your phone is equipped with a polyphonic tone generator capable of playing up to four different voices simultaneously. The generator can reproduce over 40 different instrument tones, including drums, guitar, saxophone, flute, etc. The polyphonic sounds bring a new richness and quality to ringing tones, message alert tones, background music, and sound effects used in gaming. Your Nokia 3595 phone supports Mobile MIDI (GMX) format messages and ringing tones. Your phone can receive polyphonic ringing tones in two ways:
Through the multimedia message service (MMS). See Receive multimedia messages (MMS) on page105 for more information. Through the WAP browser. See Sign on to the mobile Internet on page110 for more information. DOWNLOAD RINGING TONES You can download ringing tones over the Internet or have them sent to your phone by using SMS (short message service) or MMS. MIDI ring tones can be downloaded via MMS or WAP. Traditional ringing tones can be downloaded by using SMS, WAP, and MMS. Your phone has memory space for several traditional ringing tones or MIDI ringing tones. The number of tones you can save depends on the size of each tone. MIDI tones take up more storage space in the memory than traditional ringing tones. Note: Methods for downloading ringing tones vary. Some wireless providers allow you to send ringing tones to your phone over the Internet, but may charge for this service. For details about downloading ringing tones, contact your wireless service provider. Notification of received ringing tone When your phone receives a ringing tone, it displays Ringing tone received. Nokia 3595 User Guide 73 Copyright 2003 Nokia Personalize your phone Listen to received ringing tones Caution: If you press Exit at any time before saving the ringing tone, the ringing tone will be deleted. 1 When your phone displays Ringing tone received, press Options. 2 Scroll to Playback, then press Select. Save received ringing tones 1 2 Press Options. Scroll to Save tone, then press Select. The tone is saved to the Tones folder or another folder you have created in the gallery. If the memory is full, the phone prompts you to replace an existing tone. Replace tone? appears. Press Select. 3 Discard received ringing tones If you do not want to save the ringing tone, press Exit, then press OK to confirm. OR Press Options, scroll to Discard, then press Select, then confirm with OK. CHOOSE THE DISPLAY LANGUAGE You can choose the phone display language. 1 Press Menu 4-4-1 (Settings > Phone settings
> Language). Scroll to the language you want, then press Select. 2 ADD A WELCOME NOTE You can add a welcome note that is displayed briefly each time you turn on the phone. 1 2 3 Press Menu 4-4-4 (Settings > Phone settings > Welcome note). Enter a note, then press Options. Scroll to Save, then press Select. 74 Copyright 2003 Nokia Delete a welcome note 1 2 3 Press Menu 4-4-4 (Settings > Phone settings > Welcome note). Press Options. Scroll to Delete, then press Select. ACTIVATE HELP TEXT Many menu items have brief explanations associated with them. To view the help text, scroll to the menu item and wait for about 30 seconds. Press More to see the next page of the text or Back to exit. 1 2 Press Menu 4-4-5 (Settings > Phone settings > Help text activation). Scroll to On, then press Select. To turn off help texts, scroll to Off, then press Select. SET UP THE TIME AND DATE Your phone has an internal clock that can be displayed on the start screen. It also features an alarm clock (see Use the alarm clock on page121 ). Note: The time and date has to be reset each time the phone battery is taken out and replaced. Select the time format 1 Press Menu 4-2-1-3 (Settings > Time and date settings > Clock > Time format). Scroll to 24-hour or am/pm. Press Select. Press Menu 4-2-1 (Settings > Time and date settings > Clock). Scroll to Set the time, then press Select. Enter the current time, using two digits for both hours and minutes. Press OK, then select am or pm and press Select. Note: If you entered the time in the 24-hour format, am and pm do not appear. If this is the first time you have set the clock, the phone asks you to enter the date. Enter the date in mm:dd:yyyy format and press OK. Nokia 3595 User Guide 75 Copyright 2003 Nokia 2 3 Set the time 1 2 3 4 Personalize your phone Display the clock This feature lets you continuously display the time on the start screen. 1 Press Menu 4-2-1 (Settings > Time and date settings > Clock). 2 Scroll to Hide clock or Show clock. Only one choice appears, depending on the current setting. Press Select. A confirmation note appears on the screen. 3 Set the date format 1 2 3 Press Menu 4-2-2 (Settings > Time and date settings > Date). Scroll to Date format, then press Select Choose one of the following formats, then press Select. DD MM YYYY MM DD YYYY YYYY MM DD Set the date 1 1 2 Display the date This feature lets you continuously display the date on the start screen. 1 2 Press Menu 4-2-2 (Settings > Time and date settings > Date). Scroll to Set the date, then press Select. Enter the date in mm:dd:yyyy format, then press OK. Press Menu 4-2-2 (Settings > Time and date settings > Date). Scroll to Hide date or Show date. Only one choice appears, depending on the current setting. Press Select. A confirmation note appears on the screen. 3 76 Copyright 2003 Nokia Set automatic update of date and time If this feature is supported by your wireless service provider, it automatically updates the clock in your phone in accordance with the current time zone. This may be helpful if you are traveling from New York to California, for example, and want to receive the local time from the wireless network. 1 Press Menu 4-2-3 (Settings > Time and date settings > Auto-update of date & time). Scroll to one of the following options, then press Select:
On: Updates the date and time automatically. Confirm first: Requires you to confirm that you want the update. Off: Prevents the date and time from being automatically updated. 2 USE THE GALLERY You can save pictures and ringing tones to an existing folder or a folder you have created in the gallery. You can download images and tones by using SMS, WAP, and MMS and then save them in the gallery. Note: This feature uses shared memory. Please see Shared memory on page11 for more information. Your phone must be switched on to use this function. Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. You can find out how much memory is being used by the graphics and ringing tones in the gallery by using the Memory status feature. Use memory status Memory information is gathered from the following functions:
Contacts SMS messages MMS messages You can also check the memory status of the contact list while you are in the Contacts function. See Check contact list memory status on page43 1 Press Menu 4-4-7 (Settings > Phone settings > Memory status). The phone displays the total size of both free and used memory. Press Back. Gallery 2 Nokia 3595 User Guide 77 Copyright 2003 Nokia Personalize your phone Open the Gallery Press Menu 5 (Gallery). After a brief pause, the following options appear in the display. Option View folders Delete folder What it does Allows you to explore the folders in the gallery menu. Allows you to delete a folder you have created. Rename folder Allows you to rename a folder you have created. Add folder Allows you to add a folder of your own. Gallery downl. Allows you to use the graphic and tone downloads in your phone. VIEW A FOLDER 1 Press Menu 5 (Gallery), then press Select. A list of folders appear in the display. Scroll to a folder, such as Graphics or Tones and press Open. Scroll through the list of images or tones and press Options. Press Select to activate the option or to enter its submenu. 2 3 4 Option What it does Open/Play Delete Move Rename Allows you to open the selected file; in the Tones folder, this option is named Play. Allows you to delete the selected file. Allows you to move the file to another folder. Allows you to rename the selected file. Set as wallpaper/Set as ring tone Allows you to set the graphic as wallpaper. In the Tones folder, this option is Set as ring tone; the tone is applied to profile in use 78 Copyright 2003 Nokia Option What it does Details Sort Allows you to view details of the file, such as the name, time and date the file was created Allows you to sort the files according to date, type, name, or size ADD A FOLDER 1 2 Press Menu 5 (Gallery), scroll to Add folder and press Select. Enter a folder name and press OK. Folder added appears. DELETE A FOLDER 1 2 Press Menu 5 (Gallery), scroll to Delete folder and press Select. Scroll to the folder you want to delete and press Delete. Delete folder? appears. Press OK. Folder deleted appears. 3 RENAME A FOLDER 1 2 3 4 Press Menu 5 (Gallery), scroll to Rename folder and press Select. Scroll to the folder you want to rename and press Rename. Press Clear as many times as necessary to delete the current folder name. Enter a new folder name and press OK. Name changed appears. DISPLAY SETTINGS Wallpaper You can set your phone to display a background picture (wallpaper) on the start screen. When your phone is shipped from the factory, it will contain some preloaded pictures in the gallery menu. You can download pictures by using SMS, WAP, and MMS and then save them in the gallery. Your phone supports JPEG, GIF, BMP, PNG, and WBMP formats. Nokia 3595 User Guide 79 Copyright 2003 Nokia Personalize your phone SELECT WALLPAPER 1 2 3 4 Press Menu 4-5-1 (Settings > Display settings > Wallpaper). Scroll to Change image, then press Select to browse the gallery. Select Graphics, press Open and scroll to the image you want. Press Select, then press Set as wallpaper. Replace existing wallpaper? appears on the screen. Press OK. A confirmation note appears on the screen. 5 Note: If the wallpaper feature is off when an image is set as a wallpaper, it is switched On. You do not need to activate the wallpaper separately. Press Menu 4-5-1 (Settings > Display settings > Wallpaper). Scroll to On or Off and press Select. ACTIVATE/DEACTIVATE WALLPAPER 1 2 Color schemes You can change the color of some display components in your phone, such as indicators and signal bars. 1 At the start screen, press Menu 4-5-2 (Settings > Display settings > Color schemes). Scroll to the color scheme you want and press Select. A confirmation note appears on the screen. 2 Screen saver You can set your phone to display a screen saver after a preset time or after a custom time (up to 60 minutes). The screen saver is activated when no function of the phone is used after a preset period of time. Press any key to deactivate the screen saver. The screen saver is also deactivated when the phone is out of the network coverage area. 80 Copyright 2003 Nokia SCREEN SAVER TIMEOUT 1 At the start screen, press Menu 4-5-4 (Settings > Display settings > Screen saver timeout). Scroll to either 2 minutes or 5 minutes and press Select. If you want to set a custom time (up to 60 minutes), scroll to Other and press Select. Enter the custom time and press OK. A confirmation note appears on the screen. Display brightness You can change the brightness of the phone display. 1 Press Menu 4-5-5 (Settings > Display settings > Display brightness). A bar chart indicating the current brightness level appears on the screen. Use the Scroll up or Scroll down key to adjust the contrast level to your preference. Press OK to accept your settings. 2 3 4 2 3 USE CALLER GROUPS From the start screen, scroll to the name or number you want. Press Details, then press Options. Scroll to Caller groups and press Select. Choose Family, VIP, Friends, Business or Other, then press Select. You can create groups of contacts in your contact list and give each group a different ringing tone. When someone from that group calls, you will know because of the ringing tone. Add contacts to a caller group The name you add to a caller group must first be stored in the contact list. 1 2 3 4 Remove contacts from a caller group 1 2 3 4 From the start screen, scroll to the name or number you want. Press Details, then press Options. Scroll to Caller groups and press Select. Scroll to No group and press Select. Nokia 3595 User Guide 81 Copyright 2003 Nokia Personalize your phone Assign a ringing tone to a caller group 1 2 3 4 5 From the start screen, press Contacts. Scroll to Caller groups and press Select. Scroll to the group you want and press Select. Scroll to Group ringing tone and press Select. Scroll to the tone you want to hear for this caller group and press Select. Tip: You can set your phone to ring only when people from certain caller groups call you, and to be silent for all other call groups. Follow steps 1 through 3 above. Scroll to Rename group and press Select. Enter the group name, then press OK. Rename a caller group You can rename any call group with a name of your own. 1 2 3 Assign group graphic Each caller group has a picture associated with it. When you get a call from someone in a caller group, the graphic flashes on the screen. To turn the graphic on for a caller group:
1 2 3 Press Contacts, scroll to Caller groups, and press Select. Scroll to the name of the group and press Select. Scroll to Group logo and press Select. Note: To see the group graphic before you select it, scroll to View and press Select. Press Back to return to the menu. Scroll to On and press Select. 4 To turn the graphic off, repeat steps 1-3, scroll to Off, then press Select. VIEW A RECEIVED GRAPHIC 1 When you receive a graphic from someone else, Group logo received appears. 2 3 To view the graphic, press Show. After viewing the graphic, press Options and then choose:
Save to save it (you must choose which caller group gets the new graphic). Discard to delete it. Press Select. 4 82 Copyright 2003 Nokia RESTORE FACTORY SETTINGS You can use Menu 4 8 (Settings > Restore factory settings) to reset some of the phone settings to their original values. Caution: Restoring factory settings does not delete your contact list. However, it does delete all customized settings you may have entered. 1 2 Press Menu 4-8 (Settings > Restore factory settings). Enter the Security code, then press OK. For the default code, see Security code on page89. CHANGE XPRESS-ON COLOR COVERS To personalize your Nokia 3595 phone, you can change the front and back covers. Nokia Xpress-onTM color covers, reactive covers (glow-in-the-dark), and active covers may be purchased from your authorized Nokia dealer. Important: Before changing the cover, always switch off the power and disconnect the phone from the charger or any other device. Always store the phone with the covers attached. When changing covers, remove the back cover first, then the front cover. When replacing covers, place the front cover on first, then the back cover. Remove the back cover 1 With the back of the phone facing you, press and hold the back cover release button. Slide the cover up. Lift the cover off of the phone. 2 3 Nokia 3595 User Guide 83 Copyright 2003 Nokia Personalize your phone Remove the phone from the front cover With the back of the phone facing you, gently separate the cover from the phone, starting at the bottom. Change the keypad 1 2 Lift the keypad from inside the old front cover. Place the keypad into the new front cover. New front cover 84 Copyright 2003 Nokia Replace the new front cover 1 To replace the front cover, align the top of the phone with the top of the front cover. Make sure both sets of plastic tabs line up with their slots, as shown at right. Align the cover and snap it shut all the way around the edge of the phone. 2 Tabs Replace the back cover 1 2 Direct the back cover towards the locking catches on the phone. Slide the back cover until it locks into place. locking catches Nokia 3595 User Guide 85 Copyright 2003 Nokia Manage phone security 13 Manage phone security Your phone is equipped with different security features that allow you to do the following:
Avoid making accidental calls Prevent unauthorized use of your phone Restrict outgoing or incoming calls LOCK THE KEYPAD (KEYGUARD) Keyguard disables your keypad to prevent accidental key presses (for example, when your phone is in your pocket or purse). To lock the keys, press Menu, then *. To unlock the keys, press Unlock, then *. Note: When Keyguard is enabled, the keypad and display cannot light if you press a key. Press the power button briefly to activate the keypad and display lights. Automatic Keyguard You can have your phone automatically lock the keys after a time you specify. 1 Press Menu 4-4-2 (Settings > Phone settings > Automatic keyguard). 2 Scroll to On, then press Select. 3 Set the delay time, then press OK. Note: When Keyguard is on, calls may be possible to emergency numbers
(for example, 911 or other official emergency number). Key in the emergency number and press the Talk key. The number is displayed only after you have keyed in its last digit. Keyguard does not prevent unauthorized use of your phone. 86 Copyright 2003 Nokia ABOUT SECURITY CODES The following table summarizes how different types of security codes are used in your phone. Code Purpose Use the security code for the following procedures:
Reset call timers (page47) Clear the data counter (page50) Clear the connection timer (page51) Restore factory settings (page83) Delete your entire contact list (page44) If phone security is on, the phone requests the security code the first time you use it after installing a new SIM card. You can use the PIN code to protect against unauthorized calls if the following conditions are met:
The next time the phone is turned on, you must enter the correct PIN code to make calls or use the menus. The PIN code request is turned on The phone is powered off Enter the PIN2 code for the following procedure:
Use fixed dialing (page89) Required by the restrict calls feature. Security code PIN code PIN2 code Restriction password PIN CODES The PIN (Personal Identity Number) and PIN2 codes are 4- to 8-digit numbers that usually come from your service provider along with the SIM card. Use the PIN code to protect your phone and SIM card against unauthorized use. The PIN2 code activates some phone functions, such as Call cost limit. See Manage call costs on page50. When the phone requires the PIN or PIN2 code, it displays Enter PIN code: or Enter PIN2 code:. Enter the code, then press OK. Nokia 3595 User Guide 87 Copyright 2003 Nokia Manage phone security Set PIN code request You can activate the PIN code request to prevent unauthorized use of your phone. If you set the PIN code request to On, your phone will ask for the code each time you turn the phone on. Note: When the phone is locked, calls may be possible to the emergency number programmed into your phone (for example, 911 or other official emergency number). Press Menu 4-7-1 (Settings > Security settings> PIN code request). Enter the PIN code supplied by your service provider, and press OK. Scroll to On and press OK. 1 2 3 To turn off this feature, repeat steps 1-3, scroll to Off, then press OK. Change your PIN or PIN2 code You can change your PIN or PIN2 code to any 4- to 8-digit number. Tip: Activate the PIN code request first. 1 2 3 4 5 Press Menu 4-7-6 (Settings > Security settings > Change access codes). Scroll to Change PIN code, then press Select. Enter the current PIN code and press OK. Enter the new PIN code and press OK. Enter the new PIN code again to verify, and press OK. Note: If you make a mistake while entering the code, Code Error appears. Start again at step 2 and be careful to enter the correct code. If you enter the wrong code three times in a row, the PIN code is blocked. To unblock the PIN code, you need a Personal Unblocking Key (PUK) from your service provider. PUK CODES The PUK and PUK2 codes are 4-digit to 8-digit codes that usually come from your service provider along with the SIM card. The PUK code unblocks a blocked PIN code, and the PUK2 code unblocks a blocked PIN2 code. If you block your phone, contact your service provider. When you enter the PUK code given by your service provider, the phone prompts you to enter and then confirm a new PIN code. 88 Copyright 2003 Nokia SECURITY CODE The default security code is 12345. Nokia recommends that you change the default code immediately. You need the security code to access certain phone features. When the phone requires the security code, it displays Security code:
Enter the code, then press OK. If you enter an incorrect security code five times in a row, the phone will not accept the correct code for 5 minutes. Change the security code 1 2 3 4 5 Press Menu 4-7-6 (Settings > Security settings > Change access codes). Scroll to Change security code and press Select. Enter the current security code, then press OK. Enter the new security code, then press OK. Enter the security code again to verify, then press OK. Important: Keep the code secret and in a safe place, separate from the phone. USE FIXED DIALING If supported by your SIM card, this feature lets you restrict your outgoing calls to phone numbers included in the fixed dialing list or beginning with the same digit(s) as an entry in the list. Note: When fixed dialing is set on, calls may be possible to certain emergency numbers in some networks (for example, 911 or other official emergency numbers). Turn fixed dialing on or off 1 2 3 Press Menu 4-7-3 (Settings > Security settings > Fixed dialing). Scroll to On or Off, then press Select. Enter your PIN2 code, then press OK. Nokia 3595 User Guide 89 Copyright 2003 Nokia Manage phone security Add numbers to the fixed dialing list 1 2 3 4 5 6 Repeat steps 3-6 for each number you want to add to the list. Press Menu 4-7-3 (Settings > Security settings > Fixed dialing). Scroll to Number list, then press Select. Scroll to Add, then press Select. Enter your PIN2 code and press OK. Enter a name to go with the restricted phone number, then press OK. Enter the phone number you want to restrict, then press OK. RESTRICT CALLS This network service, if available from your service provider, lets you restrict the calls your phone can make and receive. Check with your service provider for details. Note: When calls are restricted, calls may be possible to certain emergency numbers in some networks (for example, 911 or other official emergency number). About the restriction password Contact your service provider for the restriction password. Turn on call restrictions 1 2 Press Menu 4-7-2 (Settings > Security settings > Call restrictions). Scroll through the types of calls you can restrict, and press Select when you see the one you want. Outgoing calls: Calls cannot be made. International calls: Calls cannot be made to foreign countries. International except to home country: When abroad, calls can be made only within the current country and to your home country (that is, the country where your home network operator is located). Incoming calls: Calls cannot be received. Incoming calls if roaming: Calls cannot be received outside your home area. Cancel all call restrictions: Turns off all call restrictions. Calls can be made and received in the usual way. Note: If you selected Cancel all call restrictions, the following steps are not available. Also, you can cancel call restrictions on each option, allowing restrictions on other options to stay in force. 90 Copyright 2003 Nokia 3 Scroll to one of the following options, then press Select:
Activate: Enter the restriction password and press OK. Cancel: Enter the restriction password and press OK. Check Status: The phone lists the call types with call restriction active. Change your restriction password 1 2 3 4 5 Press Menu 4-7-6 (Settings > Security settings > Change access codes). Scroll to Change restriction password, then press Select. Enter your current password, then press OK. Enter your new password, then press OK. Verify the new password, then press OK. SET UP A CLOSED USER GROUP This network service, if available from your service provider, specifies the group of people to whom you can call and who can call you. Default resets the phone to use a user group that the SIM card owner has agreed upon with the service provider. Note: When calls are limited to Closed User Groups, calls may be possible to certain emergency numbers in some networks (for example, 911 or other official emergency number). Turn closed user group on/off 1 2 3 Press Menu 4-7-4 (Settings >Security settings > Closed user group). Scroll to On or Off, then press Select. Enter the group number, then press OK. Nokia 3595 User Guide 91 Copyright 2003 Nokia Communicate with mobile messages 14 Communicate with mobile messages You can use mobile messages to keep in touch with friends, family, and business associates. Your Nokia 3595 phone allows you to do the following:
Send and receive text messages Communicate with e-mail Communicate online with other phone users Compose, send, receive and view multimedia messages (MMS) Send and receive picture messages Not all messaging features are available in all wireless networks. Contact your service provider for availability and subscription information. Warning: Do not switch on the phone when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. MESSAGE SETTINGS Before you can send and receive messages you must:
Save your message center number Have a text messaging subscription through your service provider. Contact your service provider for the message center number. Save your message center number in your phone. Set up other message settings, such as GPRS. Note: Your service provider supplies the message center number. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Press Menu, then press Select. Scroll up to Message settings, then press Select. Scroll to Text messages, then press Select. Scroll to Sending profile, then press Select. If your SIM supports more than one message profile, choose a profile, then press Select. Scroll to Message center number, then press Select. Enter your message center number, then press OK. 92 Copyright 2003 Nokia Set the message mode You can choose the type of message sent by your phone. The message modes include text, e-mail, fax and page. Note: This features appears only if your SIM card supports multiple message types. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Press Menu, then press Select. Scroll up to Message settings, then press Select. Scroll to Text messages, then press Select. Scroll to Sending profile, then press Select. If your SIM supports more than one message profile, choose a profile, then press Select. Scroll to Messages sent as, then press Select. Scroll to Text, E-mail, Page, or Fax, then press Select. Note: In order to receive a converted message, the recipient needs to have the appropriate terminal device, such as a pager or fax machine. E-mail messages can be sent to a mobile phone or personal computer. Adjust font size You can modify the font size for message displays. The font size you choose appears in messages when you are reading or editing and in message lists. 1 2 3 Press Menu, then press Select. Scroll up to Message settings, then press Select. Scroll to Other settings, then press Select. Font size appears. Press Select and scroll to Small font or Large font, then press Select. 4 Nokia 3595 User Guide 93 Copyright 2003 Nokia Communicate with mobile messages Choose other message settings You can modify the following message settings, under Messages > Message settings > Text messages > Sending profile. For menu locations, see List of menu shortcuts on page27 Note: The following list is dynamic. The order and number of items may vary, depending on the SIM card. Check with your service provider for more information. Choice What it does Message validity Allows you to select the length of time that the message center will try to deliver a message. You can choose a time from one hour to one week. If the message center cannot deliver the message within this time, the message is deleted. Default recipient number Allows you to specify a single recipient for all your messages. This option is not available when you choose Messages sent as e-mail. E-mail server Delivery reports Use GPRS Reply via same center Rename sending profile Allows you to store e-mail server information in your phone so that you do not have to enter the number each time you compose a new e-mail message. This option only shows up if you have set the message mode to E-mail. Contact your service provider for the server number. Allows you to ask the network for a report about message delivery. Allows you to send your messages via the General Packet Radio System (GPRS). Choose this when you want your recipient to reply through the same message center. Note: Do not choose Yes unless you know the recipient has the same service provider. Allows you to name the profile. This option depends on SIM card. Note: This option is not available for the default profile. 94 Copyright 2003 Nokia SEND AND RECEIVE TEXT MESSAGES You can use the text message feature to compose and send a short text message to another phone. Tip: Review ABC mode and predictive text input from Enter letters and numbers on page34 before reading this section. Send text messages 1 2 Press Menu 01-1-1 (Messages > Text messages > Create message). Enter a message. You can compose one long message made up of several linked parts. Each part can be up to 160 characters. The counter in the upper right corner shows the number of available characters. For example, 100/2 refers to 100 characters available in the second part of the message. Contact your service provider for information on pricing. Once you have finished writing, press Options, scroll to Send, then press Select. Enter or recall the recipients phone number, then press OK. 3 4 Note: When sending messages via the SMS network service, your phone may display the words Message Sent. This is an indication that the message has been sent by your phone to the message center number programmed into your phone. This is not an indication that the message has been received at the intended destination. For more details about SMS services, check with your service provider. Caution: If you need to exit while writing the message, press the End key anytime. Later, press Menu 01-1 to return and finish writing the message. If you turn off the phone without saving the message, the message will be lost. Nokia 3595 User Guide 95 Copyright 2003 Nokia Communicate with mobile messages Send messages to multiple recipients You can send the same message to more than one recipient. Tip: Before using this feature, the names of your recipients must be entered into the contact list. See Save names, numbers, and e-mail addresses on page39 for instructions. From the message screen press Options. Scroll to Sending options, then press Select. Scroll to Send to many, then press Select. Scroll to the persons name, then press Send. 1 2 3 4 Note: After you press Send, your phone may display the words Message Sent and then you return to the previous screen. To add other names to the message, repeat step 4 above. Save messages in sent items When you write a text message, it is a good idea to save it in the sent items folder. Then if there is a message delivery problem, you can easily resend the message. 1 While writing the message, press Options. 2 Scroll to Save message, then press Select. 3 Scroll to Sent items, then press Select. Resend a message from sent items 1 2 3 Press Menu, then press Select. Scroll to Sent items, then press Select. Scroll to the message you want to resend, then press Select. The message appears on the screen. Press Options and scroll to Send, then press Select. Scroll to As text msg. or As e-mail, then press Select. Enter the number or e-mail address and press OK to send the message. 4 5 6 Read a new text message When you receive a text message, the phone beeps and displays Message received and the To read the message now, press Show. indicator in the upper left corner of the screen. 96 Copyright 2003 Nokia Read a new text message later 1 When you receive a text message, press Exit. 2 3 Later when you want to read the message, press Menu, then press Select. Scroll to Inbox, then press Select. A list of message headers is displayed. Indicates that a text message has been read. Indicates that a text message has not been read. Scroll to the message you want, then press Select. If the message is long, use the scroll keys to scroll through the message. 4 5 Read linked messages Your phone can receive one long message (up to 459 characters) in sequences. You can start reading the first part before the phone has received the entire message. While viewing the message, you may see *some text missing* on the display. This is normal, and the message content will be updated as soon as the missing sequence arrives. If the memory is full, you may have to delete a message from your inbox or outbox before your phone can update the missing text. Choose text message options While reading or viewing a message, you can choose one of the following options. Note: The following list is dynamic. The order and number of options may vary. Choice Delete Reply What it does Allows you to delete the message. Allows you to start your reply with an empty screen, a template or with standard replies like Yes, No, Thank you, or I love you too. Nokia 3595 User Guide 97 Copyright 2003 Nokia Communicate with mobile messages Choice Use detail I M Forward Edit Move Rename Copy to calend. Message details What it does Allows you to extract phone numbers, e-mail addresses, or web addresses from the current message. The phone goes through and gathers all phone numbers, e-mail addresses or web addresses in the message, including the originating number or address. Allows you to start an online conversation. Allows you to send the message to another recipient. Allows you to modify the message. Allows you to move the message to the Outbox or Archive, for example. Allows you to enter a new title for the message. Copies the message to the phone calendar as a reminder note. This option is not available for picture messages. Shows, for example, the senders name and phone number, message center used, reception date and time. Save picture Allows you to save a picture to the template folder. This option only appears in the list if you receive a picture message. COMMUNICATE WITH E-MAIL You can send e-mail messages to friends and family directly from your phone if you sign up for this service with your service provider. There are two ways of sending an e-mail message. You can send an e-mail message from the Messages menu. You can send an e-mail message from the contact list. Tip: Before you send e-mail messages, you can set up a profile to define the e-mail server. Contact your service provider for the e-mail server number. 98 Copyright 2003 Nokia Define an e-mail sending profile If you use the e-mail feature on a regular basis, you may find it helpful to define an e-mail sending profile. Note: This feature depends on your SIM card. Contact your service provide for more information about e-mail profiles. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Press Menu, then press Select. Scroll up to Message settings, then press Select. Scroll to Text messages, then press Select. Scroll to Sending profile, then press Select. If your SIM supports more than one message profile, choose a profile, then press Select. If your SIM card already has a profile called E-mail, go to step 7 Scroll to Messages sent as, then press Select. Scroll to E-mail, then press Select. Enter the e-mail server number, then press Options. Scroll to Accept, then press Select. Send an e-mail message FROM THE MESSAGES MENU 1 2 Press Menu 01-1-3 (Messages > Text messages > Create e-mail). Enter the e-mail address, then press OK. OR If you have already saved an e-mail address in the contact list, press Find, scroll to the persons name, press Select, then OK. Enter a subject, then press OK. Enter a message. Once you have finished writing, press Options, scroll to Send e-mail, then press Select. If you have defined an e-mail sending profile, a confirmation note appears. If you have not defined an e-mail sending profile, enter the e-mail server number, then press OK. 3 4 5 6 Nokia 3595 User Guide 99 Copyright 2003 Nokia Communicate with mobile messages FROM THE CONTACT LIST First you must have an e-mail address entered into the contact list. See Save names, numbers, and e-mail addresses on page39 for instructions. 1 Press the Scroll up key, then scroll to the person to whom you want to send an e-mail message. Press Details, scroll through the list until the e-mail address is highlighted, then press Options. 2 3 With Send e-mail highlighted, press Select. 4 5 Enter a subject, then press OK. Enter a message. The number of available characters appears in the upper right corner of the screen. Once you have finished writing, press Options. 6 7 With Send e-mail highlighted, press Select. Receive an e-mail message When you receive an e-mail message, the phone beeps and displays Message received and the To read the message now, press Show. When reading a received e-mail message, you can choose other options, such as Reply or Forward. See Choose text message options on page97 for a list of options. indicator in the upper left corner of the screen. STORE MESSAGES Save a message to a folder You can save a message to an existing folder or a folder you have created. 1 Press Menu 01-1-1 (Messages > Text messages > Create message). After a brief pause, the message entry screen appears in the display. 2 Write your message and press Options. 3 4 Scroll to Save message and press Select. Scroll to the folder where you want to save the message and press Select. The message is saved. 100 Copyright 2003 Nokia INBOX FOLDER Messages are automatically stored in the Inbox folder after they have been read or if you press the End key when Message received appears on the start screen. SENT ITEMS FOLDER You can use the Sent Items folder to store saved messages. ARCHIVE FOLDER To make sure that certain messages will not be overwritten when memory becomes full, move some of your messages to the Archive folder. TEMPLATES FOLDER Pictures and prewritten templates are stored in the Templates folder. 1 2 3 My folders Keep your messages organized by creating custom folders and saving your messages there. ADD A FOLDER OF YOUR OWN 1 2 From the message screen press Options. Scroll to Use template, then press Select. Scroll to the template you want, then press Select. Press Menu 01-1-1 (Messages > Text messages > My folders). Press Options. Add folder is highlighted. Press Select. Enter a name for the new folder and press OK. The folder is added. 3 4 REMOVE A FOLDER Only folders created in My folders can be deleted. The Inbox, Sent items, Archive, and Templates folders are protected. When you delete a folder, all messages in the folder are deleted as well. 1 2 At the start screen, press Menu, then press Select. Scroll to My folders, then press Select. Any folders that you have created appear in the display. Scroll to the folder you wish to remove and press Options. Scroll to Delete folder and press Select. Press OK if you wish to delete and Back if you wish to exit. 3 4 5 Nokia 3595 User Guide 101 Copyright 2003 Nokia Communicate with mobile messages Move a message to a folder 1 While viewing the message, press Options. 2 3 Scroll to Move and press Select. Scroll to the destination folder and press Select. The message is moved. DELETE MESSAGES 3 Read some of the unread messages and then delete them. Delete some of these messages from your folders. If your message memory becomes full, the message icon blinks in the display. You can do the following to create more space:
Delete a single message To delete a single message, you need to open it first. 1 Press Menu 01-1 (Messages > Text messages). 2 Scroll to the folder containing the message you want to delete and press Select. A list of messages appears in the display. Scroll to the message you you want to delete and press Select. The message opens. Press Options, scroll to Delete, and press Select. You are asked to confirm the deletion. Press OK to delete the message. 5 Delete all messages in a folder 1 2 3 Press Menu 01-1 (Messages > Text messages). Scroll to Delete messages, then press Select. Scroll to the desired folder or message type that you want to delete and press Select. You are asked to confirm the deletion. Press OK to empty the folder. 4 4 102 Copyright 2003 Nokia SEND AND RECEIVE PICTURE MESSAGES Picture messages are like picture postcards. You can add text to the postcard before sending the message to a friend who has a compatible phone. You can find pictures under Messages > Text messages > Templates. Notes about picture messages This function can be used only if it is supported by your network operator or service provider. Only phones that offer picture message features can receive and display a picture message. Your phone has two types of pictures available - graphic icons found in the Templates folder and images found in Gallery. The pictures found in the Templates folder are black and white and are inserted as a message attachment, while the images found in Gallery are color and display in the body of the message. A picture message can only be sent to a phone number, while a Gallery image can be sent as a multimedia message (requires a GPRS connection) to either a phone number or an e-mail address. Each picture message is made up of several text messages. Therefore, sending one picture message may cost more than sending one text message. Contact your service provider for pricing information. Since pictures are saved in the phones memory, you cannot view them if you use your SIM card with another phone. Tip: Before sending a picture message, be sure to set the message mode to Text. See Set the message mode on page93 for instructions. Send picture messages 1 2 Press Menu 01-1-6 (Messages > Text messages > Templates). Scroll up to the picture you want to send and press Select. The picture appears. To choose a different picture, press Back, scroll to another picture, then press Select. Press Options, scroll to Send, then press Select. Scroll to As text msg., then press Select. Recall or enter the phone number. 3 4 5 6 Note: The phone number you choose must be able to receive picture messages. 7 Press OK. Nokia 3595 User Guide 103 Copyright 2003 Nokia Communicate with mobile messages Attach a picture to a text message 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Press Menu 01-1-1 (Messages > Text messages > Create message). Enter your message, then press Options. Scroll to Insert picture, then press Select. Scroll to the picture you want to send, then press View. After viewing the picture, select Insert. Select Options, scroll to Send, then press Select. Enter the phone number or recall a number from your contact list, then press OK. Note: The phone number you choose must be able to receive picture messages. indicator in the upper left corner of the screen. Receive picture messages When you receive a picture message, the phone beeps and displays Message received and the To read the message now, press Show. To read the message later, press Exit. Read a new picture message later 1 When you want to read the message, press Menu, then press Select 2 Scroll to Inbox, then press Select. A list of message headers is displayed. Scroll to the message you want, then press Select. If the message is long, use the scroll keys to view the message. 3 4 Save picture messages 1 While viewing the message, press Options. 2 3 Scroll to Save picture, then press Select. Enter a title for the picture, then press OK. A confirmation note appears. The picture is saved to the Templates folder. 104 Copyright 2003 Nokia Scroll to Edit text, then press Select. Scroll to As text msg., then press Select. Save picture messages with edited text 1 While viewing the message, press Options. 2 3 4 Make changes to the text, then press Options. 5 6 7 Scroll to Save message, then press Select. Choose Sent items, Archive, or Templates, then press Select. If the phone prompts you to replace the original, press OK. RECEIVE MULTIMEDIA MESSAGES (MMS) A multimedia message (MMS) can contain text, images, and sounds. Your phone has a multimedia message viewer for playing messages and a multimedia inbox for storing saved messages. Once you save the multimedia message, you can use the image as a screen saver or the sound as a ringing tone. Note: This function can be used only if it is supported by your network operator or service provider. Only devices that offer compatible multimedia message or e-mail features can receive and display multimedia messages. Message receiving limitations Your phone can receive a multimedia message if:
Define MMS settings Before you can use the multimedia message feature, you need to first define the way you want to receive the messages. the message size is under 45 KB and the message type and settings allow reception. Note: The default setting of the multimedia message service is on. Nokia 3595 User Guide 105 Copyright 2003 Nokia Communicate with mobile messages ALLOW MULTIMEDIA RECEPTION You can choose to receive all messages or to receive messages only when you are in the service providers home network. 1 2 3 4 5 Press Menu, then press Select. Scroll up to Message settings, then press Select. Scroll to Multimedia msg., then press Select. Scroll to Allow multimedia reception, then press Select. Scroll to one of the following, then press Select:
Yes to allow all incoming messages. In home system to allow incoming messages only if you are in the service providers home system. Scroll to Incoming multimedia messages, then press Select. Scroll to Retrieve, then press Select. Press Menu, then press Select. Scroll up to Message settings, then press Select. Scroll to Multimedia msg., then press Select. Scroll to Allow multimedia reception, then press Select. Scroll to No, then press Select. 6 7 BLOCK ALL MESSAGES If you do not want to receive any multimedia messages, follow these instructions. 1 2 3 4 5 ALLOW ADVERTISEMENTS 1 2 3 4 5 BLOCK ADVERTISEMENTS 1 2 3 4 5 Press Menu, then press Select. Scroll up to Message settings, then press Select. Scroll to Multimedia msg., then press Select. Scroll to Allow advertisements, then press Select. Scroll to Yes, then press Select. Press Menu, then press Select. Scroll up to Message settings, then press Select. Scroll to Multimedia msg., then press Select. Scroll to Allow advertisements, then press Select. Scroll to No, then press Select. 106 Copyright 2003 Nokia ABOUT CONNECTION SETTINGS Contact your service provider for information about downloading appropriate connection sets for the multimedia message service. View a multimedia message When you receive a multimedia message, the phone beeps and displays Multimedia message received. To view the message now, press Show. You can use the scroll keys to view the different elements of the message, for example, text, images, or MIDI tones. Discard a multimedia message To discard the message, press Exit, then press OK to confirm. Choose multimedia message options 1 While viewing a message, press Options. 2 Scroll to one of these choices listed in the table, then press Select. Note: The following list is dynamic. The order and number of options may vary. Choice Play Save tone What it does Allows you to play the ringing tone when the sound clip part of the multimedia message is active. Allows you to save the ringing tone when the sound clip part of the multimedia message is active. The tone is saved under the ringing tone list. See Customize a profile on page67 for information about choosing a ringing tone. Save image Allows you to save the image when the graphic part of the multimedia message is active. The image is saved under Messages > Pictures. Save message Allows you to save the multimedia message in the Multimedia inbox. Delete message Discard Details Allows you to delete a saved multimedia message. Allows you to delete a newly received multimedia message. Shows information such as the senders name, subject, type of file, file size, time, and date. Nokia 3595 User Guide 107 Copyright 2003 Nokia Communicate with mobile messages USE THE INFO MESSAGE SERVICE With the info message network service, you can receive short text messages on various topics, such as weather and traffic conditions, from your service provider. Info message selections can be found under Messages > Info messages. Note: For available topics and relevant topic numbers, contact your service provider. USE THE SERVICE COMMAND EDITOR Use the Service command editor to key in and send service requests (also known as USSD commands) to your service provider. Note: For more information, contact your service provider. 108 Copyright 2003 Nokia 15 Your WAP browser Your phone has a built-in browser you can use to connect to selected services on the mobile Internet. You can view weather reports, check news or flight times, view financial information, make online purchases and much more. NOTES ON MOBILE INTERNET ACCESS This section gives a brief overview of mobile Internet technology. Technology background WAP A technology called Wireless Application Protocol (WAP) is to mobile devices what the World Wide Web (WWW) is to personal computers. The mobile community began developing WAP several years ago to provide access to Internet sites designed for mobile users. Today, most WAP sites are made up of text and hyperlinks. Some pages even contain low-resolution graphics, or require data input. Your service provider and others are free to design WAP sites as they choose, so the sites are as variable as Web pages on the Internet. Internet content on your personal computer is called a web page. Internet content on your mobile phone is called a page, WAP card, or a Deck of cards. GPRS General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) is a technology used to send and receive data via short bursts or packets over the wireless network. GPRS allows you to stay connected to the Internet. This feature allows for faster downloads of information and no time spent completing a dial-up connection. Applications using GPRS include the WAP browser and text messaging. For information about how to track time spent online, see Check data calls on page50. For information about sending messages via GPRS, see the entry for Use GPRS under Choose other message settings on page94. For availability, pricing, and subscription to GPRS services, contact your service provider. Nokia 3595 User Guide 109 Copyright 2003 Nokia Your WAP browser The service providers role Because mobile Internet content is designed to be viewed from your phone, your wireless service provider now becomes your mobile Internet service provider as well. Its likely that your service provider has created a home page and set up your browser to go to this page when you log on to the Internet. Once at your service providers home page, youll find links to a number of other sites. SET UP FOR BROWSING You should not need to do anything to set up your phone for browsing. Your service provider usually modifies the appropriate settings when you subscribe to the feature. Contact your service provider if you have problems using the browser. SIGN ON TO THE MOBILE INTERNET You use the Services menu to connect to the mobile Internet. Note: Your phone must be switched on to use this function. Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. Press Menu 11 (Services). Scroll to Home, then press Select. 1 2 Your phone connects to the mobile Internet and to your service providers home page. If you see an error message, the phone may not be set up for browsing. Contact your service provider to make sure that your phone is configured properly. 110 Copyright 2003 Nokia USE BROWSER OPTIONS The Services menu gives you the options shown in the following list. Some service providers may have customized the options on the Services menu. Contact your service provider for more information if any of the options shown here are not available. Choice Home What it does Starts the browser and takes you to your service providers home page. Bookmarks Shows a list of all saved bookmarks. Bookmarks help you find a WAP site quickly. Service inbox Allows you to receive notifications from your service provider. Notifications may be about new e-mail messages, changes in stock prices or news headlines. Settings Go to address Clear the cache Provides options for changing connection settings, appearance settings, and authority certificate. Accepts an address you enter. Empties the browsers temporary memory and frees up space. Its advisable to empty your cache at the end of each session. NAVIGATE THE MOBILE INTERNET Since your phones screen is much smaller than a computer screen, Internet content is displayed in a different format than you may be used to seeing. This section shows simple guidelines for using the phones keys to navigate a WAP site. Examples of how to read a WAP site follow the guidelines. General guidelines for using the phone keys Use the scroll keys to browse the WAP site. To select a highlighted item, press the Talk key. To enter letters and numbers, press the 0 to 9 keys. To enter special characters, press the * key. Nokia 3595 User Guide 111 Copyright 2003 Nokia Your WAP browser Examples of mobile Internet sites The following illustrations show most of the elements you may find on a mobile Internet site. These are examples only. 1) Header line: shows the current Internet site. 2) Inactive link: appears as an underlined word. 3) Active link: appears as a highlighted word. 1) 2) 3) Use the Scroll up and Scroll down keys to scroll through the list of links. 1) Selection list: Brackets [ ] appear when you have the option to enter information. 2) Options: Press Options to go to the sites menu and/or browser page. 3) Back: Press Back to return to the previous page. 1) 2) 3) Data entry field: Brackets [ ] around three dots appear when you need to enter information. In this example, you can enter your zip code to receive the local weather forecast. 112 Copyright 2003 Nokia USE BOOKMARKS You can save addresses for your favorite sites as bookmarks. A bookmark helps you find a site again, just as a slip of paper helps you find a page in a book. Set a bookmark You can add up to 30 bookmarks. 1 2 3 4 Press Menu 11-2 (Services > Bookmarks), then press Options. Scroll to New bookmark, then press Select. Enter the address, then press OK. Enter a title, then press OK. Note: You can set a bookmark to mobile.nokiausa.com, which gives you access to downloadable Java games, graphics, and ringing tones, providing your service provider supports this feature. Contact your service provider for details. Set a bookmark while browsing 1 2 Press Menu 11-1 (Services > Home), then press Options. Scroll to Add bookmark, then press Select. DISCONNECT FROM THE MOBILE INTERNET 1 2 3 Press Options. Scroll to Quit, then press Select. The words, Quit Browsing? appears in the display. Press Yes. Note: You can also close your connection by pressing and holding the End key. Nokia 3595 User Guide 113 Copyright 2003 Nokia Your WAP browser SECURITY ISSUES Clear the cache memory Note: The information or services you have accessed may be stored in the cache of your phone. A cache is a buffer memory, which is used to store data temporarily. If you have tried to access or have accessed confidential information requiring passwords (for example, your bank account), empty the cache of your phone after each use. Press Options. Scroll to Clear the cache, then press Select. Press Menu 11 (Services). Scroll to Clear the cache, then press Select. 1 2 CLEAR THE CACHE WHILE BROWSING 1 2 About authority certificates To use some WAP services, such as banking services, you need an authority certificate. Using the certificate can help you to improve the security of connections between your phone and a WAP server. You can download the certificate from a WAP page if the WAP service supports the use of authority certificates. After the download, you can view the certificate, then save or delete it. If you save the certificate, it is added to the list of certificates in the phone. Your phone alerts you if the identity of the WAP server or WAP gateway cannot be verified or is not authentic. VIEW THE LIST OF AUTHORITY CERTIFICATES 1 2 3 Press Menu 11 (Services). Scroll to Settings, then press Select. Scroll to Authority certificates, then press Select. 114 Copyright 2003 Nokia GPRS When you use GPRS to connect to the mobile Internet, you are making a data call. The following icons appear on the screen to show you the status of your connection. Note: In order to use GPRS, you must first subscribe to the network service. Contact your service provider for details. Warning: Your phone must be switched on to use this function. Do not switch on the phone when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. Shows up in the left upper corner of the screen Indicates an active GPRS connection, for example, when you are using the WAP browser May show up in the left lower corner of the screen, under the signal strength bars, indicating a continuous GPRS connection, if you choose the always online setting Indicates that circuit switched (CS) or voice calls are not possible when using GPRS for a data call Indicates that the GPRS connection has been interrupted by a voice call Nokia 3595 User Guide 115 Copyright 2003 Nokia Your WAP browser Set up the GPRS connection Some service providers may have customized the options on the Services menu. Contact your service provider for more information if the options shown here are not available. Important: GPRS may not be available in all wireless networks. The establishment and continuation of a GPRS and Internet connection depends on network availability, service provider support, and signal strength. You can choose one of the following options from Services > Settings >Edit active service settings > GPRS connection:
Always online: the GPRS connection is established when you turn your phone on. The connection continues in the background even after you exit the WAP browser, depending on network coverage. When needed: the GPRS connection is established when you use the WAP browser and is closed when you exit the WAP browser. The following options shows how to end your browsing session, depending on which option you have chosen for your GPRS connection. Press the End key to return to the start screen if you have selected Always online. The GPRS connection remains in the background. Press the End key to end the GPRS connection if you have selected When needed. Press the End key twice to return to the start screen if you have selected When needed. Press and hold the End key to end browsing and disconnect from GPRS if you have selected When needed Receive a call while online If you are using the WAP browser over GPRS, you can still receive a voice call. Your data call is put on hold and you can choose to answer the call. To answer the incoming call, press the Talk key. To reject the incoming call, press the End key. Note: After you end your voice call, the GPRS connection automatically resumes. 116 Copyright 2003 Nokia Make a call while online When you are browsing a WAP card and want to make a call to a number on the WAP page, you can select Use number. Your phone then searches the information on the WAP card for a string of numbers. You can then choose from the number or numbers displayed to place the call. An alternate way is to press the End key to disconnect from the Internet, then place your call by searching the contact list for a name and number or by keying in the phone number. Make an emergency call while online If you are using GPRS to connect to the mobile Internet, you can end your data connection and then make an emergency call. 1 2 To close your mobile Internet connection, simply press the End key twice. Enter the emergency number for your present location (for example, 911 or any other official emergency numberemergency numbers vary by location). Press the Talk key. 3 Nokia 3595 User Guide 117 Copyright 2003 Nokia Your personal digital assistant 16 Your personal digital assistant Your Nokia 3595 phone has many useful features for organizing your everyday life, including a calendar, alarm clock, calculator, to-do list, and stopwatch. In this chapter, youll learn how to use your phone as a personal digital assistant. USE THE CALENDAR The calendar shows a month view and day view. You can use the calendar to keep track of reminders, calls you need to make, and birthdays. You can also set an alarm for calendar notes. Warning: Your phone must be switched on to use this function. Do not switch on the phone when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. View the calendar To view todays date in the calendar, press Menu 6-2 (Organizer > Calendar). The first time you access the calendar, your phone prompts you to enter the time and todays date. Select a day When you open the calendar, the month view shows todays date highlighted. To move the cursor to a new date:
Press 2 to scroll up one week. Press 4 to scroll left. Press 6 to scroll right. Press 8 to scroll down one week. Make a note When you make a note in your calendar, you can choose from the following four types. Reminder Call Birthday Meeting 118 Copyright 2003 Nokia ENTER A REMINDER 1 2 3 4 5 Press Menu 6-2 (Organizer > Calendar), press Select, then press Options. Scroll to Make a note, then press Select. Scroll to Reminder, then press Select. Enter your note, press Options, scroll to Save, then press Select. Scroll to Alarm on or Alarm off, then press Select. If you have selected Alarm on, enter a time, then press OK. Scroll to am or pm, then press Select. 6 ENTER A CALL NOTE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Press Menu 6-2 (Organizer > Calendar), press Select, then press Options. Scroll to Make a note, then press Select. Scroll to Call, then press Select. Enter the phone number, press Options, scroll to Save, then press Select. Enter the persons name, press Options, scroll to Save, then press Select. Enter a time, then press OK. Scroll to am or pm, then press Select. Choose one of the following, then press Select. No alarm Silent With tone If you select Silent or With tone, you can then choose a time. ENTER A BIRTHDAY NOTE 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press Menu 6-2 (Organizer > Calendar), press Select, then press Options. Scroll to Make a note, then press Select. Scroll to Birthday, then press Select. Enter the persons name, press Options, scroll to Save, then press Select. Enter the year of birth, then press OK. Choose one of the following, then press Select. No alarm Silent With tone If you select Silent or With tone, you can then choose a day and time. Nokia 3595 User Guide 119 Copyright 2003 Nokia Your personal digital assistant ENTER A MEETING NOTE 1 2 3 4 Press Menu 6-2 (Organizer > Calendar), press Select, then press Options. Scroll to Make a note, then press Select. Scroll to Meeting, then press Select. Enter the subject of the meeting, press Options, scroll to Save, then press Select. Enter the meeting location, press Options, scroll to Save, then press Select. Enter the meeting start time, then press OK. Scroll to am or pm, then press Select. Enter the meetings end time, then press OK. Scroll to am or pm, then press Select. 5 6 7 8 9 10 Choose one of the following, then press Select. No alarm Silent With tone If you select Silent or With tone, you can then choose a time. View calendar notes After you make a few calendar notes, you can view the days events. 1 From the start screen, press Menu 6-2 (Organizer > Calendar), then press Select. At the month view, scroll to the date you want. Press 2 to scroll up one week. Press 4 to scroll left. Press 6 to scroll right. Press 8 to scroll down one week. 2 3 With the date highlighted, press Options. 4 Scroll to View day, then press Select. 120 Copyright 2003 Nokia USE THE ALARM CLOCK The alarm clock feature is based on your phones internal clock and sounds an alert at a time you specify. The alarm clock works even if you turn your phone off. Set the alarm clock 1 2 Press Menu 6-1 (Organizer > Alarm clock). Enter the alarm time in hhmm format, then press OK. Step 3 is necessary only if you have selected am/pm format. Select either am or pm, then press Select. 3 Manage the alarm PHONE ON Press Stop to shut off the alarm. OR Press Snooze. The alarm stops and sounds again in ten minutes. Note: If you let the alarm sound for one minute without pressing a key, it stops for ten minutes, and then sounds again. PHONE OFF If the alarm time is reached while the phone is switched off, the phone switches itself on and starts sounding the alarm tone. If you press Stop, the phone asks whether you want to activate the phone for calls. Press No to switch off the phone or Yes to make and receive calls. Note: Do not press Yes when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. Turn off the alarm clock 1 2 Press Menu 6-1 (Organizer > Alarm clock). Scroll to Off and press Select. Nokia 3595 User Guide 121 Copyright 2003 Nokia Your personal digital assistant SHARE BUSINESS CARDS Your phone can send or receive an electronic business card as a short text message. The business card can have either:
a name and number, or a name, multiple numbers (home, work, fax, mobile), an e-mail address, web address and street address if you have entered this information in the contact list. If you are exchanging business cards with multiple numbers and addresses, both the receiving and sending phone must have a contact list that supports these kinds of entries. Send a business card as a short text message 1 2 3 4 5 6 Recall the name from your contact list. Press Details, if shown, or go to Step 3. Press Options. Scroll to Send bus. card and press Select. Scroll to Via text msg. and press Select. If the name in the contact list has multiple numbers, choose one of the following choices:
Primary number if you want to send a name and number only, OR All details if you want to send a name, multiple numbers, e-mail, web and street address. Enter the number for the receiving phone, then press OK. 7 Receive a business card Your phone can accept and receive an electronic business card from a compatible phone, if it is one of the following types:
Nokia Smart Messaging compact business card V-card format Note: If you press the End key at any time before saving the business card, the business card will be deleted. 122 Copyright 2003 Nokia 1 When your phone displays Business card received, press Show. 2 3 After viewing the business card, press Options. Scroll to Save to keep the information in the contact list, then press Select OR Scroll to Discard to delete the business card, then press Select. USE THE CALCULATOR Your phones calculator adds, subtracts, multiplies, divides, and computes square and square root functions. You can also use the calculator to convert currency. Note: Your phone must be switched on to use this function. Do not switch on the phone when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. This calculator has a limited accuracy and rounding errors may occur, especially in long division. Add, subtract, multiply and divide 1 2 Press Menu 9-1 (Extras > Calculator). Enter the first number in the calculation. Press # to enter a decimal point and Press Clear to delete any mistakes. To add, press * once( + appears). To subtract, press * twice (- appears). To multiply, press * three times (* appears). To divide, press * four times (/ appears). Enter the second number, repeating steps as needed. Press Options. Equals is selected. Press Select. 3 4 5 Nokia 3595 User Guide 123 Copyright 2003 Nokia Your personal digital assistant Press Menu 9-1 (Extras > Calculator). Enter the number. Press Options, scroll to Square or Square root, then press Select. Use the square and square root functions You can use the calculator for finding the square of a number or the square root of a number. 1 2 3 Convert currency SET THE EXCHANGE RATE 1 2 3 Press Menu 9-1 (Extras > Calculator), then press Options. Scroll to Exchange rate, then press Select. Scroll to Home units converted to foreign units or Foreign units converted to home units. Press Select. Enter the exchange rate (press # to enter a decimal point). Press OK. 4 5 6 Note: The exchange rate remains in the phone memory until you replace it. CONVERT A CURRENCY AMOUNT 1 Enter the amount to be converted. Press Options. 2 3 Scroll to To home to convert to domestic units or To foreign to convert to foreign units. Press Select. 4 MAKE A TO-DO LIST You can keep track of your tasks with the to-do list feature. You may be able to save up to 30 notes, depending on how long the notes are. 124 Copyright 2003 Nokia Add a to-do note When you add a new note, the default priority is medium (2). You can change the priority to high (1) or low (3). 1 2 Press Menu 6-3 (Organizer > To-do list), press Select, then press Options. Scroll to Add, then press Select. Subject: appears on the display. Enter your note, press Options, scroll to Save, then press Select. Scroll to the priority you want, then press Select. 3 4 Use predictive text for quick note entry When entering your to-do note, you can use the built-in dictionary to speed things up. See Predictive text input on page36 for details. 1 When entering your note, press Options. 2 3 4 Scroll to Predictive text, then press Select. Scroll to the language you want, then press Select. Continue entering your note. USE THE STOPWATCH Your phone has a stopwatch that can be used to track time at sporting events or other occasions. The stopwatch displays time in hours, minutes, seconds and fractions of a second. 00:00:00:0 Note: Your phone must be switched on to use this function. Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. Measure time 1 2 3 Press Menu 9-2 (Extras > Stopwatch), then press Select. Scroll to Split timing and press Select. Press Start to begin split timing. The running time appears on the screen. Nokia 3595 User Guide 125 Copyright 2003 Nokia Your personal digital assistant Measure split time You can use the split time function for such things as a long distance race when you need to pace yourself. 1 2 3 Press Menu 9-2 (Extras > Stopwatch), then press Select. Scroll to Split timing, press OK, then press Start. Take an intermediate time by pressing Split. The timer continues to run. The split time appears below the running time. Press Menu 9-2 (Extras > Stopwatch), then press Select. Scroll to Lap timing and press Select. Press Start to begin lap timing. The running time appears on the screen. Take a lap time by pressing Lap. If you split the time more than once, the new measured time appears at the beginning of the list. You can scroll to see previous measured times. STOP THE SPLIT TIMER Press Stop to end the split timer. Measure lap time You can use the lap time function when you want to track how long it takes to complete each cycle or lap. 1 2 3 4 The clock stops, then starts immediately from zero. The lap time appears below the running time. If you take more than 1 lap time, the new measured time appears at the beginning of the list. You can scroll to see previous measured times. When you press Stop, the total time appears at the top. SAVE THE LAP TIME 1 While the clock is running, press Stop, then press Options. 2 3 Scroll to Save and press Select. Enter a name for the measurement and press OK. If you dont enter a name, the total time is used as the default title for the lap time. STOP THE LAP TIMER Press Stop to end the lap timer. 126 Copyright 2003 Nokia Press Menu 9-2 (Extras > Stopwatch), then press Select. Scroll to View times and press Select. Scroll to the time you want to view and press Select. View times You can view saved times, which are listed in the order they were saved. 1 2 3 Delete times You can delete times from the stop watch memory. You can delete times one at time or delete all the times at once. DELETE ALL TIMES 1 2 3 Press Menu 9-2 (Extras > Stopwatch), then press Select. Scroll to Delete times and press Select. Scroll to Delete all and press Select. Are you sure? appears. Press OK. 4 DELETE TIMES ONE BY ONE 1 2 3 4 Press Menu 9-2 (Extras > Stopwatch), then press Select. Scroll to Delete times and press Select. Scroll to Copy and press Select. Scroll to the time you want to delete and press Delete Delete? appears. Press OK. 5 OR 1 2 3 4 5 Press Menu 9-2 (Extras > Stopwatch), then press Select. Scroll to View times and press Select. Scroll to the time you want to delete and press Select. Press Options, select Delete times. Delete? appears. Press OK. Nokia 3595 User Guide 127 Copyright 2003 Nokia Your personal digital assistant Choose other stopwatch options You can choose the following options when using the Stopwatch. Choice Function Start Save Reset Allows you to start timing again after the timing has stopped. If the maximum amount of laps has been saved, this option is not available. Allows you to save and name the last measured time. If the stopwatch memory is full, you will be prompted to delete saved times. Allows you to reset the stopwatch. Note about stopwatch operation Using the stopwatch consumes the battery and the phone's operating time will be reduced. Be careful not to let it run in the background when performing other operations with your phone. If you press the End key and return to the start screen, the clock continues to run in the background. To return to the Stopwatch function, take the following steps:
1 Press Menu 9-2 (Extras > Stopwatch). After a brief pause, a list of options appear in the display. Scroll to Continue and press Select. To stop the clock, press Stop. 2 3 SYNCHRONIZE YOUR CONTACTS AND CALENDER Your phone has the ability to synchronize its contact list and calendar data with remote devices. Using the synchronization feature (SyncML), data such as names, numbers, and e-mail addresses stored in your contact list, or day notes and reminders from the calendar can be exchanged with other devices through a synchronization service provider. After synchronization, the data in the phone will be the same as the data contained in the host database. Before you begin Before you can begin to use SyncML, you must verify your service provider offers this feature. If your service provider does offer SyncML, you must set up an account with a SyncML service provider. For more information about signing up for synchronization services, contact your wireless service provider. 128 Copyright 2003 Nokia Automatic configuration Your wireless service provider can automatically configure your phone with the correct synchronization settings by using SMS. This can only take place while your phone is in idle mode. Contact your service provider for more information. Even though it is highly recommended that your service provider configure the correct synchronization settings for you, it is helpful for you to know what the meaning of the settings. To view the synchronization settings, perform the following steps:
1 2 Press Menu 10-1-2 (Connectivity > Synchronize > Settings). Scroll to one of the following options, then press Select:
Active Internet sync. settings Custom. active Internet sync. ACTIVE INTERNET SYNC. SETTINGS This menu option allows you to select which synchronization set to activate. You have the option of renaming the set. There are four sets available. CUSTOM. ACTIVE INTERNET SYNC. This menu option allows you to customize the active synchronization set from a set of options, which are shown in the following table. Choice What it does Data to be synchronized Allows the selection of the databases to be synchronized. When this setting is selected, there are two options available, Contacts or Calendar, which will be implemented during future synchronization sessions. Database address Allows the database address to be entered for the databases that are to be synchronized. User name Allows creation or change of a user name for authorization with the synchronization server. If a user name has been previously entered, it appears. Nokia 3595 User Guide 129 Copyright 2003 Nokia Your personal digital assistant Choice What it does Password Allows a password to be established or changed , which is used to authenticate the user name while connecting with the synchronization server. If the password or user name is changed in the phone without also changing them with the synchronization service provider, the data will not be able to be synchronized. Synchronization Server Allows the input of the name of the synchronization server used to synchronize the data. Start the synchronization process During the synchronization process, it is not possible to access the database where your data is stored. However, you can cancel the synchronization process by pressing Quit or the End key. Note: It is not possible to place or receive calls, including emergency calls, during synchronization. To place a call, you must cancel the synchronization process. 1 2 3 Press Menu 10-1-1 (Connectivity > Synchronize > Synchronize). Synchronize selected data? appears. Press Yes and the synchronization begins. Once all selected databases have been synchronized, a confirmation note appears, indicating which databases have been synchronized. Press OK to return to the start screen. 130 Copyright 2003 Nokia 17 Fun and games GAME RULES Challenge yourself or a friend to one of the four fun games in your phone. In Air Glide, you try to land the glider in the zone. You must avoid running into birds because they will destroy the glider. In Bowling, you try to score as many points as possible. Hit strikes and spares as you go for glory and monitor your progress on the high score chart. In Backgammon, you can play one of the worlds most popular and enduring games. Use a doubling cube which allows you to successively double the points at stake over a game while you play. In Sky Diver, your goal is to score as many points as you can by skydiving through target rings and parachuting into the landing area of the jump zone. Warning: Your phone must be switched on to use this function. Do not switch on the phone when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. Start a new game 1 2 3 Press Menu 7-1 (Games > Select game). Scroll to the desired game, press Options, Press Open, then press Select. Opening application appears. After a brief pause, a list of options appears. Scroll to New game and press Select. 4 Adjust game settings 1 2 To adjust sound, lights or vibra, press Menu 7-4 (Games > Settings). Scroll to the desired setting and press Select. The following settings are available for all games:
Option Description Game sounds Used to turn game sound effects On or Off. Game lights Used to turn screen lights On or Off during game play only. Shakes Used to turn game vibrating effects On or Off. Nokia 3595 User Guide 131 Copyright 2003 Nokia Fun and games Game control AIR GLIDE Press 4 to move the glider to the left and press 6 to move it to the right. You can set the game level to either easy or difficult. 1 Press Menu 7-1 (Games > Select game). 2 Scroll to Air Glide, press Options, and press Select. 3 With Open highlighted, press Select. 4 Select Game level, scroll to one of the following levels, and press Select Easy Difficult BOWLING Press 4 to move the ball to the left and press 6 to move the ball to the right. Press 5 to select the speed and spin of the ball and to roll the ball down the lane. BACKGAMMON You can select and move bricks according to die throws. Black bricks are moved clockwise, white bricks counter-clockwise. You can move the cursor by pressing 4 and 6, but it can only be moved to valid points. Press 5 to select and deselect bricks. Press 0 to zoom in on dice. During game play, press the left selection key to access a menu for doubling and statistics. Press the right selection key to end the game. SKY DIVER The onscreen information for Sky Diver shows altitude on the left, wind speed and direction in the center, distance and direction to the landing zone on the right. The default control keys are:
Press 2 to make the sky diver lean forward. Press 8 to make the sky diver lean backward. Press 4 to rotate the sky diver to the left. Press 6 to rotate the sky diver to the right. Press 5 to fire open the parachute. Note: Fire flares the parachute and slows the skydiver down. Too much flaring will cause the skydiver to stall. 132 Copyright 2003 Nokia Press Menu 7-1 (Games > Select game). Scroll to Sky Diver, press Options, and press Select. You can redefine the controls by selecting the keys you want. 1 2 3 With Open highlighted, press Select. 4 With Controls highlighted, press Select 5 Scroll to Define keys and press Select. 6 Select the key you want to assign the up, down, left, right and fire controls. After each key definition, a confirmation note appears. Note: You cannot exit this option until you have define all five controls. Delete games You can delete games from the phone memory to free more memory. Caution: Once you delete a game from the game downloads, you cannot download it back into the Games menu. You can only download it into the Applications menu. 1 2 3 Press Menu 7-1 (Games > Select game). Scroll to the desired game, press Options, Scroll to Delete, then press Select. Delete? appears. Press OK. 4 Game downloads You can connect to game downloads on the Internet by using your WAP browser, if this service is available from your service provider. Check with your service provider for availability and details for use. 1 2 Press Menu 7-2 (Games > Game downlds.) and press Select. Scroll to the bookmark you want to launch, then press Select. Note: When you download a game, if it is not a Nokia supplied or approved game, the game downloads into the Applications menu. The only games you can access from the Games menu are the games that come preloaded with your phone or games downloaded from a Nokia or Nokia approved and/or tested site. Nokia 3595 User Guide 133 Copyright 2003 Nokia Fun and games CUSTOMIZE YOUR PHONE WITH JAVA APPLICATIONS Your Nokia 3595 phone has an Applications menu for downloading and storing Java applications or midlets. The phone software may include midlets specially designed for this phone. Examples of downloadable Java applications include interactive games, animations, sports training calendars, and map applications. Launch an application 1 2 Press Menu 8-1 (Applications > Select app.) If you have more than one application, scroll to the one you want to launch, then press Options. Scroll to Open, then press Select. 3 Tip: If an application uses the whole display area, no selection key names are displayed. Press one of the selection keys to show the options list. Then, select one of the options or press Back to continue with the application. Check available memory Before you download new applications to your Nokia 3595 phone, be sure to check the available memory. 1 Press Menu 8-3 (Applications > Memory). The phone displays the available memory. Press More to display how the memory is being used between phone applications and games. 2 Download an application You can download new Java applications from the mobile Internet. Use the WAP browser to find an appropriate application. Caution: Only install software from sources that offer adequate protection against viruses and other harmful software. Press Menu 8-2 (Applications > App. downloads). Scroll to the application you want to download, then press Select. 1 2 See Sign on to the mobile Internet on page110 for more information about the WAP browser. 134 Copyright 2003 Nokia Choose other application options When viewing the list of applications, press Options to access the choices listed in the following table:
Choice Open Delete Web access What it does Allows you to launch an application. Allows you to delete the application or application set from the phone. An application may require web access to make updates. You can restrict the application from accessing the mobile Internet. Your choices include Ask first, Allowed, and Not allowed. Check version Allows you to check if a new version of the application is available for download from mobile Internet services. Web page Allows you to check on additional information for the application from Internet Mobile Services. Web page is shown only if an Internet address has been provided with the application. Details Allows you to view information about the application, for example, the name, version number, vendor, a brief description, or memory size. Nokia 3595 User Guide 135 Copyright 2003 Nokia Reference information 18 Reference information BATTERIES, CHARGERS, AND ACCESSORIES This section provides information about the phone batteries, accessories, and chargers. Be aware that the information in this section is subject to change as the batteries, chargers, and accessories change. Check the model number of any charger before use with this device. Warning: Use only batteries, chargers and accessories approved by the phone manufacturer for use with this particular phone model. The use of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty applying to the phone, and may be dangerous. For availability of approved accessories, please check with your dealer. Note: For information on how to charge and recharge your battery, refer to Charge the battery on page15. Charging and discharging Your phone is powered by a rechargeable battery. Note that a new battery's full performance is achieved only after two or three complete charge and discharge cycles!
The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times but it will eventually wear out. When the operating time (talk and standby time) is noticeably shorter than normal, it is time to buy a new battery. Use only batteries approved by the phone manufacturer and recharge your battery only with the chargers approved by the manufacturer. Unplug the charger when not in use. Do not leave the battery connected to a charger for longer than a week, since overcharging may shorten its lifetime. If left unused, a fully charged battery will discharge itself over time. Temperature extremes can affect the ability of your battery to charge. Allow it to cool down or warm up first. When the battery is running out of power and your phone only has a few minutes of talk time remaining, a warning tone sounds and the Battery low message appears briefly. When no more talk time is left, a warning tone is sounded and the phone switches itself off. 136 Copyright 2003 Nokia Do not short-circuit the battery. Accidental short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object (coin, clip, and pen) causes a direct connection of the + and -
terminals of the battery (metal strips on the battery), for example, when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the connecting object. Leaving the battery in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in either summer or winter conditions, will reduce the capacity and lifetime of the battery. Always try to keep the battery between 59F and 77F (15C and 25C). A phone with a hot or cold battery may not work temporarily, even when the battery is fully charged. The performance of Li-Ion batteries is particularly limited in temperatures below 32F (0C). The following list provides guidelines that you can follow:
When the operating time (talk and standby time) is noticeably shorter than normal, buy a new battery. Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Never use any charger or battery that is damaged and/or worn out. Dispose of batteries according to local regulations (for example, recycling). Do not dispose of as household waste. When you disconnect the power cord of any accessory, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION This section provides additional safety information. A brief overview of safety can be found in For your safety on page1. Traffic safety Do not use a handheld telephone while driving a vehicle. Always secure the phone in its holder; do not place the phone on the passenger seat or where it can break loose in a collision or sudden stop. Remember road safety always comes first!
Nokia 3595 User Guide 137 Copyright 2003 Nokia Reference information Operating environment Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area and always switch off your phone whenever it is forbidden to use it, or when it may cause interference or danger. Use the phone only in its normal operating positions. Parts of the phone are magnetic. Metallic materials may be attracted to the phone, and persons with a hearing aid should not hold the phone to the ear with the hearing aid. Always secure the phone in its holder, because metallic materials may be attracted by the earpiece. Do not place credit cards or other magnetic storage media near the phone, because information stored on them may be erased. Electronic devices Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from radio frequency (RF) signals. However, certain electronic equipment may not be shielded against the RF signals from your wireless phone. PACEMAKERS Pacemaker manufacturers recommend that a minimum separation of 20 cm (6 inches) be maintained between a handheld wireless phone and a pacemaker to avoid potential interference with the pacemaker. These recommendations are consistent with the independent research by and recommendations of Wireless Technology Research. Persons with pacemakers:
Should always keep the phone more than 20 cm (6 inches) from their pacemaker when the phone is switched on. Should not carry the phone in a breast pocket. Should use the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimize the potential for interference. If you have any reason to suspect that interference is taking place, switch off your phone immediately. HEARING AIDS Some digital wireless phones may interfere with some hearing aids. In the event of such interference, you may want to consult your service provider. 138 Copyright 2003 Nokia Other medical devices Operation of any radio transmitting equipment, including cellular phones, may interfere with the functionality of inadequately protected medical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the medical device to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off your phone in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy. Vehicles RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles (for example, electronic fuel injection systems, electronic antiskid/antilock braking systems, electronic speed control systems, air bag systems). Check with the manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle. You should also consult the manufacturer of any equipment that has been added to your vehicle. POSTED FACILITIES Switch your phone off in any facility where posted notices so require. Potentially explosive atmospheres Switch off your phone when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Users are advised to switch off the phone when at a refuelling point (service station). Users are reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots (fuel storage and distribution areas), chemical plants, or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often but not always clearly marked. They include below deck on boats; chemical transfer or storage facilities;
vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane); areas where the air contains chemicals or particles, such as grain, dust, or metal powders; and any other area where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Nokia 3595 User Guide 139 Copyright 2003 Nokia Reference information Vehicles Only qualified personnel should service the phone or install the phone in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty which may apply to the unit. Check regularly that all wireless phone equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases or explosive materials in the same compartment as the phone, its parts or accessories. For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that an air bag inflates with great force. Do not place objects, including both installed or portable wireless equipment in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If in-vehicle wireless equipment is improperly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result. FCC regulations prohibit using your phone while in the air. Switch off your phone before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless telephones in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the wireless telephone network, and may be illegal. Failure to observe these instructions may lead to suspension or denial of telephone services to the offender, legal action or both. 140 Copyright 2003 Nokia EMERGENCY CALLS Important: This phone, like any wireless phone, operates using radio signals, wireless, and landline networks as well as user-programmed functions. Because of this, connections in all conditions cannot be guaranteed. Therefore you should never rely solely upon any wireless phone for essential communications (for example, medical emergencies). To make an emergency call:
1 2 3 4 If the phone is not on, switch it on. Check for adequate signal strength Some networks may require that a valid SIM card is properly inserted in the phone. Press the End key as many times as needed (for example, to exit a call, to exit a menu, etc.) to clear the display and ready the phone for calls. Key in the emergency number for your present location (for example, 911 or other official emergency number). Emergency numbers vary by location. Press the Talk key. If certain features are in use, you may first need to turn those features off before you can make an emergency call. Consult this user guide and your local cellular service provider. When making an emergency call, remember to give all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Remember that your wireless phone may be the only means of communication at the scene of an accidentdo not end the call until given permission to do so. Nokia 3595 User Guide 141 Copyright 2003 Nokia Reference information CERTIFICATION INFORMATION (SAR) THIS MODEL PHONE MEETS THE GOVERNMENT'S REQUIREMENTS FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES. Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the emission limits for exposure to radio frequency
(RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S. Government. These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines and establish permitted levels of RF energy for the general population. The guidelines are based on standards that were developed by independent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The standards include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure standard for wireless mobile phones employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6W/kg.* Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions accepted by the FCC with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR level of the phone while operating can be well below the maximum value. This is because the phone is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a wireless base station antenna, the lower the power output. Before a phone model is available for sale to the public, it must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not exceed the limit established by the government-adopted requirement for safe exposure. The tests are performed in positions and locations (for example, at the ear and worn on the body) as required by the FCC for each model. The highest SAR value for this model phone as reported to the FCC when tested for use at the ear is 1.08 W/kg, and when worn on the body, as described in this user guide, is 0.73 W/kg. (Body-worn measurements differ among phone models, depending upon available accessories and FCC requirements). While there may be differences between the SAR levels of various phones and at various positions, they all meet the government requirement. The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this model phone with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines. SAR information on this model phone is on file with the FCC and can be found under the Display Grant section of http://www.fcc.gov/oet/fccid after searching on FCC ID GMLNPM-10. 142 Copyright 2003 Nokia For body worn operation, this phone has been tested and meets the FCC RF exposure guidelines for use with an accessory that contains no metal and that positions the handset a minimum of 5/8 inch (1.5 cm) from the body. Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines. If you do not use a body-worn accessory and are not holding the phone at the ear, position the handset a minimum of 5/8 inch (1.5 cm) from your body when the phone is switched on.
*In the United States and Canada, the SAR limit for mobile phones used by the public is 1.6 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over one gram of tissue. The standard incorporates a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting requirements and the network band. For SAR information in other regions please look under product information at www.nokia.com/us. Nokia 3595 User Guide 143 Copyright 2003 Nokia Reference information CARE AND MAINTENANCE Your phone is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The suggestions below will help you to fulfill any warranty obligations and to enjoy this product for many years:
Keep the phone and all its parts and accessories out of the reach of small children. Keep the phone dry. Precipitation, humidity, and all types of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. Do not use or store the phone in dusty, dirty areas. Its moving parts can be damaged. Do not store the phone in hot areas. High temperatures can shorten the life of electronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics. Do not store the phone in cold areas. When it warms up (to its normal temperature), moisture can form inside and may damage electronic circuit boards. Do not attempt to open the phone, except as explained in this guide. Non-
expert handling may damage it. Do not drop, knock, or shake the phone. Rough handling can break internal circuit boards. Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong detergents to clean the phone. Do not paint the phone. Paint can clog the moving parts and prevent proper operation. Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modifications, or attachments could damage the phone and may violate regulations governing radio devices. All of the above suggestions apply equally to your phone, battery, charger or any accessory. If any of them are not working properly, take them to your nearest qualified service facility. The personnel there will assist you, and if necessary, arrange for service. 144 Copyright 2003 Nokia ACCESSORIES If you want to enhance your phones functionality, a range of accessories is available for you. You can select any of these items to help accommodate your specific communication needs. For availability of these and other accessories, contact your dealer. A FEW PRACTICAL RULES FOR ACCESSORY OPERATION When you disconnect the power cord of any accessory, grasp and pull the plug, Keep all accessories out of reach of small children. not the cord. Check regularly that any vehicle-installed accessories are mounted and are operating properly. Installation of any complex car accessories must be made by qualified personnel only. Use only batteries, chargers, and accessories that have been approved by the phone manufacturer. The use of any other types could invalidate any approval or warranty applying to the phone, and could be dangerous. Refer to Batteries, chargers, and accessories on page136 for important battery usage information. BATTERY INFORMATION This section provides information about the phones battery. Be aware that the information in this section is subject to change. Note: The phone uses a lithium ion (Li-Ion) battery. Dispose of used batteries in accordance with any local regulations. Do not dispose of as household waste. The tables shown in this section provide information about the batteries that are available for your phone, charging times with the Rapid Travel Charger (ACP-8), the Standard Travel Charger (ACP-7), talk times, and standby times. Consult your service provider for more information. Charging times The charging times listed below are approximate. Battery option ACP-7 Charger ACP-8 Charger ACP-12 Charger BLC-2 Li-Ion Battery 950 mAh 3.5 h 2 h 1.5 h Nokia 3595 User Guide 145 Copyright 2003 Nokia Reference information Standby and talk times The times shown in the following table are estimates only and represent a range for either standby or talk times (not a combination of both). The operation time of the battery depends on conditions such as:
Transmitting power level Signal (distance between the phone and the base station) Network parameters defined by the operator Phone use (WAP, games, SMS, Xpress-on active covers) Charging procedure used Battery option BLC-2 Li-Ion Battery 1000 mAh Talk time up to 5.5 h Standby time up to 10 d CHARGERS AND OTHER ACCESSORIES This section provides information about phone chargers and accessories. Be aware that the information in this section is subject to change as the chargers and accessories change. The chargers and accessories that are described in this section are available for your phone. Contact your dealer for details. Note: When a charger is not in use, disconnect it from the power source. Do not leave the battery connected to a charger for longer than a week, since prolonged maintenance charging of the battery could shorten its life span. If left unused, a fully charged battery will discharge itself over time. For information about Accessibility solutions, including accessories, see page9. Stylish carrying cases that protect your 3595 phone are available for purchase and can be located at www.nokia.com/us. 146 Copyright 2003 Nokia Standard Travel Charger (ACP-7) The Standard Travel Charger is a lightweight (187 g) and durable AC charger. To use the Standard Travel Charger, plug it into a standard 120-V wall outlet and connect the lead from the charger to the base of your phone. This charger can also be used with the optional Compact Desktop Charging Stand (DCV-10). Note: If the battery is completely empty, you cannot use the phone until it has enough charge to operate. Rapid Travel Charger (ACP-8) The Rapid Travel Charger is a lightweight (100 g) and durable AC charger. Calls can be made during charging, even with a fully discharged battery. To use the Rapid Travel Charger (ACP-8), plug it into a standard 120- or 220-Vac wall outlet, and connect the lead from the charger to the base of your phone. The charger can also be used together with the optional Compact Desktop Charging Stand (DCV-10). Approximate charging times for discharged batteries are shown in Charging times on page145. Travel Charger (ACP-12) The Travel Charger is a small, lightweight, high power AC-switcher charger, with cable management. To use the Travel Charger, plug it into a standard 120- V wall outlet and connect the lead from the charger to the base of your phone. (Voltages for other countries are also available.) This charger can also be used with the optional Compact Desktop Charging Stand (DCV-10). Nokia 3595 User Guide 147 Copyright 2003 Nokia Reference information Mobile Charger (LCH-9) You can charge your phones battery from your vehicle battery by using the Mobile Charger (LCH-9). Calls are possible during charging. A green light indicates that the charger is ready for charging. The battery charging times are the same as those for the Rapid Travel Charger (ACP-8). The input voltage range is from 11-24 Vdc, negative grounding. Avoid prolonged charging with the Mobile Charger (LCH-9) when the car engine is not running; this could cause your car battery to drain. Note also, that in some cars, the cigarette lighter plug is not provided with electricity if the ignition is not switched on. Mobile Charger (LCH-12) You can charge your phones battery from your vehicle battery by using the Mobile Charger
(LCH-12). Calls are possible during charging. A green light indicates that the charger is ready for charging. The battery charging times are the same as those for the Rapid Travel Charger (ACP-8). The input voltage range is from 10.8-32 Vdc, negative grounding. Avoid prolonged charging with the Mobile Charger (LCH-12) when the car engine is not running; this could cause your car battery to drain. Note also, that in some cars, the cigarette lighter plug is not provided with electricity if the ignition is not switched on. Compact Desktop Charging Stand (DCV-10) Used together with the Standard Travel Charger
(ACP-7), the Rapid Travel Charger (ACP-8), or the Travel Charger (ACP-12), the Compact Desktop Charging Stand is a stylish choice when you need your phone close at hand, always ready for calls. This charging stand allows you to charge your phones battery in an upright, obtainable position on your desk. 148 Copyright 2003 Nokia Battery Charging Stand (DDC-1) This Battery Charging Stand provides the possibility to charge a spare battery and thus have a full power source available whenever needed. It is compatible with both BLC-1 and BLC-2 batteries. This charging stand can be used with the Standard Charger (ACP-7), the Rapid Travel Charger (ACP-8) and the Travel Charger (ACP-12). Headset Kit (HDC-5) Small and lightweight, the headset kit allows easy and convenient handsfree operation. The headset has a foam earpiece cover for a comfortable fit and has a clip to hold it firmly in place. This headsets 4-wire 2.5 mm plug fits directly into the bottom of the phone, see Set up your headset on page16 for more details. A remote control button located in the microphone makes the headset convenient to use while answering or receiving calls. You can use the headset with your phones voice tag feature, see Make a call using voice recognition on page63 for more information. Nokia 3595 User Guide 149 Copyright 2003 Nokia Reference information Headset Kit (HDE-2) Small and lightweight, the headset kit allows easy and convenient handsfree operation. This headset comes with a clip for a comfortable fit. This headsets 4-wire 2.5 mm plug fits directly into the bottom of your phone. See Set up your headset on page16 for more details. Boom Headset (HDB-5) Small and lightweight, the Boom Headset fits over the ear. This headset has excellent audio quality with the microphone and speaker integrated into the unit. The Boom Headset provides basic handsfree functionality with an answer/end button. See Set up your headset on page16 for more details. 150 Copyright 2003 Nokia Retractable Headset Kit
(HDC-10) Compact and functional, this headset provides you with convenient, portable, handsfree operation. The retractable mechanism and remote control provide easy operation. See Set up your headset on page16 for more details. Express Car Kit
(CARK-125) This car kit provides charging and handsfree functionality. With excellent audio quality, the car kit is easy to use and is compatible with 12 V systems. The Express Car Kit Includes a holder and plug-in, handsfree, external microphone. Nokia 3595 User Guide 151 Copyright 2003 Nokia Reference information Full Car Kit
(CARK-134) The Full Car Kit (CARK-134) offers a convenient handsfree option, automatic charging facility, transmission capacity with external antenna connection and car radio mute. The Full Car Kit contains the following:
MKU-1 Mounting Plate HHS-9 Swivel Mount HFU-5 Junction Box HFM-8 Handsfree Microphone HFS-12 External Handsfree Speaker PCH-4J Power Cable Important: Installation should be done by qualified personnel only to secure safe and efficient equipment and wiring. Please note that the terms of the warranty require that the car kit be installed by an experienced installation facility. An end user should never attempt to install the car kit without professional assistance as the installation requires special tools and knowledge. Electronic fuel injection systems, electronic cruise control systems, and other electronic systems can malfunction due to the lack of protection from radio signals. Please check with your local retail store or your service provider for professional installation facilities in your area. There is no optional privacy handset for the Full Car Kit. Antenna considerations: Please contact your local dealer for the type of external antenna that will best support the system and terrain in your area. 152 Copyright 2003 Nokia 19 Technical information Weight Size Transmitting power Operating voltage Networks Frequency band Memory locations 80 g 107 g with BLC-2 battery Length 119 mm (4.68 in.) Width 50 mm (1.97 in.) Depth 23 mm (0.90 in.) GSM 850 2 W GSM 1900 1 W 3.6 V DC nominal 3.6 V DC for car kit GSM 850 MHz/1900 MHz GSM 850 824.2 to 848.8 MHz (TX) 869.2 to 893.8 MHz (RX) GSM 1900 1850.2 to 1909.8 MHz (TX) 1930.2 to 1989.8 MHz (RX) Up to 500 memory locations in phone. Each location holds up to 5 numbers and 3 text fields (dynamic memory). Check with your SIM card provider or carrier for information about SIM card memory capacity. Nokia 3595 User Guide 153 Copyright 2003 Nokia Troubleshooting 20 Troubleshooting This section provides a table that lists some of the most commonly encountered problems and provides possible causes and solutions. Problem Possible cause Possible solution My phone isnt charging. My phone isnt making/
answering calls. The charger and the phone are not properly connected. Securely connect the charger to the phone. The charger is not properly plugged in. Make sure that the charger is plugged in correctly. The battery is not charged. Charge the battery. The signal strength is poor. If you are indoors, move toward a window. You dont have voice mail service. Call your wireless service provider. You have not set up your voice mailbox with your service provider. Call your wireless service provider. I cant listen to my voice messages. You have not saved your voice mail number in your phone. Refer to Use voice features on page61. The voice mail number you have saved is incorrect. Call your wireless service provider. You have forgotten your password or are entering it incorrectly. Call your wireless service provider. 154 Copyright 2003 Nokia 21 Nokia One-Year Limited Warranty Nokia Inc. (Nokia) warrants that this cellular phone (Product) is free from defects in material and workmanship that result in Product failure during normal usage, according to the following terms and conditions:
1 The limited warranty for the Product extends for ONE (1) year beginning on the date of the purchase of the Product. This one year period is extended by each whole day that the Product is out of your possession for repair under this warranty. The limited warranty extends only to the original purchaser (Consumer) of the Product and is not assignable or transferable to any subsequent purchaser/
end- user. The limited warranty extends only to Consumers who purchase the Product in the United States of America. During the limited warranty period, Nokia will repair, or replace, at Nokias sole option, any defective parts, or any parts that will not properly operate for their intended use with new or refurbished replacement items if such repair or replacement is needed because of product malfunction or failure during normal usage. No charge will be made to the Consumer for any such parts. Nokia will also pay for the labor charges incurred by Nokia in repairing or replacing the defective parts. The limited warranty does not cover defects in appearance, cosmetic, decorative or structural items, including framing, and any non-
operative parts. Nokias limit of liability under the limited warranty shall be the actual cash value of the Product at the time the Consumer returns the Product for repair, determined by the price paid by the Consumer for the Product less a reasonable amount for usage. Nokia shall not be liable for any other losses or damages. These remedies are the Consumers exclusive remedies for breach of warranty. Upon request from Nokia, the Consumer must prove the date of the original purchase of the Product by a dated bill of sale or dated itemized receipt. The Consumer shall bear the cost of shipping the Product to Nokia in Melbourne, Florida. Nokia shall bear the cost of shipping the Product back to the Consumer after the completion of service under this limited warranty. 2 3 4 5 6 Nokia 3595 User Guide 155 Copyright 2003 Nokia Nokia One-Year Limited Warranty 7 8 The Consumer shall have no coverage or benefits under this limited warranty if any of the following conditions are applicable:
a) The Product has been subjected to abnormal use, abnormal conditions, improper storage, exposure to moisture or dampness, unauthorized modifications, unauthorized connections, unauthorized repair, misuse, neglect, abuse, accident, alteration, improper installation, or other acts which are not the fault of Nokia, including damage caused by shipping. The Product has been damaged from external causes such as collision with an object, or from fire, flooding, sand, dirt, windstorm, lightning, earthquake or damage from exposure to weather conditions, an Act of God, or battery leakage, theft, blown fuse, or improper use of any electrical source, damage caused by computer or internet viruses, bugs, worms, Trojan Horses, cancelbots or damage caused by the connection to other products not recommended for interconnection by Nokia. b) c) Nokia was not advised in writing by the Consumer of the alleged defect d) e) or malfunction of the Product within fourteen (14) days after the expiration of the applicable limited warranty period. The Product serial number plate or the accessory data code has been removed, defaced or altered. The defect or damage was caused by the defective function of the cellular system or by inadequate signal reception by the external antenna, or viruses or other software problems introduced into the Product. Nokia does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of the Product. If a problem develops during the limited warranty period, the Consumer shall take the following step-by-step procedure:
a) The Consumer shall return the Product to the place of purchase for repair or replacement processing. If a is not convenient because of distance (more than 50 miles) or for other good cause, the Consumer shall ship the Product prepaid and insured to:
Nokia Inc., Attn: Repair Department 795 West Nasa Blvd. Melbourne, FL 32901 The Consumer shall include a return address, daytime phone number and/
or fax number, complete description of the problem, proof of purchase and service agreement (if applicable). Expenses related to removing the Product from an installation are not covered under this limited warranty. b) c) 156 Copyright 2003 Nokia d) The Consumer will be billed for any parts or labor charges not covered by this limited warranty. The Consumer will be responsible for any expenses related to reinstallation of the Product. e) Nokia will repair the Product under the limited warranty within 30 days after receipt of the Product. If Nokia cannot perform repairs covered under this limited warranty within 30 days, or after a reasonable number of attempts to repair the same defect, Nokia at its option, will provide a replacement Product or refund the purchase price of the Product less a reasonable amount for usage. In some states the Consumer may have the right to a loaner if the repair of the Product takes more than ten (10) days. Please contact the Customer Service Center at Nokia at the telephone number listed at the end of this warranty if you need a loaner and the repair of the Product has taken or is estimated to take more than ten (10) days. If the Product is returned during the limited warranty period, but the problem with the Product is not covered under the terms and conditions of this limited warranty, the Consumer will be notified and given an estimate of the charges the Consumer must pay to have the Product repaired, with all shipping charges billed to the Consumer. If the estimate is refused, the Product will be returned freight collect. If the Product is returned after the expiration of the limited warranty period, Nokias normal service policies shall apply and the Consumer will be responsible for all shipping charges. f) 9 You (the consumer) understand that the product may consist of refurbished equipment that contains used components, some of which have been reprocessed. The used components comply with Product performance and reliability specifications. Nokia 3595 User Guide 157 Copyright 2003 Nokia Nokia One-Year Limited Warranty 10 ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE, SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE FOREGOING LIMITED WRITTEN WARRANTY. OTHERWISE, THE FOREGOING LIMITED WARRANTY IS THE CONSUMERS SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. NOKIA SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF ANTICIPATED BENEFITS OR PROFITS, LOSS OF SAVINGS OR REVENUE, LOSS OF DATA, PUNITIVE DAMAGES, LOSS OF USE OF THE PRODUCT OR ANY ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT, COST OF CAPITAL, COST OF ANY SUBSTITUTE EQUIPMENT OR FACILITIES, DOWNTIME, THE CLAIMS OF ANY THIRD PARTIES, INCLUDING CUSTOMERS, AND INJURY TO PROPERTY, RESULTING FROM THE PURCHASE OR USE OF THE PRODUCT OR ARISING FROM BREACH OF THE WARRANTY, BREACH OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT TORT, OR ANY OTHER LEGAL OR EQUITABLE THEORY, EVEN IF NOKIA KNEW OF THE LIKELIHOOD OF SUCH DAMAGES. NOKIA SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DELAY IN RENDERING SERVICE UNDER THE LIMITED WARRANTY, OR LOSS OF USE DURING THE PERIOD THAT THE PRODUCT IS BEING REPAIRED. 11 Some states do not allow limitation of how long an implied warranty lasts, so the one year warranty limitation may not apply to you (the Consumer). Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental and consequential damages, so certain of the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you (the Consumer). This limited warranty gives the Consumer specific legal rights and the Consumer may also have other rights which vary from state to state. 12 Nokia neither assumes nor authorizes any authorized service center or any other person or entity to assume for it any other obligation or liability beyond that which is expressly provided for in this limited warranty including the provider or seller of any extended warranty or service agreement. 13 This is the entire warranty between the Nokia and the Consumer, and supersedes all prior and contemporaneous agreements or understandings, oral or written, relating to the Product, and no representation, promise or condition not contained herein shall modify these terms. 14 This limited warranty allocates the risk of failure of the Product between the Consumer and Nokia. The allocation is recognized by the Consumer and is reflected in the purchase price. 15 Any action or lawsuit for breach of warranty must be commenced within eighteen (18) months following purchase of the Product. 158 Copyright 2003 Nokia 16 Questions concerning this limited warranty may be directed to:
Nokia Inc. Attn: Customer Service 7725 Woodland Center Blvd., Ste. 150 Tampa, FL 33614 Telephone: 1-888-NOKIA-2U (1-888-665-4228) Facsimile: (813) 287-6612 TTY/TDD Users Only: 1-800-24-NOKIA (1-800-246-6542) 17 The limited warranty period for Nokia supplied attachments and accessories is specifically defined within their own warranty cards and packaging. Nokia 3595 User Guide 159 Copyright 2003 Nokia Nokia One-Year Limited Warranty NOTES 160 Copyright 2003 Nokia Appendix A Message from the CTIA
(Cellular Telecommunications
& Internet Association) to all users of mobile phones. 2001 Cellular Telecommunications & Internet Association. All Rights Reserved.1250 Connecticut Avenue, NW Suite 800, Washington, DC 20036. Phone: (202) 785-0081 Nokia 3595 User Guide 161 Copyright 2003 Nokia Safety is the most important call you will ever make. A Guide to Safe and Responsible Wireless Phone Use Tens of millions of people in the U.S. today take advantage of the unique combination of convenience, safety and value delivered by the wireless telephone. Quite simply, the wireless phone gives people the powerful ability to communicate by voice--almost anywhere, anytime--with the boss, with a client, with the kids, with emergency personnel or even with the police. Each year, Americans make billions of calls from their wireless phones, and the numbers are rapidly growing. But an important responsibility accompanies those benefits, one that every wireless phone user must uphold. When driving a car, driving is your first responsibility. A wireless phone can be an invaluable tool, but good judgment must be exercised at all times while driving a motor vehicle--whether on the phone or not. The basic lessons are ones we all learned as teenagers. Driving requires alertness, caution and courtesy. It requires a heavy dose of basic common sense---keep your head up, keep your eyes on the road, check your mirrors frequently and watch out for other drivers. It requires obeying all traffic signs and signals and staying within the speed limit. It means using seatbelts and requiring other passengers to do the same. But with wireless phone use, driving safely means a little more. This brochure is a call to wireless phone users everywhere to make safety their first priority when behind the wheel of a car. Wireless telecommunications is keeping us in touch, simplifying our lives, protecting us in emergencies and providing opportunities to help others in need. When it comes to the use of wireless phones, safety is your most important call. Wireless Phone "Safety Tips"
Below are safety tips to follow while driving and using a wireless phone which should be easy to remember. 1 Get to know your wireless phone and its features such as speed dial and redial. Carefully read your instruction manual and learn to take advantage of valuable features most phones offer, including automatic redial and memory. Also, work to memorize the phone keypad so you can use the speed dial function without taking your attention off the road. 2 When available, use a hands free device. A number of hands free wireless phone accessories are readily available today. Whether you choose an installed mounted device for your wireless phone or a speaker phone accessory, take advantage of these devices if available to you. 3 Position your wireless phone within easy reach. Make sure you place your wireless phone within easy reach and where you can grab it without removing your eyes from the road. If you get an incoming call at an inconvenient time, if possible, let your voice mail answer it for you. 4 Suspend conversations during hazardous driving conditions or situations. Let the person you are speaking with know you are driving; if necessary, suspend the call in heavy traffic or hazardous weather conditions. Rain, sleet, snow and ice can be hazardous, but so is heavy traffic. As a driver, your first responsibility is to pay attention to the road. 162 Copyright 2003 Nokia 5 Do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving. If you are reading an address book or business card, or writing a "to do" list while driving a car, you are not watching where you are going. Its common sense. Dont get caught in a dangerous situation because you are reading or writing and not paying attention to the road or nearby vehicles. 6 Dial sensibly and assess the traffic; if possible, place calls when you are not moving or before pulling into traffic. Try to plan your calls before you begin your trip or attempt to coincide your calls with times you may be stopped at a stop sign, red light or otherwise stationary. But if you need to dial while driving, follow this simple tip--dial only a few numbers, check the road and your mirrors, then continue. 7 Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations that may be distracting. Stressful or emotional conversations and driving do not mix--they are distracting and even dangerous when you are behind the wheel of a car. Make people you are talking with aware you are driving and if necessary, suspend conversations which have the potential to divert your attention from the road. 8 Use your wireless phone to call for help. Your wireless phone is one of the greatest tools you can own to protect yourself and your family in dangerous situations--
with your phone at your side, help is only three numbers away. Dial 9-1-1 or other local emergency number in the case of fire, traffic accident, road hazard or medical emergency. Remember, it is a free call on your wireless phone!
9 Use your wireless phone to help others in emergencies. Your wireless phone provides you a perfect opportunity to be a "Good Samaritan" in your community. If you see an auto accident, crime in progress or other serious emergency where lives are in danger, call 9-1-1 or other local emergency number, as you would want others to do for you. 10 Call roadside assistance or a special wireless non-emergency assistance number when necessary. Certain situations you encounter while driving may require attention, but are not urgent enough to merit a call for emergency services. But you still can use your wireless phone to lend a hand. If you see a broken-down vehicle posing no serious hazard, a broken traffic signal, a minor traffic accident where no one appears injured or a vehicle you know to be stolen, call roadside assistance or other special non-emergency wireless number. Careless, distracted individuals and people driving irresponsibly represent a hazard to everyone on the road. Since 1984, the Cellular Telecommunications Industry Association and the wireless industry have conducted educational outreach to inform wireless phone users of their responsibilities as safe drivers and good citizens. As we approach a new century, more and more of us will take advantage of the benefits of wireless telephones. And, as we take to the roads, we all have a responsibility to drive safely. Nokia 3595 User Guide 163 Copyright 2003 Nokia The wireless industry reminds you to use your phone safely when driving. For more information, please call 1-888-901-SAFE. For updates: http://www.wow-com.com/consumer/issues/driving/
articles.cfm?ID=85 2001 Cellular Telecommunications & Internet Association. All Rights Reserved.1250 Connecticut Avenue, NW Suite 800, Washington, DC 20036. Phone: (202) 785-0081 164 Copyright 2003 Nokia Appendix B Message from the FDA
(U.S. Food and Drug Administration) to all users of mobile phones. July 18, 2001 ......... For updates: http://www.fda.gov/cdrh/phones Nokia 3595 User Guide 165 Copyright 2003 Nokia Consumer Update on Wireless Phones U.S. Food and Drug Administration 1. Do wireless phones pose a health hazard?
The available scientific evidence does not show that any health problems are associated with using wireless phones. There is no proof, however, that wireless phones are absolutely safe. Wireless phones emit low levels of radiofrequency energy (RF) in the microwave range while being used. They also emit very low levels of RF when in the stand-by mode. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects (by heating tissue), exposure to low level RF that does not produce heating effects causes no known adverse health effects. Many studies of low level RF exposures have not found any biological effects. Some studies have suggested that some biological effects may occur, but such findings have not been confirmed by additional research. In some cases, other researchers have had difficulty in reproducing those studies, or in determining the reasons for inconsistent results. 2. What is FDA's role concerning the safety of wireless phones?
Under the law, FDA does not review the safety of radiation-emitting consumer products such as wireless phones before they can be sold, as it does with new drugs or medical devices. However, the agency has authority to take action if wireless phones are shown to emit radiofrequency energy (RF) at a level that is hazardous to the user. In such a case, FDA could require the manufacturers of wireless phones to notify users of the health hazard and to repair, replace or recall the phones so that the hazard no longer exists. Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA regulatory actions, FDA has urged the wireless phone industry to take a number of steps, including the following:
Support needed research into possible biological effects of RF of the type emitted by wireless phones;
Design wireless phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to the user that is not necessary for device function; and Cooperate in providing users of wireless phones with the best possible information on possible effects of wireless phone use on human health. National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health Environmental Protection Agency Federal Communications Commission Occupational Safety and Health Administration National Telecommunications and Information Administration FDA belongs to an interagency working group of the federal agencies that have responsibility for different aspects of RF safety to ensure coordinated efforts at the federal level. The following agencies belong to this working group:
The National Institutes of Health participates in some interagency working group activities, as well. FDA shares regulatory responsibilities for wireless phones with the Federal Communications Commission (FCC). All phones that are sold in the United States must comply with FCC safety guidelines that limit RF exposure. FCC relies on FDA and other health agencies for safety questions about wireless phones. FCC also regulates the base stations that the wireless phone networks rely upon. While these base stations operate at higher power than do the wireless phones themselves, the RF exposures that people get from these base stations are typically thousands of times lower than those they can get from wireless phones. Base stations are thus not the subject of the safety questions discussed in this document. 166 Copyright 2003 Nokia 3. What kinds of phones are the subject of this update?
The term wireless phone refers here to hand-held wireless phones with built-in antennas, often called cell mobile or PCS phones. These types of wireless phones can expose the user to measurable radiofrequency energy (RF) because of the short distance between the phone and the users head. These RF exposures are limited by Federal Communications Commission safety guidelines that were developed with the advice of FDA and other federal health and safety agencies. When the phone is located at greater distances from the user, the exposure to RF is drastically lower because a person's RF exposure decreases rapidly with increasing distance from the source. The so-called cordless phones; which have a base unit connected to the telephone wiring in a house, typically operate at far lower power levels, and thus produce RF exposures far below the FCC safety limits. 4. What are the results of the research done already?
The research done thus far has produced conflicting results, and many studies have suffered from flaws in their research methods. Animal experiments investigating the effects of radiofrequency energy (RF) exposures characteristic of wireless phones have yielded conflicting results that often cannot be repeated in other laboratories. A few animal studies, however, have suggested that low levels of RF could accelerate the development of cancer in laboratory animals. However, many of the studies that showed increased tumor development used animals that had been genetically engineered or treated with cancer-causing chemicals so as to be pre-
disposed to develop cancer in the absence of RF exposure. Other studies exposed the animals to RF for up to 22 hours per day. These conditions are not similar to the conditions under which people use wireless phones, so we dont know with certainty what the results of such studies mean for human health. Three large epidemiology studies have been published since December 2000. Between them, the studies investigated any possible association between the use of wireless phones and primary brain cancer, glioma, meningioma, or acoustic neuroma, tumors of the brain or salivary gland, leukemia, or other cancers. None of the studies demonstrated the existence of any harmful health effects from wireless phone RF exposures. However, none of the studies can answer questions about long-term exposures, since the average period of phone use in these studies was around three years. 5.What research is needed to decide whether RF exposure from wireless phones poses a health risk?
A combination of laboratory studies and epidemiological studies of people actually using wireless phones would provide some of the data that are needed. Lifetime animal exposure studies could be completed in a few years. However, very large numbers of animals would be needed to provide reliable proof of a cancer promoting effect if one exists. Epidemiological studies can provide data that is directly applicable to human populations, but 10 or more years follow-up may be needed to provide answers about some health effects, such as cancer. This is because the interval between the time of exposure to a cancer-causing agent and the time tumors develop - if they do - may be many, many years. The interpretation of epidemiological studies is hampered by difficulties in measuring actual RF exposure during day-to-day use of wireless phones. Many factors affect this measurement, such as the angle at which the phone is held, or which model of phone is used. Nokia 3595 User Guide 167 Copyright 2003 Nokia 6. What is FDA doing to find out more about the possible health effects of wireless phone RF?
FDA is working with the U.S. National Toxicology Program and with groups of investigators around the world to ensure that high priority animal studies are conducted to address important questions about the effects of exposure to radiofrequency energy (RF). FDA has been a leading participant in the World Health Organization International Electromagnetic Fields (EMF) Project since its inception in 1996. An influential result of this work has been the development of a detailed agenda of research needs that has driven the establishment of new research programs around the world. The Project has also helped develop a series of public information documents on EMF issues. FDA and the Cellular Telecommunications & Internet Association (CTIA) have a formal Cooperative Research and Development Agreement (CRADA) to do research on wireless phone safety. FDA provides the scientific oversight, obtaining input from experts in government, industry, and academic organizations. CTIA-funded research is conducted through contracts to independent investigators. The initial research will include both laboratory studies and studies of wireless phone users. The CRADA will also include a broad assessment of additional research needs in the context of the latest research developments around the world. 7. How can I find out how much radiofrequency energy exposure I can get by using my wireless phone?
All phones sold in the United States must comply with Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) guidelines that limit radiofrequency energy (RF) exposures. FCC established these guidelines in consultation with FDA and the other federal health and safety agencies. The FCC limit for RF exposure from wireless telephones is set at a Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) of 1.6 watts per kilogram (1.6 W/kg). The FCC limit is consistent with the safety standards developed by the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineering (IEEE) and the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement. The exposure limit takes into consideration the bodys ability to remove heat from the tissues that absorb energy from the wireless phone and is set well below levels known to have effects. Manufacturers of wireless phones must report the RF exposure level for each model of phone to the FCC. The FCC website (http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety) gives directions for locating the FCC identification number on your phone so you can find your phones RF exposure level in the online listing. 8. What has FDA done to measure the radiofrequency energy coming from wireless phones?
The Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) is developing a technical standard for measuring the radiofrequency energy (RF) exposure from wireless phones and other wireless handsets with the participation and leadership of FDA scientists and engineers. The standard, Recommended Practice for Determining the Spatial-Peak Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) in the Human Body Due to Wireless Communications Devices: Experimental Techniques, sets forth the first consistent test methodology for measuring the rate at which RF is deposited in the heads of wireless phone users. The test method uses a tissue-simulating model of the human head. Standardized SAR test methodology is expected to greatly improve the consistency of measurements made at different laboratories on the same phone. SAR is the measurement of the amount of energy absorbed in tissue, either by the whole body or a small part of the body. It is measured in watts/kg (or milliwatts/g) of matter. This measurement is used to determine whether a wireless phone complies with safety guidelines. 168 Copyright 2003 Nokia 9. What steps can I take to reduce my exposure to radiofrequency energy from my wireless phone?
If there is a risk from these products--and at this point we do not know that there is--it is probably very small. But if you are concerned about avoiding even potential risks, you can take a few simple steps to minimize your exposure to radiofrequency energy (RF). Since time is a key factor in how much exposure a person receives, reducing the amount of time spent using a wireless phone will reduce RF exposure. If you must conduct extended conversations by wireless phone every day, you could place more distance between your body and the source of the RF, since the exposure level drops off dramatically with distance. For example, you could use a headset and carry the wireless phone away from your body or use a wireless phone connected to a remote antenna. Again, the scientific data do not demonstrate that wireless phones are harmful. But if you are concerned about the RF exposure from these products, you can use measures like those described above to reduce your RF exposure from wireless phone use. 10. What about children using wireless phones?
The scientific evidence does not show a danger to users of wireless phones, including children and teenagers. If you want to take steps to lower exposure to radiofrequency energy (RF), the measures described above would apply to children and teenagers using wireless phones. Reducing the time of wireless phone use and increasing the distance between the user and the RF source will reduce RF exposure.Some groups sponsored by other national governments have advised that children be discouraged from using wireless phones at all. For example, the government in the United Kingdom distributed leaflets containing such a recommendation in December 2000. They noted that no evidence exists that using a wireless phone causes brain tumors or other ill effects. Their recommendation to limit wireless phone use by children was strictly precautionary; it was not based on scientific evidence that any health hazard exists. 11. What about wireless phone interference with medical equipment?
Radiofrequency energy (RF) from wireless phones can interact with some electronic devices. For this reason, FDA helped develop a detailed test method to measure electromagnetic interference
(EMI) of implanted cardiac pacemakers and defibrillators from wireless telephones. This test method is now part of a standard sponsored by the Association for the Advancement of Medical instrumentation (AAMI). The final draft, a joint effort by FDA, medical device manufacturers, and many other groups, was completed in late 2000. This standard will allow manufacturers to ensure that cardiac pacemakers and defibrillators are safe from wireless phone EMI. FDA has tested hearing aids for interference from handheld wireless phones and helped develop a voluntary standard sponsored by the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). This standard specifies test methods and performance requirements for hearing aids and wireless phones so that no interference occurs when a person uses a compatible phone and a accompanied hearing aid at the same time. This standard was approved by the IEEE in 2000. FDA continues to monitor the use of wireless phones for possible interactions with other medical devices. Should harmful interference be found to occur, FDA will conduct testing to assess the interference and work to resolve the problem. Nokia 3595 User Guide 169 Copyright 2003 Nokia 12. Where can I find additional information?
For additional information, please refer to the following resources:
FDA web page on wireless phones http://www.fda.gov/cdrh/phones/index.html Federal Communications Commission (FCC) RF Safety Program http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection http://www.icnirp.de World Health Organization (WHO) International EMF Project http://www.who.int/emf National Radiological Protection Board (UK) http://www.nrpb.org.uk/
July 18, 2001For updates: http://www.fda.gov/cdrh/phones 170 Copyright 2003 Nokia Index Numerics 1-touch dialing assigning a number 54 change a 1-touch number 54 delete a 1-touch number 54 A ABC mode 34 accessibility solutions 9 accessibility website 9 accessible features 9 accessory battery charging stand 149 car kit 151 charging stand 148 headset kit 149 loopset 10 mobile charger 148 rapid travel charger 147 standard travel charger 147 TTY adapter 10 active call options activate/cancel call waiting 57 answer a waiting call 58 end the active call 58 reject a waiting call 58 switch between calls 58 third call waiting 58 adapter for TTY connection 10 advertisements block reception 106 receive multimedia message 106 alarm clock 121 delay alarm 121 snooze 121 symbol 21 allow multimedia reception 106 answer a call 24 answer call with any key 55 answer waiting call 58 antenna contact 19 how to hold the phone 19 location 19 performance 19 anykey answer 55 applications launch, open 134 audible alerts 66 authority certificates 114 automatic keyguard delay time 86 B battery charge 15 check strength 20 empty 15 indication on screen 20 install 17 Nokia 3595 User Guide 171 Copyright Nokia 2003 power 20 recycle 137 remove 16 temperature range 137 battery low indication 136 block incoming messages 106 block international calls 90 block multimedia messages 106 bookmark set while browsing 113 bookmarks 113 browser use bookmarks 113 browser options 111 business cards 122 send as text message 122 sending 122 C cache memory 114 calculator 123 calendar 118 make a note 118, 120 call forwarding 56 call on hold symbol 21 call restrictions cancel 90 call timers 47 call waiting 30, 57 caller group icon 22 caller groups add names 81 assign ringing tone 82 graphics 82 remove names 81 rename 82 caller ID 24, 30 car kit icon 22 car profile 70 check volume 20 clock 12 hour 75 24 hour 75 alarm 121 display the clock 76 set the clock 75 closed user groups 91 code default security code 89 personal unblocking key 88 PIN 87 restriction password 87 security code 87 conference calls 59 contact list add contact 34 delete names and numbers 43 features 33 find names 41 make a call 23 menu 33 options 33 convert currency 124 covers, changing 83 172 Copyright Nokia 2003 D data call history 50 date display the date 76 set the date 76 default security code 89 delete contact list entries 44 desktop charging stand 148 dictionary add word 37 disconnect from mobile Internet 113 display language 74 downloading ringing tones 73 E e-mail send 99, 100 set up sending profile 99 e-mail address save 40 emergency call make while using GPRS 117 end a call 24 end key 24 enter characters 34 enter letters ABC mode 34 entering letters and numbers special characters 35 standard text input 34 erase message 107 F factory settings default settings 83 file size 107 file type 107 fixed dialing 89 G gallery 77 add a folder 79 delete a folder 79 rename a folder 79 view a folder 78 games 131 Air Glide 131 Backgammon 131 Bowling 131 Sky Diver 131 GPRS 109 call history 45 check data call history 45 make a call while online 117 phone symbols 115 receive a call while online 116 graphics associate with caller group 82 H handsfree operation 64 headset connect 16 icon 22 make and answer calls 17 set up 16 Nokia 3595 User Guide 173 Copyright Nokia 2003 use 17 headset kit 149 help text 75 I icons 20 idle screen 19 in-call options access the contact list 53 conference calls 59 make a new call 53 put a call on hold 53 information message service 108 install SIM card 13 international call 53 international calls prefix 36 restrict access 90 Internet connect with your phone 110 J Java midlets 134 K keyguard 86 automatic 86 delay time 86 symbol 21 keypad avoid accidental keypresses 86 lock 86 keys and features bottom 18 L label 11 language 74 English 74 French 74 phone support 74 Spanish 74 lights keypad and display 18 line for outgoing calls 30 lock codes PIN codes 87 PUK codes 88 loopset 10 profile 71 set as default 71 LPS-3 10 M make a call 23 use the contact list 23 make an emergency call while online 117 make an international call 53 memory available for multimedia messages 105 available for names in contact list 42 choose memory type for contact list entry 43 default memory for contact list 174 Copyright Nokia 2003 43 phone 42 shared 11 menus list of items 27 message settings message center number 92 message mode 93 messages check text messages 96 check voice mail 62 MIDI 73 MIDI tones 73 midlets 134 launch application 134 MMS 105 allow advertisements 106 block advertisments 106 connection settings 107 delete message 107 discard a message 107 maximum size 105 multimedia inbox 105 play sound clip 107 ringing tone 105 save message 107 save MIDI tone 107 save received graphic 107 save ringing tone 107 screen saver 105 sender information 107 settings 105 turn off 106 view a message 107 mobile charger 148 mobile Internet clear the cache 114 security issues 114 sign off 113 sign on 110 mobile Internet site examples 112 how to read 112 multimedia inbox 105 multimedia messages 105 N network services 30 call forwarding 30, 56 call waiting 57 caller ID 55 choose outgoing line 55 conference call 59 system selection 57 transfer a call 60 Nokia Customer Care phone information 11 O online help 75 onscreen help 75 P phone check signal 20 frequency bands 153 illustrated 4 operating voltage 153 Nokia 3595 User Guide 175 Copyright Nokia 2003 transmitting power 153 turn on 18 phone label 11 phone size 153 phone symbols 20 phone weight 153 picture messages sending with text 104 viewing 104 PIN code 88 play MIDI tone 107 polyphonic sound 73 power button location 18 predictive text input 36 add word 37 language support 36 shortcuts 38 turn off 37 turn on 36 use keys 38 profiles car kit 70 customizing 67 for accessories 69 handsfree 70 loopset 71 timed 69 TTY 71 PUK code 88 punctuation how to enter 35 Q quick guide 7 R rapid travel charger 147 receive multimedia messages 105 reception 20 redial a call 25 reject a call 24 remove battery 16 remove SIM card 17 restore factory settings 83 restrict calls 90 ringing tones download 73 receive from network 73 ringing tons polyphonic sound 73 S scroll bar 26 security code 87 default 89 security features automatic keyguard 86 keyguard 86 personal unblocking key 88 PIN code 88 prevent unauthorized use 88 PUK code 88 require password 88 restrict calls 90 176 Copyright Nokia 2003 service command editor 108 settings MMS connection sets 107 MMS, multimedia 105 signal strength indicator 20 SIM 42 SIM card 13 avoid damage 13 handling 13 install 13 remove 17 SIM card feature fixed dialing 89 SIM memory icon 22 speed-dial 54 standard travel charger 147 start screen 19 stopwatch 125 delete times 127 measure lap time 126 measure split time 126 stop the clock 126 view times 127 swap between two calls 58 synchronize contact list and calendar 128 system selection 30 T T9 36 talk key 23 technical information 153 text clues 6 text message copy to calendar 98 text messages reading 96 resending 96 send to single recipient 94 sending 95 set up 92 use GPRS 94 time receive network update 77 time format 75 to-do note 125 touch tones send pause 36 track online usage 50 wireless Internet usage 50 troubleshooting 154 TTY connection between phone and TTY Device 71 end a call 73 make a call 72 receive a call 73 TTY adapter 10 TTY communication 10 TTY connection icon 22 TTY settings 71 Nokia 3595 User Guide 177 Copyright Nokia 2003 W WAP 109 WAP browser 111 use phone keys 111 WAP page active link 112 enter information 112 examples 112 header line 112 welcome note 74 wireless network services 9 write messages with built-in dictionary 36 www.nokiaaccessibility.com 9 X Xpress-on color cover 83 U update date and time 77 use two phone lines 58 user guide alternate formats 9 updates 6 user guide conventions 6 V voice commands 64 voice dialing add a voice tag 62 change a voice tag 64 delete a voice tag 64 make a call with voice recognition 63 play back a voice tag 63 voice mail listen to your messages 61 save the mailbox number 61 volume 20 adjust 20 check level on screen 20 decrease 24 earpiece 20 increase 24 keypad tones 67 Para obtener un manual del usuario en espaol favor de llamar o enviar un fax al telfono 1-888-NOKIA2U, fax 813-249-9619 178 Copyright Nokia 2003
1 2 3 4 | Manual 1 | Users Manual | 3.32 MiB | December 04 2004 |
3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 1 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Nokia 3595 User Guide What information is needed?
Numbers My number Voice mail number Wireless providers number Wireless providers customer care Model number 3595 Phone type number NPM-10 NPM-10X International mobile equipment identity
(IMEI) Where is the number?
Wireless service provider Wireless service provider Wireless service provider Wireless service provider Label on back of phone
(under battery) Label on back of phone
(under battery) Label on back of phone (under battery). See Find information about your phone on page 7. 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 2 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM LEGAL INFORMATION Part No. 9230479, Issue No. 2 Copyright 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Nokia, Nokia Connecting People, Air Glide, Bowling, Backgammon, Sky Diver, Nokia 3595, Xpress-on, and the Nokia Original Enhancements logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nokia Corporation. Other company and product names mentioned herein may be trademarks or trade names of their respective owners. Printed in Canada 04/04 US Patent No 5818437 and other pending patents. T9 text input software Copyright 1999-2003. Tegic Communications, Inc. All rights reserved. Includes RSA BSAFE cryptographic or security protocol software from RSA Security. Java is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. The information contained in this user guide was written for the Nokia 3595 product. Nokia operates a policy of ongoing development. Nokia reserves the right to make changes to any of the products described in this document without prior notice. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NOKIA BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY LOSS OF DATA OR INCOME OR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, AND CONSEQUENTIAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES HOWSOEVER CAUSED. THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED "AS IS." EXCEPT AS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NO WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE MADE IN RELATION TO THE ACCURACY AND RELIABILITY OR CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT. NOKIA RESERVES THE RIGHT TO REVISE THIS DOCUMENT OR WITHDRAW IT AT ANY TIME WITHOUT PRIOR NOTICE. EXPORT CONTROLS This device may contain commodities, technology, or software that may only be exported in accordance with the U. S. Export Administration regulations. Diversion contrary to U.S. or Canadian law is prohibited. FCC/INDUSTRY CANADA NOTICE Your device may cause TV or radio interference (for example, when using a telephone in close proximity to receiving equipment). The FCC or Industry Canada can require you to stop using your telephone if such interference cannot be eliminated. If you require assistance, contact your local service facility. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the condition that this device does not cause harmful interference. 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 3 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Manufactured or sold under one or more of the following US Patents. 4868846 5124672 5241583 5335362 5390223 5430740 5479476 5553125 5594797 5664053 5701392 5797102 5822366 5844884 5870683 5903832 5917868 5946651 5960389 5987639 6011971 6028567 6047196 6060193 6084471 6097964 6119180 6133884 6148209 6167248 4945633 5151946 5266782 5341149 5392460 5442521 5487084 5557639 5600708 5675611 5722074 5802465 5827082 5845219 5884103 5903839 5920826 5953665 5963901 5991857 6014113 6031827 6049796 6069923 6084855 6105784 6121846 6137789 6151485 6167273 5001372 5152004 5271056 5353328 5396657 5444816 5526366 5565821 5606548 5677620 5729541 5805301 5835858 5850607 5884190 5907823 5926147 5956332 5966378 6005857 6014551 6035189 6050415 6072787 6084920 6112099 6122498 6138091 6151507 6170073 5053928 5173927 5311151 5371481 5400949 5446364 5534878 5566201 5613235 5692032 5760568 5809413 5835889 5857151 5889770 5912570 5926769 5956625 5977887 6006114 6014573 6035194 6054954 6073001 6084962 6115617 6128322 6140966 6163609 6171127 5083240 5212834 5317283 5378935 5408504 5446422 5548616 5570369 5625274 5697074 5787341 5819165 5839101 5859843 5898775 5914690 5929813 5956633 5983081 6009328 6025802 6038238 6054966 6079993 6088746 6118775 6128509 6144243 6164547 6178535 5101175 5230091 5331638 5384782 5416435 5477422 5551067 5581244 5640395 5699482 5794142 5821891 5842141 5862178 5898925 5914796 5930233 5960354 5987137 6011853 6026161 6043760 6055439 6081732 6094587 6119002 6130650 6144676 6167038 6182101 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 4 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM 6184592 6199035 6223059 6266321 6285888 6314166 6356759 6377803 6392660 6438370 6470470 6185295 6201712 6230020 6266330 6292668 6317083 6359865 6377820 6400958 6445932 6487397 6185302 6201876 6240076 6269126 6295286 6324389 6359904 6381468 6417817 6453179 6510148 6185422 6202109 6249584 6271794 6307512 6324412 6363259 6385254 6430163 6456237 6522670 6188909 6219560 6259312 6272361 6308084 6333716 6370362 6385451 6434133 6456826 6591116 6195338 6223037 6262735 6282436 6311054 6347218 6370389 6392605 6437711 6463278 6606508 D423449 D481674 D485246 Design patents pending:
29/166,907 29/177,162 29/177,164 29/177,165 29/177,171 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page v Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Contents 1. 3. Quick guide. 2 For your safety . 3 About your device . 4 Network Services . 4 Shared memory . 5 2. Welcome . 6 Register your phone. 6 E-newsletters . 6 Copyright protection . 6 Contact Nokia . 6 SIM card and battery . 8 SIM card installation . 8 Install the battery . 9 Charge the battery. 10 Remove the SIM card . 11 Set up your headset. 11 4. About your phone. 12 Switch on your phone . 12 The antenna . 13 The start screen . 13 Indicators and icons. 14 5. Make and answer calls . 17 Make a call . 17 End a call . 17 Answer a call . 18 Reject a call . 18 Redial . 18 The menu . 19 Scroll bar . 19 List of main menus and submenus . 19 Text entry. 26 7. 6. Nokia 3595 User Guide v Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page vi Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM 8. 9. Standard mode . 26 Predictive text. 27 Punctuation and special characters . 28 Contacts. 30 Save names, numbers, and e-mail addresses . 30 Add text entries . 31 Find names in Contacts . 31 Edit names and numbers . 32 Phone memory . 32 Delete names and numbers . 33 Call history. 35 Check missed, received, or dialed calls . 35 Call lists options . 35 Clear call lists . 36 Call timers . 36 Message counter. 37 Manage call costs . 37 Data calls. 38 10. Advanced calling features . 39 In-call options. 39 Automatic redial . 40 1-touch dialing . 40 Anykey answer . 41 Network services. 41 11. Voice features . 45 Voice mail . 45 Voice dialing . 46 Voice commands . 47 Audible alerts . 48 12. Personalize your phone . 49 Profiles. 49 Accessory settings . 50 Polyphonic sound (MIDI) . 53 Ringing tones . 53 Display language. 54 vi Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page vii Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Welcome note . 54 Help text. 54 Time and date. 54 Memory status . 56 Gallery. 56 Display settings . 58 Caller groups . 59 Restore factory settings . 60 Xpress-on color covers . 60 13. Phone security . 64 Lock the keypad (keyguard). 64 Security codes . 64 PIN codes . 65 PUK codes. 66 Security code . 67 Fixed dialing . 67 Restrict calls. 68 Closed user groups. 69 14. Mobile messages . 70 Message settings . 70 Text messages . 72 E-mail messages . 74 Store messages. 75 Delete messages. 76 Picture messages . 77 Multimedia messages . 78 Info message service . 81 Service command editor . 81 15. Mobile Internet . 82 Notes about the mobile Internet . 82 Set up for browsing . 83 Connect. 83 Browser options . 83 Navigate . 83 Bookmarks . 85 Security issues . 85 GPRS . 86 Nokia 3595 User Guide vii Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page viii Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM 16. Disconnect. 88 Instant messaging (IM). 89 IM service provider icons . 89 Register with an IM service . 90 IM menus. 90 Log in . 91 Set your availability . 91 IM conversations. 91 IM contacts . 93 Group chat sessions . 95 IM settings . 96 Log off service. 97 17. Your personal digital assistant . 98 Calendar . 98 Alarm clock . 100 Business cards. 101 Calculator . 101 To-do list . 102 Stopwatch . 103 Synchronize contacts and calendar. 105 18. Fun and games . 107 Games . 107 Java applications . 109 Converter. 111 19. Enhancements . 112 Power . 112 Audio . 112 Car . 112 20. Reference information . 113 Battery information . 113 Enhancements. 113 Enhancements, batteries, and chargers . 114 Care and maintenance . 114 Additional safety information . 115 Batteries . 120 viii Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page ix Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM 21. Technical information. 121 22. Troubleshooting . 122 23. Nokia One-Year Limited Warranty . 123 Appendix A . 127 Appendix B . 131 Index. 137 Nokia 3595 User Guide ix Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page x Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM NOTES x Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 1 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Nokia 3595 phone at a glance Display screen Up scroll key Left selection key Talk key Down scroll key Power key Earpiece Right selection key End key Keypad Microphone Nokia 3595 User Guide 1 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 2 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Quick guide Action Press Press and hold Make a call Answer a call Answer call during call End a call Decline a call Mute a call Redial Description Press a key briefly and release it. Press a key, hold it for two to three seconds, and release it. Enter a phone number and press the Talk key. Press the Talk key. Select Answer call. Press the End key. Press the End key to send the call to voice mail. Select Options > Mute during a call. Press the Talk key twice. Adjust call volume Press the Up scroll or Down scroll key during a call. Use the in-call menu Select Options during a call. Save a name and number Enter a number, select Options > Save, enter a name;
then select OK. Use 1-touch dialing Press and hold a key (28). You must assign a key to a number in Contacts. Look up a name Check voice mail Select Contacts > Find. Press and hold the 1 key (contact your service provider for details). Write text messages Select Menu > Messages > Text messages > Create message. Enter the message. Send text messages Select Options > Send. Enter the number and select OK. Read new message If 1 message received appears on the display, select Show. 2 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 3 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM 1 For your safety Read these simple guidelines. Not following them may be dangerous or illegal. Read the complete user guide for further information. For your safety SWITCH ON SAFELY Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. ROAD SAFETY COMES FIRST Obey all local laws. Always keep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving should be road safety. INTERFERENCE All wireless phones may be susceptible to interference, which could affect performance. SWITCH OFF IN HOSPITALS Follow any restrictions. Switch the phone off near medical equipment. SWITCH OFF IN AIRCRAFT Follow any restrictions. Wireless devices can cause interference in aircraft. SWITCH OFF WHEN REFUELING Don't use the phone at a refueling point. Don't use near fuel or chemicals. SWITCH OFF NEAR BLASTING Follow any restrictions. Don't use the phone where blasting is in progress. USE SENSIBLY Use only in the normal position as explained in the product documentation. Don't touch the antenna unnecessarily. QUALIFIED SERVICE Only qualified personnel may install or repair this product. ENHANCEMENTS AND BATTERIES Use only approved enhancements and batteries. Do not connect incompatible products. Nokia 3595 User Guide 3 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 4 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM WATER-RESISTANCE Your phone is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. BACKUP COPIES Remember to make back-up copies or keep a written record of all important information stored in your phone. CONNECTING TO OTHER DEVICES When connecting to any other device, read its user guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not connect incompatible products. EMERGENCY CALLS Ensure the phone is switched on and in service. Press End as many times as needed to clear the display and return to the main screen. Enter the emergency number, then press Talk. Give your location. Do not end the call until given permission to do so.
ABOUT YOUR DEVICE The wireless device described in this guide is approved for use on the GSM 850 and 1900 networks. Contact your service provider for more information about networks. When using the features in this device, obey all laws and respect privacy and legitimate rights of others. Warning: To use any features in this device, other than the alarm clock, the phone must be switched on. Do not switch the device on when wireless phone use may cause interference or danger.
NETWORK SERVICES To use the phone you must have service from a wireless service provider. Many of the features in this device depend on features in the wireless network to function. These Network Services may not be available on all networks or you may have to make specific arrangements with your service provider before you can utilize Network Services. Your service provider may need to give you additional instructions for their use and explain what charges will apply. Some networks may have limitations that affect how you can use Network Services. For instance, some networks may not support all language-dependent characters and services. Your service provider may have requested that certain features be disabled or not activated in your device. If so, they will not appear on your device menu. Contact your service provider for more information. 4 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 5 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM For your safety
SHARED MEMORY The following features in this device may share memory: ringing tones, pictures, screen savers, and Java games and applications. Use of one or more of these features may reduce the memory available for the remaining features sharing memory. For example, saving many games may use all of the available memory. Your phone may display a message that the memory is full when you try to use a shared memory feature. In this case, delete some of the information or entries stored in the shared memory features before continuing. Some of the features, such as ringing tones, pictures, screen savers, and Java games and applications may have a certain amount of memory specially allotted to them in addition to the amount of memory shared with other features. Nokia 3595 User Guide 5 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 6 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM 2 Welcome Congratulations on your purchase of the Nokia 3595 mobile phone. Your phone provides many functions which are practical for daily use, such as a stopwatch, alarm clock, to-do list, calendar, and more. Look for updates From time to time, Nokia updates this guide to reflect changes. The latest version may be available at www.nokiausa.com. Also, an interactive tutorial may be available at www.nokiahowto.com. Accessibility solutions Nokia is committed to making mobile phones easy to use for all individuals, including those with disabilities. For more information, visit the web site at www.nokiaaccessibility.com.
REGISTER YOUR PHONE Make sure to register your phone at www.warranty.nokiausa.com or 1-888-NOKIA-2U (1-888-665-4228) so that we can serve your needs better if you should need to call the center or have your phone repaired.
E-NEWSLETTERS When you register your phone, you can sign up for Nokia's e-newsletter, Nokia Connections, if you would like. You will receive tips and tricks on using your phone, accessory information, and special offers.
COPYRIGHT PROTECTION Copyright protections may prevent some images, ringing tones, and other content from being copied, modified, transferred, or forwarded.
CONTACT NOKIA If you ever need to call Nokia Customer Care or your service provider, you will need to provide specific information about your phone. 6 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 7 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Welcome Find information about your phone This information is provided on the phone label. The label is on the back of the phone (under the battery). It contains the model and serial numbers, as well as other important information about your phone. See Remove the back cover and battery on page 8 for instructions on how to access the phone label. The label shows the following:
Phone type Phone model IMEI FCC ID number Have the phone or enhancement available Whether you are calling about your phone or an enhancement, have the equipment with you when you call. If a Nokia representative asks a specific question about the enhancement, you will have it available for quick reference. Nokia Customer Care Center, USA Customer Care Centre, Canada Nokia Mobile Phones 7725 Woodland Center Boulevard, Suite #150 Tampa, Florida 33614 Tel: 1-888-NOKIA-2U
(1-888-665-4228) Fax: 1-813-249-9619 For TTY users: 1-800-24-NOKIA
(1-800-246-6542) Nokia Products Ltd. 601 Westney Rd. South Ajax, Ontario L1S 4N7 Tel: 1-905-427-1373 1-888-22-NOKIA
(1-888-226-6542) Fax: 1-905-427-1070 Web site: www.nokia.ca Nokia 3595 User Guide 7 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 8 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM 3 SIM card and battery Before you begin, you need to prepare your phone by installing the SIM card and charging the battery. This chapter covers these topics, as well as instructions on how to attach the optional headset. Always switch off the phone before installing the SIM card and battery.
SIM CARD INSTALLATION Warning: Keep all SIM cards out of the reach of small children. For availability and information on using SIM card services, contact your SIM card vendor. This may be the service provider, network operator, or other vendor. Remove the back cover and battery 1 With the back of the phone facing you, press and hold the back cover 2 3 release button. Slide the cover up; then lift it off the phone. Lift out the battery. 2 3 1 8 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 9 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM SIM card and battery Install the SIM card The SIM card and its contacts can easily be damaged by scratches or bending, so be careful when handling, inserting, or removing the card. 1 With the phone positioned as shown in the illustration below, locate the SIM 2 card slot. Install the SIM card by sliding it gently into the slot as shown in the illustration below, making sure the gold colored contact area is face down. SIM card installed SIM card slot Beveled corner SIM card directional icon on type label
INSTALL THE BATTERY 1 2 Position the battery (with the label side facing up), so the gold colored contacts match up with those on the phone. Slide the battery until it snaps into place. Gold colored contacts Nokia 3595 User Guide 9 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 10 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Replace the back cover 1 2 Direct the back cover towards the locking catches on the phone. Slide the back cover until it locks into place. Note: Always store and use the phone with the covers attached. Locking catches
CHARGE THE BATTERY You can use the phone while the charger is connected. 1 Connect the charger to a standard wall outlet. Insert the charger plug into the round jack in the bottom of the phone. Charger 2 3 The battery power indicator (or battery bar) appears on the screen and starts scrolling. If the phone is on, Charging appears briefly on the screen. When the battery bar stops scrolling, the battery charge is complete. Battery full appears also, if the phone is on. Disconnect the charger from the phone. 10 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 11 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM
REMOVE THE SIM CARD SIM card and battery If you ever need to remove the SIM card, follow these steps. 1 Remove the back cover and battery. See Remove the back cover and battery on page 8. Press the plastic tab of the SIM card holder down. Gently push the SIM card towards the top of the phone and remove it. 2 3
SET UP YOUR HEADSET Your phone may come with a headset (HDC-5) you can use while talking on your phone. The headset provides convenient hands-free use of the phone. Connect the headset 1 Insert the headset plug into the headset jack in the phone. Put the round ear bud into one ear. 2 Use the headset Headset With the headset connected, you can make and answer calls as usual, using the keypad to press the Talk key and the End key or to enter numbers to call. The microphone for the headset hangs at the side of your head. Although the microphone may seem far from your mouth, you can speak at a normal volume. Refer to the packaging materials of your headset for further information regarding its operation. Nokia 3595 User Guide 11 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 12 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM 4 About your phone
SWITCH ON YOUR PHONE Warning: Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. 1 To turn your phone on or off, press and hold the Power key on top of the phone for at least three seconds. If the phone displays Insert SIM card, even though the SIM card is properly inserted, or SIM card not supported, contact your service provider. 2 If the phone asks for a personal identity number
(PIN) code, enter the PIN code (displayed as ****) and select OK. See the information about PIN codes on page 65, if applicable. If the phone asks for a security code, enter the security code and select OK. See Change the security code on page 67 for more information. 3 4 If the language that appears in your display is not correct, see Display language on page 54 for information on changing the display language. Back cover Antenna area On the back of your phone, you will find the back cover release button. When you remove the back cover, you will find an antenna area, which is similar to the one shown in the graphic on the left. Back cover release 12 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 13 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM About your phone
THE ANTENNA Your phone has an internal antenna. Note: As with any other radio transmitting device, do not touch the antenna unnecessarily when the device is switched on. Contact with the antenna affects call quality and may cause the phone to operate at a higher power level than otherwise needed. Avoiding contact with the antenna area when operating the phone optimizes the antenna performance and the battery life. Not touching the antenna during a call optimizes the antenna performance and the talk time of your phone. Hold the phone as you would any other telephone, with the antenna area pointed up and over your shoulder.
THE START SCREEN When you turn on your phone, the first screen that appears is the start screen, which is in the standby mode. In the middle of the start screen, you may see information indicating which wireless network your phone uses. This information can vary between phones. The Left selection key in the standby mode accesses Menu (the menu functions) and the Right selection key in the standby mode accesses the Contacts menu. Other indicators and icons appear on the start screen and are described in the next section. Menu Contacts Nokia 3595 User Guide 13 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 14 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM
INDICATORS AND ICONS On your phone, you have two types of identifiers: indicators and icons. Indicators Indicators show the status of the phone. Signal Strength Indicator Battery Strength Indicator
The signal strength indicator shows the strength of the signal to your phone. The battery strength indicator shows how much power is left in your phone battery. The volume indicator shows the earpiece volume level. See Adjust the earpiece volume during a call on page 17 for details. The audible signal and battery indicator shows by a series of beeps that either the signal or battery strength is running low on your phone. You need to set up this feature on your phone through the voice command function before it will operate. See Voice commands on page 47 for more information. Icons Icons are graphical representations of a specific item or situation. The following table shows examples and tells you what each icon means. Icon What it means Line 1 is selected for outgoing calls. Line 2 is selected for outgoing calls. 14 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 15 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM About your phone Icon What it means You have an active call. You have a call on hold. You have one or more new voice mail messages. You have a new voice mail message on line 1. You have new voice mail messages on line 1 and line 2. You have a new voice mail message on line 2. You have one or more new text messages. If the icon blinks, text message memory is full. Keyguard is on. Your phone will not accept any key presses. The alarm clock is set. The call alert and text message alert tones are turned off. The timed option for a profile is selected. Incoming voice calls are being forwarded to another number. You have forwarded all voice calls received on line 1. You have forwarded all voice calls received on line 2. You have forwarded all voice calls received on lines 1 and 2. Nokia 3595 User Guide 15 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 16 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Icon What it means The phone is ready for you to enter a response. There is a voice tag attached to a name in Contacts. Indicates an e-mail address in Contacts. You have assigned the name and number to a caller group. The headset is attached to your phone. The car kit is attached to your phone. The loopset is attached to your phone. A Telecommunications Device for the Deaf (TTY/TDD) is attached to your phone. The Contacts entry is stored on the SIM card. You are using predictive text input. Your phone uses a built-in dictionary to predict or guess the word entered. 16 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 17 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM 5 Make and answer calls This chapter tells you how to make and receive calls and how to adjust certain options. Make and answer calls
MAKE A CALL Check the signal strength The signal indicator on the left side of your phone screen shows the strength of the network radio signal. The indicator scrolls as the signal strength increases and decreases. To get the strongest signal, try moving your phone slightly. If you are inside a building, move toward a window. Use the keypad Enter the area code (if required in your local calling area) and phone number and press the Talk key. Use Contacts 1 Signal Strength From the start screen, press the Up scroll key or the Down scroll key to scroll to the number you want. Press the Talk key. 2 Adjust the earpiece volume during a call You can only adjust the earpiece volume during an active call.
To increase the volume of a call, press the Up scroll key. To decrease the volume of a call, press the Down scroll key.
When adjusting the volume, a bar chart appears in the display indicating the volume level. If an enhancement with its own loudspeaker is connected to your phone, the volume keys adjust the volume for that enhancement.
END A CALL Press the End key. Nokia 3595 User Guide 17 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 18 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM
ANSWER A CALL Press the Talk key. OR Select Options > Answer call. Caller ID Note: This feature may not be available in all wireless systems. Contact your service provider for details and availability. When caller ID is active, your phone may display the callers phone number. The callers name may also appear, if his or her name and number are stored in Contacts. See Contacts on page 30.
REJECT A CALL Press the End key. OR Select Silence > Decline. OR Select Options > Decline call.
REDIAL Last-dialed number Press the Talk key twice. Any of twenty last-dialed numbers 1 2 Press the Talk key and select the number you want to redial. Press the Talk key again. 18 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 19 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM The menu 6 The menu Your phone offers many functions that are grouped in menus and submenus. Access these menus with the selection keys and scroll keys. See Nokia 3595 phone at a glance on page 1 for the location of the selection keys and scroll keys.
SCROLL BAR While using phone menus, a scroll bar appears at the far right of the screen. This bar indicates where you are in the menu. Each numbered tab on the bar represents a different menu item. For example, select Menu once. The scroll bar appears with the first (top) tab displayed. A different tab appears each time you press the Up scroll or Down scroll key.
LIST OF MAIN MENUS AND SUBMENUS Here is an abbreviated list of the main menus and their submenus. Later chapters tell you how to work with the menus, explaining their functions. Some items may not appear due to the SIM card configuration and network service availability. 1 Messages 1 Text messages 1 Create message 2 Inbox 3 Create SMS e-mail 4 Sent items 5 Archive 6 Templates 7 My folders 8 Distribution lists 9 Delete messages 2 Multimedia messages 1 Create message 2 Inbox 3 Outbox 4 Sent items 5 Saved items 6 Delete messages Nokia 3595 User Guide 19 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 20 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM 3 Voice messages 1 Listen to voice messages 2 Voice mailbox number 4 Info messages 1 Info service 2 Topics 3 Language 4 Info topics saved on SIM card 5 Message settings 1 Text messages 2 Multimedia msg. 3 Other settings 6 Service command editor 2 Call log 1 Missed calls 2 Received calls 3 Dialed numbers 4 Delete recent call lists 1 All 2 Missed 3 Received 4 Dialed 5 Call timers 1 Duration of last call 2 Duration of received calls 3 Duration of dialed calls 4 Duration of all calls 5 Life timer 6 Clear timers 1 Last call units 2 All calls units 3 Call cost settings 7 GPRS data counter 1 Data sent in last session 2 Data received in last session 3 All sent data 4 All received data 5 Clear counters 6 Call costs (Depends on network availability and your SIM card) 20 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 21 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM The menu 8 GPRS connection timer 1 Duration of last session 2 Duration of all sessions 3 Clear timers 9 Message counter 1 Sent messages 2 Received messages 3 Clear counters 1 Ringing options 2 Ringing tone 3 Ringing volume 4 Vibrating alert 5 Message alert tone 6 Keypad tones 7 Warning tones 8 Alert for 9 Profile name (Appears under Silent, Meeting, Outdoor, My profile 1 and My profile 2) 3 Profiles 1 Normal 1 Select 2 Customize 3 Timed 2 Silent 3 Meeting 4 Outdoor 5 My profile 1 6 My profile 2 4 Settings 1 Tone settings 1 Ringing options 2 Ringing tone 3 Ringing volume 4 Vibrating alert 5 Message alert tone 6 Keypad tones 7 Warning tones 8 Alert for Nokia 3595 User Guide 21 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 22 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM 2 Time and date settings 1 Clock 2 Date 3 Auto-update of date & time 3 Call settings 1 Automatic redial 2 1-touch dialing 3 Summary after call 4 Anykey answer 4 Phone settings 1 Language 2 Automatic keyguard 3 Cell info display 4 Welcome note 5 Help text activation 6 Start-up tone 7 Memory status 5 Display settings 1 Wallpaper 2 Color schemes 3 Operator logo (Depends upon network availability) 4 Screen saver timeout 5 Display brightness 6 Network services 1 Call forwarding 2 Call waiting 3 Send own caller ID when calling 4 Line for outgoing calls 5 System selection 6 Confirm SIM service actions 7 Accessory settings (Only shows up when phone is connected to an enhancement) 1 Headset 2 Handsfree (Only shows up when phone is connected to Car Kit) 3 Loopset 4 TTY/TDD 8 Security settings 1 PIN code request 2 Call restrictions 3 Fixed dialing 4 Closed user group 5 Security level 6 Change access codes 9 Restore factory settings 22 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 23 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM The menu 5 Gallery 1 View folders 2 Add folder 3 Delete folder 4 Rename folder 5 Gallery downl. 6 Organizer 1 Alarm clock 2 Calendar 3 To-do list 7 Games 1 Select game 1 Air Glide 2 Bowling 3 Sky Diver 4 Backgammon 1 Game sounds 2 Game lights 3 Shakes 2 Game downlds. (depends on network availability) 3 Memory 4 Settings 8 Applications 1 Select app. 2 App. downloads 3 Memory 9 Extras 1 Calculator 2 Stopwatch 1 Split timing 2 Lap timing Nokia 3595 User Guide 23 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 24 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM 3 Voice commands 1 Audible alerts 1 Audible battery bar 2 Audible signal bar 10 Connectivity 1 Synchronize 2 GPRS connection 11 Services THE FOLLOWING MENU ITEMS MAY VARY; CONTACT YOUR SERVICE PROVIDER. 1 Home 2 Bookmarks 3 Service inbox 4 Settings 1 Connection settings 1 Active service settings 2 Edit active service settings 2 Appearance settings 1 Scroll mode 2 Text wrapping 3 Show images 3 Security settings 1 User certificates 2 Authority certificates 3 Security module settings 4 Cookies 4 Service inbox settings 1 Service messages 2 Automatic connection 5 Go to address 6 Clear the cache 24 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 25 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM The menu 12 IM THE FOLLOWING MENU ITEMS MAY VARY. FOR AVAILABILITY AND INFORMATION ON USING INSTANT MESSAGING, CONTACT YOUR SERVICE PROVIDER. 1 Login 2 Saved convers. 3 IM provider 4 Settings Nokia 3595 User Guide 25 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 26 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM 7 Text entry You can use two methods for entering text and numbers.
Standard mode is the only way to enter names into Contacts, enter a welcome note and to rename caller groups. Predictive text input is a quick and easy method for writing messages.
At any message screen, press the # key to switch predictive text on or off and to use predictive text in various modes. As you press the # key, the following icons
(not the descriptions) appear in the upper left of the display:
Icon What it means Uppercase text. Predictive text is Off. Lowercase text. Predictive text is Off. Sentence case text. Predictive text is Off. Sentence case text. Predictive text is On. Lowercase text. Predictive text is On. See Mobile messages on page 70 for more information on how to access a message screen.
STANDARD MODE
Press a key once to insert the first letter on the key, twice for the second letter, etc. If you pause briefly, the last letter in the display is accepted and your phone awaits the next entry. Select Clear to backspace the cursor and delete a character. Select and hold Clear to backspace continuously and delete characters. Press the 0 key to enter a space and accept a completed word. Press the 1 key to enter a period. characters on page 28. Press the * key to display special characters. See Punctuation and special To switch to 123 mode from Abc mode, press and hold the # key at any message entry screen until the icon in the upper left corner of the display switches from Abc to 123. 26 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 27 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM
PREDICTIVE TEXT Text entry Predictive text input allows you to write messages quickly using your keypad and the built-in phone dictionary. It is much faster than using the standard mode multi-tap method. You can use predictive text to write a message and create a calendar note. When predictive text is on, the icon display. When predictive text is off, the icon of the display. Activate 1 appears in the upper left corner of the appears in the upper left corner At a text entry screen, select and hold Options. OR At a text entry screen, select Options > Predictive text. Select the language of your choice. 2 Enter text
For each letter of the word that you want to spell, press the corresponding key on your keypad only once, even if the letter you want is not the first letter on the key. The phone guesses the word you are trying to spell. If a displayed word is not correct, press the * key to see other matches. To move forward through a list of matches, keep pressing the * key. To return to the previous word in the list of matches, select Previous. Press the 0 key to accept the word, enter a space, and begin writing the next word. If ? appears after a word, select Spell to add the word to the dictionary. See Add new words to the dictionary on page 28. Press the 1 key to insert a period into your message. Press and hold the * key to display special characters. See Punctuation and special characters on page 28. Compound words 1 Enter the first part of the compound word and confirm it by pressing the Down scroll key. Enter the last part of the word and confirm it by pressing the 0 key.
2 Nokia 3595 User Guide 27 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 28 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Add new words to the dictionary If you encounter a word that predictive text does not recognize, a question mark
(?) follows the word and Spell appears in the lower left of the display. Select Spell, enter your new word using the keypad, and select Save. The word is added to the dictionary and to the message that you are writing. Keep these factors in mind when adding words:
New words that you accept by selecting Save, the 0 key, or deleting the space between two words are saved to the dictionary. Depending on the language and the length of the words, you may be able to add hundreds of words to the dictionary.
When the dictionary is full, the most recent addition replaces the first.
PUNCTUATION AND SPECIAL CHARACTERS In ABC mode 1 While at any text entry screen, press the * key to display the following special characters (press and hold the * key if predictive text is on):
l 2 Scroll to the character you want and select Insert. 28 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 29 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Text entry In 123 mode You can access the following special characters only in 123 mode. There are two places you can use these characters:
At the start screen, when you dial a phone number. At the number prompt, when you add a new entry to Contacts. Press the * key Once to enter *. Twice to enter +. Three times to enter p. Four times to enter w. Function Sends command strings to the network. Contact your service provider for details. Provides a prefix for dialing international numbers. Creates a pause that occurs when dialing a number. Numbers entered to the right of this special character are automatically sent as touch tones after a 2.5-second pause. Creates a wait; digits to the right of the w are not sent until you press the Talk key. Nokia 3595 User Guide 29 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 30 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM 8 Contacts You can keep track of contact information in Contacts.
Names are saved in Contacts memory and/or SIM memory. For each name in the phone memory, you can add up to five phone numbers, including the following categories:
General phone number Mobile phone number Home phone number Work phone number Fax number
For each name in the phone memory, you can also store an e-mail address, a web address, a street address, and a note. See E-mail address on page 31 and Add text entries on page 31. For more details about phone memory and SIM memory, see Phone memory on page 32.
SAVE NAMES, NUMBERS, AND E-MAIL ADDRESSES At the start screen, enter the number you want to save and select Options. Select Save, enter the name, and select OK. Quick save 1 2 Number only At the start screen, enter the number, and select and hold Options. Name and number while in a call 1 2 At the start screen, select Options > Contacts > Add contact. Enter the name, select OK, enter the phone number, and select OK. 30 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 31 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Contacts E-mail address You can save an e-mail address for a name in Contacts. All Contacts entries that contain e-mail addresses must be stored in the phone memory. See Phone and SIM memory on page 32. 1 At the start screen, press the Up scroll or the Down scroll key to scroll to the name you want. Select Details > Options > Add detail. If the name has been saved to the SIM card, the phone prompts you to move it to the phone memory; then select OK. Select E-mail, enter the e-mail address, and select OK. 2 3 4
ADD TEXT ENTRIES Besides adding an email address for each name in Contacts, you can also add a web address, street address, or note for each name. 1 At the start screen, press the Up scroll or the Down scroll key to scroll to the name you want. Select Details > Options > Add detail. If the name has been saved to the SIM card, the phone prompts you to move it to the phone memory; then select OK. Select either Web address, Street addr. or Note, enter your information, and select OK. 2 3 4
FIND NAMES IN CONTACTS Select Contacts > Find and the name you want. Select Details to show the phone number. To call the number, press the Talk key. 1 2 3 Use scroll keys At the start screen, press the Up scroll or the Down scroll key to scroll to the name you want. Nokia 3595 User Guide 31 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 32 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM
EDIT NAMES AND NUMBERS Names 1 At the start screen, press the Up scroll or Down scroll key to scroll to the name you want to change. Select Details > Options > Edit name. Select Clear as many times as necessary to delete the name, enter the new name, and select OK. 2 3 Numbers 1 2 3 At the start screen, press the Up scroll or Down scroll key to scroll to the number you want to change. Select Details > Options > Edit number. Select Clear as many times as necessary to delete the number, enter the new number, and select OK.
PHONE MEMORY appears when a You can save names and numbers in the internal memory of the phone, SIM card memory, or in a combination of the two. The SIM icon Contacts entry is saved in SIM memory. The shorter the names and numbers, the more entries you can store in Contacts. The phone memory can hold from 125 to 500 names, depending on the number of characters used for each name, number, or text entry. Phone and SIM memory The following table summarizes the differences between the three types of memory you can choose. Phone feature Contact names capacity Phone memory Up to 500
(depending on length of entries) Phone numbers Up to 5 numbers per name SIM memory Up to 250 contact names (Depends on your SIM card;
check with your service provider) 1 number (Depends on your SIM card;
check with your service provider) Phone and SIM memory Up to 750 contact names (both SIM and phone entries are displayed) Up to 5 numbers per name (stored in phone memory) 32 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 33 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Contacts Yes Yes No Not available Up to 3 text entries per name Phone feature Phone memory SIM memory Phone and SIM memory Up to 3 text entries per name (stored in phone memory) Yes Only numbers stored to SIM can be transferred Yes Yes Yes, contact your service provider for details. Yes E-mail, Web address, Street address and Note Caller groups?
Transfer contact names/numbers to another phone?
Voice tags?
Switch between memory types The default memory type is Phone and SIM. Select Contacts > Settings > Memory in use > Phone and SIM, Phone, or SIM card. If you choose to keep Phone and SIM as the memory type:
Contacts names and numbers can be recalled from both the phone and SIM card
Contacts entries are displayed in a combined list
New entries are saved to the phone memory. Check Contacts memory status Select Contacts > Settings > Memory status > Phone or SIM card. If your list in Contacts is full, you can save the phone number to another memory or replace an existing entry.
DELETE NAMES AND NUMBERS Number 1 At the start screen, press the Up scroll or the Down scroll key to scroll to the entry you want to delete. Select Details > Options > Delete number > OK. 2 Nokia 3595 User Guide 33 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 34 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Name and number 1 At the start screen, press the Up scroll key or the Down scroll key to scroll through Contacts until you find the entry you want to delete. Select Details > Options > Delete > OK. 2 Entire Contacts contents Warning: This feature deletes the entire contents of Contacts and cannot be undone. Some repair services for your phone may erase your contact list entries. Be sure to make a copy of all information before requesting any repair service. 1 2 Select Contacts > Delete > Delete all > Phone or SIM card > Delete > OK. Enter your security code and select OK. See Security code on page 67 for the default code. 34 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 35 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Call history 9 Call history Your phone registers information about each call you make and receive. The Call log keeps track of the following:
Missed calls
Received calls Dialed calls General packet radio system (GPRS) data sent and received. Time spent online for GPRS data transfers Text messages sent and received
CHECK MISSED, RECEIVED, OR DIALED CALLS Your phone saves the last 20 numbers you have dialed or the last 10 numbers you have missed or received. The Call log saves the phone numbers of missed or received calls only if the callers number is available, your phone is turned on, and you are in your home calling area. 1 Select Menu > Call log > Missed calls, Received calls, or Dialed numbers and select the number you want to see. To dial the number, press the Talk key. Select Options to find more information or to add a number to Contacts. 2 3
CALL LISTS OPTIONS When you view the missed calls, received calls, or dialed calls list and select Options, the following choices may appear. Not all options will appear each time and the order of options may vary. Call timeShows the date and time of the last call. Use the scroll keys to view up to five recent call dates/time for the displayed phone number. Send messageAllows you to write a short text message to the person who called you. View numberDisplays the phone number if the callers name is stored in Contacts. Edit numberAllows you to edit the displayed number and save it with a name to Contacts. SaveAllows you to enter a name for the number and save both to Contacts. Add to contactAllows you to move a contact to phone memory. DeleteAllows you to delete the number from the call list. CallDials the number from the Call log. Nokia 3595 User Guide 35 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 36 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM
CLEAR CALL LISTS This feature clears all the missed, received, and dialed call lists. Warning: You cannot undo this operation. Select Menu > Call log > Delete recent call lists > All, Missed, Received, or Dialed. Missed, received, and dialed calls lists are also deleted when you change the phone security setting or if you use a SIM card that is not one of the five most recent cards used with the phone.
CALL TIMERS Note: Some timers, including the life timer, may be reset during service or software upgrades. The actual time invoiced for calls by your service provider may vary, depending on network features, rounding off for billing, and so forth. Two phone lines If you subscribe to a second phone line (see Two phone lines on page 45), call timers are separate for each phone line. When you view call timers, the call timers that are shown are for the currently selected outgoing line. However, if you view call timers while you are in a call, the call timers that are shown are for the line you are using at that moment. View call duration 1 Select Menu > Call log > Call timers > Duration of last call, Duration of received calls, Duration of dialed calls, or Duration of all calls. Select Back after viewing the selected call timer. 2 View the life timer Your phone keeps track of the total call time (all calls made and received). The life timer is displayed in hhhh:mm format. 1 2 Reset call timers to zero Select Menu > Call log > Life timer. Select Back after viewing the life timer. Note: You cannot reset the life timer. However, sometimes the life timer may be reset during service or software upgrades. Select Menu > Call log > Call timers > Clear timers, enter your security code, and select OK. 36 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 37 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Call history Show call timer during a call While in a call, select Options > Menu > Call log > Call timers. Show call timer after call Your phone can display the time spent on a call after you end the call. This feature is called Summary after call. Select Menu > Settings > Call settings > Summary after call > On or Off.
MESSAGE COUNTER The message counter gives you information on how many text messages have been sent and received. You can view the amount of sent and received messages, view details about the messages and reset the counter. Note: The actual amount invoiced by your service provider may vary. 1 2 3 4 Select Menu > Call log > Message counter > Sent messages or Received messages. Select the message (phone number) you want to see. To dial the number, press the Talk key. Select Options and one of the following options:
Message detailsShows either the sender or recipient of the message, along with details of the sent message. Send messageAllows you to write a short text message to the person who either sent you a message or received a message from you. This option will display if the message was sent to or received from a phone number. CallAllows you to call the person who either sent you a message or received a message from you. Edit numberAllows you to edit the displayed number and save it with a name to Contacts. SaveAllows you to enter a name for the number and save both to Contacts. Add to contactAllows you to move a contact to phone memory. DeleteAllows you to delete the number from the message list.
MANAGE CALL COSTS This network service allows you to check call costs. You can view the last call cost or the total cost of all calls made or received since the counters were reset. Contact your service provider for availability and instructions. Nokia 3595 User Guide 37 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 38 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Note: The actual invoice for calls and services from your service provider may vary, depending on network features, rounding off for billing, taxes and so forth.
DATA CALLS In addition to keeping track of voice calls, the phone call log records information about data calls. You can check the amount of GPRS data transferred over the network. You can also keep track of how much time you spend online. Note: Text messages sent over GPRS are not counted and therefore not included in the data counter or connection timer. For details on pricing and availability, contact your service provider. Data counter CHECK All data counters are displayed in bytes (B). Select Menu > Call log > GPRS data counter and one of the following options:
Data sent in last session Data received in last session All sent data All received data CLEAR Select Menu > Call log > GPRS data counter > Clear counters, enter your security code and select OK. Connection timer CHECK The time is displayed in hh:mm:ss format. Select Menu > Call log > GPRS connection timer and one of the following options:
Duration of last session Duration of all sessions CLEAR Select Menu > Call log > GPRS connection timer > Clear timers, enter your security code, and select OK. 38 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 39 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Advanced calling features 10 Advanced calling features In-call options and swapping between calls Call settings that you control such as anykey answer Network services such as call forwarding This chapter covers advanced calling features, including:
Not all features that are described are available in all wireless networks. Contact your service provider for availability of network services.
IN-CALL OPTIONS During a call, select Options to see the in-call menu. Not all options will appear each time and the order of options may vary. Lock keypadAllows you to lock the phone keypad. End callEnds the current call. New callAllows you to place a new call. Touch tonesSends touch tones. Touch tones are the sounds generated when you press a key; touch tones can be used for automated, over-the-phone services such as checking airline arrival or departure times. ContactsSwitches you to Contacts, so that you can look up a name, number, or address. MenuAllows you to access the phone menu. MuteDisables the microphone so that the other party cannot hear you speak. Mute also affects the microphone of any external enhancements connected to your phone. HoldHolds or releases a call. New call Enter the second phone number or recall it from Contacts and press the Talk key. OR 1 2 With either method, the first call is automatically put on hold. SWITCH BETWEEN TWO CALLS IN PROGRESS Press the Talk key or select Swap. The Select Options > New call. Enter the second phone number or recall it from Contacts and select Call. icon represents the active call and the icon represents the call on hold. Nokia 3595 User Guide 39 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 40 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM END THE ACTIVE CALL Press the End key. The call on hold becomes the active call. International call 1 2 Press the * key twice to enter the international dialing prefix (+). Enter the country code, area code, and phone number, then press the Talk key.
AUTOMATIC REDIAL Select Menu > Settings > Call settings > Automatic redial > On. If the number you dial is busy, your phone immediately redials the number. If it is still busy, your phone will redial the number up to nine more times. Automatic redial will not work while you make or answer another call.
1-TOUCH DIALING Assign a name and number to a 1-touch dialing location so that when you press this key, the phone automatically dials the associated number. The 1 key is used to access your voice mail. See Listen to your voice messages on page 46 for details on voice mail. Activate Select Menu > Settings > Call settings > 1-touch dialing > On. Assign number 1 2 Select Contacts > 1-touch dialing, a dialing location, and Assign. Enter a phone number, select OK, enter a name, and select OK. OR Select Find and the Contacts entry you want. Call At the start screen, press and hold the appropriate key. OR At the start screen, press the appropriate key and the Talk key. Change 1 Select Contacts > 1-touch dialing, the key you want to change, and Options > Change. Enter a phone number, select OK, enter a name, and select OK. 2 40 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 41 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Delete 1 2 Select Contacts > 1-touch dialing, then select the key you want to delete. Select Options > Delete > OK. Advanced calling features
ANYKEY ANSWER Anykey answer allows you to answer an incoming call by briefly pressing any key except the Power key, the Left selection key, the Right selection key, and the End key. Select Menu > Settings > Call settings > Anykey answer > On or Off.
NETWORK SERVICES Your phone supports a number of services that may be available through your service provider's network such as, call forwarding, call waiting, caller ID, multiple lines for outgoing calls, and system selection. For availability, pricing, and subscription to network services, contact your service provider. Outgoing line Your service provider must have this feature activated before you can select line 2. Select Menu > Settings > Network services > Line for outgoing calls > Line 1 or Line 2. Own number in caller ID You can determine, for each call you make, whether your telephone number appears on anothers phone caller ID. This feature is network-dependent and works on a call-by-call basis. Contact your service provider for more information. 1 Select Menu > Settings > Call settings > Network services > Send own caller ID when calling. Select one of the following options:
DefaultYour phone number is sent according to the network. YesYour phone number is sent to the other persons caller ID. NoYour phone number is not sent to the other persons caller ID. 2 Call forwarding Call forwarding tells your network to redirect incoming calls to another number. It is a network-dependent feature and may not work the same in all networks. Contact your service provider for availability. Nokia 3595 User Guide 41 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 42 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM ACTIVATE 1 Select Menu > Settings > Network services > Call forwarding and one of the following options:
Note: If you want to forward your calls to another number when your phone is turned off, select Forward when not able to take calls. Forward all voice calls Forward if busy Forward if not answered Forward if out of reach Forward when not able to take calls Forward all fax calls Forward all data calls Cancel all call forwarding Select Activate > To voice mailb. or To other no. If you select To other no., enter the phone number and select OK. The following icons appear on the phone screen:
2 Incoming voice calls are being forwarded to another number. You have forwarded all voice calls that are received on line 1. You have forwarded all voice calls that are received on line 2. You have forwarded all voice calls that are received on lines 1 and 2. CANCEL 1 2 Select Menu > Settings > Network services > Call forwarding. Select the call forwarding option you want and Cancel. Note: Canceling all call forwarding may also cancel any automatic forwarding of calls to voice mail that your service provider has activated for you. Also, this option may cancel your call forwarding service. Contact your service provider for details. CHECK CALL FORWARDING STATUS The Check status option is not available for Forward when not able to take calls. 1 2 To see the phone number where the calls are being forwarded, select Number. Select Menu > Settings > Network services > Call forwarding. Select the call forwarding option you want and Check status. 42 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 43 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Advanced calling features Select a system You can select how your phone chooses a wireless network, as there may be more than one available. The selection you make stays active until you change it or change the SIM card. Select Menu > Settings > Network services > System selection and one of the following options:
AutomaticThe phone automatically selects one of the available systems. ManualThe phone searches for available systems and then lists them. Select the system you want. The phone looks for a system and displays the result. If you lose connection while in Manual mode, the phone asks you to select a system again. Call waiting This network service lets you receive an incoming call when you are already in a call. The phone beeps to let you know of the incoming call. Contact your service provider to sign up for call waiting. Select Menu > Settings > Network services > Call waiting > Activate or Cancel. CONFIRM STATUS Select Menu > Settings > Network services > Call waiting > Check status. ANSWER A WAITING CALL Your phone signals when you have a call waiting. Press the Talk key or select Answer to put the current call on hold and answer the waiting call. REJECT A WAITING CALL Select Options > Decline call. SWITCH BETWEEN CALLS Press the Talk key or select Swap. The END THE ACTIVE CALL Press the End key or select Options > End call and the call on hold becomes active. THIRD CALL WAITING If you have both an active call and a call on hold and a third call is waiting, you can answer the third call and end the other calls. Select Options > End all calls, then press the Talk key to answer the third call. icon represents the active call and the icon represents the call on hold. Nokia 3595 User Guide 43 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 44 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Conference calls This network service, if available from your service provider, allows you to make conference calls with your phone. Contact your service provider for availability. MAKE 1 2 Place a call to the first person. Select Options > New call, enter the number of the next party you want to include, and select Call. After the other party answers, select Options > Conference. To add other parties to the call, repeat steps 23. To end the conference call, press the End key. 3 4 5 TALK PRIVATELY 1 While in a conference call, select Options > Private call. 2 Select the person with whom you want to speak privately. The other participants can continue talking with each other. To rejoin the conference call, select Options > Conference. 3 Transfer calls This network service, if available from your service provider, allows you to connect an active call and a call on hold and disconnect yourself from the call. Contact your service provider for availability. During a call, select Options > Transfer calls. 44 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 45 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM 11 Voice features The voice features in your phone make communication more convenient. You can check messages from friends or business associates, record a voice tag for contacts in the Contacts function, and use voice dialing for handsfree operation. Voice features
VOICE MAIL A voice mail subscription A voice mailbox number A temporary password Voice mail is a network feature that allows callers to leave a voice message for you when you are not able to take the call. To use voice mail, you must have:
These items are assigned by your service provider. Your service provider should also tell you how to record a greeting for your voice mailbox and how to change the temporary password. If you have difficulty using the voice mail feature, contact your service provider. Voice mailbox number If your service provider has not already set up the voice mailbox number, follow these steps to set up the voice mailbox number. 1 2 The voice mailbox number must be longer than two characters and emergency numbers, such as 911, are not allowed. Two phone lines If your particular SIM card supports it, your phone can have two phone lines. Your service provider can tell you if your SIM card allows the use of this feature and can give you access to two phone lines. If you decide to use two phone lines, you can select one of the two lines for outgoing calls, but you can still answer calls on both lines. If you use two phone lines, you will be given a voice mailbox number for each line. You need to save the voice mailbox number for each phone line separately. To do this, first select the outgoing line and save its voice mailbox number. Then, select the other line and save its number. Select Menu > Messages > Voice messages > Voice mailbox number. Enter your voice mailbox number and select OK. Nokia 3595 User Guide 45 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 46 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Voice mail indicators The method of voice mail notification depends upon your service provider. When or n you receive a voice message, your phone beeps and either an icon message received appears, where n is the number of messages. To view the message immediately, select Show; to view the message later, select Exit. If you subscribe to two different phone numbers, the message icon shows which line is receiving the voice mail message. Voice mail message on line 1. Voice mail message on line 2. Voice mail message on line 1 and on line 2. Listen to your voice messages If there is a notification message on your screen, you can get your voice messages by using one of the following methods:
If you have saved your voice mailbox number in your phone, press and hold 1 to call your voice mailbox. Call your voice mailbox number as you would any other telephone number;
then follow the directions provided.
To check your voice messages anytime, Menu > Messages > Voice messages >
Listen to voice messages.
VOICE DIALING The phone voice dialing feature allows handsfree operation while you place a call. Before using this feature, you need to create entries in Contacts so you can associate a voice tag with a name and number. You can create up to 14 voice tags in your phone. To create entries in Contacts, see page 30. Voice tags Before using voice tags, note that:
Voice tags are not language-dependent. They are dependent on the speaker's voice. You must say the name exactly as you said it when you recorded it. Voice tags are sensitive to background noise. Record voice tags and use them in a quiet environment. Very short names are not accepted. Use long names and avoid similar names for different numbers.
Note: Using voice tags may be difficult in a noisy environment or during an emergency, so you should not rely solely upon voice dialing in all circumstances. 46 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 47 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Voice features At the start screen, press the Up scroll or the Down scroll key to scroll to the name you to which you want to assign a voice tag. Select Details > Options > Add voice tag. Select Start, then speak the name clearly into the microphone. Important: Do not select Quit unless you want to cancel the recording. The phone automatically stops recording, then replays and saves the voice tag. Make a call 1 Select and hold Contacts. When you hear several beeps and Please speak now appears, release the button. Pronounce the voice tag clearly into the microphone and your phone automatically dials the number. Select Contacts > Voice tags and the name with the voice tag you want to hear. Select Options > Playback. Select Contacts > Voice tags and the name with the voice tag you want to change. Select Options > Change > Start and speak the new name. Add 1 2 3 2 Listen 1 2 Change 1 2 Delete 1 2 Select Contacts > Voice tags and the name with the voice tag you want to delete. Select Options > Delete > OK.
VOICE COMMANDS The voice command feature allows access to handsfree operation for certain phone functions. Voice commands work similar to voice dialing. Before using voice commands, you must first associate a voice tag to the phone function you want to use. Add a voice tag 1 Select Menu > Extras > Voice commands > Audible alerts > Audible battery bar or Audible signal bar > Options > Add command. Select Start and speak the voice tag clearly into the microphone. 2 Note: A message will appear if the voice tag is either too short or long. You are given the option to try again. Do not select Quit unless you want to cancel the recording. The phone replays and then saves the recorded tag. The commands which have voice tags assigned. icon appears next to Nokia 3595 User Guide 47 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 48 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM 2 CHANGE 1 2 2 DELETE 1 Existing voice command After you have associated a voice tag to a command, you can either play back, change or delete the tag. PLAY BACK 1 Select Menu > Extras > Voice commands > Audible alerts and the voice command tag you want to play back. Select Options > Playback. Select Menu > Extras > Voice commands > Audible alerts and the voice command tag you want to change. Select Options > Change > Start, then speak the voice tag clearly into the microphone. Select Menu > Extras > Voice commands > Audible alerts and the voice command tag you want to delete. Select Options > Delete > OK.
AUDIBLE ALERTS Audible alerts provide you with audible tones to indicate the current signal bar or battery bar strength of your phone. In order to obtain audible alerts, the alerts must first be set up as voice commands. To set up voice commands, see Add a voice tag on page 47. Select and hold Contacts and speak the voice tag clearly into the microphone. When the phone finds the tag, confirmation appears and the phone plays the recognized voice tag from the phone memory through the earpiece. The phone then beeps to indicate how strong the battery or signal strength is. The following table shows what the number of beeps indicates. Audible Alert One Beep Two Beeps Three Beeps Four Beeps Battery Bar Strength Signal Bar Strength Low Half full Almost full Full Weak Somewhat strong Almost strong Strong 48 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 49 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM 12 Personalize your phone Personalize your phone
PROFILES The Profiles option allows you select the sound settings that match your environment, whether it is a meeting or a soccer game. Each profile contains settings for the ringing option, ringing tone, ringing volume, vibrating alert, message alert tone, keypad tones, and warning tones. The profiles available are Normal, Silent, Meeting, Outdoor, My profile 1, and My profile 2. Your phone also has profile settings for Nokia enhancements (accessories) such as a headset, car kit, loopset, and phone adapter. Note: The profiles for enhancements do not appear until you attach these enhancements for the first time. Select Select Menu > Profiles and the profile you want to use. Customize 1 2 Select Menu > Profiles and the profile you want to customize. Select Customize and one of the following options:
Ringing optionsSet the ringing style. The choices include Silent, Ring, Ascending, Ring once, and Beep once. Ringing toneSet the ringing tone from a selection of preprogrammed tones. Ringing volumeSet the volume for incoming calls. Vibrating alertSet the vibrating alert on or off. Your phone has an internal vibrating mechanism so you do not need a special battery to use this feature. In some profiles, the vibrating alert default is Off, so the lights may not flash unless you change the default. Message alert toneSet the alert style. The choices include No tone, Standard, Special, Beep once, Ascending, and Ringing Tone. Keypad tonesSet the volume for keypad tones. Warning tonesSet the warning and confirmation tones on or off. Alert forSet an audible alert only when a member of a selected caller group is calling. The choices include Family, VIP, Friends, Business or Other. Scroll to the caller group for whom you want to set an alert and select Mark > Done. For more information about caller groups, see Caller groups on page 59. Profile nameAssign a new name to any of the following profiles: Silent, Meeting, Outdoor, My profile 1, or My profile 2. Nokia 3595 User Guide 49 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 50 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Set timed Timed profiles can prevent missed calls. For example, if you attend an event that requires you to set your phone to the Silent profile, you may forget to return the phone to the Normal profile after the event is over. You may not notice incoming calls. With the timed profile, you can have the phone automatically return to the Normal profile at a time you specify. 1 2 3 Select Menu > Profiles and the profile you want to activate Select Timed, enter the time for the profile to expire, and select OK. If you are using a 12-hour time format, select am or pm.
ACCESSORY SETTINGS Headset (HDC-5, HDE-2, HDB-5, or HDC-10) Car kit (CARK-125 or CARK-134) Loopset (LPS-3) Phone adapter (HDA-9) You can use your phone with these Nokia enhancements:
The Accessory settings do not appear in the phone menu until you connect the headset, car kit, loopset, or phone adapter. You can adjust settings related to the enhancement, such as a ringing tone. Default profile When you use the headset, car kit, or loopset, you have the option of choosing a profile. You can use the currently selected profile (for example, Normal) or you can choose from the list. Select Menu > Settings > Accessory settings > Headset, Handsfree, or Loopset >
Default profile and the profile you want. Car profile You can connect your phone to a compatible Nokia car kit for convenient handsfree operation. The car kit contains a microphone and a speaker, so you can conduct a conversation without holding the phone to your ear. The setting used with the car kit is called Handsfree. Connecting your phone to a car kit automatically disables the keyguard. 50 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 51 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Personalize your phone AUTOMATIC ANSWER This profile lets your phone answer incoming calls after just one ring. 1 2 Place the phone into the car kit holder. Select Menu > Settings > Accessory settings > Handsfree > Automatic answer > On. LIGHTS If you are using your phone with a compatible Nokia car kit, you can set lights to On (display and keypad lights stay on) or Automatic (after 15 seconds, lights turn off until the next key is pressed or the phone rings). 1 2 Place the phone into the car kit holder. Select Menu > Settings > Accessory settings > Handsfree > Lights > On or Automatic. Loopset profile The LPS-3 loopset gives people with T-coil equipped hearing aids the ability to make and receive calls without noise interference. Important: Refer to the booklet that comes with the LPS-3 for complete instructions and safety information. 1 2 3 Plug the loopset plug into the jack in the bottom of the phone, as shown in the illustration. Select Menu > Settings > Accessory settings > Loopset. Select Use loopset > Yes. Note: If you want to use the headset or TTY/TDD, you perform steps 23, then select No to deactivate the loopset profile. Nokia 3595 User Guide 51 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 52 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM TTY/TDD profile You can connect your phone to a TTY/TDD device, using the Nokia phone adapter
(HDA-9). In order for your phone to recognize the TTY/TDD, youll need to set up the TTY/TDD profile, under Accessory settings. Important: Some manufacturers of TTY/TDD devices suggest that the phone be least at 18 inches from the TTY/TDD device. Remember that when connecting to any other device, read its user guide or contact its manufacturer for detailed instructions and safety information. 1 2 Connect the TTY/TDD device by a cable to the HDA-9 phone adapter. Plug the HDA-9 phone adapter into the connector in the bottom of your phone, as shown in the illustration. Select Menu > Settings > Accessory settings > TTY/TDD > Use TTY > Yes. 3 TTY/TDD Calls NOTES
The Nokia TTY/TDD phone adapter (HDA-9) is for use with compatible TTY/TDD devices only. Check with the manufacturer of the TTY/TDD device to ensure that the connection is compatible. Check with the manufacturer of the TTY/TDD device for the connecting cable. TTY/TDD communications depend on network availability. Check with your service provider for availability and description of services.
52 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 53 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Personalize your phone MAKE Before making a TTY/TDD call with your Nokia phone, check the signal strength. See page 17 for more details. 1 2 When the receiving party answers, begin typing your conversation on the At the start screen, enter the phone number and press the Talk key. TTY/TDD device. RECEIVE You may find it helpful to use the vibrating alert under the Profiles menu. See Customize on page 49 for details. 1 Make sure the TTY/TDD device is connected to your phone. 2 Press the Talk key to answer the call; then type your responses on the TTY/TDD device. END Press the End key.
POLYPHONIC SOUND (MIDI) Your phone is equipped with a polyphonic tone generator capable of playing up to four different voices simultaneously. The generator can reproduce over 40 different instrument tones, including drums, guitar, saxophone, flute, etc. The polyphonic sounds bring a new richness and quality to ringing tones, message alert tones, background music, and sound effects used in gaming. Your Nokia 3595 mobile phone supports Mobile MIDI (GMX) format messages and ringing tones. Your phone can receive polyphonic ringing tones in two ways:
Through the multimedia messaging service (MMS). See Multimedia messages on page 78 for more information. Through the WAP browser. See Connect on page 83 for more information.
RINGING TONES Download You can download ringing tones over the Internet or have them sent to your phone by using SMS (short message service) or MMS. MIDI ring tones can be downloaded via MMS or WAP. Traditional ringing tones can be downloaded by using SMS, WAP, and MMS. Your phone has memory space for several traditional ringing tones or MIDI ringing tones. The number of tones you can save depends on the size of each tone. MIDI tones take up more storage space in the memory than traditional ringing tones. Nokia 3595 User Guide 53 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 54 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM To download ringing tones, select Menu > Gallery > Gallery downlds. > Tone downlds. > More bookmarks. The list of bookmarks is dynamic and may vary, due to network service availability. Check with your service provider for more information. Note: Methods for downloading ringing tones vary. Some wireless service providers allow you to send ringing tones to your phone over the mobile Internet, but may charge for this service. For details about downloading ringing tones, contact your wireless service provider.
DISPLAY LANGUAGE You can select the phone display language. Select Menu > Settings > Phone settings > Language and the language you want.
WELCOME NOTE Select Menu > Settings > Phone settings > Welcome note. Enter a note and select Options > Save. Add You can add a welcome note that is displayed briefly each time you turn on the phone. 1 2 Delete 1 2 Select Menu > Settings > Phone settings > Welcome note. Select Options > Delete.
HELP TEXT Many menu items have brief explanations associated with them. To view the help text, scroll to the menu item and wait for about 30 seconds. Select More to see the next page of the text or Back to exit. Select Menu > Settings > Phone settings > Help text activation > On or Off.
TIME AND DATE Your phone has an internal clock that can be displayed on the start screen. It also features an alarm clock. See Alarm clock on page 100. The time and date has to be reset each time the phone battery is taken out and replaced. 54 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 55 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Personalize your phone Select Menu > Settings > Time and date settings > Clock > Set the time. Enter the current time, using two digits for both hours and minutes. Select OK > am or pm. Set time format Select Menu > Settings > Time and date settings > Clock > Time format >
24-hour or am/pm. Set time 1 2 3 If you entered the time in the 24-hour format, am and pm do not appear. Display or hide clock This feature allows you to either display or hide the time on the start screen. Select Menu > Settings > Time and date settings > Clock > Hide clock or Show clock. Set date format 1 2 Select Menu > Settings > Time and date settings > Date > Date format. Select one of the following formats. DD MM YYYY MM DD YYYY YYYY MM DD Set date Select Menu > Settings > Time and date settings > Date > Set the date, enter the date, and select OK. Display or hide date This feature allows you to either display or hide the date on the start screen. Select Menu > Settings > Time and date settings > Date > Hide date or Show date. Set automatic update of date and time If this feature is supported by your wireless service provider, it automatically updates the clock in your phone in accordance with the current time zone. This may be helpful if you are traveling from New York to California, for example, and want to receive the local time from the wireless network. Nokia 3595 User Guide 55 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 56 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Select Menu > Settings > Time and date settings > Auto-update of date & time and one of the following options:
OnUpdates the date and time automatically. Confirm firstRequires you to confirm that you want the update. OffPrevents the date and time from being automatically updated.
MEMORY STATUS Memory information is gathered from the following functions:
Contacts
SMS messages
MMS messages
1 2 You can also check the memory status of Contacts while you are in the Contacts function. See Check Contacts memory status on page 33. Gallery Voice recorder Organizer Applications Select Menu > Settings > Phone settings > Memory status. Select Back to return to the menu.
GALLERY You can save pictures and ringing tones to an existing folder or a folder you have created in the Gallery. You can download images and tones by using SMS, WAP, and MMS and then save them in the Gallery. You can find out how much memory is being used by the graphics and ringing tones in the Gallery by using the Memory status feature. See Memory status on page 56. 56 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 57 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Personalize your phone Folders VIEW This feature allows you to view the folders in the Gallery. 1 2 Select Menu > Gallery > View folders > Graphics or Tones > Open. Select an image or tone, Options, and one of the following options:
OpenAllows you to open the selected file. DeleteAllows you to delete the selected file. MoveAllows you to move the file to another folder. RenameAllows you to rename the selected file. Set as wallpaper/Set as ring toneAllows you to set the graphic as wallpaper. In the Tones folder, this option is Set as ring tone; the tone is applied to profile in use. DetailsAllows you to view details of the file, such as the name, time and date the file was created. SortAllows you to sort the files according to date, format, name, or size. Select Menu > Gallery > Delete folder. Select the folder you want to delete and Delete > OK. ADD This feature allows you to create a folder. Select Menu > Gallery > Add folder, enter a folder name, and select OK. DELETE This feature allows you to delete a folder you have created. 1 2 RENAME This feature allows you to rename a folder you have created. 1 2 3 Select Menu > Gallery > Rename folder. Select the folder you want to rename and Rename. Select Clear as many times as necessary to delete the current folder name, enter a new folder name, and select OK. Nokia 3595 User Guide 57 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 58 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM
DISPLAY SETTINGS Wallpaper You can set your phone to display a background picture (wallpaper) on the start screen. When your phone is shipped from the factory, it will contain some preloaded pictures in the Gallery. You can download pictures by using SMS, WAP, and MMS and then save them in the Gallery. Your phone supports JPEG, GIF, BMP, PNG, and WBMP formats. SELECT Select Menu > Settings > Display settings > Wallpaper > Change image. 1 2 Select Graphics > Open, the image you want, and Options > Set as wallpap. If the wallpaper feature is off when an image is set as a wallpaper, it is switched On. You do not need to activate the wallpaper separately. SET Select Menu > Settings > Display settings > Wallpaper > On or Off. Color schemes You can change the color of some display components in your phone, such as indicators and signal bars. Select Menu > Settings > Display settings > Color schemes and the color scheme you want. Screen saver You can set your phone to display a screen saver after a preset time or after a custom time (up to 60 minutes). The screen saver is activated when no function of the phone is used after a preset period of time. Press any key to deactivate the screen saver. The screen saver is also deactivated when the phone is out of the network coverage area. PRESET TIMEOUT Select Menu > Settings > Display settings > Screen saver timeout > 2 minutes or 5 minutes. CUSTOM TIMEOUT 1 2 Select Menu > Settings > Display settings > Screen saver timeout > Other. Enter the custom time and select OK. 58 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 59 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Personalize your phone Display brightness You can change the brightness of the phone display. 1 2 Select Menu > Settings > Display settings > Display brightness. Press the Up scroll or Down scroll key to adjust the contrast level and select OK.
CALLER GROUPS You can create groups of contacts in Contacts and give each group a different ringing tone. When someone from that group calls, you will know because of the ringing tone. Add contact The name you add to a caller group must first be stored in Contacts. 1 From the start screen, press the Up scroll key or the Down scroll key to scroll to the name or number you want. Select Details > Options > Caller groups > Family, VIP, Friends, Business or Other. 2 Remove contact 1 From the start screen, press the Up scroll key or the Down scroll key to scroll to the name or number you want. Select Details > Options > Caller groups > No group. 2 Assign ringing tone Select Contacts > Caller groups and the group you want. 1 2 Select Group ringing tone and the tone you want to hear for this caller group. You can set your phone to ring only when people from certain caller groups call you and to be silent for all other call groups. Rename caller group You can rename any caller group with a name of your own. 1 2 Select Contacts > Caller groups and the group you want. Select Rename group, enter the group name, and select OK. Nokia 3595 User Guide 59 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 60 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Group graphic Each caller group can have a picture associated with it. When you get a call from someone in a caller group, the graphic flashes on the screen. ACTIVATE Select Contacts > Caller groups, the group you want, and Group logo. 1 If you want to see the group graphic before you select it, select View. 2 Select Back to return to the menu. 3 4 Select On. DEACTIVATE Select Contacts > Caller groups, the group you want, and Group logo > Off. VIEW A RECEIVED GRAPHIC When you receive a graphic from someone else, Group logo received appears. To view the graphic, select Show > Options and one of the following options:
SaveAllows you to save it (you must select which caller group gets the new graphic). DiscardAllows you to delete it.
RESTORE FACTORY SETTINGS You can use the Restore factory settings feature to reset some of the phone settings to their original values. Note: Restoring factory settings does not delete your list in Contacts. However, it does delete all customized settings you may have entered. Select Menu > Settings > Restore factory settings, enter the security code, and select OK. For the default code, see Security code on page 67.
XPRESS-ON COLOR COVERS To personalize your Nokia 3595 mobile phone, you can change the front and back covers. Nokia Xpress-on color covers, reactive covers (glow-in-the-dark), and active covers may be purchased from your authorized Nokia dealer. Note: Before removing the cover, always switch off the power and disconnect the charger and any other device. Avoid touching electronic components while changing the covers. Always store and use the device with the covers attached. 60 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 61 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Personalize your phone Remove the back cover 1 With the back of the phone facing you, press and hold the back cover release button. Slide the cover up. Lift the cover off the phone. 2 3 Remove the phone from the front cover With the back of the phone facing you, gently separate the cover from the phone, starting at the bottom. Nokia 3595 User Guide 61 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 62 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Change the keypad 1 2 Lift the keypad from inside the old front cover. Place the keypad into the new front cover. New front cover Replace the new front cover 1 To replace the front cover, align the top of the phone with the top of the front cover. Make sure both sets of plastic tabs line up with their slots, as shown at right. Align the cover and snap it shut all the way around the edge of the phone. 2 Tabs 62 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 63 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Replace the back cover 1 2 Direct the back cover towards the locking catches on the phone. Slide the back cover until it locks into place. Personalize your phone Locking catches Nokia 3595 User Guide 63 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 64 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM 13 Phone security Your phone is equipped with different security features that allow you to do the following:
Avoid making accidental calls Prevent unauthorized use of your phone Restrict outgoing or incoming calls
LOCK THE KEYPAD (KEYGUARD) The keyguard disables your keypad to prevent accidental key presses (for example, when your phone is in your pocket or purse).
To lock the keys, select Menu and press the * key. To unlock the keys, select Unlock and press the * key. Note: When the keyguard is enabled, the keypad and display cannot light if you press a key. Press the Power key briefly to activate the keypad and display lights. Automatic keyguard You can have your phone automatically lock the keys after a time you specify. 1 Select Menu > Settings > Phone settings > Automatic keyguard > On. 2 Enter the delay time and select OK. When the keyguard is on, calls still may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your phone. Enter the emergency number and press the Talk key.
SECURITY CODES The table on the next page summarizes how different types of security codes are used in your phone. 64 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 65 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Phone security Code Purpose Security code PIN code Use the security code for the following procedures:
Reset call timers (page 36) Clear the data counter (page 38) Clear the connection timer (page 38) Restore factory settings (page 60) Delete your entire contact list (page 34) If phone security is on, the phone requests the security code the first time you use it after installing a new SIM card. You can use the PIN code to protect against unauthorized calls if the following conditions are met:
The PIN code request is turned on The phone is powered off
The next time the phone is turned on, you must enter the correct PIN code to make calls or use the menus. PIN2 code Restriction password Enter the PIN2 code for the following procedure:
Set up or change fixed dialing numbers (page 67) Required by the restrict calls feature.
PIN CODES The PIN and PIN2 codes are 4-digit to 8-digit numbers that usually come from your service provider along with the SIM card. Use the PIN code to protect your phone and SIM card against unauthorized use. The PIN2 code activates some phone functions, such as call cost limit. See Manage call costs on page 37. When the phone requires the PIN or PIN2 code, it displays Enter PIN code or Enter PIN2 code. Enter the code and select OK. Nokia 3595 User Guide 65 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 66 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Select Menu > Settings > Security settings > PIN code request. Enter the PIN code supplied by your service provider and select OK > On > OK. PIN code request You can activate the PIN code request to prevent unauthorized use of your phone. If you set the PIN code request to On, your phone will ask for the code each time you turn the phone on. When the phone is locked, calls still may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your phone. ACTIVATE 1 2 DEACTIVATE 1 2 Change You can change your PIN or PIN2 code to any 4-digit to 8-digit number. You must activate the PIN code request first. See PIN code request on page 66. 1 Select Menu > Settings > Security settings > PIN code request. Enter the PIN code supplied by your service provider and select OK > Off > OK. Select Menu > Settings > Security settings > Change access codes > Change PIN code. Enter the current PIN code, select OK, enter the new PIN code, and select OK. Enter the new PIN code again to verify and select OK. 2 3 Note: If you make a mistake while entering the code, Code Error appears. Start again at step 2 and be careful to enter the correct code. If you enter the wrong code three times in a row, the PIN code is blocked. To unblock the PIN code, you need a personal unblocking key (PUK) from your service provider.
PUK CODES The PUK and PUK2 codes are 4-digit to 8-digit codes that usually come from your service provider along with the SIM card. The PUK code unblocks a blocked PIN code, and the PUK2 code unblocks a blocked PIN2 code. If you block your phone, contact your service provider. When you enter the PUK code given by your service provider, the phone prompts you to enter and then confirm a new PIN code. 66 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 67 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM
SECURITY CODE Phone security The default security code is 12345. Nokia recommends that you change the default code immediately. You need the security code to access certain phone features. When the phone requires the security code, it displays Security code. Enter the code and select OK. If you enter an incorrect security code five times in a row, the phone will not accept the correct code for five minutes. Change the security code 1 Select Menu > Settings > Security settings > Change access codes > Change security code. Enter the current security code, select OK, enter the new security code, and select OK. Enter the security code again to verify and select OK. 2 3 Important: Keep the code secret and in a safe place, separate from the phone.
FIXED DIALING Select Menu > Settings > Security settings > Fixed dialing > On or Off. Enter your PIN2 code and select OK. If supported by your SIM card, this feature lets you restrict your outgoing calls to phone numbers included in the fixed dialing list or beginning with the same digits as an entry in the list. When fixed dialing is activated, calls still may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your phone. 1 2 Add numbers to list 1 2 3 4 5 Select Menu > Settings > Security settings > Fixed dialing > Number list. Select Add, enter your PIN2 code, and select OK. Enter a name to go with the restricted phone number and select OK. Enter the phone number you want to restrict and select OK. Repeat steps 24 for each number you want to add to the list. Nokia 3595 User Guide 67 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 68 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM
RESTRICT CALLS This network service, if available from your service provider, lets you restrict the calls your phone can make and receive. Check with your service provider for details. When calls are restricted, calls still may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your phone. Contact your service provider for the restriction password. Turn on call restrictions 1 Select Menu > Settings > Security settings > Call restrictions and one of the following options:
Outgoing callsCalls cannot be made. International callsCalls cannot be made to foreign countries. International except to home countryWhen abroad, calls can be made only within the current country and to your home country (that is, the country where your home network operator is located). Incoming callsCalls cannot be received. Incoming calls if roamingCalls cannot be received outside your home area. Cancel all call restrictionsTurns off all call restrictions. Calls can be made and received in the usual way. Note: If you select Cancel all call restrictions, the following steps are not available. Also, you can cancel call restrictions on each option, allowing restrictions on other options to stay in force. 2 After you have selected one of the above options, select one of the following options:
ActivateEnter the restriction password and select OK. CancelEnter the restriction password and select OK. Check statusView the call types with call restriction active. Change your restriction password 1 2 3 Select Menu > Settings > Security settings > Change restriction password. Enter your current password and select OK. Enter your new password, select OK, verify the new password, and select OK. 68 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 69 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Phone security
CLOSED USER GROUPS This network service, if available from your service provider, specifies the group of people to whom you can call and who can call you. Default resets the phone to use a user group that the SIM card owner has agreed upon with the service provider. When calls are limited to closed user groups, calls still may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your phone. Select Menu > Settings > Security settings > Closed user group > On or Off, enter the group number, and select OK. Nokia 3595 User Guide 69 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 70 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM 14 Mobile messages You can use mobile messages to keep in touch with friends, family, and business associates. Your Nokia 3595 mobile phone allows you to do the following:
Not all messaging features are available in all wireless networks. Contact your service provider for availability and subscription information. Send and receive text messages Communicate through e-mail Communicate online with other phone users Compose, send, receive and view multimedia messages (MMS) Send and receive picture messages
MESSAGE SETTINGS 2 Have a text messaging subscription through your service provider. Contact your service provider for the message center number. Save your message center number in your phone. Set up other message settings, such as GPRS. Before you can send and receive messages you must:
Save your message center number 1 Select Menu > Messages > Message settings > Text messages >
Sending profile. If your SIM supports more than one message profile, select a profile and Message center number. Enter your message center number and select OK. 3 Set the message mode You can choose the type of message sent by your phone. The message modes include text, e-mail, fax and page. This features appears only if your SIM card supports multiple message types. 1 Select Menu > Messages > Message settings > Text messages >
Sending profile. If your SIM supports more than one message profile, select a profile and Messages sent as > Text, E-mail, Page, or Fax. 2 In order to receive a converted message, the recipient needs to have the appropriate terminal device, such as a pager or fax machine. E-mail messages can be sent to a mobile phone or personal computer. 70 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 71 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Mobile messages Adjust font size You can modify the font size for message displays. The font size you select appears in messages when you are reading or editing and in message lists. Select Menu > Messages > Message settings > Other settings > Font size > Small font or Large font. Other message settings You can modify the other Sending profile message settings. The following list is dynamic. The order and number of items may vary, due to the SIM card configuration and network service availability. Check with your service provider for more information. To modify the other Sending profile message settings, select Messages > Message settings > Text messages > Sending profile and one of the following options:
Message validityAllows you to select the length of time that the message center will try to deliver a message. You can choose a time from one hour to one week. If the message center cannot deliver the message within this time, the message is deleted. Default recipient no.Allows you to specify a single recipient for all your messages. This option is not available when you choose Messages sent as e-mail. E-mail serverAllows you to store e-mail server information in your phone so that you do not have to enter the number each time you compose a new e-mail message. This option only shows up if you have set the message mode to E-mail. Contact your service provider for the server number. Delivery reportsAllows you to ask the network for a report about message delivery. Use GPRSAllows you to send your messages through GPRS. Reply via same centerAllows you to direct the recipient to reply through the same message center. Do not select Yes unless you know the recipient has the same service provider. Rename sending profileAllows you to name the profile. This option depends on SIM card and is not available for the Default profile. Nokia 3595 User Guide 71 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 72 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM
TEXT MESSAGES Select Menu > Messages > Text messages > Create message. Compose a message and select Options > Send. Enter the recipients phone number and select OK. You can use the text message feature to compose and send a short text message to another phone. Your device supports the sending of text messages beyond the normal 160-character limit. If your message exceeds 160 characters, it will be sent as a series of two or more messages. In the navigation bar, you can see the message length indicator counting backwards from 160. For example, 10 (2) means that you can still add 10 characters for the text to be sent as two messages. Using special (Unicode) characters, such as , , , , takes up more space. If there are special characters in your message, the indicator may not show the message length correctly. Before the message is sent, the device tells you if the message exceeds the maximum length allowed for one message. You can cancel sending by selecting Cancel or you can save the message in the inbox. Send 1 2 3 If you need to exit while writing the message, press the End key anytime. Later, select Menu > Messages > Text messages > Create message to return and finish writing the message. If you turn off the phone without saving the message, the message will be lost. When sending messages, your device may display the words Message Sent. This is an indication that the message has been sent by your device to the message center number programmed into your device. This is not an indication that the message has been received at the intended destination. For more details about messaging services, check with your service provider. Send to multiple recipients You can send the same message to more than one recipient. Before using this feature, the names of your recipients must be entered into Contacts. See Save names, numbers, and e-mail addresses on page 30. 1 2 3 Read When you receive a text message, the phone beeps and the message(s) received appears, where n is the number of messages. To read the message now, select Show. From the message screen, select Options > Sending options > Send to many. Select the persons name and Send. To add other names to the message, repeat step 2. icon and n 72 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 73 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Mobile messages Read a new text message later 1 When you receive a text message, select Exit. 2 When you want to read the message, select Menu > Messages > Text messages > Inbox. A list of message headers is displayed. Indicates that a text message has been read. Indicates that a text message has not been read. Select the message you want to read. If the message is long, use the scroll keys to scroll through the message. 3 4 Read linked messages Your phone can receive one long message (up to 459 characters) in sequences. You can start reading the first part before the phone has received the entire message. While viewing the message, you may see *some text missing* on the display. This is normal and the message content will be updated, as soon as the missing sequence arrives. If the memory is full, you may have to delete a message from your Inbox before your phone can update the missing text. Text message options While reading or viewing a message, you can select one of the following options. The following list is dynamic and the order and number of options may vary. DeleteAllows you to delete the message. ReplyAllows you to start your reply with an empty screen, a template, or with standard replies like Yes, No, Thank you, or Congrats. Use detailAllows you to extract phone numbers, e-mail addresses, or web addresses from the current message. The phone goes through and gathers all phone numbers, e-mail addresses or web addresses in the message, including the originating number or address. ForwardAllows you to send the message to another recipient. EditAllows you to modify the message. MoveAllows you to move the message to the Templates or Archive folder, for example. RenameAllows you to enter a new title for the message. Nokia 3595 User Guide 73 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 74 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Copy to calend.Allows you to copy the message to the phone calendar as a reminder note. This option is not available for picture messages. Message detailsAllows you to view the details of the message, like the senders name and phone number, reception date and time. Save pictureAllows you to save a picture to the template folder. This option only appears in the list if you receive a picture message.
E-MAIL MESSAGES You can send an e-mail message from the Messages menu. You can send an e-mail message from Contacts. You can send e-mail messages to friends and family directly from your phone if you sign up for this service with your service provider. There are two ways of sending an e-mail message.
Before you send e-mail messages, you can set up a profile to define the e-mail server. Contact your service provider for the e-mail server number. Define an e-mail sending profile If you use the e-mail feature on a regular basis, you may find it helpful to define an e-mail sending profile. This feature depends on your SIM card. Contact your service provide for more information about e-mail profiles. 1 2 3 4 5 Send FROM THE MESSAGES MENU 1 2 3 4 Select Menu > Messages > Message settings > Text messages > Sending profile. If your SIM card supports more than one message profile, select a profile. If your SIM card already has a profile called E-mail, go to step 5. Select Messages sent as > E-mail. Enter the e-mail server number, select Options > Accept. Select Menu > Messages > Text messages > Create SMS e-mail. Enter the e-mail address, select OK, enter a subject, and select OK. Enter a message and select Options > Send e-mail. If you have not defined an e-mail sending profile, enter the e-mail server number, then select OK. 74 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 75 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Mobile messages FROM CONTACTS First you must have an e-mail address for the person entered into Contacts. See Save names, numbers, and e-mail addresses on page 30. 1 At the start screen, press the Up scroll or Down scroll key to scroll to the name to whom you want to send an e-mail message. Select Details and the e-mail address. Select Options > Send e-mail. Enter a subject, select OK, enter a message, and select Options > Send e-mail. If you have not defined an e-mail sending profile, enter the e-mail server number and select OK. 2 3 4 5 Receive When you receive an e-mail message, the phone beeps and the message(s) received appears, where n is the number of messages. To read the message now, select Show. When reading a received e-mail message, you can choose other options, such as Reply or Forward. See Text message options on page 73 for a list of options. icon and n
STORE MESSAGES Preset folders There are preset folders in your phone. INBOX Messages are automatically stored in the Inbox folder after they have been read or if you press the End key when message received appears on the start screen. SENT ITEMS You can use the Sent items folder to store saved messages. ARCHIVE To make sure that certain messages will not be overwritten when memory becomes full, move some of your messages to the Archive folder. TEMPLATES Pictures and prewritten templates are stored in the Templates folder. From the message screen, select Options > Use template and the template you want. Nokia 3595 User Guide 75 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 76 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM My folders Keep your messages organized by creating custom folders and saving your messages there. ADD Select Menu > Messages > Text messages > My folders > Add, enter a name for the new folder, and select OK. DELETE Only folders created in My folders can be deleted. The Inbox, Sent items, Archive, and Templates folders are protected. When you delete a folder, all messages in the folder are deleted as well. 1 Select Menu > Messages > Text messages > My folders and the folder you want to delete. 2 Select Options > Delete folder > OK. Move a message to a folder While viewing the message, select Options > Move and the destination folder you want.
DELETE MESSAGES Read some of the unread messages and then delete them. Delete some of these messages from your folders. If your message memory becomes full, the message icon blinks in the display. You can do the following to create more space:
Single To delete a single message, you need to open it first. 1 Select Menu > Messages > Text messages and the folder containing the message you want to delete. Select the message you want to delete and Options > Delete > OK. 2 All messages in folders 1 2 Select Menu > Messages > Text messages > Delete messages. Select the folder or message type that you want to delete and OK. 76 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 77 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM
PICTURE MESSAGES Mobile messages Picture messages are like picture postcards. You can add text to the postcard before sending the message to a friend who has a compatible phone. You can find pictures under Menu > Messages > Text messages > Templates. Notes
This function can be used only if it is supported by your network operator or service provider. Only phones that offer picture message features can receive and display a picture message. Your phone has two types of pictures availablegraphic icons found in the Templates folder and images found in the Gallery. The pictures found in the Templates folder are black and white, the images found in the Gallery are color, and both display in the body of the message. A picture message can only be sent to a phone number, while a Gallery image can be sent as a multimedia message
(requires a GPRS connection) to either a phone number or an e-mail address. Each picture message is made up of several text messages. Therefore, sending one picture message may cost more than sending one text message. Contact your service provider for pricing information. Since pictures are saved in the phone memory, you cannot view them if you use your SIM card with another phone. Before sending a picture message, be sure to set the message mode to Text. See Set the message mode on page 70.
Send 1 Select Menu > Messages > Text messages > Templates and the picture you want to send. Select Options > Send > As text msg., enter the phone number, and select OK. 2 Attach a picture to a text message 1 2 Select Menu > Messages > Text messages > Create message. Compose a message, select Options > Insert picture and the picture you want to send. Select View > Insert > Options > Send, enter the phone number, and select OK. 3 Receive When you receive a picture message, the phone beeps and the message(s) received appears, where n is the number of messages. To read the message now, select Show. icon and n Nokia 3595 User Guide 77 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 78 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Read later 1 2 When you want to read the message, select Menu > Messages > Text After you have received a message and you want to read it later, select Exit. messages > Inbox and select the message you want. Save 1 While viewing the message, select Options > Save picture. 2 Enter a title for the picture and select OK. The picture is saved to the Templates folder. Save picture messages with edited text 1 While viewing the message, select Options > Edit text > As text msg. and make changes to the text. Select Options > Save message > Archive or Templates. If the phone prompts you to replace the original message, select Yes. 2 3
MULTIMEDIA MESSAGES This is a Network Service. Note: Only devices that offer compatible multimedia message or e-mail features can receive and display multimedia messages. Multimedia message objects may contain viruses or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. Do not open any attachment if you are not sure of the trustworthiness of the sender. A multimedia message can contain text, images, and sounds. Your phone has a multimedia message viewer for playing messages and a multimedia inbox for storing saved messages. Once you save the multimedia message, you can use the image as wallpaper or the sound as a ringing tone. This function can be used only if it is supported by your network operator or service provider. Only devices that offer compatible multimedia message or e-mail features can receive and display multimedia messages. 78 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 79 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Mobile messages The message size is under 45 KB. The message type and settings allow reception. Message receiving limitations Your phone can receive a multimedia message under the following conditions:
Define settings Before you can use the multimedia messaging service (MMS) feature, you need to define the way you want to receive the messages. The default setting of the multimedia messaging service is generally on. The appearance of a multimedia message may vary, depending on the receiving device. ALLOW MULTIMEDIA MESSAGES You can choose to receive all messages or to receive messages only when you are in the service providers home network. 1 Select Menu > Messages > Message settings > Multimedia msg. > Allow multimedia reception and one of the following options:
YesAllows all incoming messages to be received. In home systemAllows incoming messages to be received only if you are in the service providers home system. Select Incoming multimedia messages > Retrieve. 2 BLOCK MULTIMEDIA MESSAGES You can choose to not receive any multimedia messages. Select Menu > Messages > Message settings > Multimedia msg. > Allow multimedia reception > No. ADVERTISEMENTS Select Menu > Messages > Message settings > Multimedia msg. > Allow advertisements > Yes or No. CONNECTION SETTINGS Contact your service provider for information about downloading appropriate connection sets for MMS. Nokia 3595 User Guide 79 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 80 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Write and send 1 2 3 Select Messages > Multimedia messages > Create message. Enter the text of your message and select Options. To insert a picture or a sound clip, select Insert image or Insert sound, respectively, then open the folder you want, select the picture or sound clip, and Options > Insert. To insert a name from Contacts, select Options > More options >
Insert contact, the name you want, and Options > Insert contact. To insert a number, select Options > More options > Insert number, enter the number or search for it in Contacts, and select OK. To view the message before sending it, select Options > Preview. To send the message, select Options > Send to number or Send to e-mail. Enter the recipients number or e-mail address, or search for it in Contacts, and select OK. 4 5 6 7 8 It takes more time to send a multimedia message than to send a text message. While the multimedia message is being sent, the animated icon is displayed and you can use other functions on the phone. If there is an interruption while the message is being sent, the phone tries to resend it a few times. If this fails, the message will remain in the Outbox folder and you can try to resend it later. Read When you receive a multimedia message, the phone beeps and displays Multimedia message received. To read the message now, select Show. You can use the scroll keys to view the different elements of the message, for example, text, images, or MIDI tones. Read later To read the message later, select Exit. 80 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 81 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Mobile messages Options While viewing a message, select Options and one of the following options. The following list is dynamic and the order and number of options may vary. DetailsAllows you to view details of the file, such as the name, size, date, time, resolution, format, and copyright. Save imageAllows you to save the image when the graphic part of the multimedia message is active. The image is saved under Messages > Pictures. Delete messageAllows you to delete a saved multimedia message. ReplyReply to the sender of the message. Forward to no.Forward the message to another number. Fwd. to e-mailForward the message to an e-mail address. Message detailsView the messages sender, recipient(s), time, date, subject, size, and type. PlayAllows you to play the ringing tone when the sound clip part of the multimedia message is active. Save soundAllows you to save the ringing tone when the sound clip part of the multimedia message is active. The tone is saved under the ringing tone list. See Customize on page 55 for information about selecting a ringing tone.
INFO MESSAGE SERVICE With the info message network service, you can receive short text messages on various topics, such as weather and traffic conditions, from your service provider. Info message selections can be found under Menu > Messages > Info messages. For available topics and relevant topic numbers, contact your service provider.
SERVICE COMMAND EDITOR Use the Service command editor (found under Menu > Messages > Service command editor) to key in and send service requests (also known as USSD commands) to your service provider. For more information, contact your service provider. Nokia 3595 User Guide 81 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 82 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM 15 Mobile Internet Your phone has a built-in browser you can use to connect to selected services on the mobile Internet. You can view weather reports, check news or flight times, view financial information, make online purchases and much more.
NOTES ABOUT THE MOBILE INTERNET A technology called wireless application protocol (WAP) is to mobile devices what the World Wide Web (WWW) is to personal computers. Internet content on your personal computer is called a web page. Internet content on your mobile phone is called a page, WAP card, or a Deck of cards. If the WAP site designer has made a page too large to load on the phone, it will not be displayed in the browser. You will see an error message saying, "File too big to be loaded" and the browser will return to the previous page. GPRS GPRS is a technology used to send and receive data using short bursts or packets over the wireless network. GPRS allows you to stay connected to the mobile Internet. This feature allows for faster downloads of information and no time spent completing a dial-up connection. Applications using GPRS include the WAP browser and text messaging.
For information about how to track time spent online, see Data calls on page 38. For information about sending messages using GPRS, see the entry for Use GPRS under Other message settings on page 71. For availability, pricing, and subscription to GPRS services, contact your service provider.
Service provider Because mobile Internet content is designed to be viewed from your phone, your wireless service provider now becomes your mobile Internet service provider, as well. It is likely that your service provider has created a home page and set up your browser to go to this page when you log on to the mobile Internet. Once you are at your service providers home page, you will find links to a number of other sites. 82 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 83 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM
SET UP FOR BROWSING You should not need to do anything to set up your phone for browsing. Your service provider usually modifies the appropriate settings when you subscribe to the feature. Contact your service provider if you have problems using the browser. Mobile Internet
CONNECT Use the Services menu to connect to the mobile Internet and to your service providers home page. Select Menu > Services > Home. If you see an error message, the phone may not be set up for browsing. Contact your service provider to make sure that your phone is configured properly.
BROWSER OPTIONS The Services menu gives you the options shown in the following list. Some service providers may have customized the options on the Services menu. Contact your service provider for more information if any of the options shown here are not available. HomeStarts the browser and takes you to your service providers home page. BookmarksShows a list of all saved bookmarks. Bookmarks help you find a WAP site quickly. Service inboxAllows you to receive notifications from your service provider. Notifications may be about new e-mail messages, changes in stock prices or news headlines. SettingsProvides options for changing connection settings, appearance settings, and authority certificate. Go to addressAccepts an address you enter. Clear the cacheEmpties the browsers temporary memory and frees up space. It is advisable to empty your cache at the end of each session.
NAVIGATE Since the phone screen is much smaller than a computer screen, mobile Internet content is displayed in a different format than you may be used to seeing. This section shows simple guidelines for using the phone keys to navigate a WAP site and examples of how to read a WAP site. Nokia 3595 User Guide 83 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 84 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Phone keys
To enter special characters, press the * key. Use the Up scroll and Down scroll keys for vertical browsing. Use the 4 and 6 keys for horizontal browsing. To set up these keys for horizontal browsing, select Menu > Services > Settings > Appearance settings > Scroll mode > Numeric keys. To select a highlighted item, press the Talk key. To enter letters and numbers, press the 0-9 keys.
Examples of mobile Internet sites The following illustrations show most of the elements you may find on a mobile Internet site. These are examples only. 1) Header line shows the current mobile Internet site. 2) Inactive link appears as an underlined word. 3) Active link appears as a highlighted word. 1) 2) 3) 1) 2) 3) Use the Scroll up and Down scroll keys to scroll through the list of links. 1) Selection listBrackets [ ] appear when you have the option to enter information. 2) OptionsSelect Options to go to the sites menu and/or browser page. 3) BackSelect Back to return to the previous page. Data entry fieldBrackets [ ] around three dots appear when you need to enter information. In this example, you can enter your zip code to receive the local weather forecast. 84 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 85 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Mobile Internet
BOOKMARKS You can save addresses for your favorite sites as bookmarks. A bookmark helps you find a site again, just as a slip of paper helps you find a page in a book. Your device may have some bookmarks loaded for sites not affiliated with Nokia. Nokia does not warrant or endorse these sites. If you choose to access them, you should take the same precautions for security or content as you would with any Internet site. Add You can add up to 30 bookmarks. 1 2 You can set a bookmark to mobile.nokiausa.com, which gives you access to downloadable Java games, graphics, and ringing tones, if your service provider supports this feature. Contact your service provider for details. Add while browsing Select Menu > Services > Bookmarks > Options > Add bookmark. Select Menu > Services > Bookmarks > Options > New bookmark. Enter the address, select OK, enter a title, and select OK.
SECURITY ISSUES Empty the cache A cache is a memory location that is used to store data temporarily. If you have tried to access or have accessed confidential information requiring passwords, empty the cache after each use. The information or services you have accessed are stored in the cache. FROM THE MENU Select Menu > Services > Clear the cache. WHILE BROWSING Select Options > Clear the cache. Nokia 3595 User Guide 85 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 86 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Authority certificates To use some WAP services, such as banking services, you need an authority certificate. Using the certificate can help you to improve the security of connections between your phone and a WAP server. You can download the certificate from a WAP page if the WAP service supports the use of authority certificates. After the download, you can view the certificate, then save or delete it. If you save the certificate, it is added to the list of certificates in the phone. Your phone alerts you if the identity of the WAP server or WAP gateway cannot be verified or is not authentic. To view the list of authority certificates, select Menu > Services > Settings >
Certificates > Authority certificates > Certificate list.
GPRS In order to use GPRS, you must first subscribe to the network service. Contact your service provider for details. When you use GPRS to connect to the mobile Internet, you are making a data call. The following icons appear on the screen to show you the status of your connection. Appears in the left upper corner of the screen; indicates an active GPRS connection, for example, when you are using the WAP browser May appear in the left lower corner of the screen, under the signal strength bars, indicating a continuous GPRS connection, if you choose the Always online setting Indicates that circuit switched (CS) or voice calls are not possible when using GPRS for a data call Indicates that the GPRS connection has been interrupted by a voice call 86 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 87 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Mobile Internet Set up the connection Some service providers may have customized the options on the Services menu. Contact your service provider for more information if the options shown here are not available. GPRS may not be available in all wireless networks. The establishment and continuation of a GPRS and mobile Internet connection depends on network availability, service provider support, and signal strength. You can choose one of the following options from Menu > Services > Settings >
Edit active service settings > GPRS connection:
Always onlineThe GPRS connection is established when you turn your phone on. The connection continues in the background even after you exit the WAP browser, depending on network coverage. When neededThe GPRS connection is established when you use the WAP browser and is closed when you exit the WAP browser. The following options shows how to end your browsing session, depending on which option you have chosen for your GPRS connection.
Press the End key to return to the start screen if you have selected Always online. The GPRS connection remains in the background. Press the End key to end the GPRS connection if you have selected When needed. Press the End key twice to return to the start screen if you have selected When needed. Press and hold the End key to end browsing and disconnect from GPRS if you have selected When needed.
To answer the incoming call, press the Talk key. To reject the incoming call, press the End key. Receive a call while online If you are using the WAP browser over GPRS, you can still receive a voice call. Your data call is put on hold and you can choose to answer the call.
After you end your voice call, the GPRS connection automatically resumes. Make a call while online When you are browsing a WAP card and want to make a call to a number on the WAP page, you can select Use number. Your phone then searches the information on the WAP card for a string of numbers. You can then choose from the number or numbers displayed to place the call. An alternate way is to press the End key to disconnect from the mobile Internet, then place your call by searching Contacts for a name and number or by keying in the phone number. Nokia 3595 User Guide 87 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 88 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Make an emergency call while online If you are using GPRS to connect to the mobile Internet, you can end your data connection and then make an emergency call. 1 2 3 To close your mobile Internet connection, simply press the End key twice. Enter the emergency number for your present location (for example, 911). Press the Talk key.
DISCONNECT Select Options > Quit > Yes. OR Press the End key twice. 88 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 89 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Instant messaging (IM) 16 Instant messaging (IM) Take text messaging to the next level by experiencing instant messaging in a wireless environment. Engage in instant messaging (IM) with friends and family, as long as you all use the same IM service. Check with your wireless service provider for availability. Before you can start using IM on your phone, you must first subscribe to your wireless service providers text messaging service. While only SMS capability is required to use the service, GPRS improves the speed of instant messaging. You must also register with the IM service you want to use. See Register with an IM service on page 90 for more information. Note: Due to variations in IM and wireless service providers, you may not have access to all of the features described in this guide.
IM SERVICE PROVIDER ICONS Since each IM service has its own display text and icons associated with it, the display text and icons on your phone may appear differently for each IM service provider. If you have any questions about the differences in the various IM service providers display text and icons, contact your wireless service provider for more information. The following table shows examples of IM icons and their descriptions:
Icon Description Available for all Available for contacts/Do not disturb Appear offline Available with an alert set Offline with an alert set Blocked contact Nokia 3595 User Guide 89 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 90 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Icon Description Unread message/New message Read message Group invitation
REGISTER WITH AN IM SERVICE Before you can begin to use IM, you must register with an IM service to obtain an IM user name and password. You can obtain an IM user name and password by registering over the Internet (using your computer) with the IM service provider you have selected to use. During the registration process, you will have the opportunity to create the user name and password of your choice. For more information about signing up for IM services, contact your wireless service provider.
IM MENUS Offline Before you log into IM, the IM menu appears as follows:
Login Saved convers. IM provider Settings Online After you log into IM, the IM menu appears as follows:
Conversations IM contacts Add contact Group convers. IM availability Saved convers. Settings Blocked list Logout 90 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 91 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM
LOG IN Instant messaging (IM) The first time you use IM, you need to enter your user name. Every time you log in, you need to select the IM provider you want to use and you will receive screen prompts for your user name and password. You do not have to manually enter your user name after the first login; however, you must manually enter your password every time you log in. First time login 1 2 3 After first time login 1 Select Menu > IM > Login and your IM service provider. Enter your user name and select Options > OK. Enter your password and select Options > OK. Select Menu > IM > Login and your IM service provider. The User ID screen appears with your user name. Select Options > OK, enter your password, and select Options > OK. 2 After you have logged into IM initially, you have the option of a manual login or an automatic login. See Automatic login on page 96 for information on setting up automatic login.
SET YOUR AVAILABILITY You can determine if other users can tell whether you are available or not. From the IM online menu, select IM availability and one of the following options:
Available for allAll other users see your status as online and you receive availability information and messages from all other users. Avail. for cont.Even though just the contacts in IM contacts see your status as online, you receive availability information and messages from all other users. Appear offlineEven though all other users see your status as offline, you receive availability information and messages from all other users.
IM CONVERSATIONS You can send instant messages to anyone who uses the same IM service as you do and if you have that persons user name. You can also add that person to IM contacts during an IM conversation. See IM contacts on page 93 for more information. More than one IM conversation can be active at the same time. Nokia 3595 User Guide 91 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 92 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Conversation view The conversation view of your IM conversation shows your initial message at the bottom of the screen, followed by the reply. As the conversation progresses, the most recent message appears at the top of the screen, causing the last message to move down one level. The conversation is still active, even if you leave the conversation view. You can return to it when you want. 1 2 Write and send 1 2 From the IM online menu, select IM contacts > Select > Write to other. Enter the user name of the person to whom you want to send an instant message and select Options > OK. Select Options > Write, enter a message, and select Options > Send. From the IM online menu, select Conversations. Select the IM conversation you want and Open. 3 Write and send to contact 1 From the IM online menu, select IM contacts and the contact to whom you want to send a message. Select Chat > Options > Write, enter a message, and select Options > Send. 2 Receive and reply IN CONVERSATION VIEW When you receive an instant message, your phone beeps and the senders reply appears above your most recent message. Select Options > Write, enter a message, and select Options > Send. OUTSIDE CONVERSATION VIEW When you receive an instant message, your phone beeps, and a screen with the senders screen name appears, notifying you that you have received an instant message. Select Open > Options > Write, enter a message, and select Options > Send. Save 1 2 From the conversation view, select Options > Save. Keep the conversation name that appears in the display and select Options > Save. OR Select Clear as many times as necessary to delete the conversation name, enter the name you want, and select Options > Save. 92 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 93 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Instant messaging (IM) 2 View From either the IM online or offline menu, select Saved convers., and the conversation you want to view. Rename 1 From either the IM online or offline menu, select Saved convers., the conversation you want to rename, and Options > Rename. Select Clear as many times as necessary to delete the conversation name; then enter the new conversation name. Select Options > OK. 3 Delete From either the IM online or offline menu, select Saved convers., the conversation you want to delete, and Options > Delete. End IN CONVERSATION VIEW Select Back, the conversation you want to end, and End convers. OUTSIDE CONVERSATION VIEW From the IM online menu, select Conversations, the IM conversation you want to end, and End convers.
IM CONTACTS Add the names of your friends and family (with whom you want to interact frequently through IM) to IM contacts. Add 1 2 From the IM online menu, select Add contact. Enter the contacts user name, select Options > OK, The Nickname screen appears with the contacts user name. If you want to enter a nickname by which to identify the contact, select Clear as many times as necessary to delete the user name. Then, enter the nickname. This is the name that appears in IM contacts. Select Options > OK. 3 Nokia 3595 User Guide 93 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 94 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM DURING IM SESSION 1 2 2 3 From the conversation view, select Options > Add. The User ID screen appears with the contacts user name. Select Options > OK. The Nickname screen appears with the contacts user name. If you want to enter a nickname by which to identify the contact, select Clear as many times as necessary to delete the user name. Then, enter the nickname. This is the name that appears in IM contacts. Select Options > OK. 3 ADD FROM CONVERSATION MENU 1 From the IM online menu, select Conversations and the conversation with the contact you want to add. Select Add contact. The User ID screen appears with the contacts user name. Select Options > OK. The Nickname screen appears with the contacts user name. If you want to enter a nickname by which to identify the contact, select Clear as many times as necessary to delete the user name. Then, enter the nickname. This is the name that appears in IM contacts. Remove From the IM online menu, select IM contacts, the contact you want to remove, and Remove contact > OK. Block 1 From the IM online menu, select IM contacts and the contact from whom you want to block messages. Select Block contact > OK. OR During a conversation with a contact, select Options. Select Block contact > OK. 2 1 2 94 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 95 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Instant messaging (IM) Unblock 1 2 From the IM online menu, select IM Contacts and the contact from whom you want to unblock messages. Select Unblock > OK. OR From the IM online menu, select Blocked list. Select the contact and Unblock > OK. To unblock other contacts, repeat step 2. 1 2 3 View blocked list From the IM online menu, select Blocked list. Alert SET You can set an alert for a contact to notify you when the contacts availability changes. From the IM online menu, select IM contacts and the contact for whom you 1 want to set an alert. Select Set alert. 2 REMOVE 1 From the IM online menu, select IM contacts and the contact for whom you want to remove an alert. Select Remove alert. 2
GROUP CHAT SESSIONS You can create your own private chat groups from IM contacts. See IM contacts on page 93. Create private chat group From the IM online menu, select Group convers., enter the group name (up to 10 characters), and select Options > OK > Options > OK. Members ADD 1 2 3 4 Select Options > Group members > Send. Select the contact whom you want to invite to the group chat. Enter the invitation text and select Options > Send. To add other members to the group, repeat steps 23. Nokia 3595 User Guide 95 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 96 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM From the group list, select the member you want to remove. Select Options > Remove member. REMOVE 1 2 Invitations When you receive an invitation to a group chat, the New invitation received screen appears, with the user name of the invitation sender and the group name displaying. You can either accept or reject the invitation. Select Accept > Options > OK or select Reject.
IM SETTINGS You can customize your IM settings, depending upon the IM service you have selected. Select Settings from either the IM online or offline menu and the following options appear:
Screen nameAllows you to change your screen name (nickname). Automatic loginAllows you to set your login to the automatic state. Sort contactsAllows you to display your contacts order either Alphabetically or By status. Status updatesAllows you to update your contacts online availability (presence). NetworkAllows you to view your User ID. Screen name You can enter a screen name (nickname) that is 120 characters in length. 1 2 Automatic login You can use automatic login after you have logged in with your user name and password. From either the IM online or offline menu, select Settings > Automatic login >
Automatic login on. Sort contacts From either the IM online or offline menu, select Settings > Sort contacts >
Alphabetically or By status. From either the IM online or offline menu, select Settings > Screen name. Enter your screen name and select Options > OK. 96 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 97 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Instant messaging (IM) Set up presence status updates Presence allows you and other users to know who is online and available to chat. You can set your phone to automatically update a contacts presence status every time it is changed. From either the IM online or offline menu, select Settings > Status updates > On.
LOG OFF SERVICE From the IM online menu, you can exit the IM application, but still stay connected to the IM service. This enables you to receive instant messages from your contacts, when using your phone for other purposes; for example, if you are playing a game. If you are connected to your IM service, but you have not used your IM application for some time, you may be automatically disconnected from the IM service. The next time you open the IM application, you will receive a message, Not connected and you will be taken to the offline menu to log in again. To disconnect from the IM service, you must log out from the IM online menu. You will be taken to the IM offline menu to log in again or exit the IM application. Exit From the IM online menu, select Exit. If you open IM again, you do not need to log in again. Log out From the IM online menu, select Logout > OK and the IM offline menu appears. If you want to exit IM, select Exit. Nokia 3595 User Guide 97 Copyright 2004 Nokia
1 2 3 4 | Manual 2 | Users Manual | 1.15 MiB | December 04 2004 |
3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 98 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM 17 Your personal digital assistant Your Nokia 3595 mobile phone has many useful features for organizing your everyday life, including a calendar, alarm clock, calculator, to-do list, and stopwatch. In this chapter, youll learn how to use your phone as a personal digital assistant.
CALENDAR The calendar shows a month view and day view. You can use the calendar to keep track of reminders, calls you need to make, and birthdays. You can also set an alarm for calendar notes. View To view todays date in the calendar, select Menu > Organizer > Calendar. The first time you access the calendar, your phone prompts you to enter the time and todays date. Navigate When you open the calendar, the month view shows todays date highlighted. To move the cursor to a new date:
Make a note When you make a note in your calendar, you can choose from the following four types:
Press the 2 key to scroll up one week. Press the 4 key to scroll left. Press the 6 key to scroll right. Press the 8 key to scroll down one week. Reminder Call Birthday Meeting 98 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 99 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Your personal digital assistant REMINDER 1 2 3 Select Menu > Organizer > Calendar > Options > Make a note > Reminder. Enter your note and select Options > Save. Select Alarm on, enter a time, and select OK > am or pm. OR Select Alarm off. CALL 1 2 3 4 Select Menu > Organizer > Calendar > Options > Make a note > Call. Enter the phone number and select Options > Save. Enter the persons name and select Options > Save. Enter a time, select OK > am or pm, and one of the following options:
No alarm Silent With tone If you select Silent or With tone, you can then select a time. BIRTHDAY 1 2 3 Select Menu > Organizer > Calendar > Options > Make a note > Birthday. Enter the persons name and select Options > Save. Enter the persons year of birth, select OK, and one of the following options:
No alarm Silent With tone If you select Silent or With tone, you can then select a day and time. MEETING 1 2 3 4 Select Menu > Organizer > Calendar > Options > Make a note > Meeting. Enter the subject of the meeting and select Options > Save. Enter the meeting location and select Options > Save. Enter the meeting start time, select OK > am or pm, enter the meeting end time, and select OK > am or pm and one of the following options:
No alarm Silent With tone If you select Silent or With tone, you can then select a time. Nokia 3595 User Guide 99 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 100 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM View notes After you make a few calendar notes, you can view the days events. 1 2 Select Menu > Organizer > Calendar and the date you want. Select Options > View day.
ALARM CLOCK The alarm clock feature is based on the phone internal clock and sounds an alert at a time you specify. The alarm clock works even if you turn your phone off. Set 1 Select Menu > Organizer > Alarm clock, enter the alarm time in hhmm format, and select OK. If you have selected the am/pm format, select either am or pm. 2 Alarm PHONE ON Select Stop to shut off the alarm. OR Select Snooze. The alarm stops and sounds again in ten minutes. If you let the alarm sound for one minute without pressing a key, it stops for ten minutes, and then sounds again. PHONE OFF If the alarm time is reached while the device is switched off, the device switches itself on and starts sounding the alarm tone. If you select Stop, the device asks whether you want to activate the device for calls. Select No to switch off the device or Yes to make and receive calls. Do not select Yes when wireless phone use may cause interference or danger. Turn off Select Menu > Organizer > Alarm clock > Off. 100 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 101 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Your personal digital assistant
BUSINESS CARDS Your phone can send or receive an electronic business card as a short text message. The business card can have either:
A name and number or A name, multiple numbers (home, work, fax, mobile), an e-mail address, web address and street address if you have entered this information in Contacts. 2 3 If you are exchanging business cards with multiple numbers and addresses, both the receiving and sending phone must have a contact list that supports these kinds of entries. Send 1 At the start screen, press the Up scroll or Down scroll key to scroll to the name to whom you want to send a business card. Select Details > Options > Send bus. card > Via text msg.. If the name in Contacts has multiple numbers, select one of the following options:
Primary numberAllows you to send a name and number only. All detailsAllows you to send a name, multiple numbers, e-mail, web, and street address. Enter the number for the receiving phone and select OK. 4 Receive Your phone can accept and receive an electronic business card from a compatible phone, if it is one of the following types:
If you press the End key at any time before saving the business card, the business card will be deleted. 1 When your phone displays Business card received, select Show. 2 Nokia Smart Messaging compact business card V-card format After viewing the business card, select Options and one of the following options:
SaveAllows you to keep the information in Contacts. DiscardAllows you to delete the business card.
CALCULATOR The phone calculator adds, subtracts, multiplies, divides, and computes square and square root functions. You can also use the calculator to convert currency. Note: This calculator has limited accuracy and is designed for simple calculations. Nokia 3595 User Guide 101 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 102 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Basic calculations 1 Select Menu > Extras > Calculator and enter the first number in the calculation. Note: Press the # key to enter a decimal point and select Clear to delete any errors. To add (+), press the * key once; to subtract (-), press the * key twice; to multiply (), press the * key three times; and to divide (/), press the * key four times. To perform a square or square root calculation, select Options > Square or Square root. Enter the second number in the calculation and select Options > Equals. 2 Convert currency Note: When you change base currency, you must enter the new rates because all previously set exchange rates are reset to zero. SET THE EXCHANGE RATE 1 Select Menu > Extras > Calculator > Options > Exchange rate > Foreign units converted to home units or Home units converted to foreign units. Enter the exchange rate and select OK. 2 The exchange rate remains in the phone memory until you replace it. CONVERT A CURRENCY AMOUNT 1 2 Select Menu > Extras > Calculator and enter the amount to be converted. Select Options and one of the following options:
To homeAllows you to convert to domestic units. To foreignAllows you convert to foreign units.
TO-DO LIST You can keep track of your tasks with the to-do list feature. You may be able to save up to 30 notes, depending on how long the notes are. Add a to-do note When you add a new note, the default priority is Medium (2). You can change the priority to High (1) or Low (3). 1 2 Select Menu > Organizer > To-do list > Options > Add. Enter your note, select Options > Save, and the priority you want. 102 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 103 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Your personal digital assistant Use predictive text When entering your to-do note, you can use the built-in dictionary to speed things up. See Text entry on page 26. 1 When entering your note, select Options > Predictive text. 2 Select the language you want and continue entering your note.
STOPWATCH Your phone has a stopwatch that can be used to track time at sporting events or other occasions. The stopwatch displays time in hours, minutes, seconds and fractions of a second. Time 1 2 Split time You can use the split time function for such things as a long distance race when you need to pace yourself. 1 Select Menu > Extras > Stopwatch > Split timing > Start. Select Stop to end the timer. Select Menu > Extras > Stopwatch > Split timing > Start > Split. The timer continues to run. The split time appears below the running time. Select Stop to end the split timer. 2 If you split the time more than once, the new measured time appears at the beginning of the list. You can scroll to see previous measured times. Lap time You can use the lap time function when you want to track how long it takes to complete each cycle or lap. 1 2 Select Menu > Extras > Stopwatch > Lap timing > Start. If you want to take a lap time, select Lap. The clock stops, then starts immediately from zero. The lap time appears below the running time. If you take more than one lap time, the new measured time appears at the beginning of the list. You can scroll to see previous measured times. Select Stop to end the lap timer and to display the total time at the top of the screen. 3 Nokia 3595 User Guide 103 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 104 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Save times 1 While the timer is running, select Stop > Options > Save. 2 Enter a name for the measurement and select OK. If you do not enter a name, the total time is used as the default title for the lap time. View times You can view saved times, which are listed in the order they were saved. Select Menu > Extras > Stopwatch > View times and the time you want to view. Delete times You can delete times from the stop watch memory. You can delete times one at time or delete all the times at once. ALL Select Menu > Extras > Stopwatch > Delete times > Delete all > OK. ONE BY ONE 1 2 Select Menu > Extras > Stopwatch > Delete times > One by one. Select the time you want to delete and Delete > OK. OR Select Menu > Extras > Stopwatch > View times. Select the time you want to delete and Options > Delete times > OK. 1 2 Stopwatch options You can select the following options when using the stopwatch:
StartAllows you to start timing again after the timing has stopped. If the maximum amount of laps has been saved, this option is not available. SaveAllows you to save and name the last measured time. If the stopwatch memory is full, you will be prompted to delete saved times. ResetAllows you to reset the stopwatch. Note about stopwatch operation Using the stopwatch or allowing it to run in the background when using other features increases the demand on battery power and reduces the battery life. If you press the End key and return to the start screen, the clock continues to run in the background. To return to the Stopwatch function, select Menu > Extras > Stopwatch > Continue. 104 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 105 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Your personal digital assistant
SYNCHRONIZE CONTACTS AND CALENDAR Your phone has the ability to synchronize the Contacts and Calendar data with remote devices. Using the synchronization feature (SyncML), data such as names, numbers, and e-mail addresses stored in your contact list, or day notes and reminders from the calendar can be exchanged with other devices through a synchronization service provider. After synchronization, the data in the phone will be the same as the data contained in the host database. Before you begin Before you can begin to use SyncML, you must verify your service provider offers this feature. If your service provider does offer SyncML, you must set up an account with a SyncML service provider. For more information about signing up for synchronization services, contact your wireless service provider. Automatic configuration Your wireless service provider can automatically configure your phone with the correct synchronization settings by using SMS. This can only take place while your phone is in idle mode. Contact your service provider for more information. Even though it is highly recommended that your service provider configure the correct synchronization settings for you, it is helpful for you to know the meaning of the settings. To view the synchronization settings, select Menu > Connectivity >
Synchronize > Settings > Active Internet sync. settings or Custom. active Internet sync. and one of the following options:
Active Internet sync. settingsAllows you to select which synchronization set to activate. You have the option of renaming the set. There are four sets available. Custom. active Internet sync. settingsAllows you to customize the active synchronization set from a set of options, which are shown in the following table:
Choice What it does Settings name Allows the synchronization set to be renamed. Data to be synchronized Allows the selection of the databases to be synchronized. When this setting is selected, there are two options available, Contacts or Calendar, which will be implemented during future synchronization sessions. Database addresses Allows the database address to be entered for the databases that are to be synchronized. Nokia 3595 User Guide 105 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 106 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Choice User name Password What it does Allows creation or change of a user name for authorization with the synchronization server. If a user name has been previously entered, it appears. Allows a password to be established or changed, which is used to authenticate the user name while connecting with the synchronization server. If the password or user name is changed in the phone without also changing them with the synchronization service provider, the data will not be able to be synchronized. Synchronization Server Allows the input of the name of the synchronization server used to synchronize the data. Start During the synchronization process, it is not possible to access the database where your data is stored. However, you can cancel the synchronization process by selecting Quit or pressing the End key. It is not possible to place or receive calls, including emergency calls, during synchronization. To place a call, you must cancel the synchronization process. 1 Select Menu > Connectivity > Synchronize > Synchronize > Yes. Once all selected databases have been synchronized, a confirmation note appears, indicating which databases have been synchronized. 2 When the process is complete, select OK to return to the start screen. 106 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 107 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM 18 Fun and games
GAMES Fun and games Challenge yourself or a friend to one of the four fun games in your phone.
In Air Glide, you try to land the glider in the zone. You must avoid running into birds because they will destroy the glider. In Bowling, you try to score as many points as possible. Hit strikes and spares as you go for glory and monitor your progress on the high score chart. In Sky Diver, your goal is to score as many points as you can by skydiving through target rings and parachuting into the landing area of the jump zone. In Backgammon, you can play one of the worlds most popular and enduring games. Use a doubling cube which allows you to successively double the points at stake over a game while you play.
Select Menu > Games > Select game and the game you want. Select Options > Open > New game. Start 1 2 Adjust settings Select Menu > Games > Settings and one of the following options:
Game soundsUsed to turn game sound effects On or Off. Game lightsUsed to turn screen lights On or Off during game play only. ShakesUsed to turn game vibrating effects On or Off. Control AIR GLIDE Press the 4 key to move the glider to the left and press the 6 key to move it to the right. You can select the level of play to be either easy or difficult. 1 2 BOWLING Press the 4 key to move the ball to the left and press the 6 key to move the ball to the right. Press the 5 key to select the speed and spin of the ball and to roll the ball down the lane. Select Menu > Games > Select game > Air Glide > Options > Open. Select Game level > Easy or Difficult. Nokia 3595 User Guide 107 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 108 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM SKY DIVER The onscreen information for Sky Diver shows altitude on the left, wind speed and direction in the center, distance and direction to the landing zone on the right. Fire flares the parachute and slows the skydiver down. Too much flaring will cause the skydiver to stall. The default control keys are, as follows:
The 2 key makes the sky diver lean forward. The 8 key makes the sky diver lean backward. The 4 key rotates the sky diver to the left. The 6 key rotates the sky diver to the right. The 5 key fires open the parachute. You can redefine the controls by selecting the keys you want. 1 Select Menu > Games > Select game > Sky Diver > Options > Open >
Options > Controls > Define keys. Select each key to which you want to assign the up, down, left, right, and fire controls. 2 Note: You cannot exit this option until you have define all five controls. BACKGAMMON You can select and move bricks according to die throws. Black bricks are moved clockwise, white bricks counter-clockwise. You can move the cursor by pressing the 4 and 6 keys, but it can only be moved to valid points. Press the 5 key to select and deselect bricks. Press the 0 key to zoom in on dice. During game play, press the Left selection key to access a menu for doubling and statistics. Press the Right selection key to end the game. Delete You can delete games from the phone memory to free more memory. Important: Once you delete a game from the game downloads, you cannot download it back into the Games menu. You can only download it into the Applications menu. 1 2 Select Menu > Games > Select game. Select the game you want and Options > Delete > OK. 108 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 109 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Fun and games Downloads You can connect to game downloads on the mobile Internet by using your WAP browser, if this service is available from your service provider. Check with your service provider for availability and details for use. Select Menu > Games > Game downlds. and the bookmark you want to launch. If the game you download has not been approved by Nokia, it will likely be downloaded to the Applications menu. Generally, games accessed through the Games menu were either preloaded on your phone or downloaded from a website containing games approved by Nokia.
JAVA APPLICATIONS Your Nokia 3595 mobile phone has an Applications menu for downloading and storing Java applications or midlets. Your phone may come preloaded with midlets specially designed for your phone. Examples of downloadable Java applications include interactive games, animations, sports training calendars, and map applications. Launch an application 1 Select Menu > Applications > Select app. and the application you want to launch. Select Options > Open. 2 If an application uses the whole display area, no selection key names are displayed. Press one of the selection keys to show the options list. Then, select one of the options or select Back to continue with the application. Check available memory Before you download new applications to your Nokia 3595 mobile phone, be sure to check the available memory. 1 2 Select Menu > Applications > Memory. Press the Down scroll key to display how the memory is being used between phone applications and games. Select Back to return to the menu. 3 Nokia 3595 User Guide 109 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 110 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Download an application You can download new Java applications from the mobile Internet. Use the WAP browser to find an appropriate application. Important: Only install applications from sources that offer adequate protection against harmful software. 1 2 Select Menu > Applications > App. downloads. If applicable, select More bookmarks and the bookmark that contains the application you want to download. See Connect on page 83 for more information about connecting to the WAP browser. Choose other application options When viewing the list of applications, select Options to access the following choices:
OpenAllows you to launch an application. DeleteAllows you to delete the application or application set from the phone. Web accessAn application may require web access to make updates. You can restrict the application from accessing the mobile Internet. Your choices include Ask first, Allowed, and Not allowed. Update versionAllows you to check if a new version of the application is available for download from mobile Internet services. Web pageAllows you to check on additional information for the application from Internet Mobile Services. Web page is shown only if an Internet address has been provided with the application. Serv. settingsAllows you to select specific service settings for certain applications. Your phone is set to use the default service settings for the browser. DetailsAllows you to view information about the application, for example, the name, version number, vendor, a brief description, or memory size. 110 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 111 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM
CONVERTER Fun and games This application converts many common unit types. Switch the conversion direction Select Menu > Applications > Select app. > Converter > Options > Open. Select Options to display the following options:
with the Up scroll key and the Down scroll key. Press the * key for the minus (-) sign and press the # key for the decimal point. 1 2 Clear allReset the application. Reverse conv.Toggle the unit conversion direction. Set conversionSet a unit conversion to a certain state that always occurs when you enter the application. The unit types that are available for conversion are:
Weight Length
Area
Volume ModifyAdd new conversions or adjust exchange rates. InstructionsDisplay instructions for use. Change signToggle the value of the unit from positive (+) to negative (-) and vice versa. Temperature Currency Nokia 3595 User Guide 111 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 112 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM 19 Enhancements If you want to enhance phone functionality, a range of enhancements is available for you. You can select any of these items to help accommodate your specific communication needs. For availability of these and other enhancements, contact your dealer. Stylish carrying cases that protect your Nokia 3595 mobile phone are available for purchase and can be located at www.nokiausa.com.
POWER
1000-mAh Li-Ion Battery (BLC-2) Standard Travel Charger (ACP-7) Travel Charger (ACP-12) Compact Desktop Charging Stand (DCV-10) Battery Charging Stand (DDC-1)
AUDIO Headset (HDC-5) Headset (HDE-2) Boom Headset (HDB-5) Retractable Headset (HDC-10)
Mobile Inductive Loopset (LPS-3)
Phone Adapter (HDA-9)
CAR
Mobile Holder (MBC-15S) Headrest Handsfree (BHF-1)
Express Car Kit (CARK-125)
Full Car Kit (CARK-134)
Mobile Charger (LCH-9)
Mobile Charger (LCH-12) 112 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 113 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM 20 Reference information Reference information
BATTERY INFORMATION Charging and discharging Your device is powered by a rechargeable battery. The full performance of a new battery is achieved only after two or three complete charge and discharge cycles. The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times but it will eventually wear out. When the talk and standby times are noticeably shorter than normal, buy a new battery. Use only Nokia approved batteries, and recharge your battery only with Nokia approved chargers designated for this device. Unplug the charger from the electrical plug and the device when not in use. Do not leave the battery connected to a charger. Overcharging may shorten its lifetime. If left unused, a fully charged battery will lose its charge over time. Temperature extremes can affect the ability of your battery to charge. Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Never use any charger or battery that is damaged. Do not short-circuit the battery. Accidental short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object such as a coin, clip, or pen causes direct connection of the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals of the battery. (These look like metal strips on the battery.) This might happen, for example, when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the connecting object. Leaving the battery in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in summer or winter conditions, will reduce the capacity and lifetime of the battery. Always try to keep the battery between 59F and 77F (15C and 25C). A device with a hot or cold battery may not work temporarily, even when the battery is fully charged. Battery performance is particularly limited in temperatures well below freezing. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire! Dispose of batteries according to local regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose as household waste.
ENHANCEMENTS A few practical rules about accessories and enhancements:
When you disconnect the power cord of any accessory or enhancement, grasp Keep all accessories and enhancements out of the reach of small children.
and pull the plug, not the cord. Check regularly that enhancements installed in a vehicle are mounted and are operating properly. Installation of any complex car enhancements must be made by qualified personnel only. Nokia 3595 User Guide 113 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 114 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM
ENHANCEMENTS, BATTERIES, AND CHARGERS Check the model number of any charger before use with this device. This device is intended for use when supplied with power from the standard travel charger (ACP-7). Warning: Use only batteries, chargers, and enhancements approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The use of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty, and may be dangerous. For availability of approved enhancements, please check with your dealer. When you disconnect the power cord of any enhancement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord. Your device and its enhancements may contain small parts. Keep them out of reach of small children.
CARE AND MAINTENANCE Your device is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The suggestions below will help you protect your warranty coverage and enjoy your device for many years.
Keep the device dry. Precipitation, humidity, and all types of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If your device does get wet, remove the battery and allow the device to dry completely before replacing it. Do not use or store the device in dusty, dirty areas. Its moving parts and electronic components can be damaged. Do not store the device in hot areas. High temperatures can shorten the life of electronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics. Do not store the device in cold areas. When the device returns to its normal temperature, moisture can form inside the device and damage electronic circuit boards. Do not attempt to open the device other than as instructed in this guide. Do not drop, knock, or shake the device. Rough handling can break internal circuit boards and fine mechanics. Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong detergents to clean the device. Do not paint the device. Paint can clog the moving parts and prevent proper operation. Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modifications, or attachments could damage the device and may violate regulations governing radio devices.
All of the above suggestions apply equally to your device, battery, charger, or any enhancement. If any device is not working properly, take it to the nearest authorized service facility for service. 114 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 115 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM
ADDITIONAL SAFETY INFORMATION Reference information Operating environment Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area and always switch off your device when its use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. Use the device only in its normal operating positions. To maintain compliance with radio frequency exposure guidelines only use accessories approved by Nokia for use with this device. When the device is on and being worn on the body, always use an approved carrying case. Medical devices Operation of any radio transmitting equipment, including wireless phones, may interfere with the functionality of inadequately protected medical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the medical device to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off your phone in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy. PACEMAKERS Pacemaker manufacturers recommend that a minimum separation of 6 in (15.3 cm) be maintained between a wireless phone and a pacemaker to avoid potential interference with the pacemaker. These recommendations are consistent with the independent research by and recommendations of Wireless Technology Research. To minimize the potential for interference, persons with pacemakers should
Always keep the device more than 6 in (15.3 cm) from their pacemaker when the device is switched on Not carry the device in a breast pocket Hold the device to the ear opposite the pacemaker
If you have any reason to suspect that interference is taking place, switch off your device immediately. HEARING AID Some digital wireless devices may interfere with some hearing aids. If interference occurs, consult your service provider. Nokia 3595 User Guide 115 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 116 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Vehicles RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles such as electronic fuel injection systems, electronic antiskid (antilock) braking systems, electronic speed control systems, air bag systems. For more information, check with the manufacturer or its representative of your vehicle or any equipment that has been added. Only qualified personnel should service the device, or install the device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty that may apply to the device. Check regularly that all wireless device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in the same compartment as the device, its parts, or enhancements. For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that an air bags inflate with great force. Do not place objects, including installed or portable wireless equipment in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If in-vehicle wireless equipment is improperly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result. Potentially explosive environments Switch off your device when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions. Potentially explosive atmospheres include areas where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Switch off the device at refuelling points such as near gas pumps at service stations. Observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, storage, and distribution areas, chemical plants or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often but not always clearly marked. They include below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage facilities, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane), and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust or metal powders. FCC regulations prohibit using your wireless device while in the air. The use of wireless telephones in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the wireless telephone network, and may be illegal. Failure to observe these instructions may lead to suspension or denial of telephone services to the offender, legal action, or both. 116 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 117 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Reference information EMERGENCY CALLS Important: Wireless phones, including this phone, operate using radio signals, wireless networks, landline networks, and user-programmed functions. Because of this, connections in all conditions cannot be guaranteed. You should never rely solely on any wireless phone for essential communications like medical emergencies. To make an emergency call:
1 2 3 If the phone is not on, switch it on. Check for adequate signal strength. Some networks may require that a valid SIM card is properly inserted in the phone. Press the End key as many times as needed to clear the display and ready the phone for calls. Key in the official emergency number for your present location. Emergency numbers vary by location. Press the Talk key. 4 If certain features are in use, you may first need to turn those features off before you can make an emergency call. Consult this guide or your service provider. When making an emergency call, give all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Your wireless phone may be the only means of communication at the scene of an accident. Do not end the call until given permission to do so. Nokia 3595 User Guide 117 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 118 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Certification Information (SAR) THIS MODEL PHONE MEETS THE GOVERNMENT'S REQUIREMENTS FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES. Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the emission limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S. Government. These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines and establish permitted levels of RF energy for the general population. The guidelines are based on standards that were developed by independent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The standards include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure standard for wireless mobile phones employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6W/kg.* Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions accepted by the FCC with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR level of the phone while operating can be well below the maximum value. This is because the phone is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a wireless base station antenna, the lower the power output. Before a phone model is available for sale to the public, it must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not exceed the limit established by the government-adopted requirement for safe exposure. The tests are performed in positions and locations
(for example, at the ear and worn on the body) as required by the FCC for each model. The highest SAR value for this model phone as reported to the FCC:
When tested for use at the ear -
FCCID # GMLNPM-10 is 1.08 W/kg FCCID # GMLNPM-10X is 1.19W/kg When worn on the body, as described in this user guide:
FCCID # GMLNPM-10 is 0.73 W/kg FCCID # GMLNPM-10X is 0.90 W/kg
(Body-worn measurements differ among phone models, depending upon available accessories and FCC requirements). While there may be differences between the SAR levels of various phones and at various positions, they all meet the government requirement. 118 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 119 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Reference information The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this model phone with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines. SAR information on this model phone is on file with the FCC and can be found under the Display Grant section of http://www.fcc.gov/oet/fccid after searching on FCC ID GMLNPM-10 and GMLNPM-10X. For body worn operation, this phone has been tested and meets the FCC RF exposure guidelines for use with an accessory that contains no metal and that positions the handset a minimum of 5/8 inch (1.5 cm) from the body. Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines. If you do not use a body-worn accessory and are not holding the phone at the ear, position the handset a minimum of 5/8 inch (1.5 cm) from your body when the phone is switched on.
*In the United States and Canada, the SAR limit for mobile phones used by the public is 1.6 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over one gram of tissue. The standard incorporates a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting requirements and the network band. For SAR information in other regions please look under product information at www.nokia.com/us. Nokia 3595 User Guide 119 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 120 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM
BATTERIES This section provides information about the battery in the phone. Be aware that the information in this section is subject to change. Note: The phone uses a lithium ion (Li-Ion) battery. Dispose of used batteries in accordance with any local regulations. Do not dispose of as household waste. The tables shown in this section provide information about the batteries that are available for your phone, charging times with the standard travel charger (ACP-7), talk times, and standby times. Consult your service provider for more information. Charging times The charging times listed below are approximate. Battery option ACP-7 Charger 3.5 h BLC-2 Li-Ion Battery 1000 mAh Standby and talk times The times shown in the following table are estimates only and represent a range for either standby or talk times (not a combination of both). The operation time of the battery depends on conditions such as:
Transmitting power level Signal (distance between the phone and the base station) Network parameters defined by the operator Phone use (WAP, games, SMS) Charging procedure used Battery option Talk time Standby time BLC-2 Li-Ion Battery 1000 mAh up to 5.5 h up to 10 d 120 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 121 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM 21 Technical information Technical information Feature Weight Size Frequency Range Specification 107 g with BLC-2 1000 mAh battery Length 119 mm (4.68 in) Width 50 mm (1.97 in) Depth 23 mm (0.90 in) GSM 850 824.2 to 848.8 MHz (TX) 869.2 to 893.8 MHz (RX) GSM 1900 1850.2 to 1909.8 MHz (TX) 1930.2 to 1989.8 MHz (RX) Transmitter Output Power Battery Voltage Operating Temperature GSM 850 2 W GSM 1900 1 W 3.6 V dc nominal 3.6 V dc for car kit 14 F to + 131 F
(-10 C to + 55 C) Networks Contacts GSM 850 MHz/1900 MHz Up to 500 contacts in the phone. Each contact holds up to 5 numbers and 3 text fields
(dynamic memory). Check with your SIM card provider or carrier for information about SIM card memory capacity. Nokia 3595 User Guide 121 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 122 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM 22 Troubleshooting This section provides a table that lists some of the most commonly encountered problems and provides possible causes and solutions. Problem Possible cause Possible solution My phone is not charging. The charger and the phone are not properly connected. Securely connect the charger to the phone. My phone is not making/answering calls. The charger is not properly plugged in. Make sure that the charger is plugged in correctly. The battery is not charged. Charge the battery. The signal strength is poor. If you are indoors, move toward a window. I cannot listen to my voice messages. You do not have voice mail service. Call your wireless service provider. You have not set up your voice mailbox with your service provider. You have not saved your voice mail number in your phone. Call your wireless service provider. Refer to Voice features on page 45. The voice mail number you have saved is incorrect. Call your wireless service provider. You have forgotten your password or are entering it incorrectly. Call your wireless service provider. 122 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 123 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM 23 Nokia One-Year Limited Warranty Nokia One-Year Limited Warranty Nokia Inc. (Nokia) warrants that this cellular phone (Product) is free from defects in material and workmanship that result in Product failure during normal usage, according to the following terms and conditions:
1 The limited warranty for the Product extends for ONE (1) year beginning on the date of the purchase of the Product. This one year period is extended by each whole day that the Product is out of your possession for repair under this warranty. The limited warranty extends only to the original purchaser (Consumer) of the Product and is not assignable or transferable to any subsequent purchaser/
end-user. The limited warranty extends only to Consumers who purchase the Product in the United States of America. During the limited warranty period, Nokia will repair, or replace, at Nokias sole option, any defective parts, or any parts that will not properly operate for their intended use with new or refurbished replacement items if such repair or replacement is needed because of product malfunction or failure during normal usage. No charge will be made to the Consumer for any such parts. Nokia will also pay for the labor charges incurred by Nokia in repairing or replacing the defective parts. The limited warranty does not cover defects in appearance, cosmetic, decorative or structural items, including framing, and any non-
operative parts. Nokias limit of liability under the limited warranty shall be the actual cash value of the Product at the time the Consumer returns the Product for repair, determined by the price paid by the Consumer for the Product less a reasonable amount for usage. Nokia shall not be liable for any other losses or damages. These remedies are the Consumers exclusive remedies for breach of warranty. Upon request from Nokia, the Consumer must prove the date of the original purchase of the Product by a dated bill of sale or dated itemized receipt. The Consumer shall bear the cost of shipping the Product to Nokia in Melbourne, Florida. Nokia shall bear the cost of shipping the Product back to the Consumer after the completion of service under this limited warranty. The Consumer shall have no coverage or benefits under this limited warranty if any of the following conditions are applicable:
a) The Product has been subjected to abnormal use, abnormal conditions, improper storage, exposure to moisture or dampness, unauthorized modifications, unauthorized connections, unauthorized repair, misuse, neglect, abuse, accident, alteration, improper installation, or other acts which are not the fault of Nokia, including damage caused by shipping. 2 3 4 5 6 7 Nokia 3595 User Guide 123 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 124 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM b) d) e) b) c) d) The Product has been damaged from external causes such as collision with an object, or from fire, flooding, sand, dirt, windstorm, lightning, earthquake or damage from exposure to weather conditions, an Act of God, or battery leakage, theft, blown fuse, or improper use of any electrical source, damage caused by computer or internet viruses, bugs, worms, Trojan Horses, cancelbots or damage caused by the connection to other products not recommended for interconnection by Nokia. c) Nokia was not advised in writing by the Consumer of the alleged defect or malfunction of the Product within fourteen (14) days after the expiration of the applicable limited warranty period. The Product serial number plate or the enhancement data code has been removed, defaced or altered. The defect or damage was caused by the defective function of the cellular system or by inadequate signal reception by the external antenna, or viruses or other software problems introduced into the Product. 8 Nokia does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of the Product. If a problem develops during the limited warranty period, the Consumer shall take the following step-by-step procedure:
a) The Consumer shall return the Product to the place of purchase for repair or replacement processing. If a is not convenient because of distance (more than 50 miles) or for other good cause, the Consumer shall ship the Product prepaid and insured to:
Nokia Inc., Attn: Repair Department 795 West Nasa Blvd. Melbourne, FL 32901 The Consumer shall include a return address, daytime phone number and/
or fax number, complete description of the problem, proof of purchase and service agreement (if applicable). Expenses related to removing the Product from an installation are not covered under this limited warranty. The Consumer will be billed for any parts or labor charges not covered by this limited warranty. The Consumer will be responsible for any expenses related to reinstallation of the Product. e) Nokia will repair the Product under the limited warranty within 30 days after receipt of the Product. If Nokia cannot perform repairs covered under this limited warranty within 30 days, or after a reasonable number of attempts to repair the same defect, Nokia at its option, will provide a replacement Product or refund the purchase price of the Product less a reasonable amount for usage. In some states the Consumer may have the right to a loaner if the repair of the Product takes more than ten (10) days. Please contact the Customer Service Center at Nokia at the telephone number listed at the end of this warranty if you need a loaner and the repair of the Product has taken or is estimated to take more than ten (10) days. 124 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 125 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Nokia One-Year Limited Warranty f) If the Product is returned during the limited warranty period, but the problem with the Product is not covered under the terms and conditions of this limited warranty, the Consumer will be notified and given an estimate of the charges the Consumer must pay to have the Product repaired, with all shipping charges billed to the Consumer. If the estimate is refused, the Product will be returned freight collect. If the Product is returned after the expiration of the limited warranty period, Nokias normal service policies shall apply and the Consumer will be responsible for all shipping charges. 9 You (the Consumer) understand that the product may consist of refurbished equipment that contains used components, some of which have been reprocessed. The used components comply with Product performance and reliability specifications. 10 ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE, SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE FOREGOING LIMITED WRITTEN WARRANTY. OTHERWISE, THE FOREGOING LIMITED WARRANTY IS THE CONSUMERS SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. NOKIA SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF ANTICIPATED BENEFITS OR PROFITS, LOSS OF SAVINGS OR REVENUE, LOSS OF DATA, PUNITIVE DAMAGES, LOSS OF USE OF THE PRODUCT OR ANY ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT, COST OF CAPITAL, COST OF ANY SUBSTITUTE EQUIPMENT OR FACILITIES, DOWNTIME, THE CLAIMS OF ANY THIRD PARTIES, INCLUDING CUSTOMERS, AND INJURY TO PROPERTY, RESULTING FROM THE PURCHASE OR USE OF THE PRODUCT OR ARISING FROM BREACH OF THE WARRANTY, BREACH OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT TORT, OR ANY OTHER LEGAL OR EQUITABLE THEORY, EVEN IF NOKIA KNEW OF THE LIKELIHOOD OF SUCH DAMAGES. NOKIA SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DELAY IN RENDERING SERVICE UNDER THE LIMITED WARRANTY, OR LOSS OF USE DURING THE PERIOD THAT THE PRODUCT IS BEING REPAIRED. 11 Some states do not allow limitation of how long an implied warranty lasts, so the one year warranty limitation may not apply to you (the Consumer). Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental and consequential damages, so certain of the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you
(the Consumer). This limited warranty gives the Consumer specific legal rights and the Consumer may also have other rights which vary from state to state. 12 Nokia neither assumes nor authorizes any authorized service center or any other person or entity to assume for it any other obligation or liability beyond that which is expressly provided for in this limited warranty including the provider or seller of any extended warranty or service agreement. Nokia 3595 User Guide 125 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 126 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM 13 This is the entire warranty between Nokia and the Consumer, and supersedes all prior and contemporaneous agreements or understandings, oral or written, relating to the Product, and no representation, promise or condition not contained herein shall modify these terms. 14 This limited warranty allocates the risk of failure of the Product between the Consumer and Nokia. The allocation is recognized by the Consumer and is reflected in the purchase price. 15 Any action or lawsuit for breach of warranty must be commenced within eighteen (18) months following purchase of the Product. 16 Questions concerning this limited warranty may be directed to:
Nokia Inc. Attn: Customer Service 7725 Woodland Center Blvd., Ste. 150 Tampa, FL 33614 Telephone: 1-888-NOKIA-2U (1-888-665-4228) Facsimile: (813) 287-6612 TTY/TDD Users Only: 1-800-24-NOKIA (1-800-246-6542) 17 The limited warranty period for Nokia supplied attachments and accessories is specifically defined within their own warranty cards and packaging. 126 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 127 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Appendix A Message from the CTIA
(Cellular Telecommunications
& Internet Association) to all users of mobile phones 2001 Cellular Telecommunications & Internet Association. All Rights Reserved.1250 Connecticut Avenue, NW Suite 800, Washington, DC 20036. Phone: (202) 785-0081 127 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 128 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Safety is the most important call you will ever make. A Guide to Safe and Responsible Wireless Phone Use Tens of millions of people in the U.S. today take advantage of the unique combination of convenience, safety and value delivered by the wireless telephone. Quite simply, the wireless phone gives people the powerful ability to communicate by voice--almost anywhere, anytime--with the boss, with a client, with the kids, with emergency personnel or even with the police. Each year, Americans make billions of calls from their wireless phones, and the numbers are rapidly growing. But an important responsibility accompanies those benefits, one that every wireless phone user must uphold. When driving a car, driving is your first responsibility. A wireless phone can be an invaluable tool, but good judgment must be exercised at all times while driving a motor vehicle--whether on the phone or not. The basic lessons are ones we all learned as teenagers. Driving requires alertness, caution and courtesy. It requires a heavy dose of basic common sense---keep your head up, keep your eyes on the road, check your mirrors frequently and watch out for other drivers. It requires obeying all traffic signs and signals and staying within the speed limit. It means using seatbelts and requiring other passengers to do the same. But with wireless phone use, driving safely means a little more. This brochure is a call to wireless phone users everywhere to make safety their first priority when behind the wheel of a car. Wireless telecommunications is keeping us in touch, simplifying our lives, protecting us in emergencies and providing opportunities to help others in need. When it comes to the use of wireless phones, safety is your most important call. Wireless Phone "Safety Tips"
Below are safety tips to follow while driving and using a wireless phone which should be easy to remember. 1 Get to know your wireless phone and its features such as speed dial and redial. Carefully read your instruction manual and learn to take advantage of valuable features most phones offer, including automatic redial and memory. Also, work to memorize the phone keypad so you can use the speed dial function without taking your attention off the road. 2 When available, use a hands free device. A number of hands free wireless phone accessories are readily available today. Whether you choose an installed mounted device for your wireless phone or a speaker phone accessory, take advantage of these devices if available to you. 3 Position your wireless phone within easy reach. Make sure you place your wireless phone within easy reach and where you can grab it without removing your eyes from the road. If you get an incoming call at an inconvenient time, if possible, let your voice mail answer it for you. 4 Suspend conversations during hazardous driving conditions or situations. Let the person you are speaking with know you are driving; if necessary, suspend the call in heavy traffic or hazardous weather conditions. Rain, sleet, snow and ice can be hazardous, but so is heavy traffic. As a driver, your first responsibility is to pay attention to the road. 128 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 129 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM 5 Do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving. If you are reading an address book or business card, or writing a "to do" list while driving a car, you are not watching where you are going. Its common sense. Dont get caught in a dangerous situation because you are reading or writing and not paying attention to the road or nearby vehicles. 6 Dial sensibly and assess the traffic; if possible, place calls when you are not moving or before pulling into traffic. Try to plan your calls before you begin your trip or attempt to coincide your calls with times you may be stopped at a stop sign, red light or otherwise stationary. But if you need to dial while driving, follow this simple tip--dial only a few numbers, check the road and your mirrors, then continue. 7 Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations that may be distracting. Stressful or emotional conversations and driving do not mix--they are distracting and even dangerous when you are behind the wheel of a car. Make people you are talking with aware you are driving and if necessary, suspend conversations which have the potential to divert your attention from the road. 8 Use your wireless phone to call for help. Your wireless phone is one of the greatest tools you can own to protect yourself and your family in dangerous situations--with your phone at your side, help is only three numbers away. Dial 9-1-1 or other local emergency number in the case of fire, traffic accident, road hazard or medical emergency. Remember, it is a free call on your wireless phone!
9 Use your wireless phone to help others in emergencies. Your wireless phone provides you a perfect opportunity to be a "Good Samaritan" in your community. If you see an auto accident, crime in progress or other serious emergency where lives are in danger, call 9-1-1 or other local emergency number, as you would want others to do for you. 10 Call roadside assistance or a special wireless non-emergency assistance number when necessary. Certain situations you encounter while driving may require attention, but are not urgent enough to merit a call for emergency services. But you still can use your wireless phone to lend a hand. If you see a broken-down vehicle posing no serious hazard, a broken traffic signal, a minor traffic accident where no one appears injured or a vehicle you know to be stolen, call roadside assistance or other special non-emergency wireless number. Careless, distracted individuals and people driving irresponsibly represent a hazard to everyone on the road. Since 1984, the Cellular Telecommunications Industry Association and the wireless industry have conducted educational outreach to inform wireless phone users of their responsibilities as safe drivers and good citizens. As we approach a new century, more and more of us will take advantage of the benefits of wireless telephones. And, as we take to the roads, we all have a responsibility to drive safely. The wireless industry reminds you to use your phone safely when driving. For more information, please call 1-888-901-SAFE. For updates: http://www.wow-com.com/consumer/issues/driving/articles.cfm?ID=85 129 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 130 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM NOTES 130 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 131 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Appendix B Message from the FDA
(U.S. Food and Drug Administration) to all users of mobile phones July 18, 2001For updates: http://www.fda.gov/cdrh/phones 131 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 132 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Consumer Update on Wireless Phones U.S. Food and Drug Administration 1. Do wireless phones pose a health hazard?
The available scientific evidence does not show that any health problems are associated with using wireless phones. There is no proof, however, that wireless phones are absolutely safe. Wireless phones emit low levels of radiofrequency energy (RF) in the microwave range while being used. They also emit very low levels of RF when in the stand-by mode. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects (by heating tissue), exposure to low level RF that does not produce heating effects causes no known adverse health effects. Many studies of low level RF exposures have not found any biological effects. Some studies have suggested that some biological effects may occur, but such findings have not been confirmed by additional research. In some cases, other researchers have had difficulty in reproducing those studies, or in determining the reasons for inconsistent results. 2. What is FDA's role concerning the safety of wireless phones?
Under the law, FDA does not review the safety of radiation-emitting consumer products such as wireless phones before they can be sold, as it does with new drugs or medical devices. However, the agency has authority to take action if wireless phones are shown to emit radiofrequency energy (RF) at a level that is hazardous to the user. In such a case, FDA could require the manufacturers of wireless phones to notify users of the health hazard and to repair, replace or recall the phones so that the hazard no longer exists. Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA regulatory actions, FDA has urged the wireless phone industry to take a number of steps, including the following:
Support needed research into possible biological effects of RF of the type emitted by wireless phones;
Design wireless phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to the user that is not necessary for device function; and Cooperate in providing users of wireless phones with the best possible information on possible effects of wireless phone use on human health. Environmental Protection Agency Federal Communications Commission FDA belongs to an interagency working group of the federal agencies that have responsibility for different aspects of RF safety to ensure coordinated efforts at the federal level. The following agencies belong to this working group:
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health Occupational Safety and Health Administration National Telecommunications and Information Administration The National Institutes of Health participates in some interagency working group activities, as well. FDA shares regulatory responsibilities for wireless phones with the Federal Communications Commission (FCC). All phones that are sold in the United States must comply with FCC safety guidelines that limit RF exposure. FCC relies on FDA and other health agencies for safety questions about wireless phones. FCC also 132 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 133 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM regulates the base stations that the wireless phone networks rely upon. While these base stations operate at higher power than do the wireless phones themselves, the RF exposures that people get from these base stations are typically thousands of times lower than those they can get from wireless phones. Base stations are thus not the subject of the safety questions discussed in this document. 3. What kinds of phones are the subject of this update?
The term wireless phone refers here to hand-held wireless phones with built-in antennas, often called cell mobile or PCS phones. These types of wireless phones can expose the user to measurable radiofrequency energy (RF) because of the short distance between the phone and the users head. These RF exposures are limited by Federal Communications Commission safety guidelines that were developed with the advice of FDA and other federal health and safety agencies. When the phone is located at greater distances from the user, the exposure to RF is drastically lower because a person's RF exposure decreases rapidly with increasing distance from the source. The so-called cordless phones; which have a base unit connected to the telephone wiring in a house, typically operate at far lower power levels, and thus produce RF exposures far below the FCC safety limits. 4. What are the results of the research done already?
The research done thus far has produced conflicting results, and many studies have suffered from flaws in their research methods. Animal experiments investigating the effects of radiofrequency energy (RF) exposures characteristic of wireless phones have yielded conflicting results that often cannot be repeated in other laboratories. A few animal studies, however, have suggested that low levels of RF could accelerate the development of cancer in laboratory animals. However, many of the studies that showed increased tumor development used animals that had been genetically engineered or treated with cancer-causing chemicals so as to be pre-disposed to develop cancer in the absence of RF exposure. Other studies exposed the animals to RF for up to 22 hours per day. These conditions are not similar to the conditions under which people use wireless phones, so we dont know with certainty what the results of such studies mean for human health. Three large epidemiology studies have been published since December 2000. Between them, the studies investigated any possible association between the use of wireless phones and primary brain cancer, glioma, meningioma, or acoustic neuroma, tumors of the brain or salivary gland, leukemia, or other cancers. None of the studies demonstrated the existence of any harmful health effects from wireless phone RF exposures. However, none of the studies can answer questions about long-term exposures, since the average period of phone use in these studies was around three years. 5.What research is needed to decide whether RF exposure from wireless phones poses a health risk?
A combination of laboratory studies and epidemiological studies of people actually using wireless phones would provide some of the data that are needed. Lifetime animal exposure studies could be completed in a few years. However, very large numbers of animals would be needed to provide reliable proof of a cancer promoting effect if one exists. Epidemiological studies can provide data that is directly applicable to human populations, but 10 or more years follow-up may be needed to provide answers about some health effects, such as cancer. This is because the interval 133 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 134 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM between the time of exposure to a cancer-causing agent and the time tumors develop
- if they do - may be many, many years. The interpretation of epidemiological studies is hampered by difficulties in measuring actual RF exposure during day-to-
day use of wireless phones. Many factors affect this measurement, such as the angle at which the phone is held, or which model of phone is used. 6. What is FDA doing to find out more about the possible health effects of wireless phone RF?
FDA is working with the U.S. National Toxicology Program and with groups of investigators around the world to ensure that high priority animal studies are conducted to address important questions about the effects of exposure to radiofrequency energy (RF). FDA has been a leading participant in the World Health Organization International Electromagnetic Fields (EMF) Project since its inception in 1996. An influential result of this work has been the development of a detailed agenda of research needs that has driven the establishment of new research programs around the world. The Project has also helped develop a series of public information documents on EMF issues. FDA and the Cellular Telecommunications & Internet Association (CTIA) have a formal Cooperative Research and Development Agreement (CRADA) to do research on wireless phone safety. FDA provides the scientific oversight, obtaining input from experts in government, industry, and academic organizations. CTIA-funded research is conducted through contracts to independent investigators. The initial research will include both laboratory studies and studies of wireless phone users. The CRADA will also include a broad assessment of additional research needs in the context of the latest research developments around the world. 7. How can I find out how much radiofrequency energy exposure I can get by using my wireless phone?
All phones sold in the United States must comply with Federal Communications Commission (FCC) guidelines that limit radiofrequency energy (RF) exposures. FCC established these guidelines in consultation with FDA and the other federal health and safety agencies. The FCC limit for RF exposure from wireless telephones is set at a Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) of 1.6 watts per kilogram (1.6 W/kg). The FCC limit is consistent with the safety standards developed by the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineering (IEEE) and the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement. The exposure limit takes into consideration the bodys ability to remove heat from the tissues that absorb energy from the wireless phone and is set well below levels known to have effects. Manufacturers of wireless phones must report the RF exposure level for each model of phone to the FCC. The FCC website (http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety) gives directions for locating the FCC identification number on your phone so you can find your phones RF exposure level in the online listing. 8. What has FDA done to measure the radiofrequency energy coming from wireless phones?
The Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) is developing a technical standard for measuring the radiofrequency energy (RF) exposure from wireless phones and other wireless handsets with the participation and leadership of FDA scientists and engineers. The standard, Recommended Practice for Determining the 134 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 135 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Spatial-Peak Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) in the Human Body Due to Wireless Communications Devices: Experimental Techniques, sets forth the first consistent test methodology for measuring the rate at which RF is deposited in the heads of wireless phone users. The test method uses a tissue-simulating model of the human head. Standardized SAR test methodology is expected to greatly improve the consistency of measurements made at different laboratories on the same phone. SAR is the measurement of the amount of energy absorbed in tissue, either by the whole body or a small part of the body. It is measured in watts/kg (or milliwatts/g) of matter. This measurement is used to determine whether a wireless phone complies with safety guidelines. 9. What steps can I take to reduce my exposure to radiofrequency energy from my wireless phone?
If there is a risk from these products--and at this point we do not know that there is--it is probably very small. But if you are concerned about avoiding even potential risks, you can take a few simple steps to minimize your exposure to radiofrequency energy (RF). Since time is a key factor in how much exposure a person receives, reducing the amount of time spent using a wireless phone will reduce RF exposure. If you must conduct extended conversations by wireless phone every day, you could place more distance between your body and the source of the RF, since the exposure level drops off dramatically with distance. For example, you could use a headset and carry the wireless phone away from your body or use a wireless phone connected to a remote antenna. Again, the scientific data do not demonstrate that wireless phones are harmful. But if you are concerned about the RF exposure from these products, you can use measures like those described above to reduce your RF exposure from wireless phone use. 10. What about children using wireless phones?
The scientific evidence does not show a danger to users of wireless phones, including children and teenagers. If you want to take steps to lower exposure to radiofrequency energy (RF), the measures described above would apply to children and teenagers using wireless phones. Reducing the time of wireless phone use and increasing the distance between the user and the RF source will reduce RF exposure.Some groups sponsored by other national governments have advised that children be discouraged from using wireless phones at all. For example, the government in the United Kingdom distributed leaflets containing such a recommendation in December 2000. They noted that no evidence exists that using a wireless phone causes brain tumors or other ill effects. Their recommendation to limit wireless phone use by children was strictly precautionary; it was not based on scientific evidence that any health hazard exists. 11. What about wireless phone interference with medical equipment?
Radiofrequency energy (RF) from wireless phones can interact with some electronic devices. For this reason, FDA helped develop a detailed test method to measure electromagnetic interference (EMI) of implanted cardiac pacemakers and defibrillators from wireless telephones. This test method is now part of a standard sponsored by the Association for the Advancement of Medical instrumentation (AAMI). The final draft, a joint effort by FDA, medical device manufacturers, and many other groups, was completed in late 2000. This standard will allow manufacturers to ensure that cardiac pacemakers and defibrillators are safe from wireless phone EMI. 135 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 136 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM FDA has tested hearing aids for interference from handheld wireless phones and helped develop a voluntary standard sponsored by the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). This standard specifies test methods and performance requirements for hearing aids and wireless phones so that no interference occurs when a person uses a compatible phone and a accompanied hearing aid at the same time. This standard was approved by the IEEE in 2000. FDA continues to monitor the use of wireless phones for possible interactions with other medical devices. Should harmful interference be found to occur, FDA will conduct testing to assess the interference and work to resolve the problem. 12. Where can I find additional information?
For additional information, please refer to the following resources:
FDA web page on wireless phones http://www.fda.gov/cdrh/phones/index.html Federal Communications Commission (FCC) RF Safety Program http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection http://www.icnirp.de World Health Organization (WHO) International EMF Project http://www.who.int/emf National Radiological Protection Board (UK) http://www.nrpb.org.uk/
July 18, 2001For updates: http://www.fda.gov/cdrh/phones 136 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 137 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Index Numerics 1-touch dialing assign a number 40 delete a number 41 A active call options answer a waiting call 43 end the active call 43 reject a waiting call 43 switch between calls 43 third call waiting 43 alarm clock 100 delay alarm 100 snooze 100 answer a call 18 a waiting call 43 antenna 13 applications check available memory 109 download 110 launch 109 audible alerts 48 authority certificates 86 automatic keyguard 64 B back cover release 12 battery charge 10 check strength 14 indication on screen 14 power 14 block international calls 68 multimedia messages 79 bookmarks 85 browser options 83 business cards receive 101 send 101 C cache memory 85 calculator 101 calendar make a note 98 navigate 98 view 98 call timers 36 call waiting 22, 43 caller groups add names 59 assign ringing tone 59 graphics 60 remove names 59 rename 59 caller ID 18, 22 check volume 14 clock 12 hour 55 24 hour 55 alarm 100 display 55 hide 55 set 54 set time format 55 code default security code 67 Nokia 3595 User Guide 137 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 138 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM personal unblocking key 66 PIN 65 restriction password 65 security code 65 conference calls 44 contacts delete entire contents 34 delete names and numbers 33 edit names and numbers 32 find names 31 convert currency 102 covers, changing 60 D data call history 38 date display 55 hide 55 set 55 set format 55 disconnect from mobile Internet 88 display language 54 downloading ringing tones 53 E e-mail send 74, 75 set up sending profile 74 emergency call while online 88 end a call 17 end key 17 enhancements 112 F file size 81 file type 81 fixed dialing 67 G gallery games 107 add a folder 57 delete a folder 57 rename a folder 57 view a folder 57 Air Glide 107 Backgammon 108 Bowling 107 Sky Diver 108 GPRS 82 call history 35 call while online 87 check data call history 35 phone symbols 86 H handsfree operation 47 headset 11 help text 54 I icons 14 idle screen 13 IM availability 91 contacts 93 conversations 91 group chat 95 log in 91 log off 97 offline menu 90 online menu 90 service provider icons 89 settings 96 Indicators 14 information message service 81 international calls prefix 29 restrict access 68 138 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 139 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM J Java midlets 109 K keyguard 64 L line for outgoing calls 22 list of menus and submenus 19 lock codes PIN codes 65 PUK codes 66 M make a call 17 an international call 40 emergency call while online 88 memory available for multimedia messages 79 default memory for contacts 33 message settings message center number 70 message mode 70 messages check text messages 72 check voice mail 46 MIDI 53 midlets 109 MMS advertisements 79 connection settings 79 delete a message 81 inbox 78 maximum size 79 play a sound clip 81 read a message 80 read a message later 80 reply to a message 81 ringing tone 78 save a received graphic 81 save a received ringing tone 81 sender information 81 settings 79 write and send a message 80 mobile Internet connect 83 disconnect 88 empty the cache 85 navigate 83 security issues 85 site examples 84 N network services 22 call forwarding 22, 41 call waiting 43 conference calls 44 outgoing line 41 system selection 43 transfer calls 44 Nokia Customer Care 7 O onscreen help 54 P phone illustrated 1 keys for WAP browser 84 label 7 memory 32 symbols 14 picture messages read 77 save 78 send 77 send with text 77 PIN code 66 Nokia 3595 User Guide 139 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 140 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM polyphonic sound 53 predictive text activate 27 add new words 28 enter 27 profiles customize 49 handsfree 50 PUK code 66 Q quick guide 2 R redial a call 18 reject a call 18 restrict calls 68 S scroll bar 19 security code 65 default 67 security features automatic keyguard 64 personal unblocking key 66 PIN code 66 prevent unauthorized use 66 PUK code 66 require password 66 send pause for touch tones 29 settings accessory 50 display 58 MMS 79 restore factory 60 time and date 54 signal strength check 17 indicator 14 SIM card install 9 remove 11 start screen 13 stopwatch delete times 104 stop the clock 104 view times 104 swap between two calls 43 synchronize contacts and calendar 105 system selection 22 T talk key 17 text messages copy to calendar 74 options 73 read 72 read later 73 send 72 send to multiple recipients 72 set up 70 use GPRS 71 to-do note 102 troubleshooting 122 TTY end a call 53 make a call 53 receive a call 53 U update date and time 55 V voice commands 47 voice dialing add a voice tag 46 change a voice tag 47 delete a voice tag 47 make a call with voice recognition 47 140 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 141 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM play back a voice tag 47 voice mail volume 14 listen to your messages 45 save the mailbox number 45 adjust 14 check level on screen 14 earpiece 14 keypad tones 49 W WAP browser 83 WAP page active link 84 enter information 84 examples 84 header line 84 X Xpress-on color cover 60 Nokia 3595 User Guide 141 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3595.ENv2_9230479_022304.book Page 142 Tuesday, March 16, 2004 2:59 PM Para obtener un manual del usuario en espaol favor de llamar o enviar un fax al telfono 1-888-NOKIA-2U, fax 813-249-9619. Nokia 3595 User Guide 9230479 142 Copyright 2004 Nokia
1 2 3 4 | Manual 3 | Users Manual | 81.60 KiB | December 04 2004 |
6010.Addendum_ENv1_9231767_032304_print.fm Page 1 Monday, March 22, 2004 3:49 PM Nokia 6010 User Guide Update The following information replaces the Certification Information (SAR) section of the Nokia 6010 User Guide. CERTIFICATION INFORMATION (SAR) THIS MODEL PHONE MEETS THE GOVERNMENT'S REQUIREMENTS FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES. Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the emission limits for exposure to radio frequency
(RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S. Government. These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines and establish permitted levels of RF energy for the general population. The guidelines are based on standards that were developed by independent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The standards include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure standard for wireless mobile phones employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6W/kg.* Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions accepted by the FCC with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR level of the phone while operating can be well below the maximum value. This is because the phone is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a wireless base station antenna, the lower the power output. Before a phone model is available for sale to the public, it must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not exceed the limit established by the government-adopted requirement for safe exposure. The tests are performed in positions and locations (for example, at the ear and worn on the body) as required by the FCC for each model. The highest SAR value for this model phone as reported to the FCC:
When tested for use at the ear -
FCCID no. GMLNPM-10 is 1.07 W/kg FCCID no. GMLNPM-10X is 1.19 W/kg When worn on the body, as described in this user guide:
FCCID no. GMLNPM-10 is 0.73 W/kg FCCID no. GMLNPM-10X is 0.90 W/kg 1 6010.Addendum_ENv1_9231767_032304_print.fm Page 2 Monday, March 22, 2004 3:49 PM
(Body-worn measurements differ among phone models, depending upon available enhancements and FCC requirements). While there may be differences between the SAR levels of various phones and at various positions, they all meet the government requirement. The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this model phone with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines. SAR information on this model phone is on file with the FCC and can be found under the Display Grant section of http://www.fcc.gov/oet/fccid after searching on FCC ID GMLNPM-10 and GMLNPM-10X. For body worn operation, this phone has been tested and meets the FCC RF exposure guidelines for use with a carry case, belt clip, or holder that contains no metal and that positions the handset a minimum of 5/8 inch (1.5 cm) from the body. Use of other carry cases, belt clips, or holders may not ensure compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines. If you do not use a body-worn accessory and are not holding the phone at the ear, position the handset a minimum of 5/8 inch (1.5 cm) from your body when the phone is switched on.
*In the United States and Canada, the SAR limit for mobile phones used by the public is 1.6 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over one gram of tissue. The standard incorporates a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting requirements and the network band. For SAR information in other regions please look under product information at www.nokia.com. Nokia Inc. 7725 Woodland Center Blvd., Ste. 150, Tampa, FL 33614 Telephone: 1-888-NOKIA-2U (1-888-665-4228) Facsimile: 1-813-249-9619 TTY/TDD Users: 1-800-24-NOKIA (1-800-246-6542) www.nokia.com/us www.nokiahowto.com Copyright 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Printed in USA. Version 1 9231767 2
1 2 3 4 | Manual addendum | Users Manual | 24.54 KiB |
Nokia 3595 User Guide Update Draft The following information replaces the Certification Information (SAR) section of the Nokia 3595 User Guide. CERTIFICATION INFORMATION (SAR) THIS MODEL PHONE MEETS THE GOVERNMENT'S REQUIREMENTS FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES. Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the emission limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S. Government. These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines and establish permitted levels of RF energy for the general population. The guidelines are based on standards that were developed by independent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The standards include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure standard for wireless mobile phones employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6W/kg.* Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions accepted by the FCC with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR level of the phone while operating can be well below the maximum value. This is because the phone is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a wireless base station antenna, the lower the power output. Before a phone model is available for sale to the public, it must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not exceed the limit established by the government-adopted requirement for safe exposure. The tests are performed in positions and locations
(for example, at the ear and worn on the body) as required by the FCC for each model. The highest SAR value for this model phone as reported to the FCC:
When tested for use at the ear -
FCCID # GMLNPM-10 is 1.08 W/kg FCCID # GMLNPM-10X is 0.95 W/kg 1 When worn on the body, as described in this user guide:
FCCID # GMLNPM-10 is 0.73 W/kg FCCID # GMLNPM-10X is 0.59 W/kg
(Body-worn measurements differ among phone models, depending upon available accessories and FCC requirements). While there may be differences between the SAR levels of various phones and at various positions, they all meet the government requirement. The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this model phone with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines. SAR information on this model phone is on file with the FCC and can be found under the Display Grant section of http://www.fcc.gov/oet/fccid after searching on FCC ID GMLNPM-10 and GMLNPM-10X. For body worn operation, this phone has been tested and meets the FCC RF exposure guidelines for use with an accessory that contains no metal and that positions the handset a minimum of 5/8 inch (1.5 cm) from the body. Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines. If you do not use a body-worn accessory and are not holding the phone at the ear, position the handset a minimum of 5/8 inch (1.5 cm) from your body when the phone is switched on.
*In the United States and Canada, the SAR limit for mobile phones used by the public is 1.6 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over one gram of tissue. The standard incorporates a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting requirements and the network band. For SAR information in other regions please look under product information at www.nokia.com/us. Nokia Inc. 7725 Woodland Center Blvd., Ste. 150, Tampa, FL 33614 Telephone: 1-888-NOKIA-2U (1-888-665-4228) Facsimile: 1-813-249-9619 TTY/TDD Users: 1-800-24-NOKIA (1-800-246-6542) www.nokia.com/us www.nokiahowto.com Copyright 2003, Nokia. All rights reserved. Printed in USA. Version 1 9310868 2
1 2 3 4 | Users Manual | Users Manual | 1.24 MiB |
Nokia 6010 User Guide Draft What information is needed?
Numbers My number Voice mail number Wireless providers number Wireless providers customer care Model number 6010 Phone type number NPM-10 International mobile equipment identity
(IMEI) Where is the number?
Wireless service provider Wireless service provider Wireless service provider Wireless service provider Label on back of phone (under battery) Label on back of phone (under battery) Label on back of phone (under battery). See Find information about your phone on page 7. LEGAL INFORMATION Part No. 9311233, Issue No. 1 Copyright 2004 Nokia. All rights reserved. Nokia, Nokia Connecting People, Air Glide, Bowling, Backgammon, Sky Diver, Nokia 6010, Xpress-on, and the Nokia Original Enhancements logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nokia Corporation. Other company and product names mentioned herein may be trademarks or trade names of their respective owners. Printed in Canada 01/04 US Patent No 5818437 and other pending patents. T9 text input software Copyright 1999-2003. Tegic Communications, Inc. All rights reserved. Includes RSA BSAFE cryptographic or security protocol software from RSA Security. Java is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. The information contained in this user guide was written for the Nokia 6010 product. Nokia operates a policy of ongoing development. Nokia reserves the right to make changes to any of the products described in this document without prior notice. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NOKIA BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY LOSS OF DATA OR INCOME OR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, AND CONSEQUENTIAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES HOWSOEVER CAUSED. THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED "AS IS." EXCEPT AS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NO WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE MADE IN RELATION TO THE ACCURACY AND RELIABILITY OR CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT. NOKIA RESERVES THE RIGHT TO REVISE THIS DOCUMENT OR WITHDRAW IT AT ANY TIME WITHOUT PRIOR NOTICE. EXPORT CONTROLS This device may contain commodities, technology, or software that may only be exported in accordance with the U. S. Export Administration regulations. Diversion contrary to U.S. or Canadian law is prohibited. FCC/INDUSTRY CANADA NOTICE Your device may cause TV or radio interference (for example, when using a telephone in close proximity to receiving equipment). The FCC or Industry Canada can require you to stop using your telephone if such interference cannot be eliminated. If you require assistance, contact your local service facility. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the condition that this device does not cause harmful interference. Manufactured or sold under one or more of the following US Patents. 4868846 5124672 5241583 5335362 5390223 5430740 5479476 5553125 5594797 5664053 5701392 5797102 5822366 5844884 5870683 5903832 5917868 5946651 5960389 5987639 6011971 6028567 6047196 6060193 6084471 6097964 6119180 6133884 6148209 6167248 4945633 5151946 5266782 5341149 5392460 5442521 5487084 5557639 5600708 5675611 5722074 5802465 5827082 5845219 5884103 5903839 5920826 5953665 5963901 5991857 6014113 6031827 6049796 6069923 6084855 6105784 6121846 6137789 6151485 6167273 5001372 5152004 5271056 5353328 5396657 5444816 5526366 5565821 5606548 5677620 5729541 5805301 5835858 5850607 5884190 5907823 5926147 5956332 5966378 6005857 6014551 6035189 6050415 6072787 6084920 6112099 6122498 6138091 6151507 6170073 5053928 5173927 5311151 5371481 5400949 5446364 5534878 5566201 5613235 5692032 5760568 5809413 5835889 5857151 5889770 5912570 5926769 5956625 5977887 6006114 6014573 6035194 6054954 6073001 6084962 6115617 6128322 6140966 6163609 6171127 5083240 5212834 5317283 5378935 5408504 5446422 5548616 5570369 5625274 5697074 5787341 5819165 5839101 5859843 5898775 5914690 5929813 5956633 5983081 6009328 6025802 6038238 6054966 6079993 6088746 6118775 6128509 6144243 6164547 6178535 5101175 5230091 5331638 5384782 5416435 5477422 5551067 5581244 5640395 5699482 5794142 5821891 5842141 5862178 5898925 5914796 5930233 5960354 5987137 6011853 6026161 6043760 6055439 6081732 6094587 6119002 6130650 6144676 6167038 6182101 6184592 6199035 6223059 6266321 6285888 6314166 6356759 6377803 6392660 6438370 6470470 D423449 6185295 6201712 6230020 6266330 6292668 6317083 6359865 6377820 6400958 6445932 6487397 6185302 6201876 6240076 6269126 6295286 6324389 6359904 6381468 6417817 6453179 6510148 6185422 6202109 6249584 6271794 6307512 6324412 6363259 6385254 6430163 6456237 6522670 6188909 6219560 6259312 6272361 6308084 6333716 6370362 6385451 6434133 6456826 6591116 6195338 6223037 6262735 6282436 6311054 6347218 6370389 6392605 6437711 6463278 6606508 Design patents pending:
29/162,111 Contents 1. 3. Quick guide . 2 For your safety . 3 About your device . 4 Network Services . 4 Shared memory . 5 2. Welcome . 6 Register your phone. 6 E-newsletters . 6 Copyright protection . 6 Contact Nokia . 7 SIM card and battery . 9 SIM card installation . 9 Install the battery . 11 Charge the battery. 12 Remove the SIM card . 12 Set up your headset. 13 4. About your phone. 14 Switch on your phone . 14 The antenna . 15 The start screen . 16 Indicators and icons. 17 5. Make and answer calls . 20 Make a call . 20 End a call . 20 Answer a call . 21 Reject a call . 21 Redial . 21 The menu . 22 Scroll bar . 22 List of main menus and submenus . 22 Text entry. 29 7. 6. Nokia 6010 User Guide v Copyright 2004 Nokia 8. 9. Standard mode . 29 Predictive text. 30 Punctuation and special characters . 31 Contacts. 33 Save names, numbers, and e-mail addresses . 33 Add text entries . 34 Find names in Contacts . 34 Edit names and numbers . 35 Phone memory . 35 Delete names and numbers . 37 Call history. 38 Check missed, received, or dialed calls . 38 Call lists options . 38 Clear call lists . 39 Call timers . 39 Message counter. 40 Manage call costs . 41 Data calls. 41 10. Advanced calling features . 43 In-call options. 43 Automatic redial . 44 1-touch dialing . 44 Anykey answer . 45 Network services. 45 11. Voice features . 49 Voice mail . 49 Voice dialing . 50 Voice commands . 52 Audible alerts . 53 12. Personalize your phone . 54 Profiles. 54 Accessory settings . 55 Polyphonic sound (MIDI) . 58 Ringing tones . 58 Display language. 59 vi Copyright 2004 Nokia Welcome note . 59 Help text. 59 Time and date. 59 Memory status . 61 Gallery. 61 Display settings . 62 Caller groups . 63 Restore factory settings . 65 Xpress-on color covers . 65 13. Phone security . 69 Lock the keypad (keyguard). 69 Security codes . 69 PIN codes . 70 PUK codes. 71 Security code . 72 Fixed dialing . 72 Restrict calls. 73 Closed user groups. 74 14. Mobile messages . 75 Message settings . 75 Text messages . 77 E-mail messages . 79 Store messages. 80 Delete messages. 81 Picture messages . 82 Multimedia messages . 84 Info message service . 86 Service command editor . 87 15. Mobile Internet . 88 Notes about the mobile Internet . 88 Set up for browsing . 88 Connect. 89 Browser options . 89 Navigate . 89 Bookmarks . 90 Security issues . 91 GPRS . 92 Nokia 6010 User Guide vii Copyright 2004 Nokia 16. Disconnect. 93 Instant messaging (IM). 94 Register with an IM service . 94 IM Service provider icons. 94 User name and password . 95 IM menus. 96 Log in . 96 Set your availability . 97 IM conversations. 97 IM contacts . 99 Group chat sessions . 101 IM settings . 102 Log off service. 103 17. Your personal digital assistant . 104 Calendar . 104 Alarm clock . 106 Business cards. 107 Calculator . 108 To-do list . 109 Stopwatch . 109 Synchronize contacts and calendar. 111 18. Fun and games . 114 Games . 114 Java applications . 116 Converter. 118 19. Enhancements . 119 Power . 119 Audio . 119 Car . 119 20. Reference information . 120 Battery information . 120 Enhancements. 120 Enhancements, batteries, and chargers . 121 Care and maintenance . 121 Additional safety information . 122 viii Copyright 2004 Nokia Batteries . 127 21. Technical information. 128 22. Troubleshooting . 129 23. Nokia One-Year Limited Warranty. 130 Appendix A Message from the CTIA . 135 Appendix B Message from the FDA . 139 Index. 145 Nokia 6010 User Guide ix Copyright 2004 Nokia NOTES x Copyright 2004 Nokia Nokia 6010 phone at a glance Power key Earpiece Display screen Up scroll key Left selection key Talk key Down scroll key Right selection key End key Keypad Microphone Nokia 6010 User Guide 1 Copyright 2004 Nokia
QUICK GUIDE Action Press Press and hold Make a call Answer a call Answer call during call End a call Decline a call Mute a call Redial Adjust call volume Use the in-call menu Save a name and number Use 1-touch dialing Look up a name Check voice mail Write text messages Send text messages Read new message Description Press a key briefly and release it. Press a key, hold it for two to three seconds, and release it. Enter a phone number and press the Talk key. Press the Talk key. Select Answer call. Press the End key. Press the End key to send the call to voice mail. Select Options > Mute during a call. Press the Talk key twice. Press the Up scroll or Down scroll key during a call. Select Options during a call. Enter a number, select Options > Save, enter a name;
then select OK. Press and hold a key (28). You must assign a key to a number in Contacts. Select Contacts > Find. Press and hold the 1 key (contact your service provider for details). Select Menu > Messages > Text messages > Create message. Enter the message. Select Options > Send. Enter the number and select OK. If 1 message received appears on the display, select Show. 2 Copyright 2004 Nokia 1 For your safety Read these simple guidelines. Not following them may be dangerous or illegal. Read the complete user guide for further information. SWITCH ON SAFELY Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. ROAD SAFETY COMES FIRST Obey all local laws. Always keep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving should be road safety. INTERFERENCE All wireless phones may be susceptible to interference, which could affect performance. SWITCH OFF IN HOSPITALS Follow any restrictions. Switch the phone off near medical equipment. SWITCH OFF IN AIRCRAFT Follow any restrictions. Wireless devices can cause interference in aircraft. SWITCH OFF WHEN REFUELING Don't use the phone at a refueling point. Don't use near fuel or chemicals. SWITCH OFF NEAR BLASTING Follow any restrictions. Don't use the phone where blasting is in progress. USE SENSIBLY Use only in the normal position as explained in the product documentation. Don't touch the antenna unnecessarily. QUALIFIED SERVICE Only qualified personnel may install or repair this product. ENHANCEMENTS AND BATTERIES Use only approved enhancements and batteries. Do not connect incompatible products. Nokia 6010 User Guide 3 Copyright 2004 Nokia For your safety WATER-RESISTANCE Your phone is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. BACKUP COPIES Remember to make back-up copies or keep a written record of all important information stored in your phone. CONNECTING TO OTHER DEVICES When connecting to any other device, read its user guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not connect incompatible products. EMERGENCY CALLS Ensure the phone is switched on and in service. Press End as many times as needed to clear the display and return to the main screen. Enter the emergency number, then press Send. Give your location. Do not end the call until given permission to do so.
ABOUT YOUR DEVICE The wireless device described in this guide is approved for use on the GSM 850 and 1900 networks. Contact your service provider for more information about networks. When using the features in this device, obey all laws and respect privacy and legitimate rights of others. Warning: To use any features in this device, other than the alarm clock, the phone must be switched on. Do not switch the device on when wireless phone use may cause interference or danger.
NETWORK SERVICES To use the phone you must have service from a wireless service provider. Many of the features in this device depend on features in the wireless network to function. These Network Services may not be available on all networks or you may have to make specific arrangements with your service provider before you can utilize Network Services. Your service provider may need to give you additional instructions for their use and explain what charges will apply. Some networks may have limitations that affect how you can use Network Services. For instance, some networks may not support all language-dependent characters and services. Your service provider may have requested that certain features be disabled or not activated in your device. If so, they will not appear on your device menu. Contact your service provider for more information. 4 Copyright 2004 Nokia
SHARED MEMORY The following features in this device may share memory: ringing tones, pictures, screen savers, and Java games and applications. Use of one or more of these features may reduce the memory available for the remaining features sharing memory. For example, saving many games may use all of the available memory. Your phone may display a message that the memory is full when you try to use a shared memory feature. In this case, delete some of the information or entries stored in the shared memory features before continuing. Some of the features, such as ringing tones, pictures, screen savers, and Java games and applications may have a certain amount of memory specially allotted to them in addition to the amount of memory shared with other features. Nokia 6010 User Guide 5 Copyright 2004 Nokia Welcome 2 Welcome Congratulations on your purchase of the Nokia 6010 mobile phone. Your phone provides many functions which are practical for daily use, such as a stopwatch, alarm clock, to-do list, calendar, and more. Look for updates From time to time, Nokia updates this guide to reflect changes. The latest version may be available at www.nokiausa.com. Also, an interactive tutorial may be available at www.nokiahowto.com. Access alternate formats This user guide may be available in alternate formats. Contact Nokia at www.nokiaaccessibility.com or call 1-888-665-4228 for more information.
REGISTER YOUR PHONE Make sure to register your phone at www.warranty.nokiausa.com or 1-888-NOKIA-2U (1-888-665-4228) so that we can serve your needs better if you should need to call the center or have your phone repaired.
E-NEWSLETTERS When you register your phone, you can sign up for Nokia's e-newsletter, Nokia Connections, if you would like. You will receive tips and tricks on using your phone, accessory information, and special offers.
COPYRIGHT PROTECTION Copyright protections may prevent some images, ringing tones, and other content from being copied, modified, transferred, or forwarded. 6 Copyright 2004 Nokia
CONTACT NOKIA If you ever need to call Nokia Customer Care or your service provider, you will need to provide specific information about your phone. Find information about your phone This information is provided on the phone label. The label is on the back of the phone (under the battery). It contains the model and serial numbers, as well as other important information about your phone. See Remove the back cover and battery on page 9 for instructions on how to access the phone label. The label shows the following:
Phone type Phone model IMEI FCC ID number Nokia 6010 User Guide 7 Copyright 2004 Nokia Welcome Have the phone or enhancement available Whether you are calling about your phone or an enhancement, have the equipment with you when you call. If a Nokia representative asks a specific question about the enhancement, you will have it available for quick reference. Nokia Customer Care Center, USA Customer Care Centre, Canada Nokia Mobile Phones 7725 Woodland Center Boulevard, Suite #150 Tampa, Florida 33614 Tel: 1-888-NOKIA-2U
(1-888-665-4228) Fax: 1-813-249-9619 For TTY users: 1-800-24-NOKIA
(1-800-246-6542) Nokia Products Ltd. 601 Westney Rd. South Ajax, Ontario L1S 4N7 Tel: 1-905-427-1373 1-888-22-NOKIA
(1-888-226-6542) Fax: 1-905-427-1070 Web site: www.nokia.ca 8 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3 SIM card and battery Before you begin, you need to prepare your phone by installing the SIM card and charging the battery. This chapter covers these topics, as well as instructions on how to attach the optional headset. Always switch off the phone before installing the SIM card and battery.
SIM CARD INSTALLATION Warning: Keep all SIM cards out of the reach of small children. For availability and information on using SIM card services, contact your SIM card vendor. This may be the service provider, network operator, or other vendor. Remove the back cover and battery 1 With the back of the phone facing you, press and hold the back cover release button. Slide the cover up; then lift it off the phone. Lift out the battery. 2 3 2 1 3 Nokia 6010 User Guide 9 Copyright 2004 Nokia SIM card and battery Install the SIM card The SIM card and its contacts can easily be damaged by scratches or bending, so be careful when handling, inserting, or removing the card. 1 With the phone positioned as shown in the illustration below, locate the SIM 2 card slot. Install the SIM card by sliding it gently into the slot as shown in the illustration below, making sure the gold colored contact area is face down. SIM card slot SIM card installed Beveled corner SIM card directional icon on type label 10 Copyright 2004 Nokia
INSTALL THE BATTERY 1 2 Position the battery (with the label side facing up), so the gold colored contacts match up with those on the phone. Slide the battery until it snaps into place. Gold colored contacts Replace the back cover 1 2 Direct the back cover towards the locking catches on the phone. Slide the back cover until it locks into place. Note: Always store and use the phone with the covers attached. 1 2 Locking catches Nokia 6010 User Guide 11 Copyright 2004 Nokia SIM card and battery
CHARGE THE BATTERY You can use the phone while the charger is connected. 1 Connect the charger to a standard wall outlet. Insert the charger plug into the round jack in the bottom of the phone. Charger 2 3 The battery power indicator
(or battery bar) appears on the screen and starts scrolling. If the phone is on, Charging appears briefly on the screen. When the battery bar stops scrolling, the battery charge is complete. Battery full appears also, if the phone is on. Disconnect the charger from the phone.
REMOVE THE SIM CARD If you ever need to remove the SIM card, follow these steps. 1 Remove the back cover and battery. See Remove the back cover and battery on page 9. Press the plastic tab of the SIM card holder down. Gently push the SIM card towards the top of the phone and remove it. 2 3 12 Copyright 2004 Nokia
SET UP YOUR HEADSET Your phone may come with a headset (HDC-5) you can use while talking on your phone. The headset provides convenient hands-free use of the phone. Connect the headset 1 Insert the headset plug into the headset jack in the phone. Put the round ear bud into one ear. 2 Use the headset Headset With the headset connected, you can make and answer calls as usual, using the keypad to press the Talk key and the End key or to enter numbers to call. The microphone for the headset hangs at the side of your head. Although the microphone may seem far from your mouth, you can speak at a normal volume. Refer to the packaging materials of your headset for further information regarding its operation. Nokia 6010 User Guide 13 Copyright 2004 Nokia About your phone 4 About your phone
SWITCH ON YOUR PHONE Warning: Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. 1 To turn your phone on or off, press and hold the Power key on top of the phone for at least three seconds. If the phone displays Insert SIM card, even though the SIM card is properly inserted, or SIM card not supported, contact your service provider. 2 If the phone asks for a personal identity number
(PIN) code, enter the PIN code (displayed as ****) and select OK. See the information about PIN codes on page 70, if applicable. If the phone asks for a security code, enter the security code and select OK. See Change the security code on page 72 for more information. 3 4 If the language that appears in your display is not correct, see Display language on page 59 for information on changing the display language. 14 Copyright 2004 Nokia Back cover Antenna area On the back of your phone, you will find the back cover release button. When you remove the back cover, you will find an antenna area, which is similar to the one shown in the graphic on the left. Back cover release
THE ANTENNA Your phone has an internal antenna. Note: As with any other radio transmitting device, do not touch the antenna unnecessarily when the device is switched on. Contact with the antenna affects call quality and may cause the phone to operate at a higher power level than otherwise needed. Avoiding contact with the antenna area when operating the phone optimizes the antenna performance and the battery life. Nokia 6010 User Guide 15 Copyright 2004 Nokia About your phone Not touching the antenna during a call optimizes the antenna performance and the talk time of your phone. Hold the phone as you would any other telephone, with the antenna area pointed up and over your shoulder.
THE START SCREEN When you turn on your phone, the first screen that appears is the start screen, which is in the standby mode. In the middle of the start screen, you may see information indicating which wireless network your phone uses. This information can vary between phones. The Left selection key in the standby mode accesses Menu (the menu functions) and the Right selection key in the standby mode accesses the Contacts menu. Other indicators and icons appear on the start screen and are described in the next section. Menu Contacts 16 Copyright 2004 Nokia
INDICATORS AND ICONS On your phone, you have two types of identifiers: indicators and icons. Indicators Indicators show the status of the phone. Signal Strength Indicator Battery Strength Indicator
The signal strength indicator shows the strength of the signal to your phone. The battery strength indicator shows how much power is left in your phone battery. The volume indicator shows the earpiece volume level. See Adjust the earpiece volume during a call on page 20 for details. The audible signal and battery indicator shows by a series of beeps that either the signal or battery strength is running low on your phone. You need to set up this feature on your phone through the voice command function before it will operate. See Voice commands on page 52 for more information. Icons Icons are graphical representations of a specific item or situation. The following table shows examples and tells you what each icon means. Icon What it means Line 1 is selected for outgoing calls. Line 2 is selected for outgoing calls. You have an active call. Nokia 6010 User Guide 17 Copyright 2004 Nokia About your phone Icon What it means You have a call on hold. You have one or more new voice mail messages. You have a new voice mail message on line 1. You have new voice mail messages on line 1 and line 2. You have a new voice mail message on line 2. You have one or more new text messages. If the icon blinks, text message memory is full. Keyguard is on. Your phone will not accept any key presses. The alarm clock is set. The call alert and text message alert tones are turned off. The timed option for a profile is selected. Incoming voice calls are being forwarded to another number. You have forwarded all voice calls received on line 1. You have forwarded all voice calls received on line 2. You have forwarded all voice calls received on lines 1 and 2. The phone is ready for you to enter a response. 18 Copyright 2004 Nokia Icon What it means There is a voice tag attached to a name in Contacts. Indicates an e-mail address in Contacts. You have assigned the name and number to a caller group. The headset is attached to your phone. The car kit is attached to your phone. The loopset is attached to your phone. A Telecommunications Device for the Deaf (TTY/TDD) is attached to your phone. The contact entry is stored on the SIM card. You are using predictive text input. Your phone uses a built-in dictionary to predict or guess the word entered. Nokia 6010 User Guide 19 Copyright 2004 Nokia Make and answer calls 5 Make and answer calls This chapter tells you how to make and receive calls and how to adjust certain options.
MAKE A CALL Check the signal strength The signal indicator on the left side of your phone screen shows the strength of the network radio signal. The indicator scrolls as the signal strength increases and decreases. To get the strongest signal, try moving your phone slightly. If you are inside a building, move toward a window. Use the keypad Enter the area code (if required in your local calling area) and phone number and press the Talk key. Use Contacts 1 Signal Strength From the start screen, press the Up scroll key or the Down scroll key to scroll to the number you want. Press the Talk key. 2 Adjust the earpiece volume during a call You can only adjust the earpiece volume during an active call.
To increase the volume of a call, press the Up scroll key. To decrease the volume of a call, press the Down scroll key.
When adjusting the volume, a bar chart appears in the display indicating the volume level. If an enhancement with its own loudspeaker is connected to your phone, the volume keys adjust the volume for that enhancement.
END A CALL Press the End key. 20 Copyright 2004 Nokia
ANSWER A CALL Press the Talk key. OR Select Options > Answer call. Caller ID Note: This feature may not be available in all wireless systems. Contact your service provider for details and availability. When caller ID is active, your phone may display the callers phone number. The callers name may also appear, if his or her name and number are stored in Contacts. See Contacts on page 33.
REJECT A CALL Press the End key. OR Select Silence > Decline. OR Select Options > Decline call.
REDIAL Last-dialed number Press the Talk key twice. Any of twenty last-dialed numbers 1 2 Press the Talk key and select the number you want to redial. Press the Talk key again. Nokia 6010 User Guide 21 Copyright 2004 Nokia The menu 6 The menu Your phone offers many functions that are grouped in menus and submenus. Access these menus with the selection keys and scroll keys. See Nokia 6010 phone at a glance on page 1 for the location of the selection keys and scroll keys.
SCROLL BAR While using phone menus, a scroll bar appears at the far right of the screen. This bar indicates where you are in the menu. Each numbered tab on the bar represents a different menu item. For example, select Menu once. The scroll bar appears with the first (top) tab displayed. A different tab appears each time you press the Up scroll or Down scroll key.
LIST OF MAIN MENUS AND SUBMENUS Here is an abbreviated list of the main menus and their submenus. Later chapters tell you how to work with the menus, explaining their functions. Some items may not appear due to the SIM card configuration and network service availability. 1 Messages 1 Text messages 1 Create message 2 Inbox 3 Create SMS e-mail 4 Sent items 5 Archive 6 Templates 7 My folders 8 Distribution lists 9 Delete messages 2 Multimedia messages 1 Create message 2 Inbox 3 Outbox 4 Sent items 5 Saved items 6 Delete messages 22 Copyright 2004 Nokia 3 Voice messages 1 Listen to voice messages 2 Voice mailbox number 4 Info messages 1 Info service 2 Topics 3 Language 4 Info topics saved on SIM card 5 Message settings 1 Text messages 2 Multimedia msg. 3 Other settings 6 Service command editor 2 Call log 1 Missed calls 2 Received calls 3 Dialed numbers 4 Delete recent call lists 1 All 2 Missed 3 Received 4 Dialed 5 Call timers 1 Duration of last call 2 Duration of received calls 3 Duration of dialed calls 4 Duration of all calls 5 Life timer 6 Clear timers 1 Last call units 2 All calls units 3 Call cost settings 6 Call costs (Depends on network availability and your SIM card) Nokia 6010 User Guide 23 Copyright 2004 Nokia The menu 7 GPRS data counter 1 Data sent in last session 2 Data received in last session 3 All sent data 4 All received data 5 Clear counters 8 GPRS connection timer 1 Duration of last session 2 Duration of all sessions 3 Clear timers 9 Message counter 1 Sent messages 2 Received messages 3 Clear counters 3 Profiles 1 Normal 1 Select 2 Customize 1 Ringing options 2 Ringing tone 3 Ringing volume 4 Vibrating alert 5 Message alert tone 6 Keypad tones 7 Warning tones 8 Alert for 9 Profile name (Appears under Silent, Meeting, Outdoor, My profile 1 and My profile 2) 3 Timed 2 Silent 3 Meeting 4 Outdoor 5 My profile 1 6 My profile 2 24 Copyright 2004 Nokia 4 Settings 1 Tone settings 1 Ringing options 2 Ringing tone 3 Ringing volume 4 Vibrating alert 5 Message alert tone 6 Keypad tones 7 Warning tones 8 Alert for 2 Time and date settings 1 Clock 2 Date 3 Auto-update of date & time 3 Call settings 1 Automatic redial 2 1-touch dialing 3 Summary after call 4 Anykey answer 4 Phone settings 1 Language 2 Automatic keyguard 3 Cell info display 4 Welcome note 5 Help text activation 6 Start-up tone 7 Memory status 5 Display settings 1 Wallpaper 2 Color schemes 3 Operator logo (Depends upon network availability) 4 Screen saver timeout 5 Display brightness Nokia 6010 User Guide 25 Copyright 2004 Nokia The menu 6 Network services 1 Call forwarding 2 Call waiting 3 Send own caller ID when calling 4 Line for outgoing calls 5 System selection 6 Confirm SIM service actions 7 Accessory settings (Only shows up when phone is connected to an enhancement) 1 Headset 2 Handsfree (Only shows up when phone is connected to Car Kit) 3 Loopset 4 TTY/TDD 8 Security settings 1 PIN code request 2 Call restrictions 3 Fixed dialing 4 Closed user group 5 Security level 6 Change access codes 9 Restore factory settings 5 Gallery 1 View folders 2 Add folder 3 Delete folder 4 Rename folder 5 Gallery downl. 6 Organizer 1 Alarm clock 2 Calendar 3 To-do list 26 Copyright 2004 Nokia 7 Games 1 Select game 1 Air Glide 2 Bowling 3 Sky Diver 4 Backgammon 1 Game sounds 2 Game lights 3 Shakes 2 Game downlds. (depends on network availability) 3 Memory 4 Settings 8 Applications 1 Select app. 2 App. downloads 3 Memory 9 Extras 1 Calculator 2 Stopwatch 1 Split timing 2 Lap timing 3 Voice commands 1 Audible alerts 1 Audible battery bar 2 Audible signal bar 10 Connectivity 1 Synchronize 2 GPRS connection Nokia 6010 User Guide 27 Copyright 2004 Nokia The menu 11 Services THE FOLLOWING MENU ITEMS MAY VARY; CONTACT YOUR SERVICE PROVIDER. 1 Home 2 Bookmarks 3 Service inbox 4 Settings 1 Connection settings 1 Active service settings 2 Edit active service settings 2 Appearance settings 1 Scroll mode 2 Text wrapping 3 Show images 3 Security settings 1 User certificates 2 Authority certificates 3 Security module settings 4 Cookies 4 Service inbox settings 1 Service messages 2 Automatic connection 5 Go to address 6 Clear the cache 12 IM THE FOLLOWING MENU ITEMS MAY VARY. FOR AVAILABILITY AND INFORMATION ON USING INSTANT MESSAGING, CONTACT YOUR SERVICE PROVIDER. 1 Login 2 Saved convers. 3 IM provider 4 Settings 28 Copyright 2004 Nokia 7 Text entry You can use two methods for entering text and numbers.
Standard mode is the only way to enter names into Contacts, enter a welcome note and to rename caller groups. Predictive text input is a quick and easy method for writing messages.
At any message screen, press the # key to switch predictive text on or off and to use predictive text in various modes. As you press the # key, the following icons
(not the descriptions) appear in the upper left of the display:
Icon What it means Uppercase text. Predictive text is Off. Lowercase text. Predictive text is Off. Sentence case text. Predictive text is Off. Sentence case text. Predictive text is On. Lowercase text. Predictive text is On. See Mobile messages on page 75 for more information on how to access a message screen.
STANDARD MODE
Press a key once to insert the first letter on the key, twice for the second letter, etc. If you pause briefly, the last letter in the display is accepted and your phone awaits the next entry. Select Clear to backspace the cursor and delete a character. Select and hold Clear to backspace continuously and delete characters. Press the 0 key to enter a space and accept a completed word. Press the 1 key to enter a period. characters on page 31. Press the * key to display special characters. See Punctuation and special To switch to 123 mode from Abc mode, press and hold the # key at any message entry screen until the icon in the upper left corner of the display switches from Abc to 123 (or vice versa). Nokia 6010 User Guide 29 Copyright 2004 Nokia Text entry
PREDICTIVE TEXT 2 Enter text
Predictive text input allows you to write messages quickly using your keypad and the built-in phone dictionary. It is much faster than using the standard mode multi-tap method. You can use predictive text to write a message and create a calendar note. When predictive text is on, the icon display. When predictive text is off, the icon of the display. Activate 1 appears in the upper left corner of the appears in the upper left corner At a text entry screen, select and hold Options. OR At a text entry screen, select Options > Predictive text. Select the language of your choice. For each letter of the word that you want to spell, press the corresponding key on your keypad only once, even if the letter you want is not the first letter on the key. The phone guesses the word you are trying to spell. If a displayed word is not correct, press the * key to see other matches. To move forward through a list of matches, keep pressing the * key. To return to the previous word in the list of matches, select Previous. Press the 0 key to accept the word, enter a space, and begin writing the next word. If ? appears after a word, select Spell to add the word to the dictionary. See Add new words to the dictionary on page 31. Press the 1 key to insert a period into your message. Press and hold the * key to display special characters. See Punctuation and special characters on page 31. Compound words 1 Enter the first part of the compound word and confirm it by pressing the Down scroll key. Enter the last part of the word and confirm it by pressing the 0 key.
2 30 Copyright 2004 Nokia Add new words to the dictionary If you encounter a word that predictive text does not recognize, a question mark
(?) follows the word and Spell appears in the lower left of the display. Select Spell, enter your new word using the keypad, and select Save. The word is added to the dictionary and to the message that you are writing. Keep these factors in mind when adding words:
New words that you accept by selecting Save, the 0 key, or deleting the space between two words are saved to the dictionary. Depending on the language and the length of the words, you may be able to add hundreds of words to the dictionary.
When the dictionary is full, the most recent addition replaces the first.
PUNCTUATION AND SPECIAL CHARACTERS In ABC mode 1 While at any text entry screen, press the * key to display the following special characters (press and hold the * key if predictive text is on):
l 2 Scroll to the character you want and select Insert. Nokia 6010 User Guide 31 Copyright 2004 Nokia Text entry In 123 mode You can access the following special characters only in 123 mode. There are two places you can use these characters:
At the start screen, when you dial a phone number. At the number prompt, when you add a new entry to Contacts. Press the * key Once to enter *. Twice to enter +. Three times to enter p. Four times to enter w. Function Sends command strings to the network. Contact your service provider for details. Provides a prefix for dialing international numbers. Creates a pause that occurs when dialing a number. Numbers entered to the right of this special character are automatically sent as touch tones after a 2.5-second pause. Creates a wait; digits to the right of the w are not sent until you press the Talk key. 32 Copyright 2004 Nokia 8 Contacts You can keep track of contact information in Contacts.
Names are saved in Contacts memory and/or SIM memory. For each name in the phone memory, you can add up to five phone numbers, including the following categories:
General phone number Mobile phone number Home phone number Work phone number Fax number
For each name in the phone memory, you can also store an e-mail address, a web address, a street address, and a note. See E-mail address on page 34 and Add text entries on page 34. For more details about phone memory and SIM memory, see Phone memory on page 35.
SAVE NAMES, NUMBERS, AND E-MAIL ADDRESSES At the start screen, enter the number you want to save and select Options. Select Save, enter the name, and select OK. Quick save 1 2 Number only From the start screen, enter the number, and select and hold Options. Name and number while in a call 1 2 From the start screen, select Options > Contacts > Add contact. Enter the name, select OK, enter the phone number, and select OK. Nokia 6010 User Guide 33 Copyright 2004 Nokia Contacts E-mail address You can save an e-mail address for a name in Contacts. All Contacts entries that contain e-mail addresses must be stored in the phone memory. See Phone and SIM memory on page 35. 1 At the start screen, press the Up scroll or the Down scroll key to scroll to the name you want. Select Details > Options > Add detail. If the name has been saved to the SIM card, the phone prompts you to move it to the phone memory; then select OK. Select E-mail, enter the e-mail address, and select OK. 2 3 4
ADD TEXT ENTRIES Besides adding an email address for each name in Contacts, you can also add a web address, street address, or note for each name. 1 At the start screen, press the Up scroll or the Down scroll key to scroll to the name you want. Select Details > Options > Add detail. If the name has been saved to the SIM card, the phone prompts you to move it to the phone memory, select OK. Select either Web address, Street addr. or Note, enter your information, and select OK. 2 3 4
FIND NAMES IN CONTACTS Select Contacts > Find and the name you want. Select Details to show the phone number. To call the number, press the Talk key. 1 2 3 Use scroll keys At the start screen, press the Up scroll or the Down scroll key to scroll to the name you want. 34 Copyright 2004 Nokia
EDIT NAMES AND NUMBERS Names 1 Numbers 1 2 3 2 3 At the start screen, press the Up scroll or Down scroll key to scroll to the name you want to change. Select Details > Options > Edit name. Select Clear as many times as necessary to delete the name, enter the new name, and select OK. At the start screen, press the Up scroll or Down scroll key to scroll to the number you want to change. Select Details > Options > Edit number. Select Clear as many times as necessary to delete the number, enter the new number, and select OK.
PHONE MEMORY appears when a You can save names and numbers in the internal memory of the phone, SIM card memory, or in a combination of the two. The SIM icon Contacts entry is saved in SIM memory. The shorter the names and numbers, the more entries you can store in Contacts. The phone memory can hold from 125 to 500 names, depending on the number of characters used for each name, number, or text entry. Phone and SIM memory The following table summarizes the differences between the three types of memory you can choose. Phone feature Contact names capacity Phone memory Up to 500
(depending on length of entries) SIM memory Up to 250 contact names (Depends on your SIM card;
check with your service provider) Phone and SIM memory Up to 750 contact names
(both SIM and phone entries are displayed) Nokia 6010 User Guide 35 Copyright 2004 Nokia Contacts Phone feature Phone numbers Phone memory Up to 5 numbers per name E-mail, Web address, Street Address and Note Up to 3 text entries per name SIM memory 1 number
(Depends on your SIM card; check with your service provider) Not available Phone and SIM memory Up to 5 numbers per name (stored in phone memory) Up to 3 text entries per name
(stored in phone memory) Yes No Caller groups?
Transfer contact names/numbers to another phone?
Yes Yes Yes, contact your service provider for details. Only numbers stored to SIM can be transferred Voice tags?
Yes Yes Yes Switch between memory types The default memory type is Phone and SIM. Select Contacts > Settings > Memory in use > Phone and SIM, Phone, or SIM card. If you choose to keep Phone and SIM as the memory type:
Contacts names and numbers can be recalled from both the phone and SIM card
Contacts entries are displayed in a combined list
New entries are saved to the phone memory. Check Contacts memory status Select Contacts > Settings > Memory status > Phone or SIM card. If your list in Contacts is full, you can save the phone number to another memory or replace an existing entry. 36 Copyright 2004 Nokia
DELETE NAMES AND NUMBERS At the start screen, press the Up scroll or the Down scroll key to scroll to the entry you want to delete. Select Details > Options > Delete number > OK. Number 1 2 Name and number 1 At the start screen, press the Up scroll key or the Down scroll key to scroll through Contacts until you find the entry you want to delete. Select Details > Options > Delete > OK. 2 Entire Contacts content Warning: This feature deletes the entire content of Contacts and cannot be undone. Some repair services for your phone may erase your contact list entries. Be sure to make a copy of all information before requesting any repair service. 1 2 Select Contacts > Delete > Delete all > Phone or SIM card > Delete > OK. Enter your security code and select OK. See Security code on page 72 for the default code. Nokia 6010 User Guide 37 Copyright 2004 Nokia Call history 9 Call history Your phone registers information about each call you make and receive. The Call log keeps track of the following:
Missed calls
Received calls Dialed calls General packet radio system (GPRS) data sent and received. Time spent online for GPRS data transfers Text messages sent and received
CHECK MISSED, RECEIVED, OR DIALED CALLS Your phone saves the last 20 numbers you have dialed or the last 10 numbers you have missed or received. The Call log saves the phone numbers of missed or received calls only if the callers number is available, your phone is turned on, and you are in your home calling area. 1 Select Menu > Call log > Missed calls, Received calls, or Dialed numbers and select the number you want to see. To dial the number, press the Talk key. Select Options to find more information or to add a number to Contacts. 2 3
CALL LISTS OPTIONS When you view the missed calls, received calls, or dialed calls list and select Options, the following choices may appear. Not all options will appear each time and the order of options may vary. Call timeShows the date and time of the last call. Use the scroll keys to view up to five recent call dates/time for the displayed phone number. Send messageAllows you to write a short text message to the person who called you. View numberDisplays the phone number if the callers name is stored in Contacts. Edit numberAllows you to edit the displayed number and save it with a name to Contacts. SaveAllows you to enter a name for the number and save both to Contacts. Add to contactAllows you to move a contact to phone memory. DeleteAllows you to delete the number from the call list. 38 Copyright 2004 Nokia CallDials the number from the Call log.
CLEAR CALL LISTS This feature clears all the missed, received, and dialed call lists. Warning: You cannot undo this operation. Select Menu > Call log > Delete recent call lists > All, Missed, Received, or Dialed. Missed, received, and dialed calls lists are also deleted when you change the phone security setting or if you use a SIM card that is not one of the five most recent cards used with the phone.
CALL TIMERS Note: Some timers, including the life timer, may be reset during service or software upgrades. Two phone lines If you subscribe to a second phone line (see Two phone lines on page 49), call timers are separate for each phone line. When you view call timers, the call timers that are shown are for the currently selected outgoing line. However, if you view call timers while you are in a call, the call timers that are shown are for the line you are using at that moment. View call duration 1 Select Menu > Call log > Call timers > Duration of last call, Duration of received calls, Duration of dialed calls, or Duration of all calls. Select Back after viewing the selected call timer. 2 Nokia 6010 User Guide 39 Copyright 2004 Nokia Call history View the life timer Your phone keeps track of the total call time (all calls made and received). The life timer is displayed in hhhh:mm format. 1 2 Reset call timers to zero Select Menu > Call log > Life timer. Select Back after viewing the life timer. Note: You cannot reset the life timer. However, sometimes the life timer may be reset during service on software upgrades. Select Menu > Call log > Call timers > Clear timers, enter your security code, and select OK. Show call timer during a call Note: The actual time invoiced for calls by your service provider may vary, depending on network features, rounding off for billing, and so forth. While in a call, select Options > Menu > Call log > Call timers. Show call timer after call Your phone can display the time spent on a call after you end the call. This feature is called Summary after call. Select Menu > Settings > Call settings > Summary after call > On or Off.
MESSAGE COUNTER The message counter gives you information on how many text messages have been sent and received. You can view the amount of sent and received messages, view details about the messages and reset the counter. 1 Select Menu > Call log > Message counter > Sent messages or Received messages. Select the message (phone number) you want to see. To dial the number, press the Talk key. 2 3 40 Copyright 2004 Nokia 4 Select Options and one of the following options:
Message detailsShows either the sender or recipient of the message, along with details of the sent message. Send messageAllows you to write a short text message to the person who either sent you a message or received a message from you. This option will display if the message was sent to or received from a phone number. CallAllows you to call the person who either sent you a message or received a message from you. Edit numberAllows you to edit the displayed number and save it with a name to Contacts. SaveAllows you to enter a name for the number and save both to Contacts. Add to contactAllows you to move a contact to phone memory. DeleteAllows you to delete the number from the message list.
MANAGE CALL COSTS This network service allows you to check call costs. You can view the last call cost or the total cost of all calls made or received since the counters were reset. Contact your service provider for availability and instructions. Note: The actual invoice for calls and services from your service provider may vary, depending on network features, rounding off for billing, taxes and so forth.
DATA CALLS In addition to keeping track of voice calls, the phone call log records information about data calls. You can check the amount of GPRS data transferred over the network. You can also keep track of how much time you spend online. Note: Text messages sent over GPRS are not counted and therefore not included in the data counter or connection timer. For details on pricing and availability, contact your service provider. Nokia 6010 User Guide 41 Copyright 2004 Nokia Call history Data counter CHECK All data counters are displayed in bytes (B). Select Menu > Call log > GPRS data counter and one of the following options:
Data sent in last session Data received in last session All sent data All received data CLEAR Select Menu > Call log > GPRS data counter > Clear counters, enter your security code and select OK. Connection timer CHECK The time is displayed in hh:mm:ss format. Select Menu > Call log > GPRS connection timer and one of the following options:
Duration of last session Duration of all sessions CLEAR Select Menu > Call log > GPRS connection timer > Clear timers, enter your security code and select OK. 42 Copyright 2004 Nokia 10 Advanced calling features In-call options and swapping between calls Call settings that you control such as anykey answer Network services such as call forwarding This chapter covers advanced calling features, including:
Not all features that are described are available in all wireless networks. Contact your service provider for availability of network services.
IN-CALL OPTIONS During a call, select Options to see the in-call menu. Not all options will appear each time and the order of options may vary. Lock keypadAllows you to lock the phone keypad. End callEnds the current call. New callAllows you to place a new call. Touch tonesSends touch tones. Touch tones are the sounds generated when you press a key; touch tones can be used for automated, over-the-phone services such as checking airline arrival or departure times. ContactsSwitches you to Contacts, so that you can look up a name, number, or address. MenuAllows you to access the phone menu. MuteDisables the microphone so that the other party cannot hear you speak. Mute also affects the microphone of any external enhancements connected to your phone. HoldHolds or releases a call. New call Enter the second phone number or recall it from Contacts and press the Talk key. OR 1 2 With either method, the first call is automatically put on hold. SWITCH BETWEEN TWO CALLS IN PROGRESS Press the Talk key or select Swap. Select Options > New call. Enter the second phone number or recall it from Contacts and select Call. Nokia 6010 User Guide 43 Copyright 2004 Nokia icon represents the active call and the icon represents the call on hold. Advanced calling features The END THE ACTIVE CALL Press the End key. The call on hold becomes the active call. International call 1 2 Press the * key twice to enter the international dialing prefix (+). Enter the country code, area code, and phone number, then press the Talk key.
AUTOMATIC REDIAL Select Menu > Settings > Call settings > Automatic redial > On. If the number you dial is busy, your phone immediately redials the number. If it is still busy, your phone will redial the number up to nine more times. Automatic redial will not work while you make or answer another call.
1-TOUCH DIALING Assign a name and number to a 1-touch dialing location so that when you press this key, the phone automatically dials the associated number. The 1 key is used to access your voice mail. See Listen to your voice messages on page 50 for details on voice mail. Activate Select Menu > Settings > Call settings > 1-touch dialing > On. Assign number 1 2 Select Contacts > 1-touch dialing, a dialing location, and Assign. Enter a phone number, select OK, enter a name, and select OK. OR Select Find and the Contacts entry you want. Call At the start screen, press and hold the appropriate key. OR At the start screen, press the appropriate key, and the Talk key. 44 Copyright 2004 Nokia Change 1 2 Delete 1 2 Select Contacts > 1-touch dialing, the key you want to change, and Options > Change. Enter a phone number, select OK, enter a name, and select OK. Select Contacts > 1-touch dialing, then select the key you want to delete. Select Options > Delete > OK.
ANYKEY ANSWER Anykey answer allows you to answer an incoming call by briefly pressing any key except the Power key, the Left selection key, the Right selection key, and the End key. Select Menu > Settings > Call settings > Anykey answer > On or Off.
NETWORK SERVICES Network services include call forwarding, call waiting, caller ID, multiple lines for outgoing calls, and system selection. For availability, pricing, and subscription to network services, contact your service provider. Outgoing line Your service provider must have this feature activated before you can select line 2. Select Menu > Settings > Network services > Line for outgoing calls > Line 1 or Line 2. Own number in caller ID You can determine, for each call you make, whether your telephone number appears on anothers phone caller ID. This feature is network-dependent and works on a call-by-call basis. Contact your service provider for more information. 1 Select Menu > Settings > Call settings > Network services > Send own caller ID when calling. Select one of the following options:
DefaultYour phone number is sent according to the network. YesYour phone number is sent to the other persons caller ID. NoYour phone number is not sent to the other persons caller ID. 2 Nokia 6010 User Guide 45 Copyright 2004 Nokia Advanced calling features Call forwarding Call forwarding tells your network to redirect incoming calls to another number. It is a network-dependent feature and may not work the same in all networks. Contact your service provider for availability. ACTIVATE 1 Select Menu > Settings > Network services > Call forwarding and one of the following options:
Note: If you want to forward your calls to another number when your phone is turned off, select Forward when not able to take calls. Forward all voice calls Forward if busy Forward if not answered Forward if out of reach Forward when not able to take calls Forward all fax calls Forward all data calls Cancel all call forwarding Select Activate > To voice mailb. or To other no. If you select To other no., enter the phone number and select OK. The following icons appear on the phone screen:
2 Incoming voice calls are being forwarded to another number. You have forwarded all voice calls that are received on line 1. You have forwarded all voice calls that are received on line 2. You have forwarded all voice calls that are received on lines 1 and 2. CANCEL 1 2 Select Menu > Settings > Network services > Call forwarding. Select the call forwarding option you want and Cancel. Note: Canceling all call forwarding may also cancel any automatic forwarding of calls to voice mail that your service provider has activated for you. Also, this option may cancel your call forwarding service. Contact your service provider for details. 46 Copyright 2004 Nokia Select Menu > Settings > Network services > Call forwarding. Select the call forwarding option you want and Check status. CHECK CALL FORWARDING STATUS The Check status option is not available for Forward when not able to take calls 1 2 To see the phone number where the calls are being forwarded, select Number. Select a system You can select how your phone chooses a wireless network, as there may be more than one available. The selection you make stays active until you change it or change the SIM card. Select Menu > Settings > Network services > System selection and one of the following options:
AutomaticThe phone automatically selects one of the available systems. ManualThe phone searches for available systems and then lists them. Select the system you want. The phone looks for a system and displays the result. If you lose connection while in Manual mode, the phone asks you to select a system again. Call waiting This network service lets you receive an incoming call when you are already in a call. The phone beeps to let you know of the incoming call. Contact your service provider to sign up for call waiting. Select Menu > Settings > Network services > Call waiting > Activate or Cancel. CONFIRM STATUS Select Menu > Settings > Network services > Call waiting > Check status. ANSWER A WAITING CALL Your phone signals when you have a call waiting. Press the Talk key or select Answer to put the current call on hold and answer the waiting call. REJECT A WAITING CALL Select Options > Decline call. SWITCH BETWEEN CALLS Press the Talk key or select Swap. The END THE ACTIVE CALL Press the End key or select Options > End call and the call on hold becomes active. icon represents the active call and the icon represents the call on hold. Nokia 6010 User Guide 47 Copyright 2004 Nokia Advanced calling features THIRD CALL WAITING If you have both an active and a call on hold and a third call is waiting, you can answer the third call and end the other calls. Select Options > End all calls, then press the Talk key to answer the third call. Conference calls This network service, if available from your service provider, allows you to make conference calls with your phone. Contact your service provider for availability. MAKE 1 2 Place a call to the first person. Select Options > New call, enter the number of the next party you want to include, and select Call. After the other party answers, select Options > Conference. To add other parties to the call, repeat steps 23. To end the conference call, press the End key. 3 4 5 TALK PRIVATELY 1 While in a conference call, select Options > Private call. 2 Select the person with whom you want to speak privately. The other participants can continue talking with each other. To rejoin the conference call, select Options > Conference. 3 Transfer calls This network service, if available from your service provider, allows you to connect an active call and a call on hold and disconnect yourself from the call. Contact your service provider for availability. During a call, select Options > Transfer calls. 48 Copyright 2004 Nokia 11 Voice features The voice features in your phone make communication more convenient. You can check messages from friends or business associates, record a voice tag for contacts in the Contacts function, and use voice dialing for handsfree operation.
VOICE MAIL A voice mail subscription A voice mailbox number A temporary password Voice mail is a network feature that allows callers to leave a voice message for you when you are not able to take the call. To use voice mail, you must have:
These items are assigned by your service provider. Your service provider should also tell you how to record a greeting for your voice mailbox and how to change the temporary password. If you have difficulty using the voice mail feature, contact your service provider. Voice mailbox number If your service provider has not already set up the voice mailbox number, follow these steps to set up the voice mailbox number. 1 2 The voice mailbox number must be longer than two characters and emergency numbers, such as 911, are not allowed. Two phone lines If your particular SIM card supports it, your phone can have two phone lines. Your service provider can tell you if your SIM card allows the use of this feature and can give you access to two phone lines. If you decide to use two phone lines, you can select one of the two lines for outgoing calls, but you can still answer calls on both lines. If you use two phone lines, you will be given a voice mailbox number for each line. You need to save the voice mailbox number for each phone line separately. To do this, first select the outgoing line and save its voice mailbox number. Then, select the other line and save its number. Select Menu > Messages > Voice messages > Voice mailbox number. Enter your voice mailbox number and select OK. Nokia 6010 User Guide 49 Copyright 2004 Nokia Voice features Voice mail indicators The method of voice mail notification depends upon your service provider. When or n you receive a voice message, your phone beeps and either an icon message received appears, where n is the number of messages. To view the message immediately, select Show; to view the message later, select Exit. If you subscribe to two different phone numbers, the message icon shows which line is receiving the voice mail message Voice mail message on line 1. Voice mail message on line 2. Voice mail message on line 1 and on line 2. Listen to your voice messages If there is a notification message on your screen, you can get your voice messages by using one of the following methods:
If you have saved your voice mailbox number in your phone, press and hold 1 to call your voice mailbox. Call your voice mailbox number as you would any other telephone number;
then follow the directions provided.
To check your voice messages anytime, Menu > Messages > Voice messages >
Listen to voice messages.
VOICE DIALING The phone voice dialing feature allows handsfree operation while you place a call. Before using this feature, you need to create entries in Contacts so you can associate a voice tag with a name and number. You can create up to 14 voice tags in your phone. To create entries in Contacts, see page 33. Voice tags Before using voice tags, note that:
Voice tags are not language-dependent. They are dependent on the speaker's voice. You must say the name exactly as you said it when you recorded it. Voice tags are sensitive to background noise. Record voice tags and use them in a quiet environment. Very short names are not accepted. Use long names and avoid similar names for different numbers.
50 Copyright 2004 Nokia Note: Using voice tags may be difficult in a noisy environment or during an emergency, so you should not rely solely upon voice dialing in all circumstances. Add 1 2 3 2 Listen 1 2 Change 1 2 Delete 1 At the start screen, press the Up scroll or the Down scroll key to scroll to until you find the name you to which you want to assign a voice tag. Select Details > Options > Add voice tag. Select Start, then speak the name clearly into the microphone. Important: Do not select Quit unless you want to cancel the recording. The phone automatically stops recording, then replays and saves the voice tag. Make a call 1 Select and hold Contacts. When you hear several beeps and Please speak now appears, release the button. Pronounce the voice tag clearly into the microphone and your phone automatically dials the number. Select Contacts > Voice tags and the name with the voice tag you want to hear. Select Options > Playback. Select Contacts > Voice tags and the name with the voice tag you want to change. Select Options > Change > Start and speak the new name. Select Contacts > Voice tags and the name with the voice tag you want to delete. Select Options > Delete > OK. 2 Nokia 6010 User Guide 51 Copyright 2004 Nokia Voice features
VOICE COMMANDS The voice command feature allows access to handsfree operation for certain phone functions. Voice commands work similar to voice dialing. Before using voice commands, you must first associate a voice tag to the phone function you want to use. Add a voice tag 1 Select Menu > Extras > Voice commands > Audible alerts > Audible battery bar or Audible signal bar > Options > Add command. Select Start and speak the voice tag clearly into the microphone. 2 Note: A message will appear if the voice command is either too short or long. You are given the option to try again. Do not select Quit unless you want to cancel the recording. icon appears next to The phone replays and then saves the recorded tag. The commands which have voice tags assigned. Existing voice command After you have associated a voice tag to a command, you can either play back, change or delete the tag. PLAY BACK 1 Select Menu > Extras > Voice commands > Audible alerts and the voice command tag you want to play back. Select Options > Playback. 2 CHANGE 1 2 2 DELETE 1 Select Menu > Extras > Voice commands > Audible alerts and the voice command tag you want to change. Select Options > Change > Start, then speak the voice tag clearly into the microphone. Select Menu > Extras > Voice commands > Audible alerts and the voice command tag you want to delete. Select Options > Delete > OK. 52 Copyright 2004 Nokia
AUDIBLE ALERTS Audible alerts provide you with the current signal bar or battery bar strength of your phone. In order to obtain audible alerts, the alerts must first be set up as voice commands. To set up voice commands, see Add a voice tag on page 52. Set up Select and hold Contacts and speak the voice tag clearly into the microphone. When the phone finds the tag, confirmation appears and the phone plays the recognized voice tag from the phone memory through the earpiece. The phone then beeps. The following table shows how the number of beeps can indicate how much strength is present in the audible alert. Audible Alert One Beep Two Beeps Three Beeps Four Beeps Battery Bar Strength Signal Bar Strength Low Half full Almost full Full Weak Somewhat strong Almost strong Strong Nokia 6010 User Guide 53 Copyright 2004 Nokia Personalize your phone 12 Personalize your phone
PROFILES The Profiles option allows you select the sound settings that match your environment, whether it is a meeting or a soccer game. Each profile contains settings for the ringing option, ringing tone, ringing volume, vibrating alert, message alert tone, keypad tones, and warning tones. Just pick the profile that suits your current environment: Silent, Meeting, or Outdoor. Your phone also has profile settings for Nokia enhancements (accessories) such as a headset, car kit, loopset, and phone adapter. Note: The accessory profiles do not appear until you attach these enhancements for the first time. Select Select Menu > Profiles and the profile you want to use. Customize 1 2 Select Menu > Profiles and the profile you want to customize. Select Customize and one of the following options:
Ringing optionsSet the ringing style. The choices include Silent, Ring, Ascending, Ring once, and Beep once. Ringing toneSet the ring tone from a selection of preprogrammed tones. Ringing volumeSet the volume for incoming calls. Vibrating alertSet the vibrating alert on or off. Your phone has an internal vibrating mechanism so you do not need a special battery to use this feature. In some profiles, the vibrating alert default is Off, so the lights may not flash unless you change the default. Message alert toneSet the alert style. The choices include No tone, Standard, Special, Beep once, Ascending, and Ringing Tone. Keypad tonesSet the volume for keypad tones. Warning tonesSet the warning and confirmation tones on or off. Alert forSet an audible alert only when a member of a selected caller group is calling. For more information about caller groups, see Caller groups on page 63. Profile nameAssign a new name to the following profiles: Silent, Meeting, or Outdoor. 54 Copyright 2004 Nokia Set timed Timed profiles can prevent missed calls. For example, if you attend an event that requires you to set your phone to the Silent profile, you may forget to return the phone to the Normal profile after the event is over. You may not notice incoming calls. With the timed profile, you can have the phone automatically return to the Normal profile at a time you specify. 1 2 3 Select Menu > Profiles and the profile you want to activate Select Timed, then enter the time for the profile to expire and select OK. If you are using a 12-hour time format, select am or pm.
ACCESSORY SETTINGS Headset (HDC-5, HDE-2, HDB-5, or HDC-10) Car kit (CARK-125 or CARK-134) Loopset (LPS-3) Phone adapter (HDA-9) You can use your phone with these Nokia enhancements:
The Accessory settings do not appear in the phone menu until you connect the headset, car kit, loopset, or phone adapter. You can adjust settings related to the enhancement, such as ring tone. Default profile When you use the headset, car kit, or loopset, you have the option of choosing a profile. You can use the currently selected profile (for example, Normal) or you can choose from the list. Select Menu > Settings > Accessory settings > Headset, Handsfree, or Loopset >
Default profile and the profile you want. Car profile You can connect your phone to an approved Nokia car kit for convenient handsfree operation. The car kit contains a microphone and a speaker, so you can conduct a conversation without holding the phone to your ear. The setting used with the car kit is called Handsfree. Connecting your phone to a car kit automatically disables the keyguard. Nokia 6010 User Guide 55 Copyright 2004 Nokia Personalize your phone AUTOMATIC ANSWER This profile lets your phone answer incoming calls after just one ring. 1 2 Place the phone into the car kit holder. Select Menu > Settings > Accessory settings > Handsfree > Automatic answer > On. LIGHTS If you are using your phone with an approved Nokia car kit, you can set lights to On (display and keypad lights stay on) or Automatic (after 15 seconds, lights turn off until the next key is pressed or the phone rings). 1 2 Place the phone into the car kit holder. Select Menu > Settings > Accessory settings > Handsfree > Lights > On or Automatic. Loopset profile The LPS-3 loopset gives people with T-coil equipped hearing aids the ability to make and receive calls without noise interference. Important: Refer to the booklet that comes with the LPS-3 for complete instructions and safety information. 1 2 3 Plug the loopset plug into the jack in the bottom of the phone, as shown in the illustration. Select Menu > Settings > Accessory settings >
Loopset. Select Use loopset > Yes. Note: If you want to use the headset or TTY/TDD, you perform steps 23, then select No to deactivate the loopset profile. TTY/TDD profile You can connect your phone to a TTY/TDD device, using the Nokia phone adapter
(HDA-9). In order for your phone to recognize the TTY/TDD, youll need to set up the TTY/TDD profile, under Accessory settings. Important: Some manufacturers of TTY/TDD devices suggest that the phone be least at 18 inches from the TTY/TDD device. Remember that when connecting to any other device, read its user guide or contact its manufacturer for detailed instructions and safety information. 1 Connect the TTY/TDD device by a cable to the HDA-9 phone adapter. 56 Copyright 2004 Nokia 2 Plug the HDA-9 phone adapter into the connector on the bottom of your phone, as shown in the illustration. Select Menu > Settings > Accessory settings > TTY/TDD > Use TTY > Yes. 3 TTY/TDD Calls NOTES
The Nokia TTY/TDD phone adapter (HDA-9) is for use with compatible TTY/TDD devices only. Check with the manufacturer of the TTY/TDD device to ensure that the connection is compatible. Check with the manufacturer of the TTY/TDD device for the connecting cable. TTY/TDD communications depend on network availability. Check with your service provider for availability and description of services.
MAKE Before making a TTY/TDD call with your Nokia phone, check the signal strength. See page 20 for more details. 1 2 When the receiving party answers, begin typing your conversation on the TTY/TDD At the start screen, enter the phone number and press the Talk key. device. RECEIVE You may find it helpful to use the vibrating alert under the Profiles menu. See Customize on page 54 for details. 1 Make sure the TTY/TDD device is connected to your phone. 2 Press the Talk key to answer the call; then type your responses on the TTY/TDD Nokia 6010 User Guide 57 Copyright 2004 Nokia Personalize your phone device. END Press the End key.
POLYPHONIC SOUND (MIDI) Your phone is equipped with a polyphonic tone generator capable of playing up to four different voices simultaneously. The generator can reproduce over 40 different instrument tones, including drums, guitar, saxophone, flute, etc. The polyphonic sounds bring a new richness and quality to ringing tones, message alert tones, background music, and sound effects used in gaming. Your Nokia 6010 mobile phone supports Mobile MIDI (GMX) format messages and ringing tones. Your phone can receive polyphonic ringing tones in two ways:
Through the multimedia messaging service (MMS). See Multimedia messages on page 84 for more information. Through the WAP browser. See Connect on page 89 for more information.
RINGING TONES Download You can download ringing tones over the Internet or have them sent to your phone by using SMS (short message service) or MMS. MIDI ring tones can be downloaded via MMS or WAP. Traditional ringing tones can be downloaded by using SMS, WAP, and MMS. Your phone has memory space for several traditional ringing tones or MIDI ringing tones. The number of tones you can save depends on the size of each tone. MIDI tones take up more storage space in the memory than traditional ringing tones. To download ringing tones, select Menu > Gallery > Gallery downlds. > Tone downlds..> More bookmarks. The list of bookmarks is dynamic and may vary, due to network service availability. Check with your service provider for more information. Note: Methods for downloading ringing tones vary. Some wireless service providers allow you to send ringing tones to your phone over the Internet, but may charge for this service. For details about downloading ringing tones, contact your wireless service provider. 58 Copyright 2004 Nokia
DISPLAY LANGUAGE You can select the phone display language. 1 Select Menu > Settings > Phone settings >
Language. Select the language you want. 2
WELCOME NOTE Select Menu > Settings > Phone settings > Welcome note. Enter a note and select Options > Save. Add You can add a welcome note that is displayed briefly each time you turn on the phone. 1 2 Delete 1 2 Select Menu > Settings > Phone settings > Welcome note. Select Options > Delete.
HELP TEXT Many menu items have brief explanations associated with them. To view the help text, scroll to the menu item and wait for about 30 seconds. Select More to see the next page of the text or Back to exit. Select Menu > Settings > Phone settings > Help text activation > On or Off.
TIME AND DATE Your phone has an internal clock that can be displayed on the start screen. It also features an alarm clock. See Alarm clock on page 106. The time and date has to be reset each time the phone battery is taken out and replaced. Set time format Select Menu > Settings > Time and date settings > Clock > Time format >
24-hour or am/pm. Set time 1 2 3 Select Menu > Settings > Time and date settings > Clock > Set the time. Enter the current time, using two digits for both hours and minutes. Select OK > am or pm. Nokia 6010 User Guide 59 Copyright 2004 Nokia Personalize your phone If you entered the time in the 24-hour format, am and pm do not appear. Display or hide clock This feature allows you to either display or hide the time on the start screen. Select Menu > Settings > Time and date settings > Clock > Hide clock or Show clock. Set date format 1 2 Select Menu > Settings > Time and date settings > Date > Date format. Select one of the following formats. DD MM YYYY MM DD YYYY YYYY MM DD Set date Select Menu > Settings > Time and date settings > Date > Set the date, enter the date, and select OK. Display or hide date This feature allows you to either display or hide the date on the start screen. Select Menu > Settings > Time and date settings > Date > Hide date or Show date. Set automatic update of date and time If this feature is supported by your wireless service provider, it automatically updates the clock in your phone in accordance with the current time zone. This may be helpful if you are traveling from New York to California, for example, and want to receive the local time from the wireless network. Select Menu > Settings > Time and date settings > Auto-update of date & time and one of the following options:
OnUpdates the date and time automatically. Confirm firstRequires you to confirm that you want the update. OffPrevents the date and time from being automatically updated. 60 Copyright 2004 Nokia
MEMORY STATUS Memory information is gathered from the following functions:
Contacts
SMS messages
MMS messages
1 2 You can also check the memory status of Contacts while you are in the Contacts function. See Check Contacts memory status on page 36. Gallery Voice recorder Organizer Applications Select Menu > Settings > Phone settings > Memory status. Select Back to return to the menu.
GALLERY You can save pictures and ringing tones to an existing folder or a folder you have created in the Gallery. You can download images and tones by using SMS, WAP, and MMS and then save them in the Gallery. You can find out how much memory is being used by the graphics and ringing tones in the Gallery by using the Memory status feature. See Memory status on page 61. Folders VIEW This feature allows you to view the folders in the Gallery. 1 2 Select Menu > Gallery > View folders > Graphics or Tones > Open. Select an image or tone, Options, and one of the following options:
OpenAllows you to open the selected file. DeleteAllows you to delete the selected file. MoveAllows you to move the file to another folder. RenameAllows you to rename the selected file. Set as wallpaper/Set as ring toneAllows you to set the graphic as wallpaper. In the Tones folder, this option is Set as ring tone; the tone is applied to profile in use. Nokia 6010 User Guide 61 Copyright 2004 Nokia Personalize your phone DetailsAllows you to view details of the file, such as the name, time and date the file was created. SortAllows you to sort the files according to date, format, name, or size. Select Menu > Gallery > Delete folder. Select the folder you want to delete and Delete > OK. ADD This feature allows you to create a folder. Select Menu > Gallery > Add folder, enter a folder name, and select OK. DELETE This feature allows you to delete a folder you have created. 1 2 RENAME This feature allows you to rename a folder you have created. 1 2 3 Select Menu > Gallery > Rename folder. Select the folder you want to rename and Rename. Select Clear as many times as necessary to delete the current folder name, enter a new folder name, and select OK.
DISPLAY SETTINGS Wallpaper You can set your phone to display a background picture (wallpaper) on the start screen. When your phone is shipped from the factory, it will contain some preloaded pictures in the gallery menu. You can download pictures by using SMS, WAP, and MMS and then save them in the gallery. Your phone supports JPEG, GIF, BMP, PNG, and WBMP formats. SELECT 1 Select Menu > Settings > Display settings > Wallpaper > Change image. 2 Select Graphics > Open, the image you want, and Options > Set as wallpap. If the wallpaper feature is off when an image is set as a wallpaper, it is switched On. You do not need to activate the wallpaper separately. SET Select Menu > Settings > Display settings > Wallpaper > On or Off. 62 Copyright 2004 Nokia Color schemes You can change the color of some display components in your phone, such as indicators and signal bars. Select Menu > Settings > Display settings > Color schemes and the color scheme you want. Screen saver You can set your phone to display a screen saver after a preset time or after a custom time (up to 60 minutes). The screen saver is activated when no function of the phone is used after a preset period of time. Press any key to deactivate the screen saver. The screen saver is also deactivated when the phone is out of the network coverage area. PRESET TIMEOUT Select Menu > Settings > Display settings > Screen saver timeout > 2 minutes or 5 minutes. CUSTOM TIMEOUT 1 2 Display brightness You can change the brightness of the phone display. 1 2 Select Menu > Settings > Display settings > Screen saver timeout > Other. Enter the custom time and select OK. Select Menu > Settings > Display settings > Display brightness. Press the Up scroll or Down scroll key to adjust the contrast level and select OK.
CALLER GROUPS You can create groups of contacts in Contacts and give each group a different ringing tone. When someone from that group calls, you will know because of the ringing tone. Add contact The name you add to a caller group must first be stored in Contacts. 1 From the start screen, press the Up scroll key or the Down scroll key to scroll to the name or number you want. Select Details > Options > Caller groups > Family, VIP, Friends, Business or Other. 2 Nokia 6010 User Guide 63 Copyright 2004 Nokia Personalize your phone Remove contact 1 From the start screen, press the Up scroll key or the Down scroll key and scroll to the name or number you want. Select Details > Options > Caller groups > No group. Select Contacts > Caller groups and the group you want. Select Rename group, enter the group name, and select OK. 2 Assign ringing tone 1 Select Contacts > Caller groups and the group you want. 2 Select Group ringing tone and the tone you want to hear for this caller group. You can set your phone to ring only when people from certain caller groups call you and to be silent for all other call groups. Rename caller group You can rename any caller group with a name of your own. 1 2 Group graphic Each caller group has a picture associated with it. When you get a call from someone in a caller group, the graphic flashes on the screen. ACTIVATE 1 Select Contacts > Caller groups, the group you want and Group logo. 2 If you want to see the group graphic before you select it, select View. 3 Select Back to return to the menu. 4 Select On. DEACTIVATE Select Contacts > Caller groups, the group you want, and Group logo > Off. VIEW A RECEIVED GRAPHIC When you receive a graphic from someone else, Group logo received appears. To view the graphic, select Show > Options and one of the following options:
SaveAllows you to save it (you must select which caller group gets the new graphic). DiscardAllows you to delete it. 64 Copyright 2004 Nokia
RESTORE FACTORY SETTINGS You can use the Restore factory settings feature to reset some of the phone settings to their original values. Note: Restoring factory settings does not delete your list in Contacts. However, it does delete all customized settings you may have entered. Select Menu > Settings > Restore factory settings, enter the security code, and select OK. For the default code, see Security code on page 72.
XPRESS-ON COLOR COVERS To personalize your Nokia 6010 mobile phone, you can change the front and back covers. Nokia Xpress-on color covers and active covers may be purchased from your authorized Nokia dealer. Note: Before removing the cover, always switch off the power and disconnect the charger and any other device. Avoid touching electronic components while changing the covers. Always store and use the device with the covers attached. Remove the back cover 1 With the back of the phone facing you, press and hold the back cover release button. Slide the cover up. Lift the cover off the phone. 2 3 3 2 1 Nokia 6010 User Guide 65 Copyright 2004 Nokia Personalize your phone Remove the phone from the front cover With the back of the phone facing you, gently separate the cover from the phone, starting at the bottom. 66 Copyright 2004 Nokia Change the keypad 1 2 Lift the keypad from inside the old front cover. Place the keypad into the new front cover. 1 2 New front cover Replace the new front cover 1 To replace the front cover, align the top of the phone with the top of the front cover. Make sure both sets of plastic tabs line up with their slots, as shown at right. Align the cover and snap it shut all the way around the edge of the phone. 2 Tabs Nokia 6010 User Guide 67 Copyright 2004 Nokia Personalize your phone Replace the back cover 1 2 Direct the back cover towards the locking catches on the phone. Slide the back cover until it locks into place. 1 2 locking catches 68 Copyright 2004 Nokia 13 Phone security Your phone is equipped with different security features that allow you to do the following:
Avoid making accidental calls Prevent unauthorized use of your phone Restrict outgoing or incoming calls
LOCK THE KEYPAD (KEYGUARD) The keyguard disables your keypad to prevent accidental key presses (for example, when your phone is in your pocket or purse).
To lock the keys, select Menu and press the * key. To unlock the keys, select Unlock and press the *
key. Note: When the keyguard is enabled, the keypad and display cannot light if you press a key. Press the Power key briefly to activate the keypad and display lights. Automatic keyguard You can have your phone automatically lock the keys after a time you specify. 1 Select Menu > Settings > Phone settings > Automatic keyguard > On. 2 Enter the delay time and select OK. When the keyguard is on, calls still may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your phone. Enter the emergency number and press the Send key.
SECURITY CODES The following table summarizes how different types of security codes are used in your phone. Nokia 6010 User Guide 69 Copyright 2004 Nokia Phone security Code Purpose Security code PIN code Use the security code for the following procedures:
Reset call timers (page 40) Clear the data counter (page 42) Clear the connection timer (page 42) Restore factory settings (page 65) Delete your entire contact list (page 37) If phone security is on, the phone requests the security code the first time you use it after installing a new SIM card. You can use the PIN code to protect against unauthorized calls if the following conditions are met:
The PIN code request is turned on The phone is powered off
The next time the phone is turned on, you must enter the correct PIN code to make calls or use the menus. PIN2 code Restriction password Enter the PIN2 code for the following procedure:
Use fixed dialing (page 72) Required by the restrict calls feature.
PIN CODES The PIN and PIN2 codes are 4-digit to 8-digit numbers that usually come from your service provider along with the SIM card. Use the PIN code to protect your phone and SIM card against unauthorized use. The PIN2 code activates some phone functions, such as call cost limit. See Manage call costs on page 41. When the phone requires the PIN or PIN2 code, it displays Enter PIN code or Enter PIN2 code. Enter the code and select OK. 70 Copyright 2004 Nokia Select Menu > Settings > Security settings > PIN code request. Enter the PIN code supplied by your service provider and select OK > On > OK. PIN code request You can activate the PIN code request to prevent unauthorized use of your phone. If you set the PIN code request to On, your phone will ask for the code each time you turn the phone on. When the phone is locked, calls still may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your phone. ACTIVATE 1 2 DEACTIVATE 1 2 Change You can change your PIN or PIN2 code to any 4-digit to 8-digit number. You must activate the PIN code request first. See PIN code request on page 71. 1 Select Menu > Settings > Security settings > PIN code request. Enter the PIN code supplied by your service provider and select OK > Off> OK. Select Menu > Settings > Security settings > Change access codes > Change PIN code. Enter the current PIN code, select OK, enter the new PIN code and select OK. Enter the new PIN code again to verify and select OK. 2 3 Note: If you make a mistake while entering the code, Code Error appears. Start again at step 2 and be careful to enter the correct code. If you enter the wrong code three times in a row, the PIN code is blocked. To unblock the PIN code, you need a personal unblocking key (PUK) from your service provider.
PUK CODES The PUK and PUK2 codes are 4-digit to 8-digit codes that usually come from your service provider along with the SIM card. The PUK code unblocks a blocked PIN code, and the PUK2 code unblocks a blocked PIN2 code. If you block your phone, contact your service provider. When you enter the PUK code given by your service provider, the phone prompts you to enter and then confirm a new PIN code. Nokia 6010 User Guide 71 Copyright 2004 Nokia Phone security
SECURITY CODE The default security code is 12345. Nokia recommends that you change the default code immediately. You need the security code to access certain phone features. When the phone requires the security code, it displays Security code, enter the code and select OK. If you enter an incorrect security code five times in a row, the phone will not accept the correct code for five minutes. Change the security code 1 Select Menu > Settings > Security settings > Change access codes > Change security code. Enter the current security code, select OK, enter the new security code, and select OK. Enter the security code again to verify and select OK. 2 3 Important: Keep the code secret and in a safe place, separate from the phone.
FIXED DIALING Select Menu > Settings > Security settings > Fixed dialing > On or Off. Enter your PIN2 code and select OK. If supported by your SIM card, this feature lets you restrict your outgoing calls to phone numbers included in the fixed dialing list or beginning with the same digits as an entry in the list. When fixed dialing is activated, calls still may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your phone. 1 2 Add numbers to list 1 2 3 4 5 Select Menu > Settings > Security settings > Fixed dialing > Number list Select Add, enter your PIN2 code, and select OK. Enter a name to go with the restricted phone number and select OK. Enter the phone number you want to restrict and select OK. Repeat steps 25 for each number you want to add to the list. 72 Copyright 2004 Nokia
RESTRICT CALLS This network service, if available from your service provider, lets you restrict the calls your phone can make and receive. Check with your service provider for details. When calls are restricted, calls still may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your phone. Contact your service provider for the restriction password. Turn on call restrictions 1 Select Menu > Settings > Security settings > Call restrictions and one of the following options:
Outgoing callsCalls cannot be made. International callsCalls cannot be made to foreign countries. International except to home countryWhen abroad, calls can be made only within the current country and to your home country (that is, the country where your home network operator is located). Incoming callsCalls cannot be received. Incoming calls if roamingCalls cannot be received outside your home area. Cancel all call restrictionsTurns off all call restrictions. Calls can be made and received in the usual way. Note: If you select Cancel all call restrictions, the following steps are not available. Also, you can cancel call restrictions on each option, allowing restrictions on other options to stay in force. 2 After you have selected one of the above options, select one of the following options:
ActivateEnter the restriction password and select OK. CancelEnter the restriction password and select OK. Check statusView the call types with call restriction active. Change your restriction password 1 2 3 Select Menu > Settings > Security settings > Change restriction password. Enter your current password and select OK. Enter your new password, select OK, verify the new password, and select OK. Nokia 6010 User Guide 73 Copyright 2004 Nokia Phone security
CLOSED USER GROUPS This network service, if available from your service provider, specifies the group of people to whom you can call and who can call you. Default resets the phone to use a user group that the SIM card owner has agreed upon with the service provider. When calls are limited to closed user groups, calls still may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your phone. Select Menu > Settings > Security settings > Closed user group > On or Off, enter the group number, and select OK. 74 Copyright 2004 Nokia 14 Mobile messages You can use mobile messages to keep in touch with friends, family, and business associates. Your Nokia 6010 phone allows you to do the following:
Not all messaging features are available in all wireless networks. Contact your service provider for availability and subscription information. Send and receive text messages Communicate with e-mail Communicate online with other phone users Compose, send, receive and view multimedia messages (MMS) Send and receive picture messages
MESSAGE SETTINGS Have a text messaging subscription through your service provider. Contact your service provider for the message center number. Save your message center number in your phone. Set up other message settings, such as GPRS. Before you can send and receive messages you must:
Save your message center number 1 2 Select Menu > Messages > Message settings > Text messages > Sending profile. If your SIM supports more than one message profile, select a profile and Message center number. Enter your message center number, and select OK. 3 Set the message mode You can choose the type of message sent by your phone. The message modes include text, e-mail, fax and page. This features appears only if your SIM card supports multiple message types. 1 Select Menu > Messages > Message settings > Text messages > Sending profile. If your SIM supports more than one message profile, select a profile and Messages sent as > Text, E-mail, Page, or Fax. 2 Nokia 6010 User Guide 75 Copyright 2004 Nokia Mobile messages In order to receive a converted message, the recipient needs to have the appropriate terminal device, such as a pager or fax machine. E-mail messages can be sent to a mobile phone or personal computer. Adjust font size You can modify the font size for message displays. The font size you select appears in messages when you are reading or editing and in message lists. Select Menu > Messages > Message settings > Other settings > Font size > Small font or Large font. Other message settings You can modify the other Sending profile message settings. The following list is dynamic. The order and number of items may vary, due to the SIM card configuration and network service availability. Check with your service provider for more information. To modify the other Sending profile message settings, select Messages > Message settings > Text messages > Sending profile and one of the following options:
Message validityAllows you to select the length of time that the message center will try to deliver a message. You can choose a time from one hour to one week. If the message center cannot deliver the message within this time, the message is deleted. Default recipient no.Allows you to specify a single recipient for all your messages. This option is not available when you choose Messages sent as e-mail. E-mail serverAllows you to store e-mail server information in your phone so that you do not have to enter the number each time you compose a new e-mail message. This option only shows up if you have set the message mode to E-mail. Contact your service provider for the server number. Delivery reportsAllows you to ask the network for a report about message delivery. Use GPRSAllows you to send your messages through GPRS. Reply via same centerAllows you to direct the recipient to reply through the same message center. Do not select Yes unless you know the recipient has the same service provider. Rename sending profileAllows you to name the profile. This option depends on SIM card and is not available for the Default profile. 76 Copyright 2004 Nokia
TEXT MESSAGES Select Menu > Messages > Text messages > Create message. Compose a message and select Options > Send. Enter the recipients phone number and select OK. You can use the text message feature to compose and send a short text message to another phone. Your device supports the sending of text messages beyond the normal 160-character limit. If your message exceeds 160 characters, it will be sent as a series of two or more messages. In the navigation bar, you can see the message length indicator counting backwards from 160. For example, 10 (2) means that you can still add 10 characters for the text to be sent as two messages. Using special (Unicode) characters, such as , , , , takes up more space. If there are special characters in your message, the indicator may not show the message length correctly. Before the message is sent, the device tells you if the message exceeds the maximum length allowed for one message. You can cancel sending by selecting Cancel or you can save the message in the inbox. Send 1 2 3 If you need to exit while writing the message, press the End key anytime. Later, select Menu > Messages > Text messages > Create message to return and finish writing the message. If you turn off the phone without saving the message, the message will be lost. When sending messages, your device may display the words Message Sent. This is an indication that the message has been sent by your device to the message center number programmed into your device. This is not an indication that the message has been received at the intended destination. For more details about messaging services, check with your service provider. Send to multiple recipients You can send the same message to more than one recipient. Before using this feature, the names of your recipients must be entered into Contacts. See Save names, numbers, and e-mail addresses on page 33. 1 2 3 From the message screen, select Options > Sending options > Send to many Select the persons name and Send. To add other names to the message, repeat step 2. Nokia 6010 User Guide 77 Copyright 2004 Nokia Mobile messages Read When you receive a text message, the phone beeps and the message(s) received appears, where n is the number of messages. To read the message now, select Show. Read a new text message later 1 When you receive a text message, select Exit. 2 When you want to read the message, select Menu > Messages > Text messages icon and n
> Inbox. A list of message headers is displayed. Indicates that a text message has been read. Indicates that a text message has not been read. Select the message you want to read. If the message is long, use the scroll keys to scroll through the message. 3 4 Read linked messages Your phone can receive one long message (up to 459 characters) in sequences. You can start reading the first part before the phone has received the entire message. While viewing the message, you may see *some text missing* on the display. This is normal and the message content will be updated, as soon as the missing sequence arrives. If the memory is full, you may have to delete a message from your inbox or outbox before your phone can update the missing text. Text message options While reading or viewing a message, you can select one of the following options. The following list is dynamic and the order and number of options may vary. DeleteAllows you to delete the message. ReplyAllows you to start your reply with an empty screen, a template or with standard replies like Yes, No, Thank you, or Congrats. Use detailAllows you to extract phone numbers, e-mail addresses, or web addresses from the current message. The phone goes through and gathers all phone numbers, e-mail addresses or web addresses in the message, including the originating number or address. ForwardAllows you to send the message to another recipient. EditAllows you to modify the message. 78 Copyright 2004 Nokia MoveAllows you to move the message to the Templates or Archive folder, for example. RenameAllows you to enter a new title for the message. Copy to calend.Allows you to copy the message to the phone calendar as a reminder note. This option is not available for picture messages. Message detailsAllows you to view the details of the message, like the senders name and phone number, reception date and time. Save pictureAllows you to save a picture to the template folder. This option only appears in the list if you receive a picture message.
E-MAIL MESSAGES You can send an e-mail message from the Messages menu. You can send an e-mail message from Contacts. You can send e-mail messages to friends and family directly from your phone if you sign up for this service with your service provider. There are two ways of sending an e-mail message.
Before you send e-mail messages, you can set up a profile to define the e-mail server. Contact your service provider for the e-mail server number. Define an e-mail sending profile If you use the e-mail feature on a regular basis, you may find it helpful to define an e-mail sending profile. This feature depends on your SIM card. Contact your service provide for more information about e-mail profiles. 1 Select Menu > Messages > Message settings > Text messages > Sending profile. If your SIM supports more than one message profile, select a profile. If your SIM card already has a profile called E-mail, go to step 5. Select Messages sent as > E-mail. Enter the e-mail server number, select Options > Accept. 2 3 4 5 Nokia 6010 User Guide 79 Copyright 2004 Nokia Mobile messages Send FROM THE MESSAGES MENU 1 2 3 4 Select Menu > Messages > Text messages > Create SMS e-mail. Enter the e-mail address, select OK, enter a subject, and select OK. Enter a message, select Options > Send e-mail. If you have not defined an e-mail sending profile, enter the e-mail server number, then select OK. FROM CONTACTS First you must have an e-mail address for the person entered into Contacts. See Save names, numbers, and e-mail addresses on page 33. 1 At the start screen, press the Up scroll or Down scroll key to scroll to the name to whom you want to send an e-mail message. Select Details and the e-mail address. Select Options > Send e-mail. Enter a subject, select OK, enter a message, and select Options > Send e-mail. If you have not defined an e-mail sending profile, enter the e-mail server number and select OK. 2 3 4 5 Receive When you receive an e-mail message, the phone beeps and the message(s) received appears, where n is the number of messages. To read the message now, select Show. When reading a received e-mail message, you can choose other options, such as Reply or Forward. See Text message options on page 78 for a list of options. icon and n
STORE MESSAGES Preset folders There are preset folders in your phone. INBOX Messages are automatically stored in the Inbox folder after they have been read or if you press the End key when Message received appears on the start screen. SENT ITEMS You can use the Sent Items folder to store saved messages. 80 Copyright 2004 Nokia ARCHIVE To make sure that certain messages will not be overwritten when memory becomes full, move some of your messages to the Archive folder. TEMPLATES Pictures and prewritten templates are stored in the Templates folder. From the message screen, select Options > Use template and the template you want. My folders Keep your messages organized by creating custom folders and saving your messages there. ADD Select Menu > Messages > Text messages > My folders > Add, enter a name for the new folder, and select OK. DELETE Only folders created in My folders can be deleted. The Inbox, Sent items, Archive, and Templates folders are protected. When you delete a folder, all messages in the folder are deleted as well. 1 Select Menu > Messages > Text messages > My folders and the folder you wish to delete. 2 Select Options > Delete folder > OK. Move a message to a folder While viewing the message, select Options > Move and the destination folder you want.
DELETE MESSAGES If your message memory becomes full, the message icon blinks in the display. You can do the following to create more space:
Read some of the unread messages and then delete them. Delete some of these messages from your folders. Nokia 6010 User Guide 81 Copyright 2004 Nokia Mobile messages Single To delete a single message, you need to open it first. 1 Select Menu > Messages > Text messages and the folder containing the message you want to delete. Select the message you want to delete and Options > Delete > OK. 2 All messages in folders 1 2 Select Menu > Messages > Text messages > Delete messages. Select the folder or message type that you want to delete and OK.
PICTURE MESSAGES Picture messages are like picture postcards. You can add text to the postcard before sending the message to a friend who has a compatible phone. You can find pictures under Menu > Messages > Text messages > Templates. Notes
This function can be used only if it is supported by your network operator or service provider. Only phones that offer picture message features can receive and display a picture message. Your phone has two types of pictures availablegraphic icons found in the Templates folder and images found in the Gallery. The pictures found in the Templates folder are black and white, the images found in the Gallery are color and both display in the body of the message. A picture message can only be sent to a phone number, while a Gallery image can be sent as a multimedia message (requires a GPRS connection) to either a phone number or an e-mail address. Each picture message is made up of several text messages. Therefore, sending one picture message may cost more than sending one text message. Contact your service provider for pricing information. Since pictures are saved in the phone memory, you cannot view them if you use your SIM card with another phone. Before sending a picture message, be sure to set the message mode to Text. See Set the message mode on page 75.
Send 1 Select Menu > Messages > Text messages > Templates and the picture you want to send. Select Options > Send > As text msg., enter the phone number, and select OK. 2 82 Copyright 2004 Nokia Attach a picture to a text message 1 2 Select Menu > Messages > Text messages > Create message. Compose a message, and select Options > Insert picture and the picture you want to send. Select View > Insert > Options > Send, enter the phone number, and select OK. 3 Receive When you receive a picture message, the phone beeps and the message(s) received appears, where n is the number of messages. To read the message now, select Show. Read later 1 2 When you want to read the message, select Menu > Messages > Text After you have received a message and you want to read it later, select Exit. icon and n messages > Inbox and select the message you want. Save 1 While viewing the message, select Options > Save picture. 2 Enter a title for the picture and select OK. The picture is saved to the Templates folder. Save picture messages with edited text 1 While viewing the message, select Options > Edit text > As text msg., and make changes to the text. Select Options > Save message > Archive or Templates. If the phone prompts you to replace the original message, select Yes. 2 3 Nokia 6010 User Guide 83 Copyright 2004 Nokia Mobile messages
MULTIMEDIA MESSAGES This is a Network Service. Only devices that offer compatible multimedia message or e-mail features can receive and display multimedia messages. Multimedia message objects may contain viruses or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. Do not open any attachment if you are not sure of the trustworthiness of the sender. The message size is under 45 KB. The message type and settings allow reception. A multimedia message can contain text, images, and sounds. Your phone has a multimedia message viewer for playing messages and a multimedia inbox for storing saved messages. Once you save the multimedia message, you can use the image as wallpaper or the sound as a ringing tone. This function can be used only if it is supported by your network operator or service provider. Only devices that offer compatible multimedia message or e-mail features can receive and display multimedia messages. Message receiving limitations Your phone can receive a multimedia message under the following conditions:
Define settings Before you can use the multimedia messaging service (MMS) feature, you need to define the way you want to receive the messages. The default setting of the multimedia messaging service is generally on. The appearance of a multimedia message may vary, depending on the receiving device. ALLOW MULTIMEDIA MESSAGES You can choose to receive all messages or to receive messages only when you are in the service providers home network. 1 Select Menu > Messages > Message settings > Multimedia msg. > Allow multimedia reception and one of the following options:
YesAllows all incoming messages to be received. In home systemAllows incoming messages to be received only if you are in the service providers home system. Select Incoming multimedia messages > Retrieve. 2 84 Copyright 2004 Nokia BLOCK MULTIMEDIA MESSAGES You can choose to not receive any multimedia messages. Select Menu > Messages > Message settings > Multimedia msg. > Allow multimedia reception > No. ADVERTISEMENTS Select Menu > Messages > Message settings > Multimedia msg. > Allow advertisements > Yes or No. CONNECTION SETTINGS Contact your service provider for information about downloading appropriate connection sets for MMS. Write and send 1 2 3 Select Messages > Multimedia messages > Create message. Enter the text of your message and select Options. To insert a picture or a sound clip, select Insert image or Insert sound, respectively, then open the folder you want, select the picture or sound clip, and Options > Insert. To insert a name from Contacts, select Options > More options >
Insert contact, the name you want, and Options > Insert contact. To insert a number, select Options > More options > Insert number, enter the number or search for it in Contacts, and select OK. To view the message before sending it, select Options > Preview. To send the message, select Options > Send to number or Send to e-mail. Enter the recipients number or e-mail address, or search for it in Contacts, and select OK. 4 5 6 7 8 It takes more time to send a multimedia message than to send a text message. While the multimedia message is being sent, the animated icon is displayed and you can use other functions on the phone. If there is an interruption while the message is being sent, the phone tries to resend it a few times. If this fails, the message will remain in the Outbox folder and you can try to resend it later. Nokia 6010 User Guide 85 Copyright 2004 Nokia Mobile messages Read When you receive a multimedia message, the phone beeps and displays Multimedia message received. To read the message now, select Show. You can use the scroll keys to view the different elements of the message, for example, text, images, or MIDI tones. Read later To read the message later, select Exit. Options While viewing a message, select Options and one of the following options. The following list is dynamic and the order and number of options may vary. DetailsAllows you to view details of the file, such as the name, size, date, time, resolution, format and copyright. Save imageAllows you to save the image when the graphic part of the multimedia message is active. The image is saved under Messages > Pictures. Delete messageAllows you to delete a saved multimedia message. ReplyReply to the sender of the message. Forward to no.Forward the message to another number. Fwd. to e-mailForward the message to an e-mail address. Message detailsView the messages sender, recipient(s), time, date, subject, size, and type. PlayAllows you to play the ringing tone when the sound clip part of the multimedia message is active. Save soundAllows you to save the ringing tone when the sound clip part of the multimedia message is active. The tone is saved under the ringing tone list. See Customize on page 55 for information about selecting a ringing tone.
INFO MESSAGE SERVICE With the info message network service, you can receive short text messages on various topics, such as weather and traffic conditions, from your service provider. Info message selections can be found under Menu > Messages > Info messages. For available topics and relevant topic numbers, contact your service provider. 86 Copyright 2004 Nokia
SERVICE COMMAND EDITOR Use the Service command editor (found under Menu > Messages > Service command editor) to key in and send service requests (also known as USSD commands) to your service provider. For more information, contact your service provider. Nokia 6010 User Guide 87 Copyright 2004 Nokia Mobile Internet 15 Mobile Internet Your phone has a built-in browser you can use to connect to selected services on the mobile Internet. You can view weather reports, check news or flight times, view financial information, make online purchases and much more.
NOTES ABOUT THE MOBILE INTERNET A technology called wireless application protocol (WAP) is to mobile devices what the World Wide Web (WWW) is to personal computers. Internet content on your personal computer is called a web page. Internet content on your mobile phone is called a page, WAP card, or a Deck of cards. If the WAP site designer has made a page too large to load on the phone, it will not be displayed in the browser. You will see an error message saying, "File too big to be loaded" and the browser will return to the previous page. GPRS GPRS is a technology used to send and receive data using short bursts or packets over the wireless network. GPRS allows you to stay connected to the mobile Internet. This feature allows for faster downloads of information and no time spent completing a dial-up connection. Applications using GPRS include the WAP browser and text messaging.
For information about how to track time spent online, see Data calls on page 41. For information about sending messages using GPRS, see the entry for Use GPRS under Other message settings on page 76. For availability, pricing, and subscription to GPRS services, contact your service provider.
Service provider Because mobile Internet content is designed to be viewed from your phone, your wireless service provider now becomes your mobile Internet service provider, as well. It is likely that your service provider has created a home page and set up your browser to go to this page when you log on to the mobile Internet. Once you are at your service providers home page, you will find links to a number of other sites.
SET UP FOR BROWSING You should not need to do anything to set up your phone for browsing. Your service provider usually modifies the appropriate settings when you subscribe to the feature. Contact your service provider if you have problems using the browser. 88 Copyright 2004 Nokia
CONNECT Use the Services menu to connect to the mobile Internet and to your service providers home page. Select Menu > Services > Home. If you see an error message, the phone may not be set up for browsing. Contact your service provider to make sure that your phone is configured properly.
BROWSER OPTIONS The Services menu gives you the options shown in the following list. Some service providers may have customized the options on the Services menu. Contact your service provider for more information if any of the options shown here are not available. HomeStarts the browser and takes you to your service providers home page. BookmarksShows a list of all saved bookmarks. Bookmarks help you find a WAP site quickly. Service inboxAllows you to receive notifications from your service provider. Notifications may be about new e-mail messages, changes in stock prices or news headlines. SettingsProvides options for changing connection settings, appearance settings, and authority certificate. Go to addressAccepts an address you enter. Clear the cacheEmpties the browsers temporary memory and frees up space. It is advisable to empty your cache at the end of each session.
NAVIGATE Since the phone screen is much smaller than a computer screen, mobile Internet content is displayed in a different format than you may be used to seeing. This section shows simple guidelines for using the phone keys to navigate a WAP site. Examples of how to read a WAP site follow the guidelines. Phone keys
Use the Up scroll and Down scroll keys for vertical browsing. Use the 4 and 6 keys for horizontal browsing. To set up these keys for horizontal browsing, select Menu > Services > Settings > Appearance settings > Scroll mode > Numeric keys. To select a highlighted item, press the Talk key. To enter letters and numbers, press the 0-9 keys.
Nokia 6010 User Guide 89 Copyright 2004 Nokia Mobile Internet To enter special characters, press the * key.
Examples of mobile Internet sites The following illustrations show most of the elements you may find on a mobile Internet site. These are examples only. 1) Header line shows the current mobile Internet site. 2) Inactive link appears as an underlined word. 3) Active link appears as a highlighted word. 1) 2) 3) Use the Scroll up and Down scroll keys to scroll through the list of links. 1) Selection listBrackets [ ] appear when you have the option to enter information. 2) OptionsSelect Options to go to the sites menu and/or browser page. 3) BackSelect Back to return to the previous page. 1) 2) 3) Data entry fieldBrackets [ ] around three dots appear when you need to enter information. In this example, you can enter your zip code to receive the local weather forecast.
BOOKMARKS You can save addresses for your favorite sites as bookmarks. A bookmark helps you find a site again, just as a slip of paper helps you find a page in a book. Your device may have some bookmarks loaded for sites not affiliated with Nokia. Nokia does not warrant or endorse these sites. If you choose to access them, you should take the same precautions for security or content as you would with any Internet site. 90 Copyright 2004 Nokia Select Menu > Services > Bookmarks > Options > New bookmark. Enter the address, select OK, enter a title, and select OK. Add You can add up to 30 bookmarks. 1 2 You can set a bookmark to mobile.nokiausa.com, which gives you access to downloadable Java games, graphics, and ringing tones, if your service provider supports this feature. Contact your service provider for details. Add while browsing Select Menu > Services > Bookmarks > Options > Add bookmark.
SECURITY ISSUES Empty the cache A cache is a memory location that is used to store data temporarily. If you have tried to access or have accessed confidential information requiring passwords, empty the cache after each use. The information or services you have accessed are stored in the cache. FROM THE MENU Select Menu > Services > Clear the cache. WHILE BROWSING Select Options > Clear the cache. Authority certificates To use some WAP services, such as banking services, you need an authority certificate. Using the certificate can help you to improve the security of connections between your phone and a WAP server. You can download the certificate from a WAP page if the WAP service supports the use of authority certificates. After the download, you can view the certificate, then save or delete it. If you save the certificate, it is added to the list of certificates in the phone. Your phone alerts you if the identity of the WAP server or WAP gateway cannot be verified or is not authentic. To view the list of authority certificates, select Menu > Services > Settings >
Certificates > Authority certificates > Certificate list. Nokia 6010 User Guide 91 Copyright 2004 Nokia Mobile Internet
GPRS In order to use GPRS, you must first subscribe to the network service. Contact your service provider for details. When you use GPRS to connect to the mobile Internet, you are making a data call. The following icons appear on the screen to show you the status of your connection. Appears in the left upper corner of the screen; indicates an active GPRS connection, for example, when you are using the WAP browser May appear in the left lower corner of the screen, under the signal strength bars, indicating a continuous GPRS connection, if you choose the Always online setting Indicates that circuit switched (CS) or voice calls are not possible when using GPRS for a data call Indicates that the GPRS connection has been interrupted by a voice call Set up the connection Some service providers may have customized the options on the Services menu. Contact your service provider for more information if the options shown here are not available. GPRS may not be available in all wireless networks. The establishment and continuation of a GPRS and Internet connection depends on network availability, service provider support, and signal strength. You can choose one of the following options from Menu > Services > Settings >
Edit active service settings > GPRS connection:
Always onlineThe GPRS connection is established when you turn your phone on. The connection continues in the background even after you exit the WAP browser, depending on network coverage. When neededThe GPRS connection is established when you use the WAP browser and is closed when you exit the WAP browser. 92 Copyright 2004 Nokia The following options shows how to end your browsing session, depending on which option you have chosen for your GPRS connection.
Press the End key to return to the start screen if you have selected Always online. The GPRS connection remains in the background. Press the End key to end the GPRS connection if you have selected When needed. Press the End key twice to return to the start screen if you have selected When needed. Press and hold the End key to end browsing and disconnect from GPRS if you have selected When needed
To answer the incoming call, press the Talk key. To reject the incoming call, press the End key. Receive a call while online If you are using the WAP browser over GPRS, you can still receive a voice call. Your data call is put on hold and you can choose to answer the call.
After you end your voice call, the GPRS connection automatically resumes. Make a call while online When you are browsing a WAP card and want to make a call to a number on the WAP page, you can select Use number. Your phone then searches the information on the WAP card for a string of numbers. You can then choose from the number or numbers displayed to place the call. An alternate way is to press the End key to disconnect from the mobile Internet, then place your call by searching Contacts for a name and number or by keying in the phone number. Make an emergency call while online If you are using GPRS to connect to the mobile Internet, you can end your data connection and then make an emergency call. 1 2 3 To close your mobile Internet connection, simply press the End key twice. Enter the emergency number for your present location (for example, 911). Press the Talk key.
DISCONNECT Select Options > Quit > Yes. OR Press the End key twice. Nokia 6010 User Guide 93 Copyright 2004 Nokia Instant messaging (IM) 16 Instant messaging (IM) Take text messaging to the next level by experiencing instant messaging in a wireless environment. Engage in instant messaging (IM) with friends and family, regardless of the mobile system or platform (like the Internet) they are using, as long as you all use the same IM service. Check with your wireless service provider for availability. Before you can start using IM on your phone, you must first subscribe to your wireless service providers text messaging service and register with the IM service you want to use. See Register with an IM service on page 94 for more information. Note: Depending on both your IM service provider and your wireless service provider, you may not have access to all of the features described in this guide.
REGISTER WITH AN IM SERVICE Before you can begin to use IM, you must register with an IM service to obtain an IM user name and password. See User name and password on page 95.
IM SERVICE PROVIDER ICONS Since each IM service has its own display text and icons associated with it, the display text and icons on your phone will appear differently for each IM service provider. If you have any questions about the differences in the various IM service providers display text and icons, contact your wireless service provider for more information. The following table shows IM icons and their descriptions:
Icon Description Available Away/Do not disturb 94 Copyright 2004 Nokia Icon Description Appear offline Available with an alert set Offline with an alert set Blocked contact Unread message/New message Read message Group invitation
USER NAME AND PASSWORD You can obtain an IM user name and password by registering over the Internet
(using your computer) with the IM service provider you have selected to use. During the registration process, you will have the opportunity to create the user name and password of your choice. For more information about signing up for IM services, contact your wireless service provider. Nokia 6010 User Guide 95 Copyright 2004 Nokia Instant messaging (IM)
IM MENUS Offline Before you log into IM, the IM menu appears as follows:
Login Saved convers. IM provider Settings Online After you log into IM, the IM menu appears as follows:
Conversations IM contacts Group convers. IM Availability Saved convers. Settings Blocked list Logout
LOG IN The first time you use IM, you need to enter your user name and password and select the IM provider you want to use. After the first login, you do not have to select the IM provider again, unless you want to change it. See IM settings on page 102 for more information. Every time you log in, you receive screen prompts for your user name and password. You do not have to manually enter your user name; however, you must manually enter your password every time you log in. First time login 1 2 3 Select Menu > IM > Login and your IM service provider. Enter your user name and select Options > OK. Enter your password and select Options > OK. 96 Copyright 2004 Nokia After first time login 1 Select Menu > IM > Connect. The User ID screen appears with your user name. Select Options > OK, enter your password, and select Options > OK. 2 After you have logged into IM initially, you have the option of a manual login or an automatic login. See Automatic login on page 102 for information on setting up automatic login.
SET YOUR AVAILABILITY You can determine if other users can tell whether you are available or not. From the IM online menu, select Availability and one of the following options:
AvailableOthers see your status as online and you receive availability information and messages from others. AwayEven though others see your status as online, you do not receive availability information and messages from others. Appear offlineEven though others see your status as offline, you receive availability information and messages from others.
IM CONVERSATIONS You can send instant messages to anyone who uses the same IM service as you do and if you have that persons user name. You can also add that person to IM Contacts during an IM conversation. See IM contacts on page 99 for more information. More than one IM conversation can be active at the same time. Conversation view The conversation view of your IM conversation shows your initial message at the bottom of the screen, followed by the reply. As the conversation progresses, the most recent message appears at the top of the screen, causing the last message to move down one level. The conversation is still active, even if you leave the conversation view. You can return to it when you want. 1 2 Write and send 1 2 From the IM online menu, select IM Contacts > Write to other. Enter the user name of the person to whom you want to send an instant From the IM online menu, select IM Contacts > Conversations. Select the IM conversation you want and Open. Nokia 6010 User Guide 97 Copyright 2004 Nokia Instant messaging (IM) message and select Options > OK. Select Options > Write, enter a message, and select Options > Send. 3 Write and send to contact 1 From the IM online menu, select IM Contacts and the contact to whom you want to send a message. Select Chat > Options > Write, enter a message, and select Options > Send. 2 Receive and reply IN CONVERSATION VIEW When you receive an instant message, your phone beeps and the senders reply appears above your most recent message. Select Options > Write, enter a message, and select Options > Send. OUTSIDE CONVERSATION VIEW When you receive an instant message, your phone beeps, and a screen with the senders screen name appears, notifying you that you have received an instant message. Select Open > Options > Write, enter a message, and select Options > Send. Save 1 2 From the conversation view, select Options > Save. Keep the conversation name that appears in the display and select Options >
Save. OR Select Clear as many times as necessary to delete the conversation name, enter the name you want, and select Options > Save. View From either the IM online or offline menu, select Saved convers., and the conversation you want to view. Rename 1 From either the IM online or offline menu, select Saved convers., the conversation you want to rename, and Options > Rename. Select Clear as many times as necessary to delete the conversation name and enter the new conversation name. Select Options > OK. 2 3 98 Copyright 2004 Nokia Delete From either the IM online or offline menu, select Saved convers., the conversation you want to delete, and Options > Delete. End IN CONVERSATION VIEW Select Back, the conversation you want to end, and End convers. OUTSIDE CONVERSATION VIEW From the IM online menu, select Conversations, the IM conversation you want to end, and End convers.
IM CONTACTS Add the names of your friends and family (with whom you want to interact frequently through IM) to IM Contacts. Add 1 2 From the IM online menu, select IM Contacts > Add contact. Enter the contacts user name, select Options > OK, The Nickname screen appears with the contacts user name. If you want to enter a nickname by which to identify the contact, select Clear as many times as necessary to delete the user name. Then, enter the nickname. 3 Select Options > OK. DURING IM SESSION 1 From the conversation view, select Options > Add. The User ID screen appears with the contacts user name. Select Options > OK. The Nickname screen appears with the contacts user name. If you want to enter a nickname by which to identify the contact, select Clear as many times as necessary to delete the user name. Then, enter the nickname. Select Options > OK. 2 3 ADD FROM CONVERSATION MENU 1 From the IM online menu, select Conversations and the conversation with the contact you want to add. Select Add Contact. The User ID screen appears with the contacts user name. 2 Nokia 6010 User Guide 99 Copyright 2004 Nokia Instant messaging (IM) 3 Select Options > OK. The Nickname screen appears with the contacts user name. If you want to enter a nickname by which to identify the contact, select Clear as many times as necessary to delete the user name. Then, enter the nickname. Look up 1 2 From the IM online menu, select IM Contacts > Look up. Select one of the following options:
Screen nameEnter the first few characters of the contacts nickname and select Options > Look up. User IDEnter the first few numbers of the contacts user name and select Options > Look up. Phone numberEnter the first few numbers of the contacts phone number and select Options > Look up. E-mailEnter the first few characters of the contacts email address and select Options > Look up. Remove From the IM online menu, select IM Contacts, the contact you want to remove, and Remove contact > OK. Block 1 From the IM online menu, select IM Contacts and the contact from whom you want to block messages. Select Block Contact > OK. 2 Unblock 1 2 From the IM online menu, select IM Contacts and the contact from whom you want to unblock messages. Select Unblock > OK. OR From the IM online menu, select Blocked list. Select the contact and Unblock > OK. To unblock other contacts, repeat step 2. 1 2 3 View blocked list From the IM online menu, select Blocked list. 100 Copyright 2004 Nokia Alert SET You can set an alert for a contact to notify you when the contacts availability changes. 1 From the IM online menu, select IM Contacts and the contact for whom you want to set an alert. Select Set alert. 2 REMOVE 1 From the IM online menu, select IM Contacts and the contact for whom you want to remove an alert. Select Remove alert. 2
GROUP CHAT SESSIONS Select Options > Group members > Send. Select the contact whom you want to invite to the group chat. Enter the invitation text and select Options > Send. To add other members to the group, repeat steps 24. You can create your own private chat groups from IM Contacts. See IM contacts on page 99. Create private chat group From the IM online menu, elect Group convers., enter the group name (up to 10 characters), and select Options > OK > Options > OK. Members ADD 1 2 3 4 REMOVE 1 2 Invitations When you receive an invitation to a group chat, the New invitation received screen appears, with the user name of the invitation sender and the group name displaying. You can either accept or reject the invitation. Select Accept > Options > OK or select Reject. From the group list, select the member you want to remove. Select Options > Remove member. Nokia 6010 User Guide 101 Copyright 2004 Nokia Instant messaging (IM)
IM SETTINGS From either the IM online or offline menu, select Settings > Screen name. Enter your screen name and select Options > OK. You can customize your IM settings, depending upon the instant messaging service you have selected. Select Settings from either the IM online or offline menu and the following options appear:
Screen nameAllows you to change your screen name (nickname). Automatic loginAllows you to set your login to the automatic state. Sort contactsAllows you to display your contacts order either Alphabetically or By status. IM availabilityAllows you to update your contacts online availability (presence) by using the Status updates option or to display how your presence is seen by other users by using the Authorization option. NetworkAllows you to view your User ID and Password. Screen name You can enter a screen name (nickname) that is 120 characters in length. 1 2 Automatic login You can use automatic login after you have logged in with your user name and password. From either the IM online or offline menu, select Settings > Automatic login > On. Sort contacts From either the IM online or offline menu, select Settings > Sort contacts >
Alphabetically or By status. Set up presence status and authorization Presence allows you and other users to know who is online and available to chat. You can set your phone to automatically update a contacts presence status every time it is changed. From either the IM online or offline menu, select Settings > IM availability >
Status updates > On. You can set how your presence is seen by other users. From either the IM online or offline menu, select Settings > IM availability >
Authorization > My contacts or All. 102 Copyright 2004 Nokia If you select My contacts, only the contacts in IM Contacts can view your presence information. If you select All, anybody can view your presence information.
LOG OFF SERVICE From the IM online menu, you can exit the IM application, but still stay connected to the IM service. This enables you to receive instant messages from your contacts, when using your phone for other purposes; for example, if you are playing a game. If you are connected to your IM service, but you have not used your IM application for some time, you may be automatically disconnected from the IM service. The next time you open the IM application, you will receive a message, Not connected and you will be taken to the offline menu to log in again. To disconnect from the IM service, you must log out from the IM online menu. You will be taken to the IM offline menu to log in again or exit the IM application. Exit From the IM online menu, select Exit. If you open IM again, you do not need to log in again. Log out From the IM online menu, select Logout > OK and the IM offline menu appears. If you want to exit IM, select Exit. Nokia 6010 User Guide 103 Copyright 2004 Nokia Your personal digital assistant 17 Your personal digital assistant Your Nokia 6010 phone has many useful features for organizing your everyday life, including a calendar, alarm clock, calculator, to-do list, and stopwatch. In this chapter, youll learn how to use your phone as a personal digital assistant.
CALENDAR The calendar shows a month view and day view. You can use the calendar to keep track of reminders, calls you need to make, and birthdays. You can also set an alarm for calendar notes. View To view todays date in the calendar, select Menu > Organizer > Calendar. The first time you access the calendar, your phone prompts you to enter the time and todays date. Navigate When you open the calendar, the month view shows todays date highlighted. To move the cursor to a new date:
Make a note When you make a note in your calendar, you can choose from the following four types:
Press the 2 key to scroll up one week. Press the 4 key to scroll left. Press the 6 key to scroll right. Press the 8 key to scroll down one week. Reminder Call Birthday Meeting 104 Copyright 2004 Nokia REMINDER 1 2 3 Select Menu > Organizer > Calendar > Options > Make a note > Reminder. Enter your note and select Options > Save. Select Alarm on, enter a time, select OK > am or pm. OR Select Alarm off. CALL 1 2 3 4 Select Menu > Organizer > Calendar > Options > Make a note > Call. Enter the phone number and select Options > Save. Enter the persons name and select Options > Save. Enter a time, select OK > am or pm and one of the following options:
No alarm Silent With tone If you select Silent or With tone, you can then select a time. BIRTHDAY 1 2 3 Select Menu > Organizer > Calendar > Options > Make a note > Birthday. Enter the persons name and select Options > Save. Enter the persons year of birth, select OK, and one of the following options:
No alarm Silent With tone If you select Silent or With tone, you can then select a day and time. MEETING 1 2 3 Select Menu > Organizer > Calendar > Options > Make a note > Meeting. Enter the subject of the meeting and select Options > Save. Enter the meeting location and select Options > Save. Nokia 6010 User Guide 105 Copyright 2004 Nokia Your personal digital assistant 4 Enter the meeting start time, select OK > am or pm, enter the meeting end time, and select OK > am or pm and one of the following options:
No alarm Silent With tone If you select Silent or With tone, you can then select a time. View notes After you make a few calendar notes, you can view the days events. 1 2 Select Menu > Organizer > Calendar and the date you want. Select Options > View day.
ALARM CLOCK The alarm clock feature is based on the phone internal clock and sounds an alert at a time you specify. The alarm clock works even if you turn your phone off. Set 1 Select Menu > Organizer > Alarm clock, enter the alarm time in hhmm format, and select OK. If you have selected the am/pm format, select either am or pm. 2 Alarm PHONE ON Select Stop to shut off the alarm. OR Select Snooze. The alarm stops and sounds again in ten minutes. If you let the alarm sound for one minute without pressing a key, it stops for ten minutes, and then sounds again. PHONE OFF If the alarm time is reached while the device is switched off, the device switches itself on and starts sounding the alarm tone. If you select Stop, the device asks whether you want to activate the device for calls. Select No to switch off the device or Yes to make and receive calls. Do not select Yes when wireless phone use may cause interference or danger. Turn off Select Menu > Organizer > Alarm clock > Off. 106 Copyright 2004 Nokia
BUSINESS CARDS Your phone can send or receive an electronic business card as a short text message. The business card can have either:
A name and number, or A name, multiple numbers (home, work, fax, mobile), an e-mail address, web address and street address if you have entered this information in Contacts. 2 3 If you are exchanging business cards with multiple numbers and addresses, both the receiving and sending phone must have a contact list that supports these kinds of entries. Send 1 At the start screen, press the Up scroll or Down scroll key to scroll to the name to whom you want to send a business card. Select Details > Options > Send bus. card > Via text msg. If the name in Contacts has multiple numbers, select one of the following options:
Primary numberAllows you to send a name and number only. All detailsAllows you to send a name, multiple numbers, e-mail, web, and street address. Enter the number for the receiving phone and select OK. 4 Receive Your phone can accept and receive an electronic business card from a compatible phone, if it is one of the following types:
If you press the End key at any time before saving the business card, the business card will be deleted. 1 When your phone displays Business card received, select Show. 2 Nokia Smart Messaging compact business card V-card format After viewing the business card, select Options and one of the following options:
SaveAllows you to keep the information in Contacts. DiscardAllows you to delete the business card. Nokia 6010 User Guide 107 Copyright 2004 Nokia Your personal digital assistant
CALCULATOR The phone calculator adds, subtracts, multiplies, divides, and computes square and square root functions. You can also use the calculator to convert currency. Note: This calculator has limited accuracy and is designed for simple calculations. Basic calculations 1 Select Menu > Extras > Calculator and enter the first number in the calculation. Note: Press the # key to enter a decimal point and select Clear to delete any errors. To add (+), press the * key once; to subtract (-), press the * key twice; to multiply (), press the * key three times; and to divide (/), press the * key four times. To perform a square or square root calculation, select Options > Square or Square root. Enter the second number in the calculation and select Options > Equals. 2 Convert currency Note: When you change base currency, you must enter the new rates because all previously set exchange rates are reset to zero. SET THE EXCHANGE RATE 1 Select Menu > Extras > Calculator > Options > Exchange rate > Foreign units converted to home units or Home units converted to foreign units. Enter the exchange rate and select OK. 2 The exchange rate remains in the phone memory until you replace it. CONVERT A CURRENCY AMOUNT 1 2 Select Menu > Extras > Calculator and enter the amount to be converted. Select Options and one of the following options:
To homeAllows you to convert to domestic units. To foreignAllows you convert to foreign units. 108 Copyright 2004 Nokia
TO-DO LIST You can keep track of your tasks with the to-do list feature. You may be able to save up to 30 notes, depending on how long the notes are. Add a to-do note When you add a new note, the default priority is Medium (2). You can change the priority to High (1) or Low (3). 1 2 Use predictive text When entering your to-do note, you can use the built-in dictionary to speed things up. See Text entry on page 29. 1 When entering your note, select Options > Predictive text. 2 Select Menu > Organizer > To-do list > Options > Add. Enter your note, select Options > Save, and the priority you want. Select the language you want and continue entering your note.
STOPWATCH Your phone has a stopwatch that can be used to track time at sporting events or other occasions. The stopwatch displays time in hours, minutes, seconds and fractions of a second. Time 1 2 Split time You can use the split time function for such things as a long distance race when you need to pace yourself. 1 Select Menu > Extras > Stopwatch > Split timing > Start. Select Stop to end the timer. Select Menu > Extras > Stopwatch > Split timing > Start > Split. The timer continues to run. The split time appears below the running time. Select Stop to end the split timer. 2 If you split the time more than once, the new measured time appears at the beginning of the list. You can scroll to see previous measured times. Nokia 6010 User Guide 109 Copyright 2004 Nokia Your personal digital assistant Lap time You can use the lap time function when you want to track how long it takes to complete each cycle or lap. 1 2 Select Menu > Extras > Stopwatch > Lap timing > Start. If you want to take a lap time, select Lap. The clock stops, then starts immediately from zero. The lap time appears below the running time. If you take more than 1 lap time, the new measured time appears at the beginning of the list. You can scroll to see previous measured times. Select Stop to end the lap timer and to display the total time at the top of the screen. 3 Save times 1 While the timer is running, select Stop > Options > Save. 2 Enter a name for the measurement and select OK. If you do not enter a name, the total time is used as the default title for the lap time. View times You can view saved times, which are listed in the order they were saved. Select Menu > Extras > Stopwatch > View times and the time you want to view. Delete times You can delete times from the stop watch memory. You can delete times one at time or delete all the times at once. ALL Select Menu > Extras > Stopwatch > Delete times > Delete all > OK. ONE BY ONE 1 2 Select Menu > Extras > Stopwatch > Delete times > One by one Select the time you want to delete and Delete > OK. OR Select Menu > Extras > Stopwatch > View times. Select the time you want to delete and Options > Delete times > OK. 1 2 110 Copyright 2004 Nokia Stopwatch options You can select the following options when using the stopwatch:
StartAllows you to start timing again after the timing has stopped. If the maximum amount of laps has been saved, this option is not available. SaveAllows you to save and name the last measured time. If the stopwatch memory is full, you will be prompted to delete saved times. ResetAllows you to reset the stopwatch. Note about stopwatch operation Using the stopwatch or allowing it to run in the background when using other features increases the demand on battery power and reduces the battery life. If you press the End key and return to the start screen, the clock continues to run in the background. To return to the Stopwatch function, select Menu > Extras > Stopwatch >
Continue.
SYNCHRONIZE CONTACTS AND CALENDAR Your phone has the ability to synchronize the Contacts and Calendar data with remote devices. Using the synchronization feature (SyncML), data such as names, numbers, and e-mail addresses stored in your contact list, or day notes and reminders from the calendar can be exchanged with other devices through a synchronization service provider. After synchronization, the data in the phone will be the same as the data contained in the host database. Before you begin Before you can begin to use SyncML, you must verify your service provider offers this feature. If your service provider does offer SyncML, you must set up an account with a SyncML service provider. For more information about signing up for synchronization services, contact your wireless service provider. Automatic configuration Your wireless service provider can automatically configure your phone with the correct synchronization settings by using SMS. This can only take place while your phone is in idle mode. Contact your service provider for more information. Even though it is highly recommended that your service provider configure the correct synchronization settings for you, it is helpful for you to know what the meaning of the settings. To view the synchronization settings, select Menu > Connectivity >
Synchronize > Settings > Active Internet sync. settings or Custom. active Internet sync. and one of the following options:
Nokia 6010 User Guide 111 Copyright 2004 Nokia Your personal digital assistant Active Internet sync. settingsAllows you to select which synchronization set to activate. You have the option of renaming the set. There are four sets available. Custom. active Internet sync. settingsAllows you to customize the active synchronization set from a set of options, which are shown in the following table:
Choice What it does Settings name Allows the synchronization set to be renamed. Data to be synchronized Database addresses User name Password Allows the selection of the databases to be synchronized. When this setting is selected, there are two options available, Contacts or Calendar, which will be implemented during future synchronization sessions. Allows the database address to be entered for the databases that are to be synchronized. Allows creation or change of a user name for authorization with the synchronization server. If a user name has been previously entered, it appears. Allows a password to be established or changed, which is used to authenticate the user name while connecting with the synchronization server. If the password or user name is changed in the phone without also changing them with the synchronization service provider, the data will not be able to be synchronized. Synchronization Server Allows the input of the name of the synchronization server used to synchronize the data. 112 Copyright 2004 Nokia Start During the synchronization process, it is not possible to access the database where your data is stored. However, you can cancel the synchronization process by selecting Quit or pressing the End key. It is not possible to place or receive calls, including emergency calls, during synchronization. To place a call, you must cancel the synchronization process. 1 Select Menu > Connectivity > Synchronize > Synchronize > Yes. Once all selected databases have been synchronized, a confirmation note appears, indicating which databases have been synchronized. 2 When the process is complete, select OK to return to the start screen. Nokia 6010 User Guide 113 Copyright 2004 Nokia Fun and games 18 Fun and games
GAMES Challenge yourself or a friend to one of the four fun games in your phone.
In Air Glide, you try to land the glider in the zone. You must avoid running into birds because they will destroy the glider. In Bowling, you try to score as many points as possible. Hit strikes and spares as you go for glory and monitor your progress on the high score chart. In Sky Diver, your goal is to score as many points as you can by skydiving through target rings and parachuting into the landing area of the jump zone. In Backgammon, you can play one of the worlds most popular and enduring games. Use a doubling cube which allows you to successively double the points at stake over a game while you play.
Select Menu > Games > Select game and the game you want. Select Options > Open > New game. Start 1 2 Adjust settings Select Menu > Games > Settings and one of the following options:
Game soundsUsed to turn game sound effects On or Off. Game lightsUsed to turn screen lights On or Off during game play only. ShakesUsed to turn game vibrating effects On or Off. Control AIR GLIDE Press the 4 key to move the glider to the left and press the 6 key to move it to the right. You can select the level of play to be either easy or difficult. 1 2 BOWLING Press the 4 key to move the ball to the left and press the 6 key to move the ball to the right. Press the 5 key to select the speed and spin of the ball and to roll the ball down the lane. Select Menu > Games > Select game > Air Glide > Options > Open. Select Game level > Easy or Difficult. 114 Copyright 2004 Nokia SKY DIVER The onscreen information for Sky Diver shows altitude on the left, wind speed and direction in the center, distance and direction to the landing zone on the right. Fire flares the parachute and slows the skydiver down. Too much flaring will cause the skydiver to stall. The default control keys are, as follows:
The 2 key makes the sky diver lean forward. The 8 key makes the sky diver lean backward. The 4 key rotates the sky diver to the left. The 6 key rotates the sky diver to the right. The 5 key fires open the parachute. You can redefine the controls by selecting the keys you want. 1 Select Menu > Games > Select game > Sky Diver > Options > Open >
Options > Controls > Define keys. Select each key to which you want to assign the up, down, left, right and fire controls. 2 Note: You cannot exit this option until you have define all five controls. BACKGAMMON You can select and move bricks according to die throws. Black bricks are moved clockwise, white bricks counter-clockwise. You can move the cursor by pressing the 4 and 6 keys, but it can only be moved to valid points. Press the 5 key to select and deselect bricks. Press the 0 key to zoom in on dice. During game play, press the Left selection key to access a menu for doubling and statistics. Press the Right selection key to end the game. Delete You can delete games from the phone memory to free more memory. Important: Once you delete a game from the game downloads, you cannot download it back into the Games menu. You can only download it into the Applications menu. 1 2 Select Menu > Games > Select game. Select the game you want and Options > Delete > OK. Nokia 6010 User Guide 115 Copyright 2004 Nokia Fun and games Downloads You can connect to game downloads on the mobile Internet by using your WAP browser, if this service is available from your service provider. Check with your service provider for availability and details for use. Select Menu > Games > Game downlds. and the bookmark you want to launch. Note: When you download a game, if it is not a Nokia supplied or approved game, the game downloads into the Applications menu. The only games you can access from the Games menu are the games that come preloaded with your phone or games downloaded from a Nokia or Nokia approved and/or tested site.
JAVA APPLICATIONS Your Nokia 6010 mobile phone has an Applications menu for downloading and storing Java applications or midlets. The phone software may include midlets specially designed for this phone. Examples of downloadable Java applications include interactive games, animations, sports training calendars, and map applications. Launch an application 1 Select Menu > Applications > Select app. and the application you want to launch. Select Options > Open. 2 If an application uses the whole display area, no selection key names are displayed. Press one of the selection keys to show the options list. Then, select one of the options or select Back to continue with the application. Check available memory Before you download new applications to your Nokia 6010 phone, be sure to check the available memory. 1 2 Select Menu > Applications > Memory. Press the Down scroll key to display how the memory is being used between phone applications and games. Select Back to return to the menu. 3 116 Copyright 2004 Nokia Download an application You can download new Java applications from the mobile Internet. Use the WAP browser to find an appropriate application. Note: Only install sources that offer adequate protection against harmful software. 1 2 Select Menu > Applications > App. downloads. If applicable, select More bookmarks and the bookmark that contains the application you want to download. See Connect on page 89 for more information about connecting to the WAP browser. Choose other application options When viewing the list of applications, select Options to access the following choices:
OpenAllows you to launch an application. DeleteAllows you to delete the application or application set from the phone. Web accessAn application may require web access to make updates. You can restrict the application from accessing the mobile Internet. Your choices include Ask first, Allowed, and Not allowed. Update versionAllows you to check if a new version of the application is available for download from mobile Internet services. Web pageAllows you to check on additional information for the application from Internet Mobile Services. Web page is shown only if an Internet address has been provided with the application. Serv. settingsAllows you to select specific service settings for certain applications. Your phone is set to use the default service settings for the browser. DetailsAllows you to view information about the application, for example, the name, version number, vendor, a brief description, or memory size. Nokia 6010 User Guide 117 Copyright 2004 Nokia Fun and games
CONVERTER This application converts many common unit types. Switch the conversion Select Menu > Applications > Select app. > Converter > Options > Open. Select Options to display the following options:
direction with the Up scroll key and the Down scroll key. Press the * key for the minus (-) sign and press the # key for the decimal point. 1 2 Clear allReset the application. Reverse conv.Toggle the unit conversion direction. Set conversionSet a unit conversion to a certain state that will always occur when you enter the application. The unit types that are available for conversion are:
Weight Length
Area
Volume
ModifyAdd new conversions or adjust exchange rates. InstructionsDisplay instructions for use. Change signToggle the value of the unit from positive (+) to negative (-) and vice versa. Temperature Currency 118 Copyright 2004 Nokia 19 Enhancements If you want to enhance phone functionality, a range of enhancements is available for you. You can select any of these items to help accommodate your specific communication needs. For availability of these and other enhancements, contact your dealer. Stylish carrying cases that protect your Nokia 6010 mobile phone are available for purchase and can be located at www.nokia.com/us.
POWER
1000-mAh Li-Ion Battery (BLC-2) Standard Travel Charger (ACP-7) Travel Charger (ACP-12) Compact Desktop Charging Stand (DCV-10) Battery Charging Stand (DDC-1)
AUDIO Headset (HDC-5) Headset (HDE-2) Boom Headset (HDB-5) Retractable Headset (HDC-10)
Mobile Inductive Loopset (LPS-4)
Phone Adapter (HDA-9)
CAR
Mobile Holder (MBC-15S) Headrest Handsfree (BHF-1)
Express Car Kit (CARK-125)
Full Car Kit (CARK-134)
Mobile Charger (LCH-9)
Mobile Charger (LCH-12) Nokia 6010 User Guide 119 Copyright 2004 Nokia Reference information 20 Reference information
BATTERY INFORMATION Charging and discharging Your device is powered by a rechargeable battery. The full performance of a new battery is achieved only after two or three complete charge and discharge cycles. The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times but it will eventually wear out. When the talk and standby times are noticeably shorter than normal, buy a new battery. Use only Nokia approved batteries, and recharge your battery only with Nokia approved chargers designated for this device. Unplug the charger from the electrical plug and the device when not in use. Do not leave the battery connected to a charger. Overcharging may shorten its lifetime. If left unused, a fully charged battery will lose its charge over time. Temperature extremes can affect the ability of your battery to charge. Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Never use any charger or battery that is damaged. Do not short-circuit the battery. Accidental short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object such as a coin, clip, or pen causes direct connection of the positive
(+) and negative (-) terminals of the battery. (These look like metal strips on the battery.) This might happen, for example, when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the connecting object. Leaving the battery in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in summer or winter conditions, will reduce the capacity and lifetime of the battery. Always try to keep the battery between 59F and 77F (15C and 25C). A device with a hot or cold battery may not work temporarily, even when the battery is fully charged. Battery performance is particularly limited in temperatures well below freezing. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire! Dispose of batteries according to local regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose as household waste.
ENHANCEMENTS A few practical rules about accessories and enhancements:
When you disconnect the power cord of any accessory or enhancement, grasp Keep all accessories and enhancements out of the reach of small children. and pull the plug, not the cord. Check regularly that enhancements installed in a vehicle are mounted and are operating properly.
120 Copyright 2004 Nokia
Installation of any complex car enhancements must be made by qualified personnel only.
ENHANCEMENTS, BATTERIES, AND CHARGERS Check the model number of any charger before use with this device. This device is intended for use when supplied with power from the standard travel charger (ACP-7). Warning: Use only batteries, chargers, and enhancements approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The use of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty, and may be dangerous. For availability of approved enhancements, please check with your dealer. When you disconnect the power cord of any enhancement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord. Your device and its enhancements may contain small parts. Keep them out of reach of small children.
CARE AND MAINTENANCE Your device is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The suggestions below will help you protect your warranty coverage and enjoy your device for many years.
Keep the device dry. Precipitation, humidity, and all types of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If your device does get wet, remove the battery and allow the device to dry completely before replacing it. Do not use or store the device in dusty, dirty areas. Its moving parts and electronic components can be damaged. Do not store the device in hot areas. High temperatures can shorten the life of electronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics. Do not store the device in cold areas. When the device returns to its normal temperature, moisture can form inside the device and damage electronic circuit boards. Do not attempt to open the device other than as instructed in this guide. Do not drop, knock, or shake the device. Rough handling can break internal circuit boards and fine mechanics. Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong detergents to clean the device. Do not paint the device. Paint can clog the moving parts and prevent proper operation.
Nokia 6010 User Guide 121 Copyright 2004 Nokia Reference information
Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modifications, or attachments could damage the device and may violate regulations governing radio devices. All of the above suggestions apply equally to your device, battery, charger, or any enhancement. If any device is not working properly, take it to the nearest authorized service facility for service.
ADDITIONAL SAFETY INFORMATION Operating environment Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area and always switch off your device when its use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. Use the device only in its normal operating positions. To maintain compliance with radio frequency exposure guidelines only use accessories approved by Nokia for use with this device. When the device is on and being worn on the body, always use an approved carrying case. Medical devices Operation of any radio transmitting equipment, including wireless phones, may interfere with the functionality of inadequately protected medical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the medical device to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off your phone in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy. PACEMAKERS Pacemaker manufacturers recommend that a minimum separation of 6 in
(15.3 cm) be maintained between a wireless phone and a pacemaker to avoid potential interference with the pacemaker. These recommendations are consistent with the independent research by and recommendations of Wireless Technology Research. To minimize the potential for interference, persons with pacemakers should
Always keep the device more than 6 in (15.3 cm) from their pacemaker when the device is switched on Not carry the device in a breast pocket Hold the device to the ear opposite the pacemaker
If you have any reason to suspect that interference is taking place, switch off your device immediately. 122 Copyright 2004 Nokia HEARING AID Some digital wireless devices may interfere with some hearing aids. If interference occurs, consult your service provider. Vehicles RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles such as electronic fuel injection systems, electronic antiskid (antilock) braking systems, electronic speed control systems, air bag systems. For more information, check with the manufacturer or its representative of your vehicle or any equipment that has been added. Only qualified personnel should service the device, or install the device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty that may apply to the device. Check regularly that all wireless device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in the same compartment as the device, its parts, or enhancements. For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that an air bags inflate with great force. Do not place objects, including installed or portable wireless equipment in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If in-vehicle wireless equipment is improperly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result. Potentially explosive environments Switch off your device when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions. Potentially explosive atmospheres include areas where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Switch off the device at refuelling points such as near gas pumps at service stations. Observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, storage, and distribution areas, chemical plants or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often but not always clearly marked. They include below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage facilities, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane), and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust or metal powders. FCC regulations prohibit using your wireless device while in the air. The use of wireless telephones in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the wireless telephone network, and may be illegal. Failure to observe these instructions may lead to suspension or denial of telephone services to the offender, legal action, or both. Nokia 6010 User Guide 123 Copyright 2004 Nokia Reference information EMERGENCY CALLS Important: Wireless phones, including this phone, operate using radio signals, wireless networks, landline networks, and user-programmed functions. Because of this, connections in all conditions cannot be guaranteed. You should never rely solely on any wireless phone for essential communications like medical emergencies. To make an emergency call:
1 2 3 If the phone is not on, switch it on. Check for adequate signal strength. Some networks may require that a valid SIM card is properly inserted in the phone. Press the End key as many times as needed to clear the display and ready the phone for calls. Key in the official emergency number for your present location. Emergency numbers vary by location. Press the Send key. 4 If certain features are in use, you may first need to turn those features off before you can make an emergency call. Consult this guide or your service provider. When making an emergency call, give all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Your wireless phone may be the only means of communication at the scene of an accident. Do not end the call until given permission to do so. 124 Copyright 2004 Nokia CERTIFICATION INFORMATION (SAR) THIS MODEL PHONE MEETS THE GOVERNMENT'S REQUIREMENTS FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES. Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the emission limits for exposure to radio frequency
(RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S. Government. These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines and establish permitted levels of RF energy for the general population. The guidelines are based on standards that were developed by independent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The standards include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure standard for wireless mobile phones employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6W/kg.* Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions accepted by the FCC with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR level of the phone while operating can be well below the maximum value. This is because the phone is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a wireless base station antenna, the lower the power output. Before a phone model is available for sale to the public, it must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not exceed the limit established by the government-adopted requirement for safe exposure. The tests are performed in positions and locations (for example, at the ear and worn on the body) as required by the FCC for each model. The highest SAR value for this model phone as reported to the FCC:
When tested for use at the ear -
FCCID no. GMLNPM-10 is 0.84 W/kg FCCID no. GMLNPM-10X is 0.75 W/kg When worn on the body, as described in this user guide:
FCCID no. GMLNPM-10 is 0.73 W/kg FCCID no. GMLNPM-10X is 0.79 W/kg
(Body-worn measurements differ among phone models, depending upon available enhancements and FCC requirements). Nokia 6010 User Guide 125 Copyright 2004 Nokia Reference information While there may be differences between the SAR levels of various phones and at various positions, they all meet the government requirement. The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this model phone with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines. SAR information on this model phone is on file with the FCC and can be found under the Display Grant section of http://www.fcc.gov/oet/fccid after searching on FCC ID GMLNPM-10 and GMLNPM-10X. For body worn operation, this phone has been tested and meets the FCC RF exposure guidelines for use with a carry case, belt clip, or holder that contains no metal and that positions the handset a minimum of 5/8 inch (1.5 cm) from the body. Use of other carry cases, belt clips, or holders may not ensure compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines. If you do not use a body-worn accessory and are not holding the phone at the ear, position the handset a minimum of 5/8 inch (1.5 cm) from your body when the phone is switched on.
*In the United States and Canada, the SAR limit for mobile phones used by the public is 1.6 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over one gram of tissue. The standard incorporates a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting requirements and the network band. For SAR information in other regions please look under product information at www.nokia.com. 126 Copyright 2004 Nokia
BATTERIES This section provides information about the battery in the phone. Be aware that the information in this section is subject to change. Note: The phone uses a lithium ion (Li-Ion) battery. Dispose of used batteries in accordance with any local regulations. Do not dispose of as household waste. The tables shown in this section provide information about the batteries that are available for your phone, charging times with the standard travel charger (ACP-7), talk times, and standby times. Consult your service provider for more information. Charging times The charging times listed below are approximate. Battery option ACP-7 Charger 3.5 h BLC-2 Li-Ion Battery 1000 mAh Standby and talk times The times shown in the following table are estimates only and represent a range for either standby or talk times (not a combination of both). The operation time of the battery depends on conditions such as:
Transmitting power level Signal (distance between the phone and the base station) Network parameters defined by the operator Phone use (WAP, games, SMS, Xpress-on active covers) Charging procedure used Battery option Talk time Standby time BLC-2 Li-Ion Battery 1000 mAh up to 5.5 h up to 10 d Nokia 6010 User Guide 127 Copyright 2004 Nokia Technical information 21 Technical information Feature Weight Size Frequency Range Transmitter Output Power Battery Voltage Operating Temperature Networks Memory Locations Specification 107 g with BLC-2 1000 mAh battery Length 119 mm (4.68 in) Width 50 mm (1.97 in) Depth 23 mm (0.90 in) GSM 850 824.2 to 848.8 MHz (TX) 869.2 to 893.8 MHz (RX) GSM 1900 1850.2 to 1909.8 MHz (TX) 1930.2 to 1989.8 MHz (RX) GSM 850 2 W GSM 1900 1 W 3.6 V dc nominal 3.6 V dc for car kit 14 F to + 131 F
(-10 C to + 55 C) GSM 850 MHz/1900 MHz Up to 500 memory locations in the phone. Each location holds up to 5 numbers and 3 text fields (dynamic memory). Check with your SIM card provider or carrier for information about SIM card memory capacity. 128 Copyright 2004 Nokia 22 Troubleshooting This section provides a table that lists some of the most commonly encountered problems and provides possible causes and solutions. Problem Possible cause Possible solution My phone is not charging. My phone is not making/answering calls. The charger and the phone are not properly connected. The charger is not properly plugged in. Securely connect the charger to the phone. Make sure that the charger is plugged in correctly. The battery is not charged. Charge the battery. The signal strength is poor. If you are indoors, move toward a window. I cannot listen to my voice messages. You do not have voice mail service. Call your wireless service provider. You have not set up your voice mailbox with your service provider. You have not saved your voice mail number in your phone. Call your wireless service provider. Refer to Voice features on page 49. The voice mail number you have saved is incorrect. Call your wireless service provider. You have forgotten your password or are entering it incorrectly. Call your wireless service provider. Nokia 6010 User Guide 129 Copyright 2004 Nokia Nokia One-Year Limited Warranty 23 Nokia One-Year Limited Warranty Nokia Inc. (Nokia) warrants that this cellular phone (Product) is free from defects in material and workmanship that result in Product failure during normal usage, according to the following terms and conditions:
1 The limited warranty for the Product extends for ONE (1) year beginning on the date of the purchase of the Product. This one year period is extended by each whole day that the Product is out of your possession for repair under this warranty. The limited warranty extends only to the original purchaser (Consumer) of the Product and is not assignable or transferable to any subsequent purchaser/
end-user. The limited warranty extends only to Consumers who purchase the Product in the United States of America. During the limited warranty period, Nokia will repair, or replace, at Nokias sole option, any defective parts, or any parts that will not properly operate for their intended use with new or refurbished replacement items if such repair or replacement is needed because of product malfunction or failure during normal usage. No charge will be made to the Consumer for any such parts. Nokia will also pay for the labor charges incurred by Nokia in repairing or replacing the defective parts. The limited warranty does not cover defects in appearance, cosmetic, decorative or structural items, including framing, and any non-
operative parts. Nokias limit of liability under the limited warranty shall be the actual cash value of the Product at the time the Consumer returns the Product for repair, determined by the price paid by the Consumer for the Product less a reasonable amount for usage. Nokia shall not be liable for any other losses or damages. These remedies are the Consumers exclusive remedies for breach of warranty. Upon request from Nokia, the Consumer must prove the date of the original purchase of the Product by a dated bill of sale or dated itemized receipt. The Consumer shall bear the cost of shipping the Product to Nokia in Melbourne, Florida. Nokia shall bear the cost of shipping the Product back to the Consumer after the completion of service under this limited warranty. 2 3 4 5 6 130 Copyright 2004 Nokia 7 The Consumer shall have no coverage or benefits under this limited warranty if any of the following conditions are applicable:
a) The Product has been subjected to abnormal use, abnormal conditions, improper storage, exposure to moisture or dampness, unauthorized modifications, unauthorized connections, unauthorized repair, misuse, neglect, abuse, accident, alteration, improper installation, or other acts which are not the fault of Nokia, including damage caused by shipping. The Product has been damaged from external causes such as collision with an object, or from fire, flooding, sand, dirt, windstorm, lightning, earthquake or damage from exposure to weather conditions, an Act of God, or battery leakage, theft, blown fuse, or improper use of any electrical source, damage caused by computer or internet viruses, bugs, worms, Trojan Horses, cancelbots or damage caused by the connection to other products not recommended for interconnection by Nokia. b) c) Nokia was not advised in writing by the Consumer of the alleged defect or malfunction of the Product within fourteen (14) days after the expiration of the applicable limited warranty period. The Product serial number plate or the enhancement data code has been removed, defaced or altered. The defect or damage was caused by the defective function of the cellular system or by inadequate signal reception by the external antenna, or viruses or other software problems introduced into the Product. 8 Nokia does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of the Product. If a problem develops during the limited warranty period, the Consumer shall take the following step-by-step procedure:
a) The Consumer shall return the Product to the place of purchase for repair or replacement processing. If a is not convenient because of distance (more than 50 miles) or for other good cause, the Consumer shall ship the Product prepaid and insured to:
Nokia Inc., Attn: Repair Department 795 West Nasa Blvd. Melbourne, FL 32901 The Consumer shall include a return address, daytime phone number and/
or fax number, complete description of the problem, proof of purchase and service agreement (if applicable). Expenses related to removing the Product from an installation are not covered under this limited warranty. The Consumer will be billed for any parts or labor charges not covered by this limited warranty. The Consumer will be responsible for any expenses related to reinstallation of the Product. d) e) b) c) d) Nokia 6010 User Guide 131 Copyright 2004 Nokia Nokia One-Year Limited Warranty e) Nokia will repair the Product under the limited warranty within 30 days after receipt of the Product. If Nokia cannot perform repairs covered under this limited warranty within 30 days, or after a reasonable number of attempts to repair the same defect, Nokia at its option, will provide a replacement Product or refund the purchase price of the Product less a reasonable amount for usage. In some states the Consumer may have the right to a loaner if the repair of the Product takes more than ten (10) days. Please contact the Customer Service Center at Nokia at the telephone number listed at the end of this warranty if you need a loaner and the repair of the Product has taken or is estimated to take more than ten (10) days. If the Product is returned during the limited warranty period, but the problem with the Product is not covered under the terms and conditions of this limited warranty, the Consumer will be notified and given an estimate of the charges the Consumer must pay to have the Product repaired, with all shipping charges billed to the Consumer. If the estimate is refused, the Product will be returned freight collect. If the Product is returned after the expiration of the limited warranty period, Nokias normal service policies shall apply and the Consumer will be responsible for all shipping charges. f) 9 You (the Consumer) understand that the product may consist of refurbished equipment that contains used components, some of which have been reprocessed. The used components comply with Product performance and reliability specifications. 10 ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE, SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE FOREGOING LIMITED WRITTEN WARRANTY. OTHERWISE, THE FOREGOING LIMITED WARRANTY IS THE CONSUMERS SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. NOKIA SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF ANTICIPATED BENEFITS OR PROFITS, LOSS OF SAVINGS OR REVENUE, LOSS OF DATA, PUNITIVE DAMAGES, LOSS OF USE OF THE PRODUCT OR ANY ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT, COST OF CAPITAL, COST OF ANY SUBSTITUTE EQUIPMENT OR FACILITIES, DOWNTIME, THE CLAIMS OF ANY THIRD PARTIES, INCLUDING CUSTOMERS, AND INJURY TO PROPERTY, RESULTING FROM THE PURCHASE OR USE OF THE PRODUCT OR ARISING FROM BREACH OF THE WARRANTY, BREACH OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT TORT, OR ANY OTHER LEGAL OR EQUITABLE THEORY, EVEN IF NOKIA KNEW OF THE LIKELIHOOD OF SUCH DAMAGES. NOKIA SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DELAY IN RENDERING SERVICE UNDER THE LIMITED WARRANTY, OR LOSS OF USE DURING THE PERIOD THAT THE PRODUCT IS BEING REPAIRED. 132 Copyright 2004 Nokia 11 Some states do not allow limitation of how long an implied warranty lasts, so the one year warranty limitation may not apply to you (the Consumer). Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental and consequential damages, so certain of the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you (the Consumer). This limited warranty gives the Consumer specific legal rights and the Consumer may also have other rights which vary from state to state. 12 Nokia neither assumes nor authorizes any authorized service center or any other person or entity to assume for it any other obligation or liability beyond that which is expressly provided for in this limited warranty including the provider or seller of any extended warranty or service agreement. 13 This is the entire warranty between Nokia and the Consumer, and supersedes all prior and contemporaneous agreements or understandings, oral or written, relating to the Product, and no representation, promise or condition not contained herein shall modify these terms. 14 This limited warranty allocates the risk of failure of the Product between the Consumer and Nokia. The allocation is recognized by the Consumer and is reflected in the purchase price. 15 Any action or lawsuit for breach of warranty must be commenced within eighteen (18) months following purchase of the Product. 16 Questions concerning this limited warranty may be directed to:
Nokia Inc. Attn: Customer Service 7725 Woodland Center Blvd., Ste. 150 Tampa, FL 33614 Telephone: 1-888-NOKIA-2U (1-888-665-4228) Facsimile: (813) 287-6612 TTY/TDD Users Only: 1-800-24-NOKIA (1-800-246-6542) 17 The limited warranty period for Nokia supplied attachments and accessories is specifically defined within their own warranty cards and packaging. Nokia 6010 User Guide 133 Copyright 2004 Nokia Nokia One-Year Limited Warranty NOTES 134 Copyright 2004 Nokia Appendix A Message from the CTIA
(Cellular Telecommunications
& Internet Association) to all users of mobile phones 2001 Cellular Telecommunications & Internet Association. All Rights Reserved.1250 Connecticut Avenue, NW Suite 800, Washington, DC 20036. Phone: (202) 785-0081 Nokia 6010 User Guide 135 Copyright 2004 Nokia Safety is the most important call you will ever make. A Guide to Safe and Responsible Wireless Phone Use Tens of millions of people in the U.S. today take advantage of the unique combination of convenience, safety and value delivered by the wireless telephone. Quite simply, the wireless phone gives people the powerful ability to communicate by voice--almost anywhere, anytime--with the boss, with a client, with the kids, with emergency personnel or even with the police. Each year, Americans make billions of calls from their wireless phones, and the numbers are rapidly growing. But an important responsibility accompanies those benefits, one that every wireless phone user must uphold. When driving a car, driving is your first responsibility. A wireless phone can be an invaluable tool, but good judgment must be exercised at all times while driving a motor vehicle--whether on the phone or not. The basic lessons are ones we all learned as teenagers. Driving requires alertness, caution and courtesy. It requires a heavy dose of basic common sense---keep your head up, keep your eyes on the road, check your mirrors frequently and watch out for other drivers. It requires obeying all traffic signs and signals and staying within the speed limit. It means using seatbelts and requiring other passengers to do the same. But with wireless phone use, driving safely means a little more. This brochure is a call to wireless phone users everywhere to make safety their first priority when behind the wheel of a car. Wireless telecommunications is keeping us in touch, simplifying our lives, protecting us in emergencies and providing opportunities to help others in need. When it comes to the use of wireless phones, safety is your most important call. Wireless Phone "Safety Tips"
Below are safety tips to follow while driving and using a wireless phone which should be easy to remember. 1 Get to know your wireless phone and its features such as speed dial and redial. Carefully read your instruction manual and learn to take advantage of valuable features most phones offer, including automatic redial and memory. Also, work to memorize the phone keypad so you can use the speed dial function without taking your attention off the road. 2 When available, use a hands free device. A number of hands free wireless phone accessories are readily available today. Whether you choose an installed mounted device for your wireless phone or a speaker phone accessory, take advantage of these devices if available to you. 3 Position your wireless phone within easy reach. Make sure you place your wireless phone within easy reach and where you can grab it without removing your eyes from the road. If you get an incoming call at an inconvenient time, if possible, let your voice mail answer it for you. 136 Copyright 2004 Nokia 4 Suspend conversations during hazardous driving conditions or situations. Let the person you are speaking with know you are driving; if necessary, suspend the call in heavy traffic or hazardous weather conditions. Rain, sleet, snow and ice can be hazardous, but so is heavy traffic. As a driver, your first responsibility is to pay attention to the road. 5 Do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving. If you are reading an address book or business card, or writing a "to do" list while driving a car, you are not watching where you are going. Its common sense. Dont get caught in a dangerous situation because you are reading or writing and not paying attention to the road or nearby vehicles. 6 Dial sensibly and assess the traffic; if possible, place calls when you are not moving or before pulling into traffic. Try to plan your calls before you begin your trip or attempt to coincide your calls with times you may be stopped at a stop sign, red light or otherwise stationary. But if you need to dial while driving, follow this simple tip--dial only a few numbers, check the road and your mirrors, then continue. 7 Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations that may be distracting. Stressful or emotional conversations and driving do not mix--they are distracting and even dangerous when you are behind the wheel of a car. Make people you are talking with aware you are driving and if necessary, suspend conversations which have the potential to divert your attention from the road. 8 Use your wireless phone to call for help. Your wireless phone is one of the greatest tools you can own to protect yourself and your family in dangerous situations--with your phone at your side, help is only three numbers away. Dial 9-1-1 or other local emergency number in the case of fire, traffic accident, road hazard or medical emergency. Remember, it is a free call on your wireless phone!
9 Use your wireless phone to help others in emergencies. Your wireless phone provides you a perfect opportunity to be a "Good Samaritan" in your community. If you see an auto accident, crime in progress or other serious emergency where lives are in danger, call 9-1-1 or other local emergency number, as you would want others to do for you. 10 Call roadside assistance or a special wireless non-emergency assistance number when necessary. Certain situations you encounter while driving may require attention, but are not urgent enough to merit a call for emergency services. But you still can use your wireless phone to lend a hand. If you see a broken-down vehicle posing no serious hazard, a broken traffic signal, a minor traffic accident where no one appears injured or a vehicle you know to be stolen, call roadside assistance or other special non-emergency wireless number. Careless, distracted individuals and people driving irresponsibly represent a hazard to everyone on the road. Since 1984, the Cellular Telecommunications Industry Association and the wireless industry have conducted educational outreach to inform wireless phone users of their responsibilities as safe drivers and good citizens. As we approach a new century, more and more of us will take advantage of the benefits of wireless telephones. And, as we take to the roads, we all have a responsibility to drive safely. Nokia 6010 User Guide 137 Copyright 2004 Nokia The wireless industry reminds you to use your phone safely when driving. For more information, please call 1-888-901-SAFE. For updates: http://www.wow-com.com/consumer/issues/driving/
articles.cfm?ID=85 138 Copyright 2004 Nokia Appendix B Message from the FDA
(U.S. Food and Drug Administration) to all users of mobile phones July 18, 2001For updates: http://www.fda.gov/cdrh/phones Nokia 6010 User Guide 139 Copyright 2004 Nokia Consumer Update on Wireless Phones U.S. Food and Drug Administration 1. Do wireless phones pose a health hazard?
The available scientific evidence does not show that any health problems are associated with using wireless phones. There is no proof, however, that wireless phones are absolutely safe. Wireless phones emit low levels of radiofrequency energy (RF) in the microwave range while being used. They also emit very low levels of RF when in the stand-by mode. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects (by heating tissue), exposure to low level RF that does not produce heating effects causes no known adverse health effects. Many studies of low level RF exposures have not found any biological effects. Some studies have suggested that some biological effects may occur, but such findings have not been confirmed by additional research. In some cases, other researchers have had difficulty in reproducing those studies, or in determining the reasons for inconsistent results. 2. What is FDA's role concerning the safety of wireless phones?
Under the law, FDA does not review the safety of radiation-emitting consumer products such as wireless phones before they can be sold, as it does with new drugs or medical devices. However, the agency has authority to take action if wireless phones are shown to emit radiofrequency energy (RF) at a level that is hazardous to the user. In such a case, FDA could require the manufacturers of wireless phones to notify users of the health hazard and to repair, replace or recall the phones so that the hazard no longer exists. Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA regulatory actions, FDA has urged the wireless phone industry to take a number of steps, including the following:
Support needed research into possible biological effects of RF of the type emitted by wireless phones;
Design wireless phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to the user that is not necessary for device function; and Cooperate in providing users of wireless phones with the best possible information on possible effects of wireless phone use on human health. Environmental Protection Agency Federal Communications Commission FDA belongs to an interagency working group of the federal agencies that have responsibility for different aspects of RF safety to ensure coordinated efforts at the federal level. The following agencies belong to this working group:
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health Occupational Safety and Health Administration National Telecommunications and Information Administration The National Institutes of Health participates in some interagency working group activities, as well. FDA shares regulatory responsibilities for wireless phones with the Federal Communications Commission (FCC). All phones that are sold in the United States must comply with FCC safety guidelines that limit RF exposure. FCC relies on FDA 140 Copyright 2004 Nokia and other health agencies for safety questions about wireless phones. FCC also regulates the base stations that the wireless phone networks rely upon. While these base stations operate at higher power than do the wireless phones themselves, the RF exposures that people get from these base stations are typically thousands of times lower than those they can get from wireless phones. Base stations are thus not the subject of the safety questions discussed in this document. 3. What kinds of phones are the subject of this update?
The term wireless phone refers here to hand-held wireless phones with built-in antennas, often called cell mobile or PCS phones. These types of wireless phones can expose the user to measurable radiofrequency energy (RF) because of the short distance between the phone and the users head. These RF exposures are limited by Federal Communications Commission safety guidelines that were developed with the advice of FDA and other federal health and safety agencies. When the phone is located at greater distances from the user, the exposure to RF is drastically lower because a person's RF exposure decreases rapidly with increasing distance from the source. The so-called cordless phones; which have a base unit connected to the telephone wiring in a house, typically operate at far lower power levels, and thus produce RF exposures far below the FCC safety limits. 4. What are the results of the research done already?
The research done thus far has produced conflicting results, and many studies have suffered from flaws in their research methods. Animal experiments investigating the effects of radiofrequency energy (RF) exposures characteristic of wireless phones have yielded conflicting results that often cannot be repeated in other laboratories. A few animal studies, however, have suggested that low levels of RF could accelerate the development of cancer in laboratory animals. However, many of the studies that showed increased tumor development used animals that had been genetically engineered or treated with cancer-causing chemicals so as to be pre-disposed to develop cancer in the absence of RF exposure. Other studies exposed the animals to RF for up to 22 hours per day. These conditions are not similar to the conditions under which people use wireless phones, so we dont know with certainty what the results of such studies mean for human health. Three large epidemiology studies have been published since December 2000. Between them, the studies investigated any possible association between the use of wireless phones and primary brain cancer, glioma, meningioma, or acoustic neuroma, tumors of the brain or salivary gland, leukemia, or other cancers. None of the studies demonstrated the existence of any harmful health effects from wireless phone RF exposures. However, none of the studies can answer questions about long-term exposures, since the average period of phone use in these studies was around three years. 5. What research is needed to decide whether RF exposure from wireless phones poses a health risk?
A combination of laboratory studies and epidemiological studies of people actually using wireless phones would provide some of the data that are needed. Lifetime animal exposure studies could be completed in a few years. However, very large numbers of animals would be needed to provide reliable proof of a cancer promoting effect if one exists. Epidemiological studies can provide data that is directly applicable to human populations, but 10 or more years follow-up may be Nokia 6010 User Guide 141 Copyright 2004 Nokia needed to provide answers about some health effects, such as cancer. This is because the interval between the time of exposure to a cancer-causing agent and the time tumors develop - if they do - may be many, many years. The interpretation of epidemiological studies is hampered by difficulties in measuring actual RF exposure during day-to-day use of wireless phones. Many factors affect this measurement, such as the angle at which the phone is held, or which model of phone is used. 6.What is FDA doing to find out more about the possible health effects of wireless phone RF?
FDA is working with the U.S. National Toxicology Program and with groups of investigators around the world to ensure that high priority animal studies are conducted to address important questions about the effects of exposure to radiofrequency energy (RF). FDA has been a leading participant in the World Health Organization International Electromagnetic Fields (EMF) Project since its inception in 1996. An influential result of this work has been the development of a detailed agenda of research needs that has driven the establishment of new research programs around the world. The Project has also helped develop a series of public information documents on EMF issues. FDA and the Cellular Telecommunications & Internet Association (CTIA) have a formal Cooperative Research and Development Agreement (CRADA) to do research on wireless phone safety. FDA provides the scientific oversight, obtaining input from experts in government, industry, and academic organizations. CTIA-
funded research is conducted through contracts to independent investigators. The initial research will include both laboratory studies and studies of wireless phone users. The CRADA will also include a broad assessment of additional research needs in the context of the latest research developments around the world. 7. How can I find out how much radiofrequency energy exposure I can get by using my wireless phone?
All phones sold in the United States must comply with Federal Communications Commission (FCC) guidelines that limit radiofrequency energy (RF) exposures. FCC established these guidelines in consultation with FDA and the other federal health and safety agencies. The FCC limit for RF exposure from wireless telephones is set at a Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) of 1.6 watts per kilogram (1.6 W/kg). The FCC limit is consistent with the safety standards developed by the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineering (IEEE) and the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement. The exposure limit takes into consideration the bodys ability to remove heat from the tissues that absorb energy from the wireless phone and is set well below levels known to have effects. Manufacturers of wireless phones must report the RF exposure level for each model of phone to the FCC. The FCC website (http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety) gives directions for locating the FCC identification number on your phone so you can find your phones RF exposure level in the online listing. 8. What has FDA done to measure the radiofrequency energy coming from wireless phones?
The Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) is developing a technical standard for measuring the radiofrequency energy (RF) exposure from wireless 142 Copyright 2004 Nokia phones and other wireless handsets with the participation and leadership of FDA scientists and engineers. The standard, Recommended Practice for Determining the Spatial-Peak Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) in the Human Body Due to Wireless Communications Devices: Experimental Techniques, sets forth the first consistent test methodology for measuring the rate at which RF is deposited in the heads of wireless phone users. The test method uses a tissue-simulating model of the human head. Standardized SAR test methodology is expected to greatly improve the consistency of measurements made at different laboratories on the same phone. SAR is the measurement of the amount of energy absorbed in tissue, either by the whole body or a small part of the body. It is measured in watts/kg (or milliwatts/g) of matter. This measurement is used to determine whether a wireless phone complies with safety guidelines. 9. What steps can I take to reduce my exposure to radiofrequency energy from my wireless phone?
If there is a risk from these products--and at this point we do not know that there is--it is probably very small. But if you are concerned about avoiding even potential risks, you can take a few simple steps to minimize your exposure to radiofrequency energy (RF). Since time is a key factor in how much exposure a person receives, reducing the amount of time spent using a wireless phone will reduce RF exposure. If you must conduct extended conversations by wireless phone every day, you could place more distance between your body and the source of the RF, since the exposure level drops off dramatically with distance. For example, you could use a headset and carry the wireless phone away from your body or use a wireless phone connected to a remote antenna. Again, the scientific data do not demonstrate that wireless phones are harmful. But if you are concerned about the RF exposure from these products, you can use measures like those described above to reduce your RF exposure from wireless phone use. 10. What about children using wireless phones?
The scientific evidence does not show a danger to users of wireless phones, including children and teenagers. If you want to take steps to lower exposure to radiofrequency energy (RF), the measures described above would apply to children and teenagers using wireless phones. Reducing the time of wireless phone use and increasing the distance between the user and the RF source will reduce RF exposure.Some groups sponsored by other national governments have advised that children be discouraged from using wireless phones at all. For example, the government in the United Kingdom distributed leaflets containing such a recommendation in December 2000. They noted that no evidence exists that using a wireless phone causes brain tumors or other ill effects. Their recommendation to limit wireless phone use by children was strictly precautionary; it was not based on scientific evidence that any health hazard exists. 11. What about wireless phone interference with medical equipment?
Radiofrequency energy (RF) from wireless phones can interact with some electronic devices. For this reason, FDA helped develop a detailed test method to measure electromagnetic interference (EMI) of implanted cardiac pacemakers and defibrillators from wireless telephones. This test method is now part of a standard sponsored by the Association for the Advancement of Medical instrumentation Nokia 6010 User Guide 143 Copyright 2004 Nokia
(AAMI). The final draft, a joint effort by FDA, medical device manufacturers, and many other groups, was completed in late 2000. This standard will allow manufacturers to ensure that cardiac pacemakers and defibrillators are safe from wireless phone EMI. FDA has tested hearing aids for interference from handheld wireless phones and helped develop a voluntary standard sponsored by the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). This standard specifies test methods and performance requirements for hearing aids and wireless phones so that no interference occurs when a person uses a compatible phone and a accompanied hearing aid at the same time. This standard was approved by the IEEE in 2000. FDA continues to monitor the use of wireless phones for possible interactions with other medical devices. Should harmful interference be found to occur, FDA will conduct testing to assess the interference and work to resolve the problem. 12. Where can I find additional information?
For additional information, please refer to the following resources:
FDA web page on wireless phones http://www.fda.gov/cdrh/phones/index.html Federal Communications Commission (FCC) RF Safety Program http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection http://www.icnirp.de World Health Organization (WHO) International EMF Project http://www.who.int/emf National Radiological Protection Board (UK) http://www.nrpb.org.uk/
July 18, 2001For updates: http://www.fda.gov/cdrh/phones 144 Copyright 2004 Nokia Index Numerics 1-touch dialing assign a number 44 delete a number 45 A active call options answer a waiting call 47 end the active call 47 reject a waiting call 47 switch between calls 47 third call waiting 48 alarm clock 106 delay alarm 106 snooze 106 a call 21 waiting call 47 antenna 15 applications answer check available memory 116 download 117 launch 116 audible alerts 53 authority certificates 91 automatic keyguard 69 B back cover release 15 battery charge 12 check strength 17 indication on screen 17 power 17 block international calls 73 multimedia messages 85 bookmarks 90 browser options 89 business cards receive 107 send 107 C cache memory 91 calculator 108 calendar make a note 104 navigate 104 view 104 call timers 39 call waiting 26, 47 caller groups add names 63 assign ringing tone 64 graphics 64 remove names 64 rename 64 caller ID 21, 26 check volume 17 clock 12 hour 59 24 hour 59 alarm 106 display 60 hide 60 set 59 set time format 59 default security code 72 code Nokia 6010 User Guide 145 Copyright 2004 Nokia personal unblocking key 71 PIN 70 restriction password 70 security code 70 conference calls 48 contacts delete entire content 37 delete names and numbers 37 edit names and numbers 35 find names 34 convert currency 108 covers, changing 65 D data call history 41 date display 60 hide 60 set 60 set format 60 disconnect from mobile Internet 93 display language 59 downloading ringing tones 58 E e-mail send 80 set up sending profile 79 emergency call while online 93 end a call 20 end key 20 enhancements 119 F factory settings 65 file size 86 file type 86 fixed dialing 72 G gallery games 114 add a folder 62 delete a folder 62 rename a folder 62 view a folder 61 Air Glide 114 Backgammon 115 Bowling 114 Sky Diver 115 call history 38 call while online 93 check data call history 38 phone symbols 92 GPRS 88 H handsfree operation 52 headset 13 help text 59 I icons 17 idle screen 16 IM availability 97 contacts 99 conversations 97 group chat 101 log in 96 log off 103 offline menu 96 online menu 96 service provider icons 94 settings 102 user name and password 95 Indicators 17 information message service 86 146 Copyright 2004 Nokia international calls prefix 32 restrict access 73 J Java midlets 116 K keyguard 69 L line for outgoing calls 26 list of menus and submenus 22 lock codes PIN codes 70 PUK codes 71 M make memory 84 a call 20 an international call 44 emergency call while online 93 available for multimedia messages default memory for contacts 36 message center number 75 message mode 75 check text messages 78 check voice mail 50 message settings messages MIDI 58 midlets 116 MMS advertisements 85 connection settings 85 delete a message 86 inbox 84 maximum size 84 play a sound clip 86 read a message 86 read a message later 86 reply to a message 86 ringing tone 84 save a received graphic 86 save a received ringing tone 86 sender information 86 settings 84 write and send a message 85 mobile Internet clear the cache 91 connect 89 disconnect 93 navigate 89 security issues 91 site examples 90 N network services 26 call forwarding 26, 46 call waiting 47 conference calls 48 outgoing line 45 system selection 47 transfer calls 48 Nokia Customer Care 8 O onscreen help 59 P phone illustrated 1 keys for WAP browser 89 label 7 memory 35 symbols 17 picture messages read 83 Nokia 6010 User Guide 147 Copyright 2004 Nokia save 83 send 82 send with text 83 PIN code 71 polyphonic sound 58 predictive text activate 30 add new words 31 enter 30 customize 54 for accessories 55 handsfree 55 profiles PUK code 71 Q quick guide 2 R redial a call 21 reject a call 21 restore factory settings 65 restrict calls 73 S scroll bar 22 security code 70 default 72 security features automatic keyguard 69 personal unblocking key 71 PIN code 71 prevent unauthorized use 71 PUK code 71 require password 71 MMS, multimedia 84 signal strength check 20 indicator 17 settings SIM card install 10 remove 12 start screen 16 stopwatch delete times 110 stop the clock 110 view times 110 swap between two calls 47 synchronize contacts and calendar 111 system selection 26 T talk key 20 text messages copy to calendar 79 options 78 read 78 read later 78 send 77 send to multiple recipients 77 set up 75 use GPRS 76 to-do note 109 touch tones troubleshooting 129 TTY send pause 32 end a call 58 make a call 57 receive a call 57 U update date and time 60 V voice commands 52 voice dialing add a voice tag 50 change a voice tag 51 148 Copyright 2004 Nokia voice mail volume 17 51 delete a voice tag 51 make a call with voice recognition play back a voice tag 51 listen to your messages 49 save the mailbox number 49 adjust 17 check level on screen 17 earpiece 17 keypad tones 54 W WAP browser 89 WAP page active link 90 enter information 90 examples 90 header line 90 X Xpress-on color cover 65 Nokia 6010 User Guide 149 Copyright 2004 Nokia Para obtener un manual del usuario en espaol favor de llamar o enviar un fax al telfono 1-888-NOKIA-2U, fax 813-249-9619. Nokia 6010 User Guide 9311233 150 Copyright 2004 Nokia
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2004-04-17 | 1850.2 ~ 1909.8 | PCE - PCS Licensed Transmitter held to ear | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment |
2 | 2004-04-12 | 1850.2 ~ 1909.8 | PCE - PCS Licensed Transmitter held to ear | |
3 | 2003-12-15 | 1850.2 ~ 1909.8 | PCE - PCS Licensed Transmitter held to ear | |
4 | 2003-10-30 | 1850.2 ~ 1909.8 | PCE - PCS Licensed Transmitter held to ear | Original Equipment |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 4 | Effective |
2004-04-17
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
2004-04-12
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
2003-12-15
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
2003-10-30
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Microsoft Corporation
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0005087978
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Physical Address |
1 Microsoft Way
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
Redmond, Washington 98052
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
United States
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 2 3 4 | TCB Application Email Address |
h******@americantcb.com
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
h******@americanTCB.com
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 | TCB Scope |
B1: Commercial mobile radio services equipment in the following 47 CFR Parts 20, 22 (cellular), 24,25 (below 3 GHz) & 27
|
||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Grantee Code |
GML
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Equipment Product Code |
NPM-10X
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Name |
H****** S******
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Title |
Director, EMC, SI and RF Compliance
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Telephone Number |
425-7********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Fax Number |
425-7********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
h******@microsoft.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Firm Name |
Nokia Mobile Phones
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Name |
N****** W******
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Physical Address |
6000 Connection Drive, M/S 2:200
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
Irving, Texas 75039
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
United States
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 | Telephone Number |
972-8********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Fax Number |
972-8********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
972-8********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
n******@nokia.com
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
N******@nokia.com
|
|||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 4 | No | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Equipment Class | PCE - PCS Licensed Transmitter held to ear | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | Dual Band Mobile Phone | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Purpose / Application is for | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Original Equipment | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Grant Comments | Power Output is ERP for Part 22 and EIRP for Part 24. Body-worn operations are restricted to belt-clips, holsters or similar accessories that have no metallic component in the assembly and which provide at least 1.5 cm separation between the device and the users body. End users must be informed of the body worn requirements for satisfying RF Exposure compliance. The highest reported SAR values are: Part 22 Head: 1.19 W/kg; Body-worn 0.90w/kg; PCS Band Head: 0.51W/kg; Body-worn 0.49W/kg. | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Power Output is ERP for Part 22 and EIRP for Part 24. Body-worn operations are restricted to belt-clips, holsters or similar accessories that have no metallic component in the assembly and which provide at least 1.5 cm separation between the device and the users body. End users must be informed of the body worn requirements for satisfying RF Exposure compliance. The highest reported SAR values are: Part 22 Head: 1.19 W/kg; Body-worn 0.90w/kg; PCS Band Head: 0.51W/kg; Body-worn 0.49W/kg | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Power Output is ERP for Part 22 and EIRP for Part 24. Body-worn operations are restricted to belt-clips, holsters or similar accessories that have no metallic component in the assembly and which provide at least 1.5 cm separation between the device and the users body. End users must be informed of the body worn requirements for satisfying RF Exposure compliance. The highest reported SAR values are: Part 22 Head: 0.95W/kg; Body-worn 0.79W/kg; PCS Band Head: 0.51W/kg; Body-worn 0.49W/kg | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Power Output is ERP for Part 22 and EIRP for Part 24. Body-worn operations are restricted to belt-clips, holsters or similar accessories that have no metallic component in the assembly and which provide at least 1.5 cm separation between the device and the users body. End users must be informed of the body worn requirements for satisfying RF Exposure compliance. The highest reported SAR values are: Part 22 Head: 0.95W/kg; Body-worn 0.59W/kg; PCS Band Head: 0.46W/kg; Body-worn 0.44W/kg | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Firm Name |
Nokia Mobile Phones
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Name |
R******** L******
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Telephone Number |
972-8********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Fax Number |
972-8********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
r******@nokia.com
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 24E | BC | 1850.2 | 1909.8 | 1.318 | 35.21 Hz | 256KGXW | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 2 | 22H | BC | 824.2 | 848.8 | 1.148 | 31.2 Hz | 256KGXW | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 24E | BC | 1850.2 | 1909.8 | 1.318 | 35.21 Hz | 256KGXW | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 2 | 22H | BC | 824.2 | 848.8 | 1.148 | 31.2 Hz | 256KGXW | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 1 | 22H | BC | 824.2 | 848.8 | 1.148 | 31.2 Hz | 256KGXW | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 2 | 24E | BC | 1850.2 | 1909.8 | 1.318 | 38.21 Hz | 256KGXW | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 1 | 22H | BC | 824.2 | 848.8 | 1.148 | 31.2 Hz | 256KGXW | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 2 | 24E | BC | 1850.2 | 1909.8 | 1.318 | 38.21 Hz | 256KGXW |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC